5 Af/J 
 
 CORNELL 
 
 UNIVERSITY 
 
 LIBRARY 
 
Cornell University Library 
 PL 6231.Z5M13 
 
 Asiatic origin of tlie Oceanic Languages 
 
 3 1924 026 914 972 
 
Cornell University 
 Library 
 
 The original of tliis book is in 
 tine Cornell University Library. 
 
 There are no known copyright restrictions in 
 the United States on the use of the text. 
 
 http://www.archive.org/details/cu31924026914972 
 
THE ASIATIC ORIGIN OF THE OCEANIC 
 LANGUAGES. 
 
THE ASIATIC OEIGIN 
 
 OCEANIC LANGUAGES: 
 
 ETYMOLOGICAL DICTIONARY OF THE LANGUAGE OF 
 EFATE (NEW HEBEIDES) 
 
 WITH AN INTRODUCTION. 
 
 THE REV. D. MACDONALD, 
 
 Efate, Ne^ Hebeides. 
 
 LONDON 
 
 MELVILLE, MULLEN r~ SLADE, 
 
 12, LUDGATE SQUARE, E.C. 
 (262 & 264, Collins Street, Melbourne. 1 
 
 LUZAC & CO., 
 ^6, GREAT RUSSELL STREET, W.C. 
 1894. 
 
V6 7^33-13 
 
 r\ 
 
PKEFACE. 
 
 The following work gives, in the first place, a Dictionary of the 
 
 language of Efate, New Hebrides, as accurate as I can make it 
 
 after upwards of twenty-one years' constant study and use of the 
 
 language in the performance of my duty as a missionary stationed 
 
 on the island of Efate. But, as is noted in the introduction, a vast 
 
 number of derivative words have, for the sake of brevity, not been 
 
 inserted. In the second place, the dialectical variations of Efatese 
 
 words are given in a considerable number of instances ; the cognate 
 
 words in other languages of the Oceanic family are usually put 
 
 within brackets, and are chosen purposely from its four great 
 
 branches — the Papuan (or " Melanesian "), the Maori-Hawaiian (or 
 
 " Polynesian "), the Malayan, and the Malagasy (or " Tagalan "). 
 
 These, which embrace the fundamental elements of Oceanic speech, 
 
 have been found of great use in determining the radical meaning 
 
 and original forms of words, and also, it may be remarked, in 
 
 illustrating the homogeneity of the great insular family, properly 
 
 called Oceanic, since it extends from Madagascar in the Indian 
 
 Ocean to Easter Island in the Pacific, from the Hawaiian Islands 
 
 1 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 in the North Pacific to New Zealand in the South, and from 
 Sumatra through the Eastern Archipelago and New Guinea to the 
 New Hebrides and Fiji. In the third place, and usually after the 
 bracket, are placed the Asiatic— i.e., the Semitic — words to which all 
 the preceding Oceanic words are traced. Arabia, which borders on 
 Oceania, has always been, and is to this day, the principal home of 
 this, the most important family of Asiatic languages. 
 
 For a short Efatese grammar the reader is referred to the work 
 entitled " Three New Hebrides Languages : Efate, Eromanga, Santo ;" 
 for short grammars of other New Hebrides languages, to that 
 entitled " South Sea Studies ; " and for some general outline of 
 Oceanic grammar, to that entitled " Oceania: Linguistic and Anthi'o- 
 pological." Any remark on a particular point in the present work 
 which differs from any similar remark that I had made in the 
 works just named is to be regarded as correcting it. Even in the 
 present work, as, e.g., in treating of the formative particles, many 
 of the main elements of Oceanic grammar are dealt with ; in a work 
 treating of the whole material of a language of a family so extremely 
 analytic as the Oceanic, it could not well be otherwise. While fully 
 convinced of the importance of grammar in comparative philology 
 I have for many years been equally convinced that, to establish the 
 Asiatic origin of the Oceanic languages, the whole material of one 
 Oceanic language must be dealt with, as in the present work. 
 
 The work of Gibbon has been described as the splendid bridge 
 from the old world to the new. The work presented to the public 
 in this little volume is a bridge of an immensely wider span than 
 Gibbon's, connecting two worlds less known than his, and throwin.o- 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 light, as I believe not otherwise obtainable, on both, especially on 
 the newer — the world, so interesting to modern science, of the 
 existing savage, which can be thoroughly known only through his 
 language. This bridge, indeed, makes no pretension to " splendour," 
 but, while perhaps more deeply sensible of its imperfections in 
 details than anyone else can be, I trust it will be found to be in all 
 substantial respects well and faithfully . built, and durable even to 
 indestructibility. However that may be, it is certain that the 
 building of it has taken more than the twenty years which the build- 
 ing of Gibbon's took. 
 
 I may here explain that, as no Arabic or Ethiopic type are in the 
 establishment where this work is printed, I have been reluctantly 
 obliged to re- write all the Arabic and other Semitic words in Roman 
 characters. For this reason I have not printed at all, as I originally 
 intended, the second part of the Dictionary, or Asiatic-Oceanic. 
 Whether the complete work, with proper type, will appear here- 
 after will largely depend on the reception accorded to the present 
 volume. 
 
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS. 
 
 a., adjective, 
 ad., adverb, 
 art., article, 
 c. , v^ith. 
 
 c. art., with the article, 
 eg., egg., cognate, cog- 
 nates. 
 
 conj., conjunction. 
 
 cf., compare. 
 
 (1., dd., dialect, dialects. 
 
 d. syn. c, dialect syn- 
 onymous with. 
 
 den., denominative, 
 dem., demonstrative, 
 der., derivation, 
 i.tj., the same as. 
 inf., infinitive, 
 inter. , interrogative, 
 interj., interjection, 
 imp., imperative, 
 mid. , middle voice. 
 n. a., nomen actionis (in- 
 finitive). 
 
 n. ag., nomen agentis 
 (active participle). 
 
 n. p., nomen patientis 
 (passive participle). 
 
 nom. suf., nominal suflix. 
 
 num., numeral. 
 
 opp. , opposite, opposed. 
 
 part., participle. 
 
 pers. pron. , personal pro- 
 noun. 
 
 pi., plural. 
 
 prel, preformative. 
 
 prep. , preposition. 
 
 prob., probably. 
 
 pron., pronoun. 
 
 ps. , passive. 
 
 q.v., which see. 
 redup., reduplicate, 
 s., substantive. 
 S.V., under the word 
 
 (siib voce), 
 sing., singular, 
 syn., synonymous, 
 syn. c, synonymous with, 
 t. , transitive, 
 v., verb. 
 
 V. c.verb causative form. 
 V. i. , verb intransitive. 
 V. r. , verb reflexive, or 
 
 reciprocal. 
 V. t., verb transitive, 
 verb, suf., verbal svifiix. 
 voc. , vocative. 
 
 A., Arabic. 
 Amh. , Amharic. 
 Am., Ambrym. 
 An., Aneityum. 
 Arm., Aramaic. 
 Assy., Assyrian. 
 Bu., Bugis. 
 Ch., Chaldee. 
 E., Ethiopic. 
 E. Mai, East Mai. 
 Ef., Efate. 
 Er., Eromanga. 
 Fi., Fiji. 
 Fut., Futima. 
 H. , Hebrew. 
 Ha., Hawaiian. 
 Ja. , Java. 
 Ma., Maori. 
 Mg., Malagasy. 
 
 Ml., Malekula. 
 
 Ml. A., Malekula Aulua. 
 
 Ml. P. , Malekula Pang- 
 
 kumu. 
 Ml. U. , Malekula Uripiv. 
 Mod. A., Modem Arabic. 
 Mod. S. , Modem Syriac. 
 My., Malay. 
 Pa., Paama. 
 S., Syriac. 
 Sa. , Samoan. 
 Soc. , Socotra. 
 T., Tigre. 
 Ta., Tanna. 
 TaSa. , Tangoan Santo. 
 Tah., Tahiti. 
 To., Tonga. 
 
 Ct. , Catafago's Dic- 
 tionary of Mod. A. 
 
 Freytag, Freytag's Ara- 
 bic Lexicon. 
 
 Ges. , Gesenius's Dic- 
 tionary of Hebrew. 
 
 Nm. , Newman's Dic- 
 tionary of Mod. A. 
 
 St. , Stoddart's Grammar 
 of Mod. S. 
 
 After an Arabic verb 1, 
 2, 3, 4, 5, &c., denote 
 its different forms, and 
 1), 2), 3), &c., its dif. 
 ferent meanings. 
 
 After a Hebrew verb 
 Pi. denotes Piel, Pu. 
 Pual, Hi. Hiphil, Ni. 
 Niphal. 
 
INTEODUCTION. 
 
 The Alphabet. — The Ef. alphabet used in this work differs from 
 that used in the Ef. version of the New Testament only in the use 
 of b instead of p. The letters are a, b (and b), e, f, g, i, k, 1, m, n, o, 
 r, s, t, and u. The vowels a, e, i, o, u have the Italian sounds : i 
 and u are also used sometimes for y and w, thus uo is pronounced 
 wo, but i is very rarely used for y. B stands for both b and p, f 
 for f and v, g for ng in sing, and k, 1, m, n, r, s, t are sounded as in 
 English. In one dialect of Efatese h represents the s of the other 
 dialects. In My. d* is nearly the same as d, eh is like oh in church, 
 a like short e, and g is hard, as in give. In the New Hebrides 
 languages, Fiji, and Samoan, g represents ng as in Ef. In Fi. 
 c represents th, and in Malagasy o stands for u. The Samoan ' is a 
 click, or half-expressed k, and the Hawaiian k stands for the t of 
 the cognate dialects. Ef. au sounds like ow in now, and ai, or ei, 
 like i in sigh, or ei in height. Ef. b is sometimes like bw, some- 
 times like kb : a more rare variation of m is m, or m, like mw, or 
 gm. The alphabet of the Asiatic group of languages to which the 
 Island group of languages is traced in this work is represented 
 thus :— ' (Elif ), b, g, d, A. d, h, w (u, o), z, L, A. h', t, A. t', y (i), k, 1, 
 m, n, s, ' ('ain), A. " ("ain), p (f), s, A S', li, r, s', th (t), A. t. Of 
 these the ' represents a quiescent consonant, or spiritus lenis, like 
 the h in hour ; b, b and sometimes bh or v ; g, g and gh ; d, d and 
 dh ; w (u, o), w and v ; h, a guttural h, like hh ; t, a guttural t ; 
 ' is related to ' and to h ; S represents ts ; h, a guttural k, some 
 
INTRODUCTION. 
 
 s confounded with ' ; s', sli. Of the Arabic letters d, h', t', 'V 
 S', d is sounded like th in that, with ; s', somewhat like th in 
 ; and t' (an aspirated t, or th) is sometimes like a strongly- 
 ulated palatal z (somewhat like s), sometimes like s' ; while h', 
 " are stronger guttural sounds than h and ', the former like ch 
 cotch loch. The Arabic < is a grammatical ending, and is 
 isented in Arabic by an h with two dots over it. In Mod. A. 
 when it is followed by another word is it pronounced t, other- 
 it is a quiescent h. It should be noted that ' in the middle or 
 lie end of words represents also an omitted letter or vowel 
 d. 
 
 jBttee Changes. — The Ef. vowels u and o are frequently 
 •changed : in many words— as kori (kuri), bonoti (bunuti), loko 
 I, luku) — it is equally correct to use either u or o. The vowel 
 very often pronounced and written e, as in set, bet, the M}'. a. 
 short sounds of i and e are practically identical. The diph- 
 gs ai, or ei, and au, are sometimes contracted to e, or i, and o, 
 Generally when w (u) and y (i) come between two vowela 
 
 may be omitted in writing and pronunciation, thus mauora 
 vora) or maora, uui (uwi) or iii, noai (na-uai, na-wai), and rial, 
 iya). The labials b, f, m, are thus often elided, being first 
 ged into u (w), as in the examples given mauora is for mabora, 
 for na-fai (d. ni fai), and uui for ufi or ubi. 
 
 Dhe labials are very frequently interchanged, as m to b or f, 
 vice vemd, as munuti, bunuti ; mago, bago ; mai, bai, or bei, 
 be. B and f are constantly interchanged, especially when 
 rring stt the beginning of verbs, thus ba fano go thou, i bano 
 ^ent, bare, redup. barefare ; and bano to go, nafanoen the 
 g. As already noted, m, b, and f are often changed to w (u), 
 then elided : at the end of a word preceded by the vowel a» 
 
 readily become w or u, thus baram, barab, baraf, barau are all 
 "orms of the same word ; and in the same position, preceded by 
 rowel u, they are apt to be simply elided, thus num, nuf, nubu. 
 
INTRODUCTION. 
 
 nu are all Ef. forms of the same word. B and b are interchanged, 
 and also m and m .■ b (like b) readily changes into w (u, o), as fcota 
 ia, redup. botauota, and uotauota (wotawota), nafiotan, or nauotan, 
 mauota (mawota) or maota. 
 
 G (ng). This sound in Ef. usually stands for k (see generally 
 words beginning with g in the Dictionary) ; more rarely it stands 
 for n, as in finaga and rag (lan), and still more rarely for m, as in 
 sugi (sumi). G- (ng) is not one of the original stock of Oceanic 
 consonants. 
 
 K. The Ef. k is sometimes elided, as in alia for kali a, usi for 
 kusi, nosoafa and soafa for nakosoafa, nara for nakoro, buti for 
 bakauti ; sometimes changed to g (ng), and sometimes interchanged 
 with b, as bui na and kui na, bisi na and kihi na, makus and mafis 
 (cf. My. bawa and gawa, &c.) 
 
 N. This letter is sometimes elided, as a for ani or an, ma for 
 man, sometimes interchanged with g (ng) q.v., t, as ni ki, ti ki ; s, 
 inuma, isuma ; 1 and r, nag, lag, rag, and nagusu, lausu. 
 
 R. This letter is interchanged with 1, as rag and lag ; with t, as 
 baki ta for baki ra to them, and very commonly ta for ra in both the 
 nom. and verb suf. 3 pi ; with s, as busi for muri, gusu na for gore 
 na, and, s to r, muri na for mesau na. It is also sometimes elided, as 
 8u for Sru, u for ru. In one d. r is often pronounced tr, which in 
 others is nr, t, and nd. 
 
 L. See r and n. L and r in some Oceanic dialects are identical, 
 and 1 is sometimes pronounced somewhat like d. 
 
 T. See r and 1. This letter is sometimes in Ef. pronounced ts, 
 as tsi ka for tika (also rika and nika), and is found changed to s, as 
 sa for ta. 
 
 S. See t, r, n. In one Ef. d. it is changed to h, as lateha 
 for latesa, &c. 
 
 Note. — The gutturals kh, hh, gh, in some of the New Hebrides 
 sister dialects, have been lost from the Ef. The Oceanic inter- 
 dialectical letter changes are in general so self-explaining and well 
 
INTRODUCTION. 
 
 m (My. and Ef. k, Mg. h ; Fi. c (i.e., th), Ef. s, &c.) as to 
 ire no treatment here. 
 
 BETTER Changes in the Asiatic Languages of which the 
 lABET IS Given Above. — The sounds represented by ', h, li, h', ' , 
 " , may have been all distinct from each other in the Semitic 
 ler tongue, but the uniform tendency of the Semitic languages is, 
 ey become developed analytically, to confound them all into one 
 ro. Thus in Assy. ', h, li, ', and ", all became like ' (i.e., spiritus 
 ), and even li' became either a mere spiritus lenis or k. So in 
 hese are all a mere ', or spiritus lenis, except h, and ll', which 
 ometimes k. 
 
 r, k, and li were not only sometimes interchanged with each 
 •, but also with ', h ; and, as above remarked, k is sometimes 
 ed in pronunciation as a mere ', or spiritus lenis. In Ef. they 
 sually represented by k, and sometimes elided (i.e., spiritus lenis). 
 'he labials b, w, m, p. These were interchanged with each 
 • : b (or v) in Mod. S. has sometimes a sound varying from w 
 ; in Assy, m and v are interchanged, in Himyaritic m and b 
 ) ; in Assy, m was also sometimes changed to n and ng ; p is 
 r p or f in H., in A. it is f ; b following a in Mod. S. is 
 auneed o, and f (or p) following a is pronounced au (i.e., ab or 
 jcomes o, af or ap au). Compare the remarks on the Ef. labials 
 
 B. 
 
 r. This letter, especially when the first consonant of a verb, 
 
 jften dropped. Accordingly in Ef., &c., such verbs are often 
 
 Dut the initial n. It was also interchanged with 1, m, and y. 
 
 i, 1. These are interchanged with each other, and with n : 
 
 are also sometimes elided ; 1 is interchanged with d, and r with 
 
 ibilants, as with z and s. Compare the Ef. above. 
 
 IBILANTS AND Dentals. — These were sometimes interchanged 
 
 each other ; and see r, 1. They were also sometimes elided. 
 
 Sf. r, 1, t, s, above. 
 
 ee concluding remarks, infra. 
 
INTRODUCTION. 
 
 The Article. — The forms of the article illustrate some of the 
 foregoing remarks on letter changes. Its common form in Ef. is na, 
 ni, n', in Mg. ny, Sa. le, E. Mai. re, Meli and Ma. te. But in 
 Ef. it not only occurs in some words with its consonant elided (A. 
 al, hal, r, H. ha) as a, 6, or i, but also as la or F (or ra), as in lausu, 
 lag (also rag, ran, nag), and lifaru (also r&falu, libuis), lobu, laso na, 
 lima, and rakum, rarua ; as ta, as in tanekabu (and nanekabu, see 
 ate, infra), taliga ; and as s, as in suma (My. rumah). In such 
 words the article has been prefixed in very early times (in lifaru 
 certainly before the word left Arabia), and has come by later 
 generations to be regarded as a part of the word. By looking up 
 these words in the Dictionary it will be seen that they illustrate 
 more than one of the above noted letter changes. The article is 
 regularly prefixed to the abstract substantive that may be formed 
 from every verb or adjective in the language by the ending an (ana, 
 usually written en, ena) as nakasuana the being strong, strength, 
 from kasua strong, nafamiena the act of eating, food, from bami to 
 eat : in My. the article (or dem. particle) ka is thus used (Mg. ha). 
 This ka or k' occurs in Ef. only as an " unconscious " article, and 
 the former, 1', r', or n', occurs in My. only as an unconscious article. 
 Both of these articles were also prefixed to verbal nouns (substan- 
 tives or adjectives) without the formative ending an, as in kalumi 
 spider, lit. the sweller, or that which swells, kalau spider's web, lit. 
 the woven, or that which is woven, kolofa bent (Pi. kalove), lit. the 
 bent, that which is bent. To a word of this kind — with the 
 unconscious article ka — the causative preformative was attached, 
 and hence baka (see ba, c. prel, and baka, Mg. maha, infra). In 
 the same way — to words with the unconscious article n' (ng) — was 
 prefixed the same c. pref. ma (in My. and Mg.), forming man, mana, 
 niang, &c. Thus Mg. be is " great," habe greatness, lit. that which 
 is great, mahabe to make great, but also manabe to make great (na, 
 modern form ny, the article, and also used in the sense of a relative 
 = ha = that which, &c.) The r in My. bar (ber, be), the reflexive 
 
INTRODUCTION. 
 
 preformative, is a form of the same article (Fi. ra, forming so called 
 passives like ka) which in Ef. occurs as 1', n', and r', <fec., and the 
 prefixed hk or be, Mg. mi, Ef. bi, Sa. fe, is the real r. pref. : hence 
 My. bar is equivalent to Mg. miha, the difference being that the 
 former has the art. r, the latter the article ha. The fact that in 
 Mg. maha is the causative and miha the reflexive preformative 
 shows that there is nothing either reflexive or causative in the ha. 
 But of course baka, man, &c., came to be regarded, when their origin 
 was no longer remembered; as simple formatives. 
 
 The Pkesonal Pronouns and Numerals. — For these see two 
 papers in the Journal of the Polynesian Society, on " The Asiatic 
 Origin of the Oceanic Personal Pronouns" and "Oceanic Numerals" 
 respectively. 
 
 The Verb. — The Semitic verb had two bases, the one that of 
 the perfect, being the " concrete " or participial, the other that of 
 the imperfect (or "future"), with which was connected the im- 
 perative and infinitive, being the " abstract " or verbal substantive. 
 In the Oceanic languages the ancient inflexion of the perfect and 
 imperfect has disappeared, its place being supplied by analytic 
 substitutes. The Oceanic verb is really a participle, or verbal 
 substantive used as a participle, and represents, or is, either the 
 ancient participial base, as afa ia, afa ki, ba, laba or leba, and 
 (passive) bura, tuk or toko, or the ancient infinitive base, as tao, 
 taru (or toro), soko, saki, or a derived participle or infinitive of the 
 ancient verb. The ancient participle (or verbal adjective) had two 
 forms, the active and passive, and was sometimes used as a substan- 
 tive; the ancient infinitive had numerous forms, each of which could be 
 used either in an active or a passive sense, and was sometimes used 
 as a participle or verbal adjective. Every adjective in Efatese is a 
 verb when used with the verbal pronoun (the analytic substitute for 
 the ancient inflexion of the perfect and imperfect), and every verb 
 is an adjective when used without the verbal pronoun. The follow- 
 ing are examples of verbs representing ancient participles and 
 
INTRODUCTION. 
 
 infinitives: — Active participle, mita; passive participle, mitela, barua, 
 bau ; infinitive, roko (loku, luku), borau, mauri (moli). It will be 
 observed that these examples involve both the Semitic modes of 
 inflexion, by internal vowel change and by external addition. 
 
 In the Semitic languages the simple verb usually had three 
 radical letters, but a very large number of these were, or became, 
 always pronounced as having only two, and a good many were some- 
 times so pronounced, as those one of whose three letters was ', ', ", 
 h, li, li', li, w, y, and (initial) n. Crenerally, but not always, it is 
 the briefest form of the ancient word that is found represented in 
 Efatese. In some instances the three strong radicals of an ancient 
 verb are still found in its Efatese representative, as in salube, sekof, 
 serab, surut, sumat. The final n of an ancient verb is sometimes 
 found elided in Efatese, as in asua, and m , b, or p (f) vocalized or 
 elided, as already pointed out, as in nu (num), nu e a, ra (or ta), 
 barau (barab), bolau (uolau), sau, galau, balu-sa (and balu-saki). 
 
 The " forms " of the Efatese verb, or derivative verb forms, are 
 the causative, having the formative prefixes ba (or ma), and baka 
 and sa ; the reflexive or reciprocal, having bi or fi ; the reflexive 
 passive, having ta; the passive, having ma (mi, &c.): see the Diction- 
 ary for these particles and words beginning with them. Among 
 " forms " of the verb may also be placed the reduplicate forms, as 
 when the whole verb is doubled, as magamaga ; when the initial 
 syllable is doubled, as sasaJo ; and when the final is doubled, as 
 tafagka or tafakaka (or tafak'ka). Reduplication modifies the 
 meaning of the verb in various ways, expressing intensity or repeti- 
 tion of the act, and sometimes giving a diminutive sense. 
 
 The Substantive. — From every verb, whether simple or deriva- 
 tive, is or may be formed a verbal substantive by adding to it the 
 formative sufiix ana, or an (usually pronounced ena, or en), and 
 prefixing the article na (ni, <Src.) This formative suflSx is common 
 generally to all the Semitic and to all the Oceanic languages, form- 
 ing infinitives or abstract verbal substantives denoting the action or 
 
INTRODUCTIOX. 
 
 e and various related ideas. la Efatese, when used without the 
 cle, this verbal substantive is used in a passive sense as a verbal 
 ictive, thus bami to eat, nafamiena the eating, the act of eating, 
 ng, food, and famiena to be eaten, eatable, for eating, as nafinaga 
 iena food to be eaten, eatable, or for eating. These, to save 
 je, are not given, except in a few instances, in the Dictionary. 
 A number of Efatese substantives analytically represent the n. 
 or active participle, of the simple form of the Semitic verb, as 
 , from kill a, lita, or tlla, from tila ia, so sar', let, lofa, laga, 
 a, nife, ori, seru, siko, sll, tunu, soro, &c. A number of Efatese 
 DS become substantives by prefixing the article, as mitela broken, 
 [tela it is broken, namitela that which is broken, a fragment, 
 laki to remain as a guest, namanaki a guest : see above on the 
 cle. In the same way, as already observed, some nouns were 
 Qed by prefixing ka, k' ; but no new substantives can thus 
 formed. On the other hand, a new substantive phrase can 
 similarly formed from every verb in the language by prefixing 
 particle te (for which see the Dictionary), as te fami what eats, 
 ir, te kili what digs, a digging thing or person. A number of 
 tese substantives simply represent, or are, the ancient Semitic 
 3tantives, whether primitive, as fai or ai (water), afa or ab' 
 her), or derivative, as at6 (liver), tua (leg), kuli (skin). A few 
 tese verbs become substantives by suffixing a, as namisakia 
 :ness, namatakua fear, namitiria a writing, namaietoa anger : this 
 ipresents the ancient abstract ending H. ah (for ath), A. a,t, Mod. 
 1 (or ah). 
 
 The Adjective Endings. — The first of these to be noticed is a, 
 n sama, koa, sulia, lebaleba, lasoa, fitia, bulla, buria, oroa. This 
 i^ssy. is a (originally ai), Mod. S. a, E. i, awi, ai, A. iyy'. It was 
 finally pronounced iya, or aya (Dillmann). Sometimes in Ef . it is 
 s in tuai. Another a. ending is na, or 'na, as in barbarutena, 
 ilena, telatelana, sasana, rana, rarana, oraorana. This in Assy. 
 ,n', or en', Arm. ana, an, na, A. an'. These aie found in the 
 
INTRODUCTION. 
 
 Oceanic languages generally. The former, a, is exceedingly common 
 in the Maori-Hawaiian languages, and the latter in Malagasy. The 
 so-called passives in Samoan, «fec., formed by the ending a, are not 
 passives but adjectives : sometimes in Samoan they are actives, and 
 they always seem to be so in Futuna, and they sometimes turn a 
 substantive into an adjective. The Efatese adjective tunitunia is 
 formed from tuni (i.e., tu ni, tu, v., and ni, t. prep.) exactly after the 
 manner of the so-called Maori-Hawaiian passives, which in a vast 
 number of instances suffix the ending a to a verb having a transitive 
 preposition. A third a. ending is ak, k, or ka, as in katak, kanoka 
 (also syn. kanoa), sikai (and sikatika), Malagasy isaka, iraika. This 
 in Assy, is ak', which may be the same as the Mahri ending k, which 
 forms adjectives, as safaik healed, taimak thirsty, sebak full, hark 
 hot, heberrek cold : this ending in Mahri formed also in earlier times 
 verbal substantives. 
 
 Other Endings. — The ending t (or th) in the Semitic languages 
 is very common in Malagasy, and pronounced tra, which is often 
 changed to ra. This occurs in all the Oceanic languages generally 
 as in bats, 4, My. ampat, Mg. efatra, Sa. (elided) fa, and also in Sa. 
 fitu, Mg. fito, 7 ; and in Ef. fuata, barbaruta, lebalebara, fuluara, 
 bulora, sikara, and (elided) in bau head, for batu (as the neighbour- 
 ing dialects prove), also in batu, bate, buta. Sometimes the t. 
 prepositions are found suffixed to the verb, as if they were a part of 
 it, and have to be carefully distinguished from the formative endings 
 above treated of. In bau, fitu, lifaru, &c., we have also the ancient 
 Semitic ending u. 
 
 The Transitive Pkepositions. — These are simply the preposi- 
 tions coming immediately after, or suffixed to, the verb, connecting 
 it with its object. The construction is exactly the same as in the 
 Semitic languages, and the prepositions are identical, and occur in all 
 the Oceanic languages, forming a marked feature of them. The verb 
 with its t. prep, is construed as one word, and to it is or may be 
 suffixed the substantive formative ending an, or ana, or the adjective 
 
INTRODUCTION. 
 
 ing a, or na. The three most frequently used preps, are bi, or fi, 
 mi (also ba, fa, ma), li, or ni, or ri (also la, na, ra), and ki (also 
 The two former are the most frequently used in all Semitic 
 ;uages, and the latter very frequently used in Himyaritic (or 
 aean) and Amharic. The double t. preps, usually have the 
 ;r, as maki, faki, raki, naki, &c., but not always, for there occur 
 nusi, nus (as in bunusi and banus. My. panas), bisi (as in libisi), 
 or nuti (as in bonoti, munuti). In the Dictionary the t. prep, 
 preps.) is usually given with the verb, see, e.g., under the words 
 V. t., and alialia, and the a which is often suffixed to the prep, is 
 verbal suffix pronoun, 3 person, see, e.g., under bamau ria (d. 
 au sa). The na after many substantives in the Dictionary, see, 
 under balu, is the nominal suffix pronoun, 3 person. Thus balu 
 lenotes his brother, bamau ria to find him, her, or it, le-ka see 
 le-baia see him, le k'baia see him, li-bisia see him ; these are all 
 itically synonymous, but le-ka is lit. look to him, le-baia look 
 % him, le-k'baia look to — upon him, and li-bisia look upon him 
 transitive prep, si being in this case without definite meaning 
 merely directing more emphatically to the object). 
 Concluding Remarks. — Taking the letters of the above-given 
 itic alphabet in their order, and, for the sake of brevity, taking 
 a here only as they occur as the initial letters of the words 
 pared in the Dictionary, we may observe the changes these letters 
 i undergone from the time they left South-Western Asia till the 
 ent time when they are found in Oceania : — 
 . Always found as spiritus lenis, generally dropped, sometimes 
 ined {i.e., its accompanying vowel retained). Number of words 
 
 D. Nearly always b, rarely m. Number of words large. 
 
 ;. Nearly always k (or its variant g, i.e., ng), rarely elided. A 
 
 I number of words. 
 
 ]. Nearly always t, very rarely r, rarely s, and still more 
 
 ly elided. A good many words. 
 
INTEODUCTION. 
 
 d. Always t, except in one instance s (d. h). Very few words. 
 
 h. Always spiritus Jenis, and sometimes its accompanying 
 vowel elided. A good many words. 
 
 w (u, o). Always retained only in its accompanying vowel (as 
 a for wa), and sometimes that vowel elided. A good many words. 
 
 z. Always s. A good many words. 
 
 ll. Nearly always spiritus lenis, but in a considerable pro- 
 portion of instances k (or g), and rarely its accompanying vowel 
 elided. Number of Words large. 
 
 h'. Generally k (or g), sometimes spiritus lenis, very rarely its 
 accompanying vowel elided. Not very many words. 
 
 t. Generally t, rarely r, 1, or n. A good many words. 
 
 t'. Always t. "Words very few. 
 
 y (i). Always retained only in its accompanying vowel, and 
 that usually is elided. Not many words. 
 
 k. Generally k (or g), rarely elided. Number of words large. 
 
 1. Nearly always 1, rarely r, t, and (see the prep, ni) rarely n 
 or elided. A good many words. 
 
 m. Usually m, often b (or f), very rarely (through w, u) only 
 its accompanying vowel retained. A very large number of words. 
 
 rt. Usually elided, n when retained as it sometimes is. Number 
 of words large. 
 
 s. Nearly always s, in one instance t, and in one instance n. 
 Not many words. 
 
 '. Always spiritus lenis, and retained only in its accompanying 
 vowel, which is sometimes elided. Number of words large. 
 
 ". Always spiritus lenis, and as preceding letter. A good 
 many words. 
 
 p (f). Generally b, or f, rarely m, m, sometimes b. Number 
 of words large. 
 
 S. Generally t, or s, oftener the former, sometimes (rarely) r, 
 or 1. See futum, busuf, and tiu, riu, tutu, lulu, luma, luba. 
 Number of words large. 
 
INTRODUCTION^ 
 
 s'. Generally t, sometimes 1, in one instance s, and very rarely 
 r. A good many words. 
 
 h. Nearly always k (or g), rarely spiritus lenis. Number of 
 words large. 
 
 r. Generally r, very often 1. Number of words large. 
 
 s'. Nearly always s, rarely t, and more rarely 1, in one instance 
 n. Number of words large. 
 
 th, t. Usually t, sometimes n, rarely r, I, or s. A good many 
 words. 
 
 Certain words and particles, owing to their very frequent use, 
 undergo greater changes, as the pronouns, numerals, formative 
 particles, and prepositions ; thus the Ancient Semitic interrogative 
 and indefinite pron. ma (Sabaean ba) in Ef. occurs as ma, fa, and a, 
 and the same word, m', used as a preformative in participles and 
 jnfinitives in the Ancient Semitic, in Ef. occurs as m', b', and f, 
 Mg. m', f, mp', My. m', b', and p' ; and see the preps, li (original 
 form), ni, ri, i, &c., and with a, ani, an, a, and bi, fi, or mi, with 
 dem. suffixed bai or bei. See also, above, the article, and the 
 negative adverb in the Dictionary. 
 
DICTIONARY 
 
 OP THE 
 
 LANGUAGE OF EFATE 
 
 A] 
 
 (NEW HEBRIDES)., 
 
 [abu 
 
 A 
 
 verbal pron., I : d. ni, q.v. 
 
 A, v., contraction of ani, q.v., to 
 be, or dwell in. 
 
 A, prep., contraction of ani, an, 
 q.v. : sometimes e, or i, in, at, 
 to, of. Used prefixed to nouns, 
 as ataku, etaku, or itaku, at 
 the back, behind ; and to the 
 suffixed pronoun of the posses- 
 sive, as agu my, ana his, dialect 
 6nea, or inea his, inu my. 
 [The same contraction is found 
 in Mg. ahy my, azy his, and in 
 Sa. ana his. The Mg. a. is 
 contracted for any, an, and the 
 Sa. is probably the same par- 
 ticle.] 
 
 A, art., or dem., prefixed to cer- 
 tain words, as to some nouns, 
 pronouns, akamus ye, and pre- 
 positions, ani of, aki or agi of ; 
 and to verbs, nikam, d. agau, 
 that which nips, or grasps. 
 [Fi. a, an article, prefixed also 
 to prepositions, as a nei, a kei, 
 denoting the possessive case as 
 in Efatese. The Fi. a is a 
 form of the article na, and the 
 Efate a, being the same as the 
 Fi., must in that case be a 
 form of the common article na 
 (ni, ne, &c.), q.v. Agi (a gi) 
 
 of, in Efate in one dialect is 
 nag or nagi (na gi) of, and 
 akam, ye, in another dialect is 
 nikam ye. The same article is 
 found in Ma. and To. as a. In 
 Fi. and Ef., prefixed to posses- 
 sive prepositions, it has some- 
 what of the force of a relative 
 pronoun.] H. ha for hal ; A. 
 al, sometimes hal, dem. art., 
 used also sometimes as a rela- 
 tive pronoun prefixed to verbs 
 and prepositions : compare ha, 
 according to F. Muller iden- 
 tical with hal for al, the article. 
 Arm. ha this, as an interjec- 
 tion, lo ! H. he. 
 
 A, interj., ! lo ! [Ha. a, Tah. 
 a, lo ! o !] See under preced- 
 ing word. 
 
 Ab, s., d. voc, father. [Ma. pa, 
 My. pa, pak, Mg. aba.] A. 
 ab, H. ab. Oh. aba, father. 
 
 Aba, V. See ofa. 
 
 Abab, s., father. [Ma. papa, 
 My. bapa, bapak, Mg. baba.J 
 See ab. 
 
 Abu, v., to heal, get well (a sore), 
 d. au, id., d. mau, to get well, 
 recover from sickness. [Sa. 
 mafu, to heal up, Mg. miafa, 
 to recover from sickness.] A. 
 afa, 3, 4, restore to health. 
 2 
 
ABu] 
 
 Abu, s., ashes, also afu, au. See 
 following word. 
 
 Abuobu, V. redupL, to be dusty, 
 to fly in the air (dust), also 
 afuafu, id.; naob dust, ashes, 
 lime (ashes of coral), na, art., 
 and ob, noba (nobwa), s., id., 
 nobanoba, v., to be dusty, be- 
 come dust, fly in the air (dust), 
 tano afu, tano abu, tano au 
 ashes; libu,, v., to be ashy, 
 ash-ooloured, dirty, or covered 
 ■with ashes, as in mourning for 
 the dead, hence malibu, v., to 
 be a mourner thus, especially 
 for a deceased husband or wife, 
 and hence malibu, s., a widow 
 or widower, that is, one so 
 mourning : libu, v., is also 
 found (Bau d.) as lifu, lifu- 
 lifu ; mafu, s., a thick vapour 
 like dust; uncleanness (ritual). 
 [Sa. efu, s., efuefu, s., dust, 
 efu, v., to become dust, efu, 
 a., reddish-brown, To. efoo, s., 
 dust, ashes, efooia, a., dusty, 
 covered with ashes, Sa. lefu, 
 a., s., lefulefu, s., ashes. Ma. 
 nehu, s., dust, nehunehu, a., 
 dusky, whakanehu, v., reduce 
 to powder, My. abu, s., Ja. 
 awu, s., dust, ashes. My. dabu, 
 labu, id., kalabu, v., a., ashy, 
 ash-coloured, also klabu, Ja. 
 kluwu, Mg. vovoka, s., dust, 
 ashes, mamavoka, v., to dust, 
 sprinkle with dust, mavo, a., 
 brown, manavo, v., despise, 
 blacken, sully, mavoana, a., 
 unadhesive (applied to mortar), 
 Fi. dravu, s., ashes, dravu- 
 dravua, a., ashy, of the colour of 
 asnes, poor, hence vakadravu- 
 dravua-taka, v., to make poor.] 
 
 [afa ia 
 
 A. haba (habu), v., rise, float- 
 in the air {dust), become like 
 dust, de carhone igne extincto, 
 die, 4, raise or excite dust, 
 habwa< dust, colour of dust, 
 Ct. habut dust, dust mixed 
 with ashes, a thick vapour 
 like dust, Nm. hebwa fine 
 dust, powder, mutahabbi weak 
 in sight. 
 
 Abuera, and abura, s., d. for 
 
 kabuer, q.v. 
 Afa (ava), s., father, an afa his 
 
 father. See ab, d. voc. afa. 
 
 Afa, v., swim (man, or animal), 
 d. ofa. 
 
 Afa ia, v. t., carry (him, or it), 
 d. ofea. The first meaning 
 seems not connected with the 
 second, to a European, but a 
 native connects them thus : a 
 man afa natas swims or floats 
 on the sea, the sea afa nata- 
 mole bears or carries the man; 
 so a man afa ki nakasu swims 
 Yielding a floating stick, but if 
 he gets on to the stick and lets 
 it float him ashore the stick is 
 said to afa ia carry him. The 
 sea or the stick carry him thus, 
 hence afa, v. t, denotes carry a 
 man on one's back, then to carry 
 anything on the back : and as 
 a man so carried clasps with 
 his arms the carrier round the 
 chest the head of an axe is 
 said to afa its handle, and as 
 one carrying a basket on his 
 back holds the string of it 
 over his shoulder, so a man 
 drawing a log by a string 
 thus over his shoulder is said 
 to afa it, and a tug steamer is 
 
afafa] 
 
 said to afa or tow a ship. A 
 dog afa a piece of meat, carry- 
 ing it ofl" firmly held by its 
 teeth, and a man afa a pipe 
 or a twig, i.e., carries it held 
 by his teeth. A messenger 
 afa, carries, his message, a 
 horse its rider, and a warrior 
 afa, carries, i.e., leads his 
 troop ; also a person afa naro- 
 gitesan bears a disease or in- 
 firmity or trouble. (See bafa.) 
 
 Afafa, V. redupl., dd. ofaofa, 
 ofafa. [My. apung, s., a float, 
 ampung, a., buoyant, kambang, 
 v., to float. Sa. opeope, to 
 float, Epi mava, d. mia, to 
 swim ; Sa. fafa, v., carry a 
 person on the back, faafafa, s., 
 a burden carried on the back, 
 Mg. baby, a., carried on the 
 back, mibaby, v., to carry on 
 theback(as children and others 
 are carried). Pi. vava, v., to 
 carry on the back, va-ya, to 
 make a bundle, as of sticks, to 
 carry on the back, ps. vai, 
 cf. bai a, fai a, infra.] A. 
 'ama, swim (man), go (camel), 
 2, dispose in sheaves or 
 bundles : Nm. float, swim. 
 'Ama< a bundle, a float, or raft, 
 for carrying things across 
 water. In this A. word there 
 is the idea of connecting to- 
 gether (as things in a bundle, 
 Ac.) Cf. the cognates under 
 bau, mau, &c., infra, viz., 
 'amma, &c. In afaia, carry 
 him, as a floating stick carries 
 a man in the water, or a horse 
 carries him on land, the transi- 
 tive preposition = bi (afai = 
 'ama bi) gives the verb its 
 
 [afis ia 
 
 transitive force, make to swim, 
 to go, i.e., carry. 
 
 Afa ki, V. t., and of a ki, to bury, 
 Maka tafaki, pr. n., name of 
 the person who buried the first 
 men who died in the beginning 
 of the world, according to 
 native story. [Sa. ufi, v., cover, 
 conceal, ps. utitia, with instru- 
 mental particle ufita'i, ufi, s., 
 a cover, ufi, s., the yam, Efate 
 ui, or uui (pronounced uwi), 
 the yam, Mg. afina, vo'afina is 
 concealed, miafina to conceal 
 oneself, manafina to conceal, 
 to bury. My. buni to conceal, 
 concealed, mambuni to conceal, 
 tarbuni, sambufii, &c. See bei, 
 infra.'\ A. "aba be concealed, 
 2 to conceal, to bury, 5 be 
 absent. See egg. a. v. bei, 
 infra. "Ayab' roots (so called 
 because buried in the ground 
 or covered with earth), Sa. ufi, 
 Ef. uwi, Ja., My. uwi, ubi, 
 Mg. ovy (uvi) yams. 
 
 Afaru na, s.,d. ofari, wing, wings. 
 [Ero. evlok, Tidore filafila, 
 Torres Islands perperi, wing, 
 My. mibar, mabur, to fly with 
 wings.] H. 'abar, Hi. to soar, 
 mount upwards in flight, 'eber 
 and 'evrah wing feather (with 
 which birds soar). 
 
 Af ia, V. t., to be near to, d. of 
 ia, A. wahafa to approach, 
 draw near to. 
 
 Afin ia, v. t., afan ia, afen ia, 
 also dd. 
 
 Afis ia, and afit ia, to put or 
 carry under the arm or arms, 
 held between the arm and the 
 side; to cover with its wings, 
 as a bird its young, clasping 
 
APITl] 
 
 AGINAMI 
 
 between the wing and the side, 
 and afini na, s., armpit, axilla, 
 and d. afili na, id., also the 
 groin. [My. kapet, mangapet, 
 carry under the arm, Sa. afisi, 
 caiTy under the arm.] A.'Ibif, 
 pi., abat' armpit, axilla, abt, 5, 
 place, or carry under the arm, 
 'ibat' what is put under the 
 arm, anything put or clasped 
 to the side. 
 
 Afiti, s., a slave. This word oc- 
 curs with the article as n^fiti. 
 [My. beta, Ja. patik, a slave.] 
 H. 'ebed, Ch. 'abad, a slave. 
 See bati, v. 
 
 Afo, s. See foga. 
 
 Afuafu. See abuobu. 
 
 Agau, d. nikam, s., a, or ni, 
 art., and kam, or gau, nippers, 
 tongs : from the verb kamu, 
 q.v. [Fi. ai qamu, id.. My. 
 angkub forceps, nippers, pin- 
 cers.] See kamu, kamut. 
 
 Aga (anga), for anka, art., a., 
 and prep, ka, literally that 
 or the to, or that which to ; 
 a particle prefixed to the nom. 
 suf. pron., forming a poss. 
 pron. Without the art. it 
 is pronounced ka, q.v. See 
 kagu, (fee, for meaning. 
 
 Agana, poss. pron., 3 sing. ; aga, 
 na. See kana, kakana, kan- 
 ana, and for meaning and use 
 see under kiana. 
 
 Agama, poss. pron., 2 sing.; aga, 
 ma. See kama. 
 
 Agagu, poss. pron., 1 sing ; aga, 
 gu. See kagu. 
 
 Ag'gami, poss. pron., 1 pi, excl.; 
 aga, gami. Kagami. 
 
 Agagita, poss. pron., 1 pi., incl. ; 
 aga, gita. Kagita. 
 
 Agamu, poss. pron., 2 pi. ; aga, 
 mu. Kamu. 
 
 Agara, poss. pron , 3 pi. ; aga, 
 ra. Kara. 
 
 Agam, pron., 2 pi., you, ye ; dd. 
 igam, nigami, nigkam (gk for 
 g), akam, egu, art., a, or i, e, 
 or ni, and the pers. pron. 2 
 pers. pi. kam, gam, eami, 
 which in one dialect, without 
 the art., is kumu, in another 
 is kami, q.v. 
 
 Ag, pron., 2 sing., you, thou ; 
 dd. nago, nigo, nego; a, or nfi, 
 ni, ne, art,, and g, go (for k, 
 ko). See k, ko, ku, ki. 
 
 Agi, or aki, particle consisting of 
 the art. a, and prep, gi (for ki, 
 q.v.) to, of ; dd. nig', nag', 
 nigi or nigki (ng for g), in 
 which the art. is na or ni. Agi 
 is often equivalent to ani, q.v., 
 but not always : ani or iiii 
 sometimes means "of" nearly 
 in the sense of " from," as 
 rarua ini se ? a canoe of (from) 
 what place 1 which cannot lie 
 expressed by rarua agi se ? 
 See the preps, ki and ni. Agi 
 is often equivalent to the 
 simple prep, gi, or ki, but 
 sometimes it means the, tlie 
 (thing), that which of, tlie 
 art. having the force of a rela- 
 tive pronoun. 
 
 Agiegi, s., c. art. nagiegi, the 
 air, breeze : lagi. 
 
 Aginago, poss. pron., 2 sing., thy, 
 of thee ; agi, nago. 
 
 Aginai, poss. pron., 3 sing., his, 
 her, of him ; agi, nai. 
 
 Aginami, poss. pron., 1 pi. excl., 
 our and theirs, of us and them ; 
 agi, nami. 
 
aginara] 
 
 Aginara, poss. pron., 3 p]., their, 
 of them ; agi, nara. 
 
 Aginau, poss. pron., 1 sing., my, 
 of me ; agi, nau. 
 
 Agita, poss. pron., a, prep., and 
 nom. suf. gita; a, gita. [Sa. 
 a tatou, Mg. antsika.] 
 
 Ago, pron., 2 sing., you, thou ; 
 ag, nago. 
 
 Agu, poss. pron., 1 sing., my ; 
 a, gu. [Sa. a'u. Ma. aku, 
 Mg. ahy, my.] 
 
 Agumu, poss. pron., 2 pi., your; 
 agi, kumu. 
 
 Aheka, d., tasila, d. tasiga ; sila 
 ia. 
 
 Ais, or eis, ad., here, d. ieta ; a, 
 or e, or i, prep., and is, see sa, 
 se, s, this, here ; d. esas, q.v. 
 [Mg. aty, ety, ato. eto, Ta. 
 yesa. My., without prep., 
 sini, sika, and with preps. 
 di and ka, disini, kasini.] 
 H. zeh, without prep., here, 
 properly this, Ef. se, this, 
 here, E. zgya here. Also H. 
 bazeh, E. bazya, c. prep, ba, 
 with which is to be compared 
 Ha. ma in manei here, and 
 also generally. The prep, a, 
 e, or i was also similarly used. 
 See examples of this under the 
 word igin, infra. 
 
 Ai, s., c. art. nai, water, d. for 
 nifai, q.v. 
 
 Aime, s., c. art. naime, a stream: 
 preceding word, and me, q.v. 
 
 Aka, a., d. koa, and koakoa, a., 
 stringy, fibrous, as a yam 
 when cooked (bad to eat) ; 
 akoa na, or ako ana, root, its 
 root, lit. and fig. ; aka, a rela- 
 tive, family connection (con- 
 sidered as root or off-shoot 
 
 [aka 
 
 from), aka na, d. ek, eka na; 
 in one place ek or eka denotes 
 great grandfather, and great 
 grandmother (which in another 
 place is denoted by tai la, or 
 tai, q.v.), in another place aka 
 denotes mother (used by a 
 child addressing its mother), 
 d. iak (i, art.), mama; aka na, 
 or uaka na (waka na) fissure, 
 inside of fissure, as of the 
 mouth, of a canoe (hold), of a 
 bag or basket, or of anything; 
 kaka naniu the fibrous sub- 
 stance like coarse cloth that 
 grows round the top of the 
 stem of the cocoanut tree 
 (naniu) ; makaka, to be ragged 
 or fissured, as cloth ; mako, or 
 maka, offspring, in pr. nn. as 
 mako naru, &c.; taumako, the 
 wild yam growing on the hills, 
 so called because koa or fibrous. 
 Koa has the a. ending a. [To. 
 aca, Ei. waka. My. akar, Mg. 
 faka, root. Ma. long and thin 
 roots, akaaka fibrous roots, 
 kaka a fibre or hair, a garment, 
 a kind of net, Ha. aa niu = Ef . 
 kaka naniu, also roots (small), 
 offspring, a pocket, a bag, a 
 coarse kind of cloth, Sa. aa 
 fibres of a root, family connec- 
 tion. Mg. kaky, ikaky (i art., 
 cf. Ef. aka, iak) father, papa. 
 Tab. aa root, sieve, (fee, aaa the 
 stringy substance in any kind 
 of food or vegetable, native 
 cloth that is not well worked.] 
 A. ' akka, n.a. ' akak, to be 
 split, fissured, ' akko, a fissure, 
 ' akihai' a bag (pera viatoria. 
 Ha. aa), also like 'akiko and 
 'ikkaJ', hairs of a foetus ; 
 
akam] 
 
 'awako, small shoots sprouting 
 from the upper part of a palm, 
 'ikkano, shoots sprouting from 
 the roots of palms and vines, 
 'akka, 4, to send forth such 
 shoots from the roots (palms 
 or vines), cf. Mg. faka root, 
 caus. verb mamaka to send 
 forth roots, and My. akar roots 
 of a plant, scandent plant, parts 
 of a plant that climb. 
 
 Akam, d. ; a, art., and kam, you ; 
 pers. pron., 2 pi. See kumu. 
 
 Akamus, preceding word, with 
 dem. s suffixed, as it is in E. 
 to pers. prons. 
 
 Ake, interj. See ako, ako ri. 
 [Mg. akay !] A, interj., and 
 ke, q.v. 
 
 Ake ri, interj., a.ke or aki and ri, 
 as in ako ri. 
 
 Aki, prep., i.q., agi, q.v. 
 
 Akit, d., pron., 1 pL, incL, we 
 and you. [My. kita, Tag. 
 kita, Fut. akitea. An. akaija.] 
 See nininta. 
 
 Akoa na, or ako ana, s., root. 
 See aka. 
 
 Ako, interj. For ri, dem. par- 
 ticle, used also as an expletive, 
 and la, ad., see these words. 
 
 Ako ri la, interj. 
 
 Ako ri, interj. Ako expresses 
 surprise, wonder, admiration, 
 also mourning, commiseration. 
 A, interj., and ko, q.v. 
 
 Al, d., syn. with elo, d. ali, the 
 sun. See ali. 
 
 Alat ia, v. t. (and let, q.v.) to 
 press together, nip as with 
 scissors, or with the teeth, press 
 between two things drawn to- 
 gether, to press, urge, persist, 
 be importunate with, to grasp. 
 
 [ali 
 
 The final consonant is often 
 dropped ; 
 
 Ala, s., c. art. nala, a basket or 
 purse the edges of whose 
 mouth can be closed by being 
 drawn or pressed together, 
 women's carrying basket ; 
 
 Alati, s., scissors, nippers, clip- 
 pers; 
 
 Alaterabati, also alati bati ore, 
 to gnash the teeth, lit., press 
 the teeth together creaking. 
 See bati and ore ; 
 
 Ala goro ki, v. t., press, urge. 
 See goro ; 
 
 Alala, a., compressing. [Mg. 
 lasitra, mandasitra to pinch,] 
 H. Lahas to press, squeeze, 
 'alas to urge, S. 'elas coegit, 
 arctavit, A. lahis' angustus, 
 arctus (drawn, pressed to- 
 gether). 
 
 Alalu, i.q. elalo, q.v. See alo 
 na. 
 
 Alau, s. ; a, prep., and lau, sea ; 
 also elau, d. ela, the sea, on 
 the sea, seawards. [Malo a 
 lau, Epi lau, My. laut, Ja. 
 lahut, lot. Tag. dagat, Mar- 
 shall Islands lojet, the sea. 
 My. lauti, v., and malaut, v., 
 to put to sea, be at sea in a 
 boat or ship.] A. logg', and 
 loggai', or lojjai', middle and 
 depth of the sea, ocean, lajja, 
 or lagga, 8, the sea was wide 
 and deep, or such a sea was 
 sailed over, 2, he entered the 
 vast and deep sea. 
 
 Alekabu, c. art., talekabu, d. for 
 arekabu. 
 
 Ali, s., c. art., nali, leaf, leaves : 
 ulua. 
 
 Ali, s., day (d. ali sun, d. ali 
 
ALIATi] 
 
 light, see lina). Sera ali, 
 every day, toko ali, stay at 
 liome during the day, not going 
 to work. Usually this word 
 is doubled, as 
 
 Aliati, s., day (for aliali). [An. 
 adiat]. And 
 
 Aliati, v., to day, to dawn, to 
 lighten as the dawn. See al, 
 alo, elo, the sun, also meta ni 
 al, meta ni elo, the sun, lit., 
 eye, i.e., source of day or light. 
 [Mg. andro, Malo alo. My. 
 ari, hari, Sa. la, Ma. ra, day ; 
 Sa. la, Ma. ra. My. mata-ari, 
 Mg. maso-andro, the sun.] A. 
 nahar', daylight, day (from 
 sunrise to sunset), H. nharah, 
 light, daylight, S. nhar, A. 
 nara, to shine, be light, 2, to 
 dawn, lighten as the dawn. 
 
 Al ia, V. t., for gal ia, or kal ia, 
 
 Ali, and alia, s., place, part, alian, 
 its place or part, d. male n, or 
 milen; luan, that place, there, 
 for alia uau, li ban, d. lo bon, 
 there (li for alia) ; mala, and 
 malo, a place, a part, malo, 
 time, i.e., a part of time, as 
 malp ni aliati a part of the 
 day, malo uan, that time, or 
 that place, malo, trunk of the 
 body, or of a tree, mala 
 malala, an open place or plain, 
 also the village dancing and 
 public worship ground, mal- 
 mal, redup., a small place or 
 part ; main, malumalu, to be 
 bare, clear, as a piece of 
 ground, to be bare, devoid of 
 Lair, as the face, malamala 
 naked. [Fi. mala a part, Sa. 
 
 ' malae the open space where 
 
 [alialia 
 
 public meetings are held, Tah. 
 inarae the sacred place formerly 
 used for worship, marae, a., 
 cleared, as a garden, or a place 
 of worship. Ma. marae enclosed 
 space in front of a house, a 
 yard, raaramara, a small 
 piece.] A. 'ariya to be naked, 
 'ara', 'ara', 'ara<', an open place, 
 tract, part, mo'rai, and mo'ra*', 
 naked part of the body not 
 covered with clothing, H. 
 ■arah to be naked, 'arah a 
 naked or bare place, ma'ar 
 a naked space, void space, 
 ma'Srah a naked place, i.e., a 
 plain or field devoid of trees, 
 'A. mo'arrai, naked, bare. 
 
 Aliali, V. i. (doubled), to delay, 
 be slow, and taliali, id., in- 
 tensive. [Cf. Ha. alia, v., to 
 wait.] A. ala (alu), and, 2, 
 alia', and, 5, to delay, be slow. 
 
 Alialia, v. i., or a., insane, to be 
 insane ; connected with this is 
 ululia inspired, possessed, or 
 entered by a deity (natemate) 
 or demon, and, therefore, as a 
 matter of course, out of one's 
 senses. Alialia is not used in 
 some places where ululia (for 
 uluuluia) is used in both 
 senses ; this latter word is also 
 pronounced luluia, and lulia. 
 It is a reduplicate and has the 
 a. ending ia, and literally 
 means entered (i.e., by a 
 spirit), possessed. [Sa. ului- 
 tino enter the body, possess 
 (as by an aitu), ulu to enter, 
 and tino body. Ha. uluia and 
 uluhia to be inspired, pos- 
 sessed by a spirit, ulu to 
 have spiritual possession. 
 
alialia] 
 
 good or bad, ulala insane, out 
 of one's senses. Tali, uru to 
 be inspired, uruhia inspired. 
 This last word corresponds to 
 Sa. ulufia, which simply means 
 entered, being the passive of 
 ulu to enter. Tah. taura a 
 pretended prophet or some- 
 one inspired by some god or 
 goddess. Corresponding to Sa. 
 ulu to enter is Mg. iditra to 
 enter, and with this latter is 
 connected the reduplicate ad- 
 ala insane, senseless, a lunatic, 
 a fool (cf. Ha. ulala). Ef. 
 lala an idiot, senseless person, 
 fool, may belong here also, and 
 cf. Ei. lialia foolish, crazy, an 
 idiot.] Ch. 'alal to enter, S., 
 id,, 'al he entered, imp., 'ul 
 enter, A. "alia he entered. 
 Note.- — The A. is followed 
 by prep, fi, the S. by b and also 1 
 (A. li) : the first of these preps, 
 is used in Mg. (amy), as in 
 Jno. xiii. 27, Satan niditra 
 aminy, entered into him ; and 
 the second (any, sometimes 
 contracted to an and a), as in 
 Lu. xxii. 3, and often : in Sa. 
 we have the first in the fi of 
 ulufia, hi of Ha. uluhia, and 
 the second in the i of ulu-i-tino 
 and of Ha. uluia. This is 
 the verb constantly used in S., 
 Mg., and Sa., to denote the 
 entering into a man of a spirit. 
 The Ef. and Fi. use another 
 and synonymous verb, Ef. sili 
 to enter, Fi. curu, id., which is 
 used also in A. to express this 
 idea, and the first of the above 
 preps, is sometimes used in all 
 three languages, as in Lu. xxii. 
 
 [alo n 
 
 3, Ef. sili-ti, Ei. curu-mi, A. fi : 
 for the A. verb corresponding 
 to sili, curu, see sili, infra. 
 In the three languages both 
 verb and prep, exactly cor- 
 respond, and express (that 
 Satan) entered into (Judas). 
 
 Alo, s,, d., the sun. See ali. 
 
 Alo-fi a, v., wave (with a circular 
 and rolling motion) to him, 
 beckon to by so waving the 
 hand, or a branch of a tree ; 
 alo, and prep, fi : bialo, v. r., 
 wave often, or wave to each 
 other, alo-alo wave repeatedly, 
 talo go round, avoid, turn 
 round, taloalo keep going round 
 (as on a zigzag or crooked 
 path), turn round. See next 
 word. 
 
 Alo n, or alu n, s., belly, abdo- 
 men, the front, before, d. al' 
 naru na, belly, i.e., palm (or 
 front) of his hand ; reduplicate 
 lalo n, or lalu n, id., elalo, be- 
 fore (e prep., and lalo front), 
 d. elol, in the belly, inside, 
 an enclosure, d. loga. [Fi. 
 yalova. Ml. P. oruvi. Ml. U. 
 oluve, TaSa. lobe or love, Malo 
 alovi, to beckon, To. taloo to 
 beckon, Sa. alo to fan, talo to 
 fan, to beckon, to wave a 
 piece of tutuga over the dead, 
 begging him to take calamities 
 and diseases with him, alofi to 
 sit in a circle, alofilima palm 
 of hand (i.e., front or belly of 
 hand), Sa. alo belly, under 
 side, Ma. aro face, front. Ha. 
 alo belly, face, Ma. arohi to 
 look for, arohirohi to turn 
 round and round, Ha. aloalo 
 to turn this way and that, alo 
 
al'] 
 
 to elude, to oppose (face, 
 front), to swim (wave hands), 
 double (as a cape, i.e., go 
 round).] H. 'ul belly, abdomen, 
 so called from its roundness, 
 A. alo : the root is 'ul, and 'il, 
 not used as a verb in H., and 
 its primary notion is to roll, 
 turn round, as is seen in its 
 (derivatives and) cognates, as 
 H. bul, gil, galal, 'agal, &c., 
 and A. alia (awl, &c.) The 
 meaning of Ef. elalo in front, 
 before (e = in) is secondary, 
 the radical meaning being in 
 the belly, inside, and it is as 
 opposed to etaku' (e taku) 
 behind, at the back (taku 
 radically denoting back, as na 
 taku natamole a. man's back), 
 that it has the former meaning. 
 It should be noted that 
 Gesenius points out that a 
 secondary meaning of the root 
 'ul is to be strong, powerful, 
 whence, el, strong, God ; and 
 that thence arises a tfaird 
 notion, that of pr,e-eminence(A. 
 awila to go before, precede), 
 whence H. 'ulam TproTp. front, 
 then vestibule. 
 Al' (naru) (for alo naru), d., 
 palm (belly) of the hand. 
 [Ml. P. aro, Malo lolo.] 
 
 Alo ana, or aloa na, s., maternal 
 uncle ; vocative (reduplicate) 
 lolo (cf. abab, mama). [In Ef. 
 dd. syn. auaua, bau. Malo 
 taura (ta art.), maternal 
 uncle.] A. h'alo maternal 
 uncle. See next word. 
 
 Aloara, a. ; alo, and a. ending 
 ara or ra ; and 
 
 Aloaloara, a., redupl., spotted, 
 
 [amo-rua 
 
 marked. [Sa. ilaila, a., 
 spotted, marked, ila, s., a 
 mother's mark, a mark in the 
 skin, To. ila a mole or mark 
 in the skin.] A. h'alo, pi. 
 h'ilan, mole or mark in the 
 skin, ah'yalo, a., having such 
 marks in the skin, spotted, 
 marked. 
 
 Alo-fi a, v., rub on (to) it ; alo, 
 v., and prep. fi. See loa, and 
 lo-fi a. A. hala, lialu, or halo,. 
 rub, smear. 
 
 Alikas, s., c. art. nalikas, for na 
 uli na kasu, leaf or leaves of 
 trees. See uli, and kasu. 
 
 Alser, s., c. art. nalser, dried or 
 withered cocoanut leaves, so- 
 called because jagged ; from 
 nal for na uli, leaves, and sere, 
 jagged. 
 
 Alu na, s., for alo na, q.v. 
 
 Ama, poss. pron., 2 sing., thy : a 
 prep., and nom. suf. ma. [Sa. 
 au, Mg. anao, thy.] 
 
 Amau, a., true : in loamau, q.v.,. 
 lo a thing, and amau, also 
 mau, mori, mauri, true. H. 
 aman. See mau. 
 
 Amos ia, v., to carry on the- 
 shoulder, to bear, to carry. 
 Often the final s is dropped ;. 
 hence 
 
 Amo, v., to carry, to put a load 
 on the shoulder ; and 
 
 Amo-taki, d., id. ; and 
 
 Amo-rua, am'rua (rua two), to- 
 carry two (burdens), one on 
 each end of a stick (as a China-- 
 man carries two baskets) ; the 
 word also occurs in tak'anio, 
 d. takiamo to carry a burden 
 on only one end of such a. 
 stick : and 
 
-AMOAMO] 
 
 Amoamo, c. art. namoamo, s., 
 a burden, lit., that which is 
 carried. [Sa. amo, v., to carry 
 on the shoulders, amoga, s., a 
 burden. Ha. amo, to carry a 
 burden on the shoulder, to 
 carry.] H. 'amas, bear, carry, 
 especially lift up a load and 
 put it on a beast. 
 
 Amo, s., c. art. namo na, the 
 lungs, but also 
 
 Am' kanoa, the heart, and 
 
 Am' insat, the lungs (see kanoa, 
 insat) ; and 
 
 Am' molu, the spleen. [Fut. 
 ama, Sa. mama, the lungs. To. 
 mama, id.. Ha. akemama, the 
 lungs, from ake liver, and 
 mama. In To., Sa., Put., and 
 Ha., mama (a reduplicate) 
 means light, to be light (opp. 
 •of heavy), but this is not the 
 .stem to which the word mama 
 •denoting the lungs belongs, and 
 ' does not occur at all in Ef ., 
 ■though the Ef. amo is mani- 
 festly the same as Eut. ama, 
 and Sa. (reduplicate) mama, 
 the lungs. For analogues 
 of akemama see under the 
 word ate, the liver. In Ef. 
 uateam', q.v., the kidneys, is 
 ua ate am', lit., fruit of the 
 liver (or inside) of the belly 
 ■(am', the belly) : uateau (d. ua- 
 teaf) is d. for uateam', and 
 balau, q.v. (for balam'), the 
 common Ef. for inside, is lit. 
 the hollow of the am' (amo), 
 i.e., belly. See following — 
 
 Amo, s., c. art. namo, the soft 
 forming kernel of a young 
 cocoanut : so called like the 
 Internal parts of man or ani- 
 
 10 [ana 
 
 mal from the softness and 
 smoothness : 
 
 Amoamo, v. i., a., reduplicate, to 
 be soft and smooth, as the 
 forming kernel of a young 
 cocoanut, or the intestines or 
 viscera, or any smooth or pol- 
 ished surface : d. momoa. [Sa. 
 mama, a., clean (i.e., smooth), 
 Tah. clean, not soiled or pol- 
 luted, To. and Ma. ma clean, 
 white.] A. ma'y', pi. am'a' 
 intestinum; also, a level place 
 between two rugged places 
 (Ef. na momo, or na amo'mo, 
 a smooth and level place 
 between the rocks in a reef), 
 ma'a, 4, to have dates ripe or 
 ripening (a palm), ma'w' dates 
 on the tree, ripe or growing 
 ripe, ma'i soft, smooth {of food), 
 ma"y' softness of skin, H. 
 me'eh only in pi. me'im or 
 m'ey intestines, the belly, then 
 the bosom, heart : eg. is A. 
 maha to gleam with whiteness, 
 to gild, whence mahw' new 
 soft ^gtes. Gesenius gives the 
 radical meaning as "flowing 
 down, softness," see H. ma'ah. 
 
 Amo'moj or am'mo, c. art. nam- 
 omo, or nam'mo ; see s. pre- 
 ceding word : d. momo. 
 
 Amori. See mori. 
 
 Amos ia, v. t., to rub, to rub in 
 order to make smooth : mos ia, 
 mus ia. A. wamasa to rub (a 
 thing), to rub (a thing) that it 
 may be smooth. 
 
 Amu, poss. pron., 2 pi., your : 
 a, prep., and nom. suf. mu. 
 
 Ana, form of pers. pron., 3 sing., he, 
 she, preserved in aneana : other 
 forms nai, enea (inia), ga (nga). 
 
ana] 
 
 Ana, poss. pron., 3 sing., liis, her, 
 its : a, prep., and na, nom. 
 suf. [Sa ana, id., Mg. azy, 
 has the same prep, a, but pre- 
 fixed to the separate pron. like 
 Ef. anai, d. inea, his, her, its.] 
 
 Anagagu, anagama, anagana, 
 anagagita, anagami, anagamu, 
 
 r anagara (or anagata), poss. 
 prons., syn. c. agagu, agama, 
 ifec, q.v. 
 
 Anaga, in these words, is the 
 same as aga, in agagu, and 
 anaga is related to aga as 
 
 , nagi or nij; to agi, that is, the 
 preiix to the prep, ga (or gi) is 
 the art. with or without its n. 
 
 Anai, poss. pron,, 3 sing., his, 
 her, its : a, prep., and nai. 
 
 Anana, poss. pron., 3 sing., his, 
 her, its, d. for aneana, q.v. 
 
 Angana, poss. pron., 3 sing., of 
 him, his, her, its : anS or am, 
 q.v., prep., and ana, a, form of 
 the pers. pron., 3 sing. 
 
 Anekabu, c. art. nanekabu, d. 
 
 , for arekabu. 
 
 Anekama, c. art. naidA,ma, d. 
 for arekabu. 
 
 Anekabu, c. art. tanekabu, d. 
 for arekabu. 
 
 Anena, d. for aneana. ' 
 
 Anera, for aneara, often pro- 
 nounced aneta, angata, d. arS- 
 ara, poss. pron., 3 pL, of them, 
 their; prep, ani, and ara, pers. 
 pron., 3 pi. 
 
 Aneta, d. for anera. 
 
 Ani, prep., particle consisting of 
 the art. a and prep, ni, q.v., 
 a,nd often used for the simple 
 prep, ni, of, belonging to (geni- 
 tive prep.), for (dative, rare, 
 this is usually expressexi by 
 
 1 1 [ani 
 
 magi, nag', or nig', q.v.): 
 generally synonymous with 
 agi, q.v. for a difference. Some- 
 times pronounced ini (eni), and 
 contracted to a, in, i, or e, and 
 having among other meanings 
 that of "in" (cf . the contraction 
 in English of i' for in, as " i' 
 the forest," for "in the forest"), 
 or "at," or " on," as etaku or 
 itaku behind (at the back), 
 elau or alau on the sea, also 
 to the sea, seawards, as ba ki 
 elau, go seawards, or to the 
 sea, ki e being two preps, 
 of similar meaning, the one 
 strengthening the other (cf. 
 My. akan, Mg. ho any, ho a). 
 
 Anigami; d. syn. c. aginami; 
 poss. pron. 1 pi. excl., of us — 
 them (of us and them) : ani, 
 prep., and garni (for nami), 
 pers. pron. 1 pi. excl. See 
 nami, kinami. 
 
 Anigita ; d. aninita, q.v. ; poss. 
 pron. 1 pi. incl., of us — you 
 (of us and you) : ani prep., 
 and gita (for nita). See 
 ninita, nita. 
 
 Animu ; d., syn. c. agumu ; 
 poss. pron. 2 pL, of you, your : 
 a, prep., and nimu (for 
 nikamu), d. nikam; pers. pron. 
 2 pi. 
 
 Aninita, d. obsolete, syn. c. 
 anigita : ani prep., and nita, 
 pers. pron. 1 pi. incl. See 
 ninita, nita. 
 
 Ani, v., usually pronounced eni, 
 d. oni, contracted to an, en, a, 
 o ; c. preformative m' or ma, 
 it is man, ma, ban (and mban), 
 ba, dd. bon, ben, bao, baon, 
 maon ; to abide, to be, as i 
 
ANi] 
 
 12 [ani 
 
 ani or i an suma he abides or 
 is at home (in the house), i 
 man or i ma tafa he is on the 
 hill, i man or i ma rarua it is 
 in the ship or canoe, i ma or i 
 an til ia, bat ia, he abides 
 (continues) or is telling it, 
 doing it. 
 
 Note 1. — The verb an 
 may be thus used before 
 any verb, like toko (contracted 
 to) to sit, dwell, be, with 
 which it is nearly synonymous. 
 But an tano lies or is on the 
 ground, toko tano, or to atano 
 sits on the ground, tu tano 
 stands on the ground. Both 
 tu and toko are used before 
 other verbs like an, and toko 
 til ia, tu til ia, like an til ia, 
 denote to abide, continue, or 
 be telling it. Another verb, 
 tau, q.v., is used in the same 
 way before other verbs, as i 
 tau til ia, bat ia, he abides, or 
 is constantly, habitually, or 
 addictedly, or repeatedly, tell- 
 ing, doing it. These verbs 
 thus used before other verbs 
 are auxiliaries, not of tense, 
 but of " form," expressing 
 continuance, intensity, repeti- 
 tion ; and as in the English 
 phrases " I do say it," " I 
 must say it" (where say is the 
 simple infinitive after the 
 auxiliaries do and must), the 
 verb immediately following 
 them is the infinitive. 
 
 Note 2. — The preformative 
 m', ma' (mg, mi) is used with 
 toko, tu, and tau, as well as with 
 ani, an, as matoko (or mate), dd. 
 batoko, fatoko (vatoko), matu. 
 
 batu, fatu (vatu), mitau or 
 mStau : with this preformative 
 these verbs have much the> 
 same meaning as without it ; 
 they have the same meaning 
 with the added idea of con- 
 tinuance or intensity. [Mg. 
 monina dwell, reside, inhabit, 
 onenana, f onenana (a dwelling), 
 mponina (dweller).] A., 4) 
 "aniya, to dwell, abide, 8) to 
 be, ma"na' dwelling, cf. H. 'un 
 to rest, to dwell, ma'on a dwell- 
 ing. 
 Ani na, c. art. nani na, s., child, 
 son or daughter, dd. ati, atu. 
 [My. anak, Mg. anaka, id., 
 My. kanak (see kanao, kano, 
 infra), Mg. zanaka, id., c. arts, 
 k' and z'.] A. wald', walad', 
 walid', E. waldg, Amh. wande, 
 T. wadg, H. yalid, one born, 
 child, son, from the verb H. 
 yalad, A. walada, to bring 
 forth, bear (a mother), to beget 
 (a father), A. walid', parent, 
 genitor, father, walida<' mother, 
 genitrix' (Nm. welid, wSlida, 
 Ot. walidah). My. baranak 
 (Makassar, ma-ana), to bear a 
 child, bring forth any offspring, 
 have children, be a parent, Sa. 
 fanau (cf. A., 4) to bring forth, 
 fananau, fanafanau, fanaua 
 (ps.), fanau, s., offspring, chil- 
 dren, fanauga, s., offspring, 
 child-bearing. 
 
 Note. — The word ani, or ati, 
 atu, son or daughter, probably 
 represents an original mascu 
 line (and so that denoting 
 father, A. walid. Ml. and Santo 
 tata, voc, reduplicate, Santo d. 
 tai, Mg. ray), but the word 
 
ANOlJ 
 
 belonging to this stem do- 
 noting mother, the ancient 
 feminine (w§lida, walidah). 
 This is in Ef. d. raite na, or 
 reita na mother, d. ere na (for 
 erana), Ta.iti, d. rih. Am. rahi. 
 An. risi. Ml. risi, d. are, Epi d. 
 la, Pa. lati, Fila leta, Celebes 
 leyto : Ef . voc. tete (cf . abab, or 
 mama) a reduplicate ; also be- 
 long here Ef. atene na grand- 
 mother, and d. atia na, id., 
 the vocative of which, a redu- 
 plicate, is tata. In one dialect 
 atia means also grandfather. 
 In Epi mother, in one d. la, in 
 another is kaine, i.e., ka art., 
 and ine (for ina) mother, and 
 this latter is the prevailing 
 form of this word in the Malay 
 Archipelago (see Wallace's list), 
 Amboyna, Ceram, &o., ina, Mg. 
 reny and ineny (reduplicate, 
 voc. Ta. d. nana), Sa. tina ; the 
 Sa. tina is t' art., and ina, 
 Put. jina, Aniwa nana, Epi d., 
 without art. ani, Mg. r-eny 
 Celebes undo, Bu. indok, ina. 
 My. ind-u, J. id-ung ; also 
 Ysabel ido, San Cristoval ina, 
 Motu tina. Mare nene, Duke of 
 York na. 
 
 Anoi, or anui, s., c. art. nanoi, 
 or nanui, vir, husband, male : 
 m has been elided from the 
 beginning of this word as in 
 noai, d. nai, d. nifai (nivai), 
 q.v., water ; d. mane (mwane), 
 ma'an (mo'an), male. See 
 mane. 
 
 Anu, d., pers. pron. 1 sing., !• 
 See kinau. 
 
 Anu na, s. c. art., nanu na, his, 
 
 13 [ao 
 
 her, its shadow, i bi an' fur 
 it is an empty appearance, 
 mere shadow (worthless). 
 [Epi ununo, Malo unu. Ml. d. 
 nunu, id.] And 
 An', s., a rope, c. art. nan'. 
 These two meanings are also 
 found in the A. A. 'anna, n. 
 a. 'annu, 'ananu, 'ununu .to 
 present itself, to appear, 2, to 
 hold with a rein ; 'anu a long 
 rope, 'ananu and 'inanu ad- 
 paritio rei, 'ananu clouds, H. 
 'anan a cloud. 
 
 Note. — The radical mean- 
 ing of H. anan is to cover, 
 and cognate are kanan and 
 ganan ; A. janna, or ganna, to 
 cover, to be dark (of tlie 
 night), to be possessed by a 
 demon and insane, jinnu, or 
 ginnu, darkness of night, also 
 demons, spirits, or every kind 
 of them (this is the jin of tlie 
 "Arabian Nights "), hin a kind 
 of demons, ginniyyu a demon 
 or spirit, ganunu genii. In 
 Ef., d., unu ghost, d. inini 
 spirit, soul, Ml. P. oni, noni 
 n, his soul, or his shadow, Epi 
 d. anunu soul or spirit, Epi 
 (Baki) unu, c. art. niunu soul 
 or spirit, ununo shadow ; and 
 Ml. oni, Malo unu, one's like- 
 ness in water or in a looking 
 glass. Ef. ate, q.v., denotes 
 the soul, a spirit, one's 
 shadow, and one's likeness in 
 water or in a looking-glass. 
 Ao (or au), v., d,, to bark (as a 
 dog). See bakau. FSa. ou, 
 id.] 
 
 Ao, ad., yes. [Ma. au.] See au. 
 
ara] 1 4 
 
 Ara, form of pers. pron. 3 pi., 
 preserved in areara : other 
 forms nara, nigara (gara), 
 enera, kiniara. 
 
 Ara, s., a fence : c. art. nara, d. 
 nar : see koro, c. art. nakoro, 
 id. (ara has the initial k elided), 
 Nar fat, d. for nakoro fatu, a 
 stone fence. 
 
 Ara ia, v. t., seek, ara ika search, 
 look for fish, come seeking, 
 ba ara go or come seeking, 
 ti ara press after seeking. 
 [Fi. qara, v. t., seek, qaqara, 
 qaraqara, vakasaqara.] A. 
 hala, 3, n. a. hawal', v. t., 
 seek. 
 
 Araara, or arara, v., reduplicate 
 of ara, to join to, join together, 
 connect with, arara naui, 
 attach the yam vines to stakes, 
 arara nia connect it, arara ni 
 ora naui ki nakau connect or 
 attach the yam vine to the 
 stake : arara ki nalo na agree 
 to his voice (judgment, opinion, 
 &c.), lit. join on to it, syn. 
 sokari nalona : oraorana, q.v., 
 variegated, belongs to this 
 stem. H. babar, S. hbar, E. 
 habara, to join together, con- 
 nect with ; then, to agree with 
 someone; then, to be banded, 
 striped, variegated, A. habara, 
 ps. hubira to be striped, E. 
 hubur coloured, variegated, 
 adorned with various colours, 
 Ch. liabarbar spotted. Pri- 
 mary meaning, bind together. 
 Arara, s., heat, arara ni elo heat 
 
 of the sun : see next word. 
 Aran, or oran, d. arain, d. on, 
 d. uen, s., c. art. naran, &c., 
 sand. In on and uen (wen). 
 
 [aeu 
 
 the r is elided, the n of on, 
 like that of mang (male), q.v., 
 is non-radical. [Sa., Ma., 
 Tah., To., Ha , one, and one- 
 one sand ; oneonea (a, a. end- 
 ing) sandy.] A. liorr', or 
 horron, sand, from liarra to be- 
 hot, whence iiararai heat, Ef. 
 arara heat. 
 
 Aral, d., dem. pron , this, that. 
 For the final ai, see uai. [Ha. 
 la, Ma. ra there, Fut. ra that, 
 Mg. iroa that, there, ery, ary, 
 there.] S. hal, H. halah there, 
 connected with the dem. H. 
 hal, A. al, the art., Ch. alu, 
 aru, Ch. and Talmud hare, 
 are, dem., lo ! there ! Of 
 this dem. syllable al, hal, 
 ar, har, Gesenius remarks — 
 "It is hard to say which 
 form is the more ancient and 
 primitive ; " it is seen also 
 in Arm. harka, halkah, here, 
 H. elleh, &c., these, those, and 
 in Ef. arog (d.), eri, erik, eru, 
 q.v. 
 
 Areara, d., for aneara, anera, q.v.; 
 the prep, ani, or anS, is arS in 
 this word. 
 
 Arekabu na, s., c. art. narekabu, 
 the liver. See ate. 
 
 Arifon, s., c. art. narifon, diviner, 
 ma,gician. A. 'arrafon a di- 
 viner, from 'arafa to know, 
 divine, 2, make known. 
 
 Ari(a), V. t., to plane, scrape off, 
 rub off. [Sa. oro, id.] S. gra' 
 to scrape off, shave, H. gara'. 
 
 Arog (arong), d., dem. pron., this. 
 See arai and erik. The final 
 g as in nag, naga, dem. 
 
 Aru na, s., c. art. naru na, 
 hand, arm ; fore-foot of a 
 
asa] 
 
 quadruped : naru arms, i.e., 
 weapons of war, war ; i bi aru 
 uia he is industrious, lit. a 
 good hand, i bi aru sa he 
 is handless, lazy, lit. a bad 
 hand. [New Guinea dd. 
 uadu, dei. Ml. P. fera. Ml. A. 
 verua, Samang tong, Nias 
 tanga, Borneo dd. tongan, 
 lungan, rongo, tangan, My. 
 tangan, Mg. tan ana, d. tkn- 
 gana, Madura Bali tanang.] 
 H. yad hand, S. id., A. yadu 
 (and yaddu), dual yadan ; also, 
 adu, dual adan, hand, arm; 
 fore-foot of a quadruped. The 
 Mg. tdtna-ns, compares with the 
 A. adan. 
 
 Asa, ad., the day after to-morrow. 
 See uasa. 
 
 Asfeli na, s., a friend. [Ml. U. 
 selen, Bu. sblao, id.] A. 
 wasil', intimate friend, from 
 wasala to join, be joined. 
 
 As ia, d. uas ia, v. t., cut, cut 
 out, as asi naniu cut out the 
 kernel of a cocoanut (to make 
 a water vessel of it), asi 
 (lua namena na) cut (out his 
 tongue), asi intkl6 cut the 
 roots of taro (while it is in 
 the water, to pull it out of 
 the ground) : hence maseasi, 
 q.v. S. hsa, v.t., cut out (as 
 the eye). 
 
 Asi na, s., c. art. nasi na, the 
 part of the face bearded, jaw, 
 jawbone, chin. [Malo ase 
 TaSa. ese chin. Ml. P. fese 
 chin, ese cheek.] The radical 
 idea is that of cutting, sharp, 
 tearing. A. li'add' mala, gena. 
 
 Asi ta bunu, jaw cutting dead ; 
 
 Asi tageli, crooked jaw : these 
 
 15 [a SUA 
 
 expressions denote, the latter 
 crooked talk, the former talk 
 calculated for and resulting in 
 the death of one hated. 
 
 Aso, v.i., to burn, be burning {a 
 fire), be kindled, to be burnt 
 or scorched (as one's skin, or 
 food in being cooked). [Pi. 
 qesa, qesaqesa, a., burnt or 
 scorched, as in cooking. An. 
 ecescas, a., burned, aoas, or 
 cas, to burn ; hot, burning.^ 
 A. wakada, n. a. wakdo, H. 
 yakad, S. ikad, to burn, be 
 burning, be kindled. 
 
 Aso, s., a kind of crab, the 
 robber crab. 
 
 Aso, or asu, s,, c. art. naso, or 
 nasu, a bow (for shooting 
 arrows). [Aurora usu, Paama 
 hisu. Ml. P. vus, Ml. U. yis,, 
 Amblaw busu. My. busor, 
 Saparua husu, id.] A. kawsu, 
 or kasu, id. So called from 
 being curved. 
 
 Asoara, s., the rainbow. Cloth 
 brilliantly variegated with 
 different coloured bands or 
 stripes is called na kalu aso- 
 ara, a phrase in which the word 
 is an adjective. Also a stone 
 fence constructed of three rows 
 or bands of stone is described 
 as asoara. See infra, soara 
 (or souara). 
 
 Asolat, see soli. 
 
 Asua, V. i., to smoke, c. t. prep., 
 asufenia to smoke on to it, or 
 him : c. art. it is s., naasua na 
 the smoke of it, its smoke. 
 [Mg. etona, s., smoke, mane- 
 tona, v., to smoke. My. asap 
 (probably this word lit. means 
 smoke of fire, api), b^rasap to 
 
at] 
 
 smoke, Malo asu, s., mo asu- 
 asu, v., TaSa. asu, s., m'asu, 
 v., Ml. P. ese, s., mi es, v.. Ml. 
 A. nahamp basua, s., lit. the 
 "fire smokes, basua, v., Sa. asu, 
 s., asua, and asuina, v. ps.] 
 H. 'as'en, to smoke, 'as'an 
 smoke, A. 'athana, 1, 2, 4, to 
 smoke. 
 At, or ats, o. art. nat, q.v., 
 
 banana. 
 Ata (or nata), s., c. art. nata, d. 
 na eta for na ata, a man, a 
 person ; one, someone ; nata 
 nata, every one. See atamole, 
 atemate, ata na, atamam. 
 {Motlav et, Ureparapara at, 
 man. See below, Note 2.] 
 A. nat', for nas', which is 
 the commonly used plural 
 {" pluralis fractus," a col- 
 lective or abstract, or singular 
 with a collective meaning), 
 •of 'insan', man, male or 
 female, a human being, also 
 umbra hominis (the older 
 plural is 'unas', with which 
 ■corresponds H. 'enos'. Arm. 
 'anas'a, a man, men), and de- 
 notes men, also genii, demons. 
 Note 1. — A. 'insan, for 
 which there is also 'isan, 
 •corresponds to H. 'is'on, which 
 is formed from 'is' by the 
 •ending on, and denotes, when 
 followed by the word eye, 
 "little man of the eye, i.e., 
 pupil in which as in a glass a 
 little image of a man is seen " 
 (Ges.) ; the A. denotes in 
 addition to the meanings given 
 above " the little image appear- 
 ing in the pupil of the eye : " 
 A. 'insan is from the root 'ans 
 
 16 [ata na 
 
 and H. 'is' vir, 'is'ah woman> 
 from 'ins', 'ins'ah, hence the pi. 
 of 'is'ahisnas'im, corresponding 
 to A. nisa', niswai, and niswan, 
 women. The words 'is' vir, is'ah 
 woman (and their equivalents 
 in th^e cognate languages) must 
 ■ be carefully distinguished from 
 that given above under ata (or 
 nata) denoting " a human 
 being " whether male or female, 
 though they all belong to the 
 same root or stem. 
 
 Note 2. — According to the 
 above, the t in ata, like that in 
 A. nat', represents an original 
 s as in nas'. In Ef. dd. this 
 t is sometimes pronounced 
 nearly as r, and ts. In 
 other New Hebrides dia- 
 lects this consonant is found 
 as t, s, r, 1 ; thus correspond- 
 ing to Efate ata-mani male 
 (vir) are An. ata-maig, Fut. 
 ta-ne (for ta-ane), Ta. yeru- 
 man, Epi dd. ata-mani, su- 
 mano, Ml. U. oro-man, TaSa. 
 la-mani. My orang, Mg. olona 
 belong here. 
 Ata na, s., c. art. nata na (or 
 nate na) his spirit, his soul ; 
 his shadow ; his image (in 
 water or a glass). This is tlie 
 same word as the preceding, 
 but in this use has the noni. 
 suf . [Sa. ata a spirit, a shadow, 
 Fut. ata a ghost, shadow, 
 image (as in water), picture or 
 likeness, Fila tano ata, his 
 soul, Ma. ata reflected image, 
 shadow, ata po early morning, 
 ata marama moonlight, whaka- 
 ata mirror, Sa. ataga (from ata 
 a shadow) the mere appearance 
 
ATA Ia] 
 
 of a tiling, atagia to glisten 
 (as from a reflected light), 
 ataata the red sky after sun- 
 set. Ha. aka the shadow of a 
 person, figure, outline, or like- 
 ness, aka to light up, as the 
 moon before rising, akalani a 
 heavenly shadow, a splendid 
 light, Ef. atalagi, q.v., the 
 moon.] See preceding word. 
 
 Ata ia. or atai a, v. t., to know, d. 
 tai, q.v. 
 
 Atakasua, a., jealous j sus- 
 picious : from ata (soul), and 
 kasua q.v. 
 
 Atalagi, s., usually written 
 atelagi, the moon : from ata 
 (see ata na), and lagi the 
 sky, heaven. [Ha. akalani 
 (a heavenly shadow, a splen- 
 did light) is composed of the 
 same two words.] 
 
 Atamauri, or atemauri, s., the 
 spirit of a living man that has 
 gone out of him during sleep 
 and been seen by someone. 
 This word occurs in one dia- 
 lect and is composed of ata 
 the soul, and mauri, q.v., to 
 live. 
 
 Atamate, or atemate, s., c. art. 
 natemate, spirit of one dead, 
 ghost, spirits of the dead, 
 demons, good or bad spirits, 
 supernatural beings, objects of 
 worship, gods (gen. name). 
 The word is composed of ata 
 (above), and mate, q.v., to 
 die, be dead, a. dead. [i/fl. P. 
 demej, Epi dd. atamate, si- 
 maro, Ta. yeramis, Ml. A. 
 terhes. An. natmas, id.] The 
 primary meaning of nat.emate 
 Sepms to be dead man : thus 
 
 ,17 [atata 
 
 a corpse may be called nate- 
 mate, and natemate sometimes 
 denotes "the dead" in a col- 
 lective sense. 
 
 Atamole, s., c. art. natamole, 
 man, male or female, a human 
 being, same as ata, or nata, 
 with the addition of mole, 
 q.v., to live, a. living. Nata- 
 mole lit. denotes living man. 
 [Mg. olombelona, id. The 
 Mg. is composed of the same 
 two words as the Ef. ; for olo- 
 na see ata (above), and for 
 velona to live see mole (be- 
 low) ; and the meaning of the 
 compound word is the same in 
 each case. At least the 
 initial ta in Fi. tamata, Sa. 
 tangata, Tah. taaia, id., be- 
 longs here.] 
 
 Atamani, s., c. art. natamani, 
 male, lit. a male human 
 being, from ata (above), and 
 mani, q.v., male. [For New 
 Hebrides forms of this com- 
 pound word, see ata (above). 
 Fi. tangane, Sa. tane, id.] 
 
 Atatabu, or at' tab, s., c. art. 
 natatabu, or nat'tab, lit.. 
 sacred spirits, sacred stones 
 identified with such spirits, 
 and objects of pagan worship : 
 from ata (above), and tabu, 
 q.v. 
 
 Atama s., d. syn. c. ore, the 
 pointed rubbing stick for pro- 
 ducing fire by its friction with 
 another stick : a, art., and 
 tama ia, q.v. 
 
 Atara, aturiei. See natara, 
 naturiei. 
 
 Atata, V. i., or a., a reduplicate, to 
 have white spots or marks 
 3 
 
atata] 
 
 such as show where sores have 
 healed. See next word. 
 
 -Atata, s., an albino. The 
 radical meaning would there- 
 fore seem to be white. [Of. 
 Mg. hatsatra white, pale, 
 wan, sickly.] A. was'ah' 
 white spot appearing on the 
 head or feet of a horse, 
 was'ali' whitening spots of 
 leprosy, was'ih' very white; 
 from was'aha to be manifest, 
 white (as milk), &c. 
 
 Ate, c. art. natg na (d. nante na), 
 the liver (of a shark), the 
 spleen ; in arekabu (for ate- 
 kabu) it signifies the liver or 
 principal viscus of the kabu 
 (or kobu, q.v.), inside, and in 
 uateam, q.v., the proper mean- 
 ing seems to be the middle, the 
 middle and more important 
 part. [My. ati the liver, then 
 the mind, heart or inside, 
 Mg. aty the liver, the inside, 
 Sa. ate the liver.] A. kabd', 
 kabid', H. kabed, E. kabdg, 
 the liver, Amh. hod6, the 
 belly. A. kabid' also denotes 
 the belly with its parts, the 
 middle and more important 
 part (of a thing), the middle 
 (of a thing). E. kabdg viscus 
 (nom. gen. ), stomach, belly, in- 
 side, and particularly the 
 liver, as the heaviest of the 
 viscera. (See Ludolf's E. 
 Lex.) H. kabad, E. kabda, to 
 be heavy (primary meaning). 
 
 Note 1. — ArSkabu, q.v,, c. 
 art. narekabu, dd. talekabu, 
 nanekabu, tanekabu, and 
 nanekama, the liver, is com- 
 posed of are (for ate) the 
 
 18 [a 
 
 liver or principal viscus, and 
 kabu (for which see kobu the 
 belly, the inside), and lit. 
 denotes the viscus (or liver) of 
 the inside ; with are (for ate) 
 corresponds Ml. TJ. ere, and 
 New Guinea, Maclay Kiiste 
 arre, the liver. 
 
 Note 2.— With Ludolfs 
 statement (above) compare 
 that in the Ha. Diet., 
 where ake (for ate) is de- 
 fined as " the liver," and also 
 " a general name for several 
 internal organs, qualified by 
 different terms " : thus akeloa 
 spleen (loa long), and also 
 akeniau ; akepaa the liver, as 
 well as the simple ake ; ake- 
 mama the lungs (see above, 
 s.v. amo). In Sa. atepili the 
 spleen, atevae the calf of the 
 leg, Tah. aterima the thick 
 part of the arm. In Ef. 
 uateam' (d. uateau) the kid- 
 neys (see above, s.v. amo) 
 ua-nate-natuo, or ua-nate-tuo, 
 the calf of the leg, in one 
 dialect is denoted by uateau 
 natore, lit. kidneys of the 
 shin (i.e., the leg from the 
 knee to the foot, see tore), 
 and uateau Jaso denotes 
 kidneys of the scrotum. 
 Ua-nate has exactly the same 
 meaning as uate (i.e., ua-ate) 
 the only difference being that 
 in the former ate c. art. is 
 nate; ua, fruit, is used be- 
 cause the parts spoken of are 
 round or fruit-shaped. In 
 Ef. dd. the calf of the leg is 
 uateau natore, ua-nate tuo (or 
 natuo), and naSela natore, of 
 
Atelaki] 
 
 which the last lit. denotes 
 the belly of the leg (below 
 the knee). 
 
 Atelaki na, or atelakia na, s., 
 the owner of it, owner : from 
 a, art., and telaki or telakia, 
 q.v. 
 
 Atena na (d. atia na), s., maternal 
 grandmother ; voc. tata. See 
 ani na. 
 
 Ati na, s., c. art. nati na, child, 
 d. ani na, q.v. [Ma., Tah., 
 ati offspring.] 
 
 Atia na, s., paternal grandfather 
 or grandmother : voc. tia. See 
 atena na, tata, tematete ta, 
 tia, tematia ta. 
 
 Ati(a), d. uati(a), v. t., d. for 
 ari a, q.v. 
 
 Atoara, see natoara. 
 
 Atu na, s., c. art. natu na, d. 
 ati na, his, her child, off- 
 
 _ spring. See ani na. 
 
 Atu, c. suf. atu-gia (d. uatu) beat, 
 smite, break off or divide off 
 (as a piece of a plantation) ; 
 atu (namauri) utter (an in- 
 cantation), at' usi utter re- 
 hearsing (see us ia), ktn saki 
 plop up (of a turtle, also of 
 the sound of the breath in the 
 throat of a man recovering 
 from a faint or dying) ; and 
 atu taku turn the back (to 
 anyone on being addressed, as 
 if not aware of it), atu taluko 
 turn oneself (from someone) ; 
 atu tuai break in pieces (a 
 plantation) giving him (a por- 
 tion) ; fiatu, V. r., to be fight- 
 ing,- to be smiting each other : 
 nalagi atu the wind beating, 
 a hurricane ; atu nabau kill 
 (by sihiting the head) ; atu 
 
 19 [atua 
 
 ualubota rout the enemy 
 (smite, break the enemy). 
 With the ending maki the 
 word, atu-maki, means jerk, 
 snap, as atu-maki jerk (as the 
 branch of a tree), balusa atu- 
 maki to paddle jerking (with 
 a jerking motion of the 
 paddle), atu-maki nalo ra jerk 
 their voices, or snap their 
 voices. A. hata beat, smite, 
 hatia be bent, stoop (a man), 
 Nm. heti declaim : cf. hatta 
 to break, to beat off (as leaves 
 from trees), to utter (words). 
 
 Atuta (see ta atuta ki), s., set 
 time, or place, as i ta atuta 
 ki nia, he declares a set time to 
 (one), i.e., to meet him on a 
 certain day, or at a certain 
 time (to do something), ru tu 
 natuta they kept the set time, 
 i risugi natuta he changed the 
 set time. See ta atuta. 
 
 Atu-maki, v. See atu. 
 
 Atu saki, at 'saki, v. See atu 
 and saki. 
 
 Atu taku, at' taku, v. See atu 
 and taku. 
 
 Atu taluko, at' taluko, v. See 
 atu and taluko. 
 
 Atua, s., God. Introduced word. 
 In Meli. c. art. the word 
 tetua (East Mai retua, To. 
 hotooa, he otua) denotes 
 among the heathen the same 
 as atamate, that is, any 
 spiritual being regarded as 
 having supernatural qualities 
 or powers, as a demon, good 
 or bad, a ghost, a god : it is 
 a general name. A human 
 being on dying immediately 
 becomes a tetua or natamate — 
 
atum-kol] 
 
 that is, not only a spirit, but, 
 among the heathen, an object 
 of superstitious regard. In 
 Sa. aitu a spirit, a god, seems 
 to belong to the same stem, 
 ■whence, with a. ending a, 
 aitua haunted. Probably both 
 aitu and atua belong to the 
 same stem as ata, q.v. The 
 word in Ha. (akua), To. (otua), 
 Ma. and Sa. (atua) now de- 
 notes God in the Christian 
 sense, and it has been intro- 
 duced with this meaning into 
 Aneityum, Tanna, Efate, Epi, 
 &o. 
 
 Atum-kol, s., echo, lit. offspring 
 of the call or shout, and 
 
 Atuma, in pr. nn. atuma-neru 
 offspring of war, iSrc. See 
 kola, and for atuma offspring, 
 see futum. 
 
 Atuta. See p. 19. 
 
 Au, verb. pron. 1 pi. excl., we, 
 they, d. pu (for mu) : separate 
 pron. kinami we — they; kinau 
 I, verb. pron. a I, d. ni. 
 
 Au, ad., yes, d. ao. A, dem. 
 prefix, and u, or o, for which 
 see o. H. hahu' that (is it). 
 
 Au, V. i., to heal, get well, d. for 
 abu, id., q.v. 
 
 Au, s., a kind of lizard, d. for 
 kau, id. 
 
 Au, v. i., to bark. See ao. 
 
 Aiia (awa), v. i., or a., fatigued, 
 
 c, art. naiia, one fatigued. H. 
 ya'af, to be fatigued, ya'ef, 
 fatigued. 
 
 AiiA, (aw^), ad., no, it is not : d. 
 
 eiio, q.v. 
 Auaua, s. (awawa, a reduplicate), 
 
 d. bau, q.v., maternal uncle. 
 
 20 [ba 
 
 [My. uwa, wa, uwak, an uncle 
 or aunt], cf. A. 'amni', an 
 uncle. See bau na. 
 
 Aue, interj., surprise, commisera- 
 tion, [Sa. aue, alas ! oh ! of 
 wonder.] A. awwi (&c.>, alas! 
 ah ! oh ! 
 
 Aui, interj., surprise, commisera- 
 tion ; a, dem., and ui, q.v. 
 
 Auis, interj., surprise, commisera- 
 tion ; a, dem., and uis, q.v. 
 
 Aul ia, V. t., dd. ul ia, ol ia, uil 
 ia. See ul ia. 
 
 Aum, s., c. art. naum, d. for 
 aime, q.v. 
 
 Aure, s., a singer, bard, a, art., 
 and ure or ore (see ore). [Fut. 
 goro. Ma. whakaoriori, Ha. 
 olo. My. uraura, Mg. hira, to 
 sing, &c.] E. halaya, to sing. 
 
 Aiita, s., or ad., auta, ashore, on 
 land, d. euta, q.v., a, prep., and 
 uta, q.v. 
 
 B 
 
 'a-, or fa-, caus. prefix, origin- 
 ally ma. [Mg ma-, fa-, mpa-.] 
 S. ma- (Maphel conj.), Mod. 
 S. ma-, caus. prefix (St., 
 pp. 110, 111): the Mafel or 
 Maphel is simply the participle 
 of the ancient Aphel (H. 
 hiphil, A. 4). 
 
 Ba, (bwa), and ua (wa), v. i., to 
 rain = d. bona (bowa). [Epi 
 mboba, mbobo, Ta. ufu, id.] 
 A. ba'a to rain continuously, 
 ba'a'a rain, rain water. 
 
 Bi, or fa (va), v., to go, enter (a 
 ship, &c.), tread(go upon), with 
 si suffixed, ba-si to tread, tread 
 upon (go upon). [Pi. va-ca. 
 
ba] 
 
 to tread upon, hence va na, 
 and probably yava na, the feet, 
 Mys6l bo, to go. This verb 
 in Ef., &c., is often followed 
 by a " directive," or adverb, 
 which sometimes is suffixed to 
 it, and the expression thus 
 formed may signify either to 
 go or to come, thus, An. apan, 
 go there, • apam, come here, 
 Ef. ban, or bano, go there, 
 ba be (d.) come here, (d.) 
 umai (in which the ba is 
 corrupted to u), Sa. o mai, 
 Amboyna uimai, oimai, omai, 
 Mysol bo mun, to come here ; 
 My. p&rgi, pai, to go, is perhaps 
 this pa and rgi or i, pftrgi-mari 
 to come, like Ef. d. bano 
 to go (ba and no), bano -mai 
 to come here. The mai in 
 Such phrases as the above, Ef. 
 dd. mai, be, has sometimes, 
 from being an abverb or 
 directive so used after ba, 
 come to be used alone, the 
 ba being understood, signi- 
 fying to come : thus in one Ef. 
 d. mai, in another d. be (mai 
 and be are forms of the same 
 particle) are now verbs used 
 alone denoting to come here. 
 My. mari hither, here, in like 
 manner used alone signifies to 
 come. See under banotu, notu.] 
 H. bo', ba, to enter, come, go 
 (egg. E. bawi', A. ba, to return, 
 &c.) 
 Ba, v., to come from (from a 
 place), as Ku ba se 1 you 
 come from where? i ba nalia 
 uan he comes from that place, 
 dd. bai, be, baki (where the 
 prep, ki = from). [Mg. avy 
 
 21 [baba 
 
 aiza ? == ba set = come from 
 where 1 come whence ? avy to 
 come.] See under banotu. 
 
 Ba ki, v., c. prep., to go to (a 
 place) : ba, and the prep, ki 
 to: ki, to, sometimes denotes 
 from see preceding word. 
 
 Bai, v., d., ba, q.v., to come from, 
 as bai se 1 come from where ? 
 See under banotu. 
 
 Bai, v., to be, d. for bi, q.v. 
 
 Bai a, v. t., to gather together in 
 order to carry home, as fire- 
 wood, or fruit, &c. [Fi. va-ya, 
 ps. vai, to make a bundle, as 
 of sticks, to carry on the back.] 
 See afaia. 
 
 Ba, d. mba, final conj., that : 
 used in the conjugation of the 
 future and imperative and in- 
 finitive of verbs. 
 
 Ba, that thou, sign of 2 pers. sing, 
 imperative ; includes pron. 2 
 pers. sing. [Motu ba, used in 
 the same way in fut., inf., and 
 imp., Fi. me, in imp. and inf., 
 Ma. me, forming a kind of im- 
 perative future, Mg. mba that, 
 Ml. P. ba, b' that, used in con- 
 jugation of imp., inf., and 
 future.] A. fa that (final 
 conj.), ifec. 
 
 Ba, v., d. for ma. See ani, v. 
 
 Bab, s., d., voc, father = ab, 
 babu, abab, id. 
 
 Ba, na (kba na), s., c. art. na 6a 
 na, and, reduplicated 
 
 JSaSa na, s., hollows, or channels ; 
 and 
 
 BaJba, s., c. art. nafiaSa, a hollow, 
 channel, or bed of a stream, 
 dry except after heavy rains : 
 
 Baha,, s., c. art. na6a6a, a board : 
 [Sa., Tah.papa, My. papan, id.] 
 
BABU] 
 
 Bairn na (d. bamu na), s., c. art. 
 nubabvL na, the cheek : (My. 
 pipi, Tah. papa — uru, id.] H. 
 gabab to be curved, hollow ; 
 to cut, dig. Hence gab the 
 back (see below, bamu), geb a 
 board : egg. having the sense 
 of hollow, curved, are numer- 
 ous, as gavah, gafaf, guf, or 
 gup (infra kobu, kubu, kabu), 
 kafaf (infra kau, kai, kaf), 
 nahab (infra na6ea, i.e., nak- 
 bea, d. nakima, fafine), bub, 
 'abab, nabab, Ac, and the eg. 
 words in A., &c. Mg. ho- 
 boka hollow, concave, pepo 
 hollow, concave. My. S,mpa 
 hollow. To. papa the hollow 
 piece of wood on which 
 gnatoo is imprinted, lowpapa 
 a board, &c. 
 
 Babatrega, v. i., or a., variegated, 
 versicoloured, as cloth : the 
 formative prefix ba doubled ; 
 said to be denominative from 
 trfiga (toga), q.v., a versi- 
 coloured woven basket. 
 
 Babu, s., d., voc, father : dd. 
 afa, ab, abab, bab'. 
 
 5afa, s., a small separate house 
 used only by women dwelling 
 apart from men during men- 
 struation, and also at the time 
 of parturition. From afa to 
 bear, carry, c. pref. 6a (for 
 ma). See baofa (d.), which is 
 from ofa, d. for afa, bear, 
 carry : baofa, though etymo- 
 logically the same as 5afa, has 
 a dififerent meaning, no such 
 custom as is implied by the 
 6afa obtaining among the 
 speakers who say " baofa." 
 It denotes the act of men- 
 
 22 [baga 
 
 struating, not the house for 
 those menstruating. 
 
 Note. — In Ha. the house 
 for menstruating women was 
 called hale pea. 
 
 Bafanau, same as fanau, q.v. 
 
 Bafano, or fafano, v., to wash 
 the hands. See bano lia. 
 [Sa. fafano wash the hands 
 and mouth, Fi. vuluvulu wash 
 the hands. See bulu nia, 
 bano lia, balo nia, &c., infra.'\ 
 
 Bafatu, or fafatu, v. t., to trust 
 in, confide in, rely upon. See 
 fatu. 
 
 Baga, V. c. See bagan ia, to feed, 
 charge, fill ; 
 
 Bagan ia, v. c, to feed, lit. make 
 to eat, bagan ia sa, lit. make 
 him eat it ; caus. prefix ba, 
 and kan to eat. With the 
 n elided baga, as baga nata 
 feed anyone, baga sisi load a 
 gun ; baga, absolute, as i baga 
 (of a pig or a fish) to wander 
 about in search of food ; faga 
 (of fire), nakabu faga a burn- 
 ing or devouring fire, i faga it 
 burns, devours, or eats (of fire, 
 and of an ulcer) ; nafaga a 
 bribe, nafagafaga a bait. [Fi. 
 vakani-a, Sa. fafaga, feed, 
 cause to eat, Mg. mamahana 
 to feed, also load (a gun), 
 caus. pref. ma, and fahana.l 
 See kan ia. 
 
 Bagau-nabau, pr. n., c. art. 
 nabagau-nabau : the feeder of 
 the oven with the slain ; baga, 
 ua, nabau. 
 
 Baga, s. See bago, a hill, d. 
 mago, d. bega. 
 
 Baga, s., d. for maga, the banyan 
 tree. 
 
bagabaga] 
 
 Bagabaga, v. i. See bagobago. 
 
 Bagarai a, v. c, to dry, lit. make 
 dry : from gara, kara, dry, 
 [My. mangaving kan, id.] See 
 gara, kara. 
 
 Bagaranu a i, den. v. c. ; from 
 
 ■ ran, c. art. niran, fresh water; 
 to wash with fresh water after 
 bathing in the sea : d. baka- 
 naru mia, id. (naru, transposed 
 for ranu). [Sa. faalanu to 
 wash off salt water, ps. faa- 
 lanumia; with 'i faalanuma-'i.] 
 See ran, s. 
 
 Bagi, v., to mount, climb, ascend 
 (a hill, ladder, tree, ship, &c.); 
 may also have the prep, ki 
 before the object, as bagi 
 nakasu or bagi ki nakasu 
 climb the tree, bagi to go up, 
 ascend, bagi ki go up on. [Mg. 
 akatra, miakatra, id.. My. 
 minggah, id.. Ma. piki to 
 climb, pikitia.J A. 'aka', 4), to 
 ascend. 
 
 Bagobago, v. i., or a., to be 
 crooked. [Sa. pi'o, pi'opi'o, 
 id., Ma. piko, bent, Mg. 
 vokoka crooked, My. bengkok, 
 Ja, bengkong crooked.] H. 
 hafak, S. hpak, A. 'apaka 
 to turn, (fee, H. hapakpak 
 crooked, twisted. Hence 
 
 Bagobagoa, a., crooked, twisted : 
 -a, a. ending ; and 
 
 Bagobagora, a., id. : a. ending -ra. 
 
 Bago, v., to be behind, i 6ago 
 asa he is behind it, as i 6ago 
 nakoro he is behind the fence 
 (of a man behind a fence put 
 up about his house to shut 
 out the public view), i 6ago 
 nafanua it is behind the land 
 (of a ship taking shelter under 
 
 23 [bago 
 
 the iee side of an island in a 
 hurricane). The word Jago 
 na, s., denotes the heel; the 
 lower part of the back (syn. 
 bisi na) ; ba,go nafanua west 
 end of an island, is the opp. 
 of meta nafanua east end of 
 an island (fore-end and heel- 
 end) ; 6ago na kelu, or 6aga 
 na kelu is the after part of an 
 army that (kelu) goes in a 
 circuitous course to surprise 
 the enemy — and in all these 
 senses the word in one dialect 
 is pronounced mago na, which 
 is the more original form. 
 The hills behind the villages, 
 or not far back from the shore, 
 on which there is no jungle, 
 are called bega, baga, d. 
 mago. This word is much 
 used in names of places, points 
 or heels of the land : thus 
 Pagona is the naiiie of west end 
 of Deception Island, Havan- 
 nah Harbour, and Pago of the 
 long point of land on the 
 south of Fila harbour ; Selim- 
 baga a place on Tongoa, ifec. 
 The end of anything, as the 
 land, a stick, &c., is called 
 meta-6ago na, lit. the eye or 
 point of its end. [TaSa. 
 pigo na, end or extremity.] 
 H. 'akab, A. 'akaba to be be- 
 hind, to come from behind : 
 the form (in Ef.) resembles 
 A. ma'kob, mago, 6ago : H. 
 'akeb the heel, A. 'akib' id., 
 and the end of a thing : H. 
 'akeb also denotes the ex- 
 treme rear of an army, and 
 'akob a hill, acclivity (A., E., 
 id.) 
 
BAGO Na] 
 
 iSago na, s., d. for inago na, heel 
 of foot ; back part of body ; 
 hinder end (of an island) in 
 opp. to meta na fore end {i.e., 
 east) ; hinder part of an army ; 
 an end (of anything) ; end of 
 a house (the Efatese house has 
 two ends), hence, inside of a 
 house at the far ends, and 
 then generally in one d. in- 
 side (of a house) ; end, i.e. 
 bottom, of a hole or deep pit. 
 See preceding word and mago. 
 
 Bagote fia, v.c, to buy it, pur- 
 chase it, lit. to break, separate 
 (from its former owner) a 
 thing, d. bakotufia. See koto. 
 
 Bagokot, or bagkot, v., redupli- 
 cate of foregoing. 
 
 Ba gote fia, v., to break a thing 
 (as a stick) by treading (see b^) 
 on it. 
 
 Bai, v., d. ba, to go or come from 
 (a place) : ba v., and prep i., 
 d. ba ki, id., has prep. ki. 
 
 Bai, or bei, v., dd. bi, mi, to be, 
 as, i bai fatu it is a stone ; also 
 prep, before the object of 
 many verbs, see bei. See bi ; 
 and bei (or bai). 
 
 Baibai, or baibaia, v. i., or a., to 
 be large, wide; said to be d. 
 for bebea, q.v. 
 
 Bai na, s., d. for bau na, the 
 head. See bau na. 
 
 Bai, s., d., c. art. nabai na, 
 feathers or covering of a bird : 
 d. for mau na, q.v. [Ma. hou, 
 feathers.] 
 
 Bai;! baibai ! interj., surprise and 
 pleasure. [Mg. baba, id.] A. 
 bah'i bah'i id. 
 
 Baina, v., to go there (away from 
 speaker), ba goj i to, na there : 
 
 24 I [baka 
 
 d. binen' : d. syn. banotu, 
 q.v. 
 
 Baka, d. sometimes for baki, v., 
 used also as a prep.: ba to go, 
 and ki (rarely ka) to, as v., i 
 baki' nalia uane he goes to that 
 place ; as prep., i bisa baki 
 John he speaks to (or unto) 
 John. [Epi beki ; and Epi d., 
 with prep, ni (instead of ki and 
 equivalent to it) bani, Florida 
 vani.] See preps, ki, ni. 
 
 Baka, or faka, caus. prefix. This 
 consists of the caus. prefix ba 
 (or fa), q.v., and the deni. 
 particle ka, q v. [Fi. vaka, 
 Sa. faa. Ma. whaka, Mg. maha, 
 faha, mpaha.] 
 
 Note. — As this particle ka 
 (Mg. ha) has various uses in 
 Oceanic, and as in baka it is 
 manifestly used in a manner 
 not of local or recent origin, 
 the question arises as to what 
 its exact force in this con- 
 nection is. In My. ka is 
 prefixed to the verbal nouii 
 formed by the suffix an 
 exactly as in Ef. na (the 
 common art.) is to the same 
 verbal noun, and in that case 
 it has the force of an article. 
 In Ja. ka is used in the same 
 way, and in addition prefixed 
 to a verb forms a passive 
 verbal adjective, as suduk to 
 stab, kasuduk stabbed, or 
 passive verb (as it is called) 
 to be stabbed. (So in Fi., as, 
 e.g., voro-ta to break, kavoro 
 broken.) And it is thus that, 
 in the case of the numerals, ka 
 prefixed to the cardinals makes 
 them ordinals in Ja., My., Pi., 
 
BAKA EOA] 
 
 25 
 
 [bakalarOa 
 
 and Ef. These ordinals 
 having been formed as katolu 
 third (that which or he who 
 is three, that (or what) is 
 three) the causative prefix ba 
 added formed bakatolu make 
 third, cause to be third ; this 
 word in Mg.,,fahatelo (verbal 
 
 . adjective), is " third," in Ef. 
 i bakatolu is (verb) he made 
 the third (time) at it, and the 
 verbal noun from this verb, 
 formed in the usual way, is 
 nafakatoluan the being or 
 doing the third time. Compare 
 in H. the den. verb formed 
 from the numeral three, Piel 
 (causative) "to do anything the 
 third time," &c., and Pual 
 part, (verbal adjective) "three- 
 
 , fold," &c. In Ef. bakatolu, 
 though really a verb, is trans- 
 lated into English as an ad- 
 
 . verb of times — thus i bakatolu 
 bat ia he did it three times, 
 but lit. he made the third 
 time doing it. 
 
 Baka roa, v. i., to jerk over to 
 the other side (a canoe sail) : 
 boka tia to strike, and roa to 
 tufn round. 
 
 '^aka, s., a fence, a fence of stone 
 
 ' or wood made for protection 
 or fortification in war. [Ha. 
 pa a fence. Ma. pa a stockade, 
 
 . fortified place, pa to block 
 up, obstruct.] H. ma'akeh a 
 parapet (surrounding a flat 
 roof) to hinder one from fall- 
 ing ofi", from 'akah, A. 'aka' 
 to hold back (and 'aka), 
 hinder, impede. 
 
 Baka sia, d. transposed for kaba 
 
 ' sia, koba sia, to follow. 
 
 Bakabasea, v. c, d. syn. c. suer 
 
 ia, to scold, vituperate : from 
 
 base a, id. 
 Bakabatg, or bakafate, v. c, make 
 
 the fourth time : from batS, 4. 
 
 [Mg. fahefatra the fourth.] 
 Bakabulu tia, v. c, nearly the 
 
 same as the simple verb bulu 
 
 tia, q.v. 
 Bakabunuti, bak^-manu, <fec. See 
 
 bakaralima. 
 Bakafakal ia, v., to console, com- 
 fort : reduplicate from bakal 
 
 ia, id., q.v. 
 Bakafia, d. bakafisa, v., make 
 
 how many times 1 make how 
 
 often ? See bisa. 
 
 I. Bakal ia, v. c, to soothe, com- 
 fort, take tender care of (as of 
 a child, or one in sorrow) : see 
 kal. A. 'agila to soothe, com- 
 fort ; E. 'egal, a child, Ef. 
 kal, fakal, and d. kekel, id., 
 usually vocative, and , niuch 
 used in proper names of chil- 
 dren, as kal nagusu child of 
 the point (promontory), kal 
 or fakal tamate child of 
 peace, &c. 
 
 II. Bakal ia, v. c, to sharpen (as 
 a knife, axe, (fee.) H. kalal, 
 Pilpel, to sharpen ; to move to 
 and fro, A., E., id. See 
 makal sharpened, sharp, kala 
 little, &c. H. kalal to be light, 
 to be swift, fleet, to be dimin- 
 ished, little, so A. kalla to be 
 despised, H. kalon, shame, 
 pudenda, Ef. makal, 
 
 Bakalailai, v. c, nearly same as 
 simple verb lailai, q.v., to be 
 delighted. 
 
 Bakalarua, v. c, make tfie 
 seventh time, or seven times. 
 
bakalatesa] 
 
 See larua, kalarua. [Mg. 
 fahafito the seventh.] 
 
 Bakalatesa, v. C, make the sixlh 
 time, or six times. See latesa, 
 kalatesa. [Epi vaari.] 
 
 Bakalatolu, v. c, make the 
 eighth time. [Epi vaarolu.] 
 See latolu. 
 
 Bakalifiti, v. c, make the ninth 
 time. [Epi vakoveri.] See 
 lifiti. 
 
 Bakaleba, v. c, make (himself) 
 great, be proud : leba, laba. 
 
 Bakalima, v. c, make the fifth 
 time, or five times. [Mg. 
 fahading, the fifth.] See lima. 
 
 Bakamataku ki, v. c, to make 
 afraid, to threaten, frighten : 
 from mataku to be afraid. 
 [Mg. mahatahotra, My. mana 
 kuti, manakut kan, Sa. 
 faamata'u.] 
 
 Bakamaturu ki, v. c, make to 
 sleep, put to sleep : from 
 maturu to be asleep, to sleep. 
 [My. manidor kan.] 
 
 Bakamauri a, v. c, to make 
 alive, save : from mauri to be 
 alive, live. [Sa. faaola. My. 
 mangidupi, Mg. mamelona.] 
 
 Bakameta sa, v. c, to direct the 
 eyes to, look at : a bakameta 
 gu is, i bakameta na sa, &c., 
 seems to mean lit. I direct my 
 eyes, make my eyes upon it, 
 &c. : meta, or mita, q.v., v., 
 and s. Bakamita, id. 
 
 Bakamirara. See mirara. 
 
 Bakanaru mia, v. c, naru, trans- 
 posed for ranu : d. for baga- 
 ranu a i, in the one case m' is 
 the t. prep., in the other a. 
 
 Bakarairai, v. c. Nearly the same 
 as the simple v. rairai, q.v. 
 
 i6 [bakas 
 
 Bakarau sa, v. c, divide it 
 (among a number of persons), 
 distribute it : from rau, q.v. 
 
 Bakarogo, v. c, make (him- 
 self) hear or obey, be humble, 
 quiet, meek ; from rogo, q.v. 
 
 Bakaru. See bukaru. 
 
 Bakarua, v. c, make the second 
 time, or two times. See rua, 
 karua. [Mg. faharoa, the 
 second.] 
 
 Bakaralima, or bakarualima, 
 v. c, make the tenth time, or 
 ten times. [Epi vaduulimo.] 
 See rualima, or ralima, kara- 
 lima. 
 
 Note. — The caus. prefix 
 baka may be attached to the 
 word or words denoting any 
 number, as bakabunuti (bun- 
 uti, 100), bakamanu (manu, 
 1000), make the hundredth, 
 thousandth time, or one 
 hundred, one thousand times, 
 bakaralima lima (ralima lima, 
 50), bakamanu ralima (manu 
 ralima, 10,000), make the 
 fiftieth, ten thousandth time, or 
 fifty or ten thousand times, &c. 
 
 5akas, or 6okas, s., c. art. 
 naftakas, flesh ; then, a pig 
 (not a sow or a boar) specially 
 reared and esteemed for its 
 flesh ; then. Hades, because 
 of the numbers of such pigs 
 killed on occasion of deaths, 
 especially of chiefs, whose 
 flesh was not only much en- 
 joyed at repeated feasts among 
 the living, but supposed in 
 some way to accompany or 
 follow the souls of the de- 
 ceased to Hades, and give 
 corresponding gratification to 
 
bakasa] 
 
 the shades of the departed 
 assembled there : with the 
 prep, a, abakas, or abokas, in 
 Hades. [Epi bukahi a pig 
 (not boar or sow), Put. pakasi 
 a pig (gen. name), Ero. mpokas 
 a pig (gen. name), An. picad, 
 i.e., picath, a pig (gen. name).] 
 A. manlius' having much 
 flesh, fleshy, from nalias'a to 
 denude a bone of flesh, to take 
 the flesh from ofi" a bone. 
 
 Bakasa, v. c, bakasa ki, or 
 bakasa ia, to paint (as the 
 face), hence na fakasa, s., a 
 festival (adornment); to clean, 
 make clean (as a place), to 
 clear, make clear. [Fi. ai 
 qisa paint for the face.] A. 
 nakas'a to paint, to colour ; 
 to clear, make clear (as a 
 place) : bakasa, dd. (trspd.) 
 bisaki, biski. 
 
 Bakasau, v. c, dd. bisakau ia, 
 bisaui, bisaku tia, to make or 
 build up a fire, lit., make to 
 join on to, i.e., one stick to 
 another, to make a bigger 
 fire. (By joining tdgether the 
 smouldering ends of two fire 
 sticks and then joining on to 
 them the ends of other sticks 
 a fire is built up.) The in- 
 itial b! or ba in this word is 
 the causative prefix : the 
 simple verb is siku tia, q.v. 
 
 Bakaser ia, v. c, to loosen or 
 remove a, tabu (as from a 
 place), make common or non- 
 tabu. See ser ia. 
 
 Bakasere a, v. c, to treat kindly 
 carefully providing for, to en- 
 tertain hospitably. See sere 
 a, ps. masere. 
 
 27 [BAKAtf 
 
 Bakasikai (d. fakasikitika), v. c, 
 make the first time, or one 
 time. [Mg. faharaika the 
 first.] See sikai (or isikai), 
 kasikai. 
 
 Bakosoro fia, v. c, make to burn t 
 from soro, v. c, to burn. 
 
 Bakatabtabu ki, v. c, make 
 tabu, or declare tabu. See 
 tabu. [To. fakatabu to inter- 
 dict.] 
 
 Bakatar ia, v. c. Nearly the 
 same as the simple verb tar 
 ia, q.v. 
 
 Bakatau, v. c. Nearly the same 
 as the simple v. tau, q.v. 
 
 Bakateba, v. c, oaus. form, to 
 watch, to look out or watch 
 for, as bakateba na bai saki 
 ni aliati watch or look out for 
 the rising flush of dawn. [Sa. 
 tepa, tetepa, to look towards. J 
 H. sapah to look out, view, 
 watch, look out fon 
 
 BakatiJas ia, v. c, to suffice : 
 from tilas ia, q.v., and see 
 also tlie simple v. las ia. 
 
 Bakatogo ia, v. c, d. for 
 
 Bakatoko ia, v. c, to make a 
 show or feinb of striking or 
 pushing. See the simple v. 
 togo fia. 
 
 Bakatolu, v. c, make the third 
 time, or three times. [Mg. 
 fahatelo the third.] 
 
 Bakau, or bakauS, v. c, to say 
 or shout au6 ! au§ ! or au ! au t 
 to make a howling or barking 
 noise in a well-known Efatese 
 way expressiveof joy, triumph,, 
 "^ or derision : the howl or cooee 
 repeated several times, ending 
 in the loud jerking or barking 
 utterance of au ! au i au ! H. 
 
BAKAUL Ia] ; 
 
 , 'a vah to howl, cry out, A. 'aui to 
 howl, as a dog, wolf, or jackal. 
 
 IBakaul ia, v. c, to make like, 
 imitate, to be like to, resemble : 
 the simple v. is aul ia (dd. 
 
 L ui lia, ol ia) or ul ia, q.v. 
 
 Bakauti a, v. c, d. buti a, q.v., 
 make an end, finish. [Fi. 
 vakaoti, To. vakaochi, Sa. 
 faaoti. Ma. whakaoti.] H. 
 haseh an end, kasah, A. kas'a', 
 2, to finish. 
 
 Bake, d. baku, v., to search, to 
 search for (as to search for 
 insects in the head, or for 
 fleas and such like in mats or 
 cloth). S. bka', or bko', to 
 search. 
 
 Baki, v., to go to (a place), ba to 
 go, and ki, prep. ,to : d. be' 
 (nearly beh), id. 
 
 Baki, prep., to, unto. This is 
 
 , preceding word used as a prep. 
 
 Eaki, v., d., to go or come from 
 (a place), dd. ba, bai : ba to 
 go or come, and prep, ki (to), 
 from. For ba see bai. 
 
 IBake, d. for bakl se, go where ? 
 bake is for baki e, go to where : 
 se, d. e, where ? se is e c. 
 
 . art. s'. 
 
 Bakilina, v., to go or come into 
 the light, i.e., into view, to 
 appear : baki go or come to, 
 and lina light. See lina, d. ali. 
 
 Bakitakita d. for makitakita, q.v. 
 
 Bako, s., shark, d. 6ake. [Malo 
 bacio, Epi bekeu.] Der. un- 
 certain. 
 
 Bakor, v., d., to go or come in 
 front of, to appear : ba to go 
 or come, and koro, q.v. 
 
 JBakotu fia, v. t., d. for bagote 
 fia, q.v. 
 
 1 [bala 
 
 Baku, v., d. for bake, q.v. 
 
 Baku, v. t., to pluck out, baku 
 sa pluck it out, ps. mafaku 
 plucked out, tafakaka, d. ta- 
 fagka (i.e., tafak'ka), v. i., to 
 burst, explode. [Sa. fa'i pluck, 
 extract, mafa'ifa'i extracted, 
 Ma. whakiwhaki, and kow- 
 haki, to pluck. My. kopak to 
 burst, break out, Mg. vaky 
 burst out, mitifaka to burst, 
 mitefoka to sound (as the ex- 
 plosion of a gun.] A. faka' to 
 burst, to pluck out, tafakka', 
 5, to be burst. 
 
 I. ^ala, V. i., to be smooth. 
 [Sa. molemole, lamolemole, 
 id., Tah. moremore smooth, 
 without branches, as a tree ; 
 even, without protuberances ; 
 also, hairless, more, v. i., to 
 drop or fall, as pia leaves 
 when ripe, Ma. moremore, 
 V. t., to make bald or bare ; 
 strip of branches, &c.] A. 
 mara, n. a. maur' to fall off 
 (as wool or hair from the 
 body, feathers from an arrow) ; 
 to pluck out or off (as hair, 
 wool). 
 
 5ala, i bi 6ala, it is smooth, 
 level. See preceding word. 
 
 :Bala-gara, v. i., d., to be poor, 
 lit. smooth (or bare) dry, 
 bare and dry : gara or kara 
 
 dry, q.v. 
 
 II. fiala, V. i., often pronounced 
 6ela, d. iola to incline to ; be 
 close to : i Jala nakasu in- 
 clines and keeps close to a 
 tree (hiding), 6ala sa inclines 
 and keeps close to it, 6ala-afi 
 nafanua hugs the land (a 
 ship), (see af ia) ; 6ala is close 
 
bala] 
 
 to (as a man to a tree, or one 
 board to another), hence to be 
 stuck and inclining from side 
 to side to get through (as a 
 man in the vines of the 
 jungle, or in any confined 
 place, as a narrow door ; a 
 bone in the throat, or the 
 branches of a fallen tree in 
 those of another) ; ftala-tagoto, 
 or 6ala-goto incline across, 
 hence cross, a., as nakasu fiala- 
 tagoto (see goto) a cross beam, 
 or cross stick, hence fala a 
 ship's yards (because they are 
 fixed across or on the mast), 
 and sticks fastened across or 
 on a tree for a ladder to climb 
 it are called fala, or balafala, 
 and 6ala-galu (see galu) is the 
 upper cross board at the 
 end of a canoe ; fala also 
 denotes a litter, so called be- 
 cause the sticks forming it are 
 fastened across or upon each 
 other. [Sa. pilia to be en- 
 tangled (as one tree falling 
 against another, &c.), pilipili 
 be near, pipili a cripple. Ma. 
 piri, to stick, come close, keep 
 close, skulk, hide oneself, 
 pipiri come to close quarters, 
 join battle. Ha. pili to cleave 
 to (as to a friend).] A. mala, 
 n. a. mayl' to incline, incline 
 to, bend or lean to (some- 
 thing) ; to be close or near 
 to ; to have a part of the 
 body (vitio naturae) inclined 
 or bent to one side (used also 
 of a building leaning to one 
 side) ; 3, make a hostile 
 incursion. Nm. miel, v. i., 
 slant, deviate, incline (to- 
 
 29 [baha. 
 
 wards), mail (gerund) slope, 
 inclination, propensity. 
 III. 5ala, s., the belly, usually 
 pronounced 6ele, q.v. ; 6alau, 
 for 6ala am' (like uateau for 
 d. uateam'), the inside of a 
 man, or of anything (hollow or 
 womb of the am', abdomen), 
 6aloa (ending a) a hollow, a 
 valley, 6alua a hollow or hole 
 in a rock, falea a cave, 6ala- 
 kutu na the hollow at the 
 back of the head (lit. the 
 hollow of his kutu, q.v.), 6alo- 
 leba the stomach (lit. the big- 
 hollow), 6ile na, or 6ele na his 
 mother (lit. his womb, th& 
 .womb that bore him), na felak 
 a family, tribe, bela-ki, to 
 gird (oneself), to tie or fasten 
 under one's girdle or belly, to 
 take with one, to conceive 
 (o woman), tela source. [Ma. 
 wharua, a,, concave, s., valley, 
 whawharua, s., mother, whare 
 a house, people of a house^ 
 wharetangata connection by 
 marriage, Tah. fare a house, 
 farefare, a., hollow, as the 
 stomach for want of food.] 
 H. beten the belly, the womb, 
 the inside, the womb, mother, 
 batan properly to be empty, 
 hollow, vain, i.q. batal (see 
 6alo infra), A. batn' belly, in- 
 side or middle of anything, pi. 
 connections by marriage, a 
 tribe (small), batana to have 
 the belly distended with food, 
 to be intimate and familiar, 
 to be hid, 4, to fasten the 
 girth under the belly (of a 
 beast of burden), to cover, 
 hide, 5, to put a thing under 
 
BALAF Ia] 
 
 one's belly, S. btan to con- 
 ceive, have in the womb, A. 
 batuna to have a great belly. 
 
 £alaf ia, v. t., incline to keeping 
 near to : ala li., and af ia. 
 
 jBalagote fia, v. t., incline (or 
 bend) across it : bala, ii., and 
 goto, or koto. 
 
 ^alafis ia, v. t., hug (as a ship 
 hugging the coast) : Jala ll., 
 and afis ia. 
 
 Balaga tia, v. c, to lift up (as 
 the cover from anytliing) : 
 laga tia. 
 
 Balaga-saki nia, v. c, lift up, 
 stripping off (as the husk of 
 reeds) : preceding word, and t. 
 ending saki. Hence 
 
 Malaga na, s., husk, scale, or 
 similar thing that is or may 
 be lifted up from what it 
 covers or encloses : syn. laga- 
 laga na. 
 
 Balatalk sa, v., to be entangled 
 (as one tree falling against 
 another). [Sa. pilia, id.] 
 The radical idea is seen in 
 bala. to be entangled or stuck 
 in the throat (a bone) ; the 
 bone inclines to one side and 
 so sticks. See 6ala il. 
 
 Balafala, s. See fala, s. 
 
 .Salas, c. art. naSalas, i.e., na,ha. 
 las big hollow ; nabua naSalas 
 the road of the big hollow or 
 gorge behind Utaon. 
 
 .Salau na, s., the belly, inside ; 
 inside, middle of anything : 
 6ala III., and au for arao : 
 6alau is, lit., the hollow or 
 middle or inside of the belly. 
 
 ^alaus ia, v. t., to go through or 
 along a thing lengthwise, not 
 to go across it (ftalagote fia) : 
 
 30 [balo 
 
 6ala II., and us ia to follow, 
 go through or along (as a 
 road, <fec.) 
 
 5alea, s., d. for 5aloa, valley : 
 6ala III., and a. ending a. 
 
 5ale6alea, and 6ele6elea, full of 
 hollows, bellied, large : 6ala 
 III., and a. ending a. [Ha. 
 pele, to have a large belly ; to 
 be large.] 
 
 Bale sia, v. t., d., to husk, strip 
 off (as the envelope of sugar 
 cane) ; and 
 
 Bala-saki, v. t., id. A. wafala 
 to decorticate. 
 
 Bali, V. i., to fast ; 
 
 Bali ki, v. t., to fast from (a 
 thing) ; 
 
 Balifali, v. i., to fast (many 
 people). [Mg. fady, id.] A. 
 'abala, or 'abila, to abstain ; 
 to be devoted to the worship of 
 God, 2, to mourn (the dead). 
 
 Balikau ia, v. t., to go or step 
 over : ba to go, and likau or 
 lakau, q.v. 
 
 Ba.\o, v. i., a., ad., to be empty, 
 vain, null and void, to no 
 purpose or effect : i 6alo it is 
 empty, nasuma 6alo an empty 
 house, lo or te 6alo an empty, 
 i.e., a worthless thing, a trifle, 
 nothing, i toko 6alo he remains 
 in vain, to no purpose, for 
 nothing, idle ; d. mole ; hence 
 sera te 6alo, or sera te mole, 
 to deem worthless, vain, to 
 despise. [Fi. wale uselessly, 
 for nothing, idly. Ha. wale, 
 Sa. vale.] A. batala, n. a. 
 butr, or botr to be vain, 
 nothing, to no end or purpose, 
 in vain, for nothing, idle, H. 
 batal to be empty, vacant, 
 
BALO] 
 
 idle (cognate bat an, 6ala iii.), 
 E. batala to be empty, vain. 
 
 Bale, prep, or ad., d., above, up : 
 see (b') bi, prep., and ulua, v. 
 [Malo aulu (a, prep. " on "), 
 Eut. weiluga (see elag, infra). 
 Ha. maluna above, up (ma, 
 prep., and luna).] Amh. 
 balai above, and exactly as 
 Ef. balo ki (above to), balai 
 ka, as above his house, or 
 ahove anything : the prep, ba, 
 E. ba, on, and lai the upper 
 part, high, A. 'alu, 'alo, upper 
 part. 
 
 Note. — Compound preps, or 
 ads. of this kind consist of a 
 preposition prefixed to another 
 word, which may be an ad. , s., or 
 a. used substantively (as Eng- 
 lish above, aboard, around, i.e., 
 ■on-bove, on-board, on-round) : 
 thus Ef. elag, d. balo, Sa. 
 iluga, Ha. maluna, Malo aulu, 
 Amharic balai, above, on high, 
 on the uppersideorpart,all con- 
 sist of the preps, e, i, or a, q.v., 
 or bi, b' or ma, mi, q.v., and a 
 word signifying high, up, or 
 the upper part and side, for 
 which see ulua, elag, lua, laga, 
 infra. 
 
 Balo nia, v. t., dd. balo sia, or 
 bilo sia, bulo sia, bulu gia, 
 bunu lia bulu nia, bano lia, to 
 wash (anything) to wash (by 
 rubbing) : fafano, or bafano, 
 q.v., to wash the hands. [Sa. 
 fufulu to rub, to wash, My, 
 basuh to wash.] A. masa n. a. 
 maus' to wash ; to rub with 
 the hand. 
 
 .^aloa, s., c. art. naialoa, a 
 valley, lit. what is hollow or 
 
 31 [balu-sa 
 
 concave, -a being the a. ending. 
 [Ma. wharua, a., concave, s. 
 valley.] See bala, iii. 
 
 Saloleba, s., the stomach : 6alo 
 cavity. See 6ala iii., and 
 leba, laba, big. 
 
 Balotu, V. i., d., to go there, 
 or thither (away from the 
 speaker), dd. banotu, blnotS, 
 binats, net, to set out, go 
 away (from the speaker), hence 
 a common word of farewell to 
 one departing is Ku balotu 
 you are going away, to which 
 the one departing replies Ku 
 mato you remain. See banotu. 
 
 5alua, s., a hole or hollow in a 
 rock : see 6ala iii. 
 
 Balu-saki, v. t., to paddle (a 
 canoe), row (a boat) ; 
 
 Balu-sa, v., to paddle, row, balu- 
 sa, sa paddle or row with it (a 
 paddle or oar). [Epi dd. 
 mbeluo ka, mbahua kin, v. t.. 
 An. aheled (aheleth) to paddle, 
 to row, to sail. Am. fuloh to 
 paddle, Fi. ai voce an oar, voce 
 to paddle, to row, voce-taka, 
 v. t. (= balu-saki). Pa. palusa. 
 Ml. d. masu, Ml. A. sua, Malo 
 mo sua, Ta. asua, Put. sua, 
 Mg. voy, act of rowing, mivoy 
 to row, voizina rowed, fivoy 
 an oar. My. d"ayung an oar, 
 d'ayung, bftrd-ayung to row.] 
 
 Note. — Balu-saki is the 
 same as voce-taka (pronounced 
 vothe-taka) the saki or taka 
 being the transitive terminal 
 tion, i.e., the prep, connecting 
 the verb with its object, and 
 consisting of two preps, com- 
 bined, sa or ta and ki or ka. 
 The first of these preps, is seen 
 
balu-sa] 
 
 in the d (th) of aheled, and in 
 the z or zi of voizina, and sa 
 of palusa. The verb "to 
 row" is balu, voce (vothe), 
 (m)beluo, (m)bahua, voy, masu, 
 and -without the preformative 
 b' (v'j m',) asua, sua, d-ayung, 
 and the 1 in balu, c (th) in 
 voce, h in mbahua, s in sua, 
 d in d'ayung, all are varia- 
 tions of the same original 
 consonant which is elided in 
 voy. The word for "oar," ai 
 voce, fivoy, is in Ef. uose, d. 
 uohe (wose, wohe), Fut. foi. 
 In Fut. the connection be- 
 tween sua to paddle and foi 
 an oar or paddle is not so 
 apparent as that between Ml. 
 P. su to paddle, and bos a 
 paddle, because in foi, as in 
 voy (=: Fi. voce) the s has 
 been elided ; and the con- 
 nection between Ef. balu to 
 paddle and uose a paddle is 
 not so apparent as that be- 
 ween Epi mbahua to paddle, 
 and voho a paddle, Epi d. 
 bahua to paddle, boho a 
 paddle. See uose, infra. A. 
 jadafa, or gadafa, liadafa (or 
 'athafa), Amharic kazat (or 
 'azaf), to propel with oars, 
 to row, Mod. A. kaddaf, or 
 'addaf, part, mo'addif (anc. 
 mo'addif, or mo'azzif, cf. voce 
 (vothe), bose, uose, voy, foi). 
 Sua is without the preforma- 
 tive, cf. 'azaf a, 'addaf : balu 
 seems to have the same prefix 
 as Sa. pale to r'ow, without 
 which is Sa. alo (ps. alofia), 
 and alofa'i to paddle, row, and 
 with another verb, Sa. taualo. 
 
 32 [ban- 
 
 to row, to keep on rowing. 
 As to the prefix in balu com- 
 pare that in batok, batu, q.v. 
 
 Balu na, or ftalu na, s., relative, 
 friend ; a brother's brother, 
 or sister's sister. A. ma'lai 
 helper, relative, friend, asso- 
 ciate, walai to be closely re- 
 lated, to be a friend, helper. 
 
 5alu-naki, v. t., to be a balu to 
 a brother or to a sister. 
 
 .Salu gor ia, v. t., help, befriend, 
 take the part of. See gor ia. 
 
 jBaluk, s., c, art. naSaluk, an in- 
 let or small bay, a cul de sac : 
 6a, and luku. 
 
 Bamasok6 sa, v. t., come upon, 
 find : ba go, and masoko, q.v. 
 
 Bamau ria, v. t., d. bamau sa, 
 come upon, find it; ba go, and 
 mau (sa), q. v. 
 
 Bamau, v., to reach to, or term- 
 inate at, as i bamau nalia uane 
 it reaches to, or stops or term- 
 inates at, that place ; hence, 
 absolute, i bamau it terminates, 
 stops, or ceases : ba go, and 
 mau, q. v. 
 
 Bamu na, s., the shoulder blade, 
 shoulder, d. bau na. [Tah. 
 papa the shoulder blade]. See 
 6a6a a board. 
 
 Bamu ua, s., d. for babu na, q. v. 
 
 Ban, v., d. for man ; ani, q. v., 
 c. preformative m. 
 
 Ban, V. i., for bano. 
 
 Ban, s., and baniben, s., armlet, 
 worn between the elbow and 
 the shoulder, and woven so 
 that the outer surface consists 
 of different coloured beads 
 (carved out of shells) arranged 
 in regular figures. [Male ban, 
 Epi beni]. Der. uncertain. 
 
BANi] 
 
 Bani, v., to act violently, to 
 oppress, as ru bani kiena they 
 violently destroy or take away 
 a nian's property (at his house 
 or plantation), as in time of 
 vfar, or as a punishment for 
 crime; baniban us ia follow 
 him, acting oppressively, per- 
 secute him. H. yanah to act 
 violently, to oppress : bani has 
 the preformative as in batoko, 
 balu, &c. 
 
 Banako, v. t., dd. binako, bunak, 
 to steal, banak6 sa, and banak 
 ia, d. bunako n', steal it. [Ma. 
 whanako, whenako, Fi. butako, 
 Ero. prok, Ml. fenake, My. 
 cholong, Ja. liolong, Mg. 
 halatra c. pref. mangalatra, 
 id.] A. saraka, n. a. sarli', 
 Mahri heriq, heliq, and desoq, 
 to steal. Ef., Fi., and Er., 
 &c., have the pref. 
 
 .Banaga, s., itiats, d. banu ; so 
 called because they are plaited, 
 see bau. [Fi. ibi, Epiyembi.] 
 
 Banei, v.i., to come here (to the 
 speaker) ; same meaning as 
 banimai, or bano-mai. [Ml. 
 P. vine, id.] 
 
 Banei, s., d. bane, volcano : see 
 bani a, v. t. [Pa. banei id.] 
 
 Bani a, or ban ia, v. t,, to burn ; 
 to roast, to cook by roasting 
 on the fire; ben or fen cooked 
 or roasted. The n is not 
 radical: dd. beni a, banu sa, 
 whence banus. See banei ; 
 and dd. ubu, upu, of (ov), urn, 
 ua (uwa), oven (cooking), fire- 
 place. [Sa. faafana, to warm 
 up food, matanafana, to be 
 warm. To. mafana, heat, 
 warmth, Ma^ mahana, warm, 
 
 33 [J3AN0MAI 
 
 Ta. mahana, warm, the sun, a 
 day, Fi. vavi-a to bake. My. 
 bu to roast, grill, broil, Ja. 
 panas hot, warm, panaskan 
 to heat, Mg. fana, voafana, 
 warm (applied to food cooked 
 and warmed the second time), 
 mafana, mafanafana, warm, 
 hafanana, s., heat, manafana 
 and mahafanafana, v. t., to 
 heat, mihafana, v. i., to be hot, 
 grow hot ; and Mg. memy, 
 Sa. umu, oven.] H. afah, to 
 cook, to bake, specially bread 
 or cake in an oven (Ch., S. 
 id.)", A. wafa', whence mifa', an 
 oven, Mod. S. yafyana, a baker. 
 
 Banimai, v. i., to come here (to 
 the speaker), opp. to banotu 
 go there (away from the 
 speaker) : see banomai. [Epi 
 mbinime.] 
 
 Bano lia, d. balo sia, v. t., d. for 
 balo nia. 
 
 Bano, V. i., to go, go ofif, or 
 away. [Malo vano, Epi mbano, 
 mbene, Meli fano, Fut. fano, 
 Ta. uven. An. apan.] The 
 verb ban or bano is composed 
 of ba to go, and an adverbial 
 sufiix or directive, for which 
 see under banotu. 
 
 BanOmai, banamai, or banimai, 
 V. i., to come here or hither, 
 dd. ba be, umai, mai, be : bano 
 mai, or without the suiBx nij, 
 ni, ba, be ; with ba corrupted 
 to u, umai ; and, without bano 
 (or ba), mai, d., or be, d., as 
 a verb in the sense of the full 
 expression, bano-mai, or ba-be. 
 See ba, bano, supra ; and 
 under the following word. 
 [Meli fano mai.] 
 
 4 
 
BANOTU] 
 
 Banotu, sometimes pronounced 
 balotu, V. i., to go away (in a 
 direction from the speaker), to 
 go there or thither, dd. binoti, 
 banats, binats, and notu, net : 
 ba to go, and notu there 
 or thither. Notu, or net, 
 originally an ad. has come to 
 be used in some dialects for 
 the full expression, as a verb. 
 See the similar remark as to 
 mai, or be, under the preceding 
 word. 
 
 Note on the particles mai, 
 d. be (in banomai, babe), 
 notu (in banotu), and 'no (in 
 bano) : — 
 
 1. Mai, or be, coming 
 after a verb is an ad. or 
 " directive " signifying here, 
 hither. [So in Fi., Sa., Ha., 
 Tah., To., Ma. (My. mari).] 
 Coming before a verb in 
 Fi. it signifies to come, as 
 au sa mai kauta I have 
 come to take ; so in Ef . a 
 mai buati I have come to 
 take, i.e., I (am) here to take: 
 in two Ef. dd. a mui, a be, I 
 have come, or I (am) here ; as 
 " to come " is always expressed 
 in other Ef. dd. by banomai, 
 or babe, mai or be in those 
 two dd. may be regarded as a 
 mere abbreviation of bano- 
 mai, babe. So Mg. avy and 
 My. mari are also used as 
 verbs signifying to come. 
 Before a noun or the ad. 
 " where " mai signifies from in 
 Fi., Sa., Ha., To. (mei, or me), 
 Ef. (bai, ba, be), and Mg. 
 (avy), thus Fi. maivei ? Sa. 
 maifea 1 Tah. mai hea ? To. 
 
 34 [banotu 
 
 meife ? or mefe 1 Ef. ba se ? 
 bai se ? or be sabe 1 Mg. avy 
 aiza 1 from where ? whence ? 
 The Mg. and Ef. are verbs — i ba 
 se ? avy aiza izy? he comes 
 from where ? In the other 
 cases the mai, as in mai hea ? 
 is called a prep. Ef. i ba, or 
 bai se? is, literally, he (is) 
 hither (from) where ? and in 
 one dialect the prep, ki = from 
 is expressed as i ba ki e ? 
 he (is) here (or hither) from 
 where 1 In Fi. mai is also a 
 prep, signifying in, at. The 
 radical meaning of this par- 
 ticle is here or hither, and it 
 is an ad. consisting of the 
 prep, ma or ba (Ha. ma in, 
 at, to, ifeo. ) in, to, and the 
 dem. i or 'i, this (place), here, 
 hence mai, bai in or to this 
 (place), here or hither. See 
 Ef. d. i this, here ; and the 
 prep., in Ha. and Ma. ma, Fi. 
 vei, Mg. amy, under the word 
 bi (d. mi) ivfra. H. bazeh 
 in this (place), here, Amh. 
 bazih, and with the z elided 
 (bayh, or baih), here, lit. in 
 this (place), and with the 
 pron. 3 sing, instead of zch. 
 Mahri boh here, H. poh here, 
 lit., in this place. 
 
 2. Notu, or lotu (nats, nat, 
 net) like mai in two dialects 
 has come to be used as a verb 
 (notu, net) with the same 
 meaning as banotu for which 
 it is used, as mai and be for 
 banomai, babe, for the sake 
 of brevity ; and like mai it is 
 a compound ad., consisting of 
 the prep, ni, or n' to (or ani, 
 
BANU] 
 
 q.v.), as to ■which seeni, infra, 
 and a dem., that, yon (place), 
 there, yonder, and signifying 
 to that or yon (place), thither. 
 3. The no, or 'no, in bano, 
 is the same as the no in notu, 
 but without the tu, i.e., it is the 
 prep, n', and o, dem. The dif- 
 ference between notu and no, 
 or rather between banotu and 
 bano, is slight, banotu being 
 simply a strengthened bano. 
 The difference between bano 
 or bani in banomai, or bani- 
 mai, and bano in banotu seems 
 to be that in the former banQ 
 or bani or banS the dem. after 
 the prep, n' is wanting, thus 
 banimai go to here, banotu go 
 to there. T. nyo to there, 
 thither. Matt. ii. 22, nye, id.. 
 Matt. xvii. 20, xxiv. 28, xxvi. 
 36. Amh. with the prep, 
 wada, to, instead of n6 (i.e., 
 originally E. la, A. li, to, 
 cf. balotu), wadaziya, and 
 (z elided) wadiya to there, 
 thither. The tu in banotu is 
 dem., as in My. itu, that, situ, 
 there, TaSa. natu and atu, 
 that, E. uetu, that, H. zektu, 
 that. 
 Banu, s., d. ianaga, q.v. 
 Banu sa, and banus. See bani a 
 
 to roast. 
 Bao, V. i., d. for ma, man, ba, ban, 
 
 bon. See ani, v. i. 
 Baofa, s., d., menstruation, i 
 su baofa meamea (said of a 
 woman menstruating while 
 still suckling a child) : 6afa. 
 Bara, v, i., to be burned (as food 
 in cooking) : see buria, d. 
 bouria, or bauria, ta6ara. [Ma. 
 
 35 [bare 
 
 wera burnt, hot, s., heat, pa- 
 wera hot, Sa. vevela to be 
 hot, ps. velasia, vela, done, 
 well cooked, My. parik, marak, 
 to kindle, set on fire.] H. 
 ba'ar (Ch. bS'ar to burn, Pael 
 to kindle), to burn up, to 
 kindle, to be burned. 
 
 Bara, v. i., or a., to be barren, 
 d. oro. E. 'abara to be 
 barren, 'ebur bairen. 
 
 Barab, v. i., or a., long, high (as 
 a hill). [Malo barauo, Fi. 
 balavu. Ml. U. periv, long, 
 also wide.] Ef, dd. baraf, 
 baram, barau, birerife (see 
 laba, leba), prop, extended, 
 cf. Ml. U. 
 
 Baraf, d. barab. 
 
 Baragai, d., transposed for baga- 
 rai. 
 
 Bara tia, v. t., to beat. [Fi. 
 waro-ca, My. palu, Ja. pala, 
 Mg. vely.] A. wabala to 
 beat. 
 
 Bara tia, v. t., to bind together. 
 My. barot to gird, to bind 
 round.] H. liibar to connect, 
 join together. See farati, in- 
 fra. 
 
 Baram, d. barab. 
 
 Bara- tuna, s., d. for bura. 
 
 Barau, d. barab. 
 
 Barau, v. i., to reproach, speak 
 loudly reproaching. See rau. 
 
 Bar6, V. i., to be moved, move 
 about, bare ki, v. t., to move, 
 agitate, barefare ki, id. A. 
 farSfara to move, agitate. 
 
 Bare, or barea, v. i , or a., d. 
 uorea, or orea, to be blind (a 
 man), to have a white speck 
 (of an eye whose sight is lost), 
 to be dirty looking, like a 
 
BARETAU] 
 
 sightless eye (of half-raw food). 
 [Ml. A. bar, U. oror, Epi 
 mbili.] H. 'avar, E. 'awir, to 
 be blind. 
 
 Baretau, a., black and white 
 spotted (as a pig), also a yam 
 that has been peeled, or a tree 
 that has been barked, i bi 
 baretau : tau white, and bare, 
 for which see the following 
 word. 
 
 Barea, or borea, d., x. i., or a., 
 black, dirty coloured. [My. 
 biru blue, TaSa. berika black.] 
 A. 'a'faru dust-coloured. 
 
 Saro, V. i., or a., to be heed- 
 less, taliga ha.ro deaf, d. na 
 6aro one deaf, haroharo to be 
 heedless, indifferent, taiaro 
 to be heedless, refractory, 
 lawless, barua free from, as 
 i tumana bisa barua ki nia 
 he declares himself free from 
 it (as a crime), marua to 
 cease, leave off, lo barua kin ia 
 see the nakedness of someone, 
 literally, or as to his poverty 
 or being devoid of food, ifec. 
 See baror, btira. H. para' to 
 loose, let go, make naked, 
 paru'a lawless, unbridled, A. 
 fara"a to empty, leave off, be 
 free from (as free from cares 
 or labour, careless, idle), 5, 
 tafarra"a to be idle. 
 
 Ba,ro, c. art. najaro, s., one deaf. 
 
 Bare sia, or baru sia, v. t. This 
 verb was used thus in the old 
 days : to fell a big tree they 
 burned round the base of it, 
 then ru baru si, or baru lu 
 namalitera, that is, smashed, 
 broke, shaved, chipped, cut, or 
 scraped off the charred wood ; 
 
 36 [barua 
 
 then burned the new exposed 
 surface again, smashed or cut 
 off (with the karau tare) the 
 charred parts again, and so on 
 till the tree fell. On E. Mai 
 barusi naniu = Ef. koi naniu 
 (see koi). Tea farofaro that 
 which cuts, shaves, rasps off, 
 barobaroa (a. ending -a) fit for 
 rasping off (as sandpaper or a 
 grindstone). [Fi. varo-ta to 
 file, saw, or rasp, Sa. valu 
 scrape out nuts (:=Ef. koi), to 
 scrape (as taro), ps. valua, Ma. 
 waru to scrape, shave, cut (the 
 hair), Ha. walu to scratch, 
 rub, rasp, polish, Tah. varu to 
 shave, to bark a tree, to scrape. 
 My. paras to shave, to pare close 
 to the surface, Mg. fara scrape, 
 scratch, make smooth.] H. 
 bara to cut out, carve out, &c., 
 A. bara' to cut out, to cut or 
 pare down, to plane and polish. 
 (As to the notion of breaking, 
 cutting, separating, which is 
 inherent in the radical syllable 
 H. par, see under H. parad 
 (Ges. Diet.) The same is 
 found in the somewhat softened 
 syllable bar, A. and H.) 
 
 Baroaki, d. See boroaki. 
 
 Barobaroa, a. See under baro 
 sia. 
 
 Baror, s., one careless, heedless, 
 lawless, wicked, foolish. See 
 6aro. 
 
 5aro&aro, v. i., or a. See under 
 6aro. 
 
 Barua, v. i., or a., made naked, 
 devoid of, clear or free from. 
 See 6aro. 
 
 Barua, or uarua, v. i., or a., fat, 
 big, large. [Mg. baribary, 
 
barubardta] 
 
 bary, large, full, well made, 
 Fi. vora to grow fat or stout.] 
 H. bara', to grow fat, bari' 
 fat, A. wara' to be fat. 
 Barubaruta, a., fat ; ending -ta : 
 
 barua. 
 Barubarutena, a., fat ; ending 
 
 -tena: barna. 
 Ba-si a, v., go upon, tread upon, 
 basi namatuna tread upon 
 something: ba to go, and 
 t. ending si. [Fi. va-ca.] 
 Basa, to speak. See bisa. 
 .Base a, v. t., to break off (as a 
 branch from a tree), to break 
 off with a snap or jerk, 6asu, 
 id., mafasu d. moas (mow&s) 
 broken off, 6ase-raki, takes a 
 different object, as fease nara 
 nakasu break off the branch of 
 a tree, base-raki na-usu break 
 off from a reed (the husk or 
 covering, so as to make it 
 bare), &ase6ase raki nia, id., 
 6asu li a, t. ending li, to 
 detach, break off, tafeasuli de- 
 tached, broken off, separated. 
 [Pi. basu-ka, or -raka, to 
 break, also to open one's eyes 
 or mouth, basi-a, nearly syn. 
 c. basu-ka. Sa. fati to break 
 off, ps. fatia.] A. fas's'a to 
 break off, fassa detach, shiver 
 off, H. pasah, q.v., to distend, 
 open (the lips), A. fasa' to 
 separate, detach (as flesh from 
 a bone). 
 Basea, v. t., c. verb, suf., scold, 
 vituperate, rail at, d. syn. suer 
 ia : bakabasea, id. A. nabaza 
 to reproach, blame, rail at. 
 Basiu, s., a bone piercer. See siu. 
 Baso ia, v. t., to pierce. See sui. 
 [Fi. veso-ka and sua-ka.] 
 
 37 [batu 
 
 Bastak, v., d. for bataka : basi, 
 taka. 
 
 Bastufi, V. t., d., to follow, to be 
 like : basi, and tufi. A. tabi'a 
 to follow. 
 
 ^asu li. See &as6 a. 
 
 Bataka na, v. t., to be like, 
 equal to, sufficient for (bastufi 
 and mautaka nearly syn.): Vta 
 to go, and taka like, similar 
 to. 
 
 i?atako na, or batoko na, s., the 
 body, d. mole na. [Ta. buti. 
 My. batang, Mg. vatana.] A. 
 badano the body. 
 
 Bate, v., d. for batu. 
 
 Batg, num., four. [Mg. efatra. 
 My. ampat, Sa. fa.] A. ar- 
 ba'ai', four. 
 
 Bati na, s., the teeth, a tooth, 
 also a shoot (of banana or 
 taro), a seed. [Fi. bati.] See 
 nabati na. 
 
 Bati-gat, and d. bati-gaut, s., a 
 thorny plant, with crooked, 
 grasping thorns, like hooks : 
 for gaut, see under gau, tagau. 
 
 Bati-rik, s., mosquito : bati, and 
 rik, q.v. 
 
 Bat ia, or bati a, v. t., to do, 
 make, work at. [My. buat, 
 or buwat, to do.] S. 'bad, to 
 do, to work, work at, make. 
 
 ^atlk, d. uarik, v. i., or a., few, 
 to be few. See tik or rik. 
 
 Batira, s., precipice, rugged de- 
 clivity : 
 
 Batibatira, a., rugged and pre- 
 cipitous : bati teeth, and end- 
 ing ra : nabatira, that which is 
 rugged (as a precipice), syn. 
 na tiroa. 
 
 Batok. V. i., d., to remain : toko. 
 Batu, V. i., d., to remain : tu. 
 
BATU] 
 
 5atu, s., na 6atu, an adult, 
 young man. A. fatiy' adult, 
 fata' young man. 
 
 Batu, v., d. bate, to close up the 
 roof at the ridge-pole -with 
 reeds : na fatu the ridge-pole. 
 [Epi bofugo, v., id.] See fatu, 
 s.,andbau. A. "am a' to cover 
 a house, that is, its upper roof, 
 as with reeds. 
 
 Batua na, s., the knee : prob. 
 bau (q. V.) the head, and tua 
 leg. [Ml. A. lua leg, mbulua 
 knee. Ml. P. and Malo bau 
 knee.] 
 
 Batua ki, v. t., to go from (any 
 thing or persou) : ba to go, 
 and tua ki to place, lay down : 
 lit. go laying down or leaving. 
 
 Bau na, s., d. for bauiu na, q.v. 
 
 Bau, s., one slain. [Ha. po, 
 slain, lost, hidden]. See s. bog. 
 
 Bau na, s., the head ; a head or 
 chief, specially, d., maternal 
 uncle, that is, head of the 
 family. [Malo batu, San Oris- 
 toval bau, head ; Tah. fau a, 
 kind of head dress, a god, as 
 being head or above, a king 
 or principal chief, as being 
 above others.] A. hamaiu the 
 head : the head and chief of 
 a tribe or family, 
 under bau sia and mau 
 
 Bau lulu, s., a proud person, lit. 
 high head : lu. 
 
 Baua, or uaua (waua), s., a pillow: 
 preceding word and ending -a : 
 also, v., to pillow one's head. 
 
 Bau-maso na, s., portion of the 
 property of one deceased in- 
 herited by a member of the 
 family : bau, and maso, q.v. 
 Eor bau see s. bau sia. 
 
 38 [bau 
 
 See egg. 
 
 Bau, V. t., to be above, cover, 
 surpass, i bau gor ia. See 
 tabau : 
 
 Bau sia, or fau sia, v. t., to 
 fasten together ; to plait (a 
 mat ) ; bau rarua fasten to- 
 gether (the parts of) a canoe ; 
 bau uago fasten a pig to the 
 carrying pole : ora naui i bau 
 the yam vine fastens on or 
 round the stake ; redup. bau- 
 fau ; bau-maso (maso a portion) 
 the portion collected or fastened 
 or gathered together, bau-terag 
 ia fasten — to dry it (as wet 
 cloth), i.e., fasten it on some- 
 thing in the sun or before a 
 fire. [Sa. fau (Ma. hou) tie 
 together, fasten by tying, ps. 
 fausia, To. fau fillet round the 
 head, turban, Fut. fausia to 
 fasten, tie, Fi. vau-ca to bind 
 together, Sa. fau-la'i to be 
 heaped up, to abound, My. 
 ubung to join, connect, ifcc.] 
 See mau. H. 'amam to gather 
 together, to collect, to join to- 
 gether, A. 'amma to put on 
 the head a fillet, to be a chief, 
 to be an uncle, "amma to 
 cover, to fasten (a caviel), H. 
 'amam to cover, hide, fig. to 
 surpas-s, A. "amma, 4, to dip, 
 &c. 
 
 Bau gor ia, v. t., to cover over : 
 tabau sa to be above (as 
 covering a thing), to be over, 
 surpass him (in dignity or 
 rank). See under preceding 
 word for bau. 
 
 Bau or fau, bao or fao, v. i., or 
 a., new. [Malo baro, Ml. 
 mermer, Motu matamata, My. 
 baharu, Sa. fou, Fi. vovou, vou, 
 
BA.UH a] 
 
 Mg. vao (havaozana) new.] 
 A. maliduth, part, of liadatha 
 to be new, new. H. liadas', 
 S. lidath, id., E. hadas, to 
 renew. 
 
 Bauli a, v. c, to buy by exchang- 
 ing ; 
 
 Baulu, or faulu, s., the thing 
 given in exchange wherewith 
 to purchase something, barter 
 (wherewith to buy by ex- 
 changing). See aul ia, ul ia. 
 
 Bau-ragia, or bau-teragia. 8ee 
 bau sia. 
 
 Baus ia, and bausus ia, v. t., to 
 ask him (or her), bausus ia sa, 
 ask him it (or about it) : 
 
 Bausu ki, to inquire about (a 
 thing), bausu baki to inquire 
 at (a person), to ask, to ques- 
 tion (a person). See us ia. 
 
 Bauria, d. for buria, q.v. See 
 bara. 
 
 Bea, (kbe, or bwe), s. See naJea. 
 
 Be, d. mai, ad., here, hither ; d. 
 to come here, like mai, q.v. ; 
 also d. for ba, bai, to come or 
 go from, as i be sab mai ? he 
 comes from where hither ? 
 
 Be emia, v. t., to have it, i be 
 nalo he has a thing, d. i 
 bienia he has it: bienia, bi enia. 
 
 Be, or bea, dd. bei, mia (tiamia), 
 V. i., or a., to precede, go 
 before, be first, tirst. [Sa. 
 mua, and mua'i first, muamua 
 to go before, first, Lakon mo, 
 Volow mag, Arag moana first, 
 Fi. mada to precede.] A. 
 fuhai mouth, entrance (as of 
 a river), hence the first or 
 foremost part of anything, 
 Amh. pat, or fat, fore-part, 
 and c. a. ending fatanga first. 
 
 39 [bei 
 
 Be, d., a particle used after 
 interrogatives, then, now, thus 
 ua be ? sa be (sab) ? where 
 then 1 takani aga bat ia be I 
 how shall I do it then (or 
 now). In other dialects it is 
 not used. H. 'epu' then, now, 
 as ayeh 'epo' where then ? eg. 
 'epoh (poh here) where? how] 
 
 Be, fS, oonj., if, should; ku fS 
 bano i fe uia should you go it 
 were well, i b6 fano i b§ uia 
 should (or if) he go it were 
 well. [Ta. ip, Fut. pe, if.] 
 Amh. ba, be, if, should (re- 
 peated in each clause as in 
 £f., Isenberg's Gr., pp. 158-9). 
 
 Be a, or fe a, redup. befe, v. t , 
 to read, also to count. E. 
 nabab to speak, recite, read, 
 eg. H. naba' to prophesy (A. 
 naba' to declare), from naba'. 
 Hi. hibi'a to tell. 
 
 Be, or bea, redup. bebea, v. i., 
 or a., to be great, wide ex- 
 tended. [Mg. be great, large, 
 Mota poa, Gao bio.] E. 'abya, 
 or 'abia to be great, wide, ex- 
 tended, 'abiy great, large. 
 
 Bega, d. baga, q.v., a hill. 
 
 Beiki, or bai ki, d. bi ki, v. t., to 
 show : d. syn. bisai ki. A. 
 baha to appear, be shown, 
 manifest, show, divulge, in- 
 dicate ; hence 
 
 Beifei ki, make manifest, in- 
 dicate. 
 
 Bei, v., bei ki to watch for (as 
 for an animal to take or kill 
 it) ; d. bu to see, look at. A. 
 ba"a (ba"ai) to watch, observe, 
 look at, look out for, rush 
 upon (the prey) from an am- 
 bush, seek, &c. 
 
BEl] 
 
 Bei, or bai, a thing hidden, con- 
 cealed, i bi 6ei it is hidden. 
 [Mg. afina, My. buni, To. 
 fufu, Ma., Ha. huna, Fut. 
 funa, Epi mbin, Fi. vuni, 
 hidden.] Seeafa : eg. to the 
 word there given are A. "abai, 
 H. haba', A. li'aba', to hide. 
 
 Bei, d. for be, or bea, v. i., or a., 
 to precede, first. 
 
 Bei or bai, d. ba, prep, (in this 
 form as a prep., but see bai, 
 v.), used mostly after verbs, 
 connecting them with their 
 object : lo to look, lo bei a 
 look upon it, see it, d. lekba 
 (the final a is made long by 
 the absorption of the pron. of 
 the third person ) ; taruba to 
 fall, taruba bei a fall upon it, 
 d. ro to fall, ro bei a to fall 
 upon it ; an to be, to lie, an 
 bei a lie upon it ; toko sit, 
 toko bei a sit upon it ; ba to 
 go, ba 6ei a go or tread upon 
 it (for instance, upon filth in 
 the path, ba bai intai); le ba i 
 look upon it, see it, d. libi sia 
 or lebi sia (i.e., le bi sia look 
 upon it): the final i in bei or 
 bai belongs to the pronoun of 
 the third person. [Fi. vei to, 
 d. va.] E. ba, A. fi, bi, H. 
 b'. 
 
 Bei, s., na bei saki ni aliati the 
 ascending cloud of dawn, the 
 dim cloudy or misty appear- 
 ance preceding daylight at 
 dawn : d. in tei saki the rising 
 cloud. See tai ni lagi. A. 
 "amma (S. 'am) to be covered 
 with clouds, as the sky, 
 "animai dust, darkness "am- 
 ma.t' cloudy. 
 
 40 [bele 
 
 Beie, or fefe, s., oven cover 
 (made of leaves) ; a covering 
 trap (for catching fowls). [Sa. 
 veve oven cover of leaves.] 
 See (Jofia) bo. 
 
 Beigo, or baigo, s., a trumpet 
 (shell) ; d. a kind of flute 
 (cocoanut shell). [Sa. fagu- 
 fagu a flute. To. fagofago a flute 
 blown by the nose.] A. baka 
 to blow a trumpet, ba'ku, or 
 ba'ko, a trumpet. 
 
 Bela ki, v. t., to gird (oneself), 
 bela ki na tali put on one's 
 girdle or belt ; to tie or fasten 
 anything or carry anything 
 between one's girdle and the 
 lower part of the belly : hence, 
 to take with one, to have with 
 one or attached to one. See 
 bala, III. The s. is nafelaki, d. 
 nabiilai, or 6alai, what is 
 fastened or girded round the 
 loins, girdle. 
 
 Belaki, v. i., to be pregnant : 
 Aala III. 
 
 Belaki, s., c. art. nabelaki, d. 
 syn. intamate, great heathen 
 feast or series of feasts periodi- 
 cally held at every village, at 
 which there was abundaiwe of 
 food, singing, and dancing : 
 prob. so called because of the 
 abundance of food, and friendly 
 feeling : 6ala iii. 
 
 Bela, or fela, if perhaps, if in- 
 deed, conj. be, and ad. la. 
 
 Bela, V. i., to be smooth, level ; 
 bala I. 
 
 .Bela, d. for Jala ii., q.v. 
 
 Bela-tagot. See 6ala li. 
 
 Bela-galu. See 6ala ii, 
 
 .Bele, s., the dead body of a pig : 
 said to be so called because its 
 
bele] 
 
 belly swells, ii'ala ui. [Ha. 
 pele to swell out, have a large 
 belly.] 
 
 .Sele na, s., the belly (or &&la 
 na); the womb; a mother (dd. 
 syn. eri na, raite na, susu na) ; 
 a source, as 6ele ni torogo the 
 source or master of the torogo 
 (a species of divination), also 
 6ele nai (naui) kanoa the be- 
 ginning or feast of the first 
 ripe yams : 6ala ill. 
 
 Belbel, d. for bile, bilebile, q.v. 
 
 Beles, s., c. art. nebeles, a dance 
 in which the two parties keep 
 Tneetirig each other. See lasi, 
 tilasi. 
 
 Ben, or fen, a., cooked, broiled, 
 roasted : bani a. 
 
 Beni a, d. for bani a. 
 
 Ben, d. for brm. See anJ to be, 
 abide. 
 
 .Selii ki (kwelu ki), v. t., to 
 fold, to double, taAelu (tak- 
 welii) folded, doubled ; 
 
 .Belu to be doubled up, as it were 
 folded together, hence to be 
 hidden, to hide oneself, 6elu 
 ki to be hidden from, also 
 uelu ; 
 
 Beluuelu, V. i , or a., folded, 
 hence limp, doubled up, and 
 beluuelukij a., doubled up, 
 uneven, limp, limber, weak, 
 flexible. [Ha. pelu to double 
 over, bend, or flex, as a joint, 
 to fold, doubled, folded over, 
 pelupelu to double over and 
 over, doubled over, Sa. mapelu, 
 mapelupelu to bend, stoop, 
 Fi. belu-ka to bend, curve, 
 kabelu bent, Mg. valona 
 
 . folded, doubled.] H. kapal to 
 fold together, to double, part. 
 
 41 [beru 
 
 ps. doubled, Ch. liapel to 
 double, roll up, S. Ethjie. 
 'ethkfel, or etkfel, to be 
 doubled, folded together. 
 
 Bera, or fera, v. i., to crumble, 
 fall to pieces, berafera, and 
 taberafera to crumble, fall to 
 pieces, be scattered about in 
 fragments ; 
 
 Bera ki, v. t., to scatter about, 
 tabera ki. to scatter about, 
 make to fall to pieces, and 
 beraferaki, v. t., and taferafera 
 ki, V. t., na feroa, s., a crumb, 
 sabera ki, v. t., to scatter, 
 saberak, d. saberik, v. i., to 
 fall to pieces. [Fi. vuru-taka 
 to crumble, vuruvuru, v. i., to 
 crumble, and S., a crumb, 
 Mg. miveraberaka, v. i., to 
 crumble, mahavera, v. t.. My. 
 ambor scattered, tabur to be 
 scattered ; Ja. sftbar to scatter, 
 to strew. My. sibar to strew, 
 scatter.] E. farfur a crumb, 
 Talmud parpor from H. pur 
 to break, Pilpel pirper to break 
 in pieces : " this is the original 
 power of the biliteral par," 
 Ges., s. V. parad, then applied 
 to scattei'ing, <fec. 
 
 Bera gia, v. t., d, birigia, q.v. 
 
 Bera kati a, d. bera tia, bera tiki 
 nia, v. used as ad., fully, 
 thoroughly, accurately ; also 
 a., as tea berakati na a thing 
 fully his, a, thing his own. 
 Probably connected with bura, 
 d. biri, to be full, full. 
 
 Beru, v. d., syn. uma, to clear 
 for a plantation, to cut down 
 trees, cut or clear the jungle. 
 [Mg. firala (fira cut, ala wood', 
 
 , forest), miferala cut down 
 
BES] 
 
 wood in order to make some 
 use of the ground, clear the 
 forest, Ja. tipar felling and 
 burning the forest for culti- 
 vation, Ma. para to cut down 
 bush, clear.] H. bere', Piel of 
 bara' to cut down — "go into 
 the wood and cut out room 
 for thee there " Josh. xvii. 15. 
 
 Bes, or besa, s., dry wood, hard 
 dry wood used for fencing. A. 
 yabis' dry (wood), Nm. yabis 
 dry (wood). 
 
 ^es, d. besu, s., a young pig 
 whose mother is dead and 
 which is brought up as a pet 
 and is therefore tame and 
 gentle; also a motherless child, 
 syn. mitabusa. So called from 
 being deprived of the mother's 
 milk, and, as it were, arid. 
 See preceding word and busa : 
 A. yabisa to be dry. 
 
 BSta, or feta, s., a tribe, a crowd 
 or lot of people, or of animals, 
 accompanying each other, as 
 nabeta Togoliu the tribe of 
 Togolius, the Togoliu crowd, 
 set, or lot ; a shoal, nabeta 
 naika, a shoal of fish. See 
 bita, bita-naki, ta. 
 
 Beti, or bati, s., in proper names, 
 as Togoliu beti, Metanibeti, 
 &.C. : beti seems a form of the 
 word bati (see nabati na) and 
 prob. means chief, or head of 
 the family. 
 
 ^eti, s., a kind of spear pronged 
 with sharpened human bones, 
 and feathered : prob. so called 
 because pronged or toothed. 
 See nabati na. 
 
 Bi, v., d. for umba ki, q.v. 
 
 Bi, or fi, dd. mi, bai, v., to be, 
 
 42 [bi bnia 
 
 only used before substantives, 
 or words used as substantives, 
 as i bi natamole, fatu, nakasu, 
 it is a man, stone, tree, ru bi 
 natamole uia they are good 
 men. [Epi mbe, ve, to be. 
 Ml. P. fe, A. mbe, be, U. vi.] 
 This is the prep, bi, ti (or bai) 
 come to be used as the verb 
 to be, somewhat similarly to 
 E. bo, M. A. fib and fi. But 
 the word is not used imper- 
 sonally in Ef . as in E. and A. ; 
 it is more used in Ef . and Epi 
 than in Ml. Compare Ges. 
 Diet., s. V. be (Beth essentiae). 
 Bi enia (d. bi einia, or be emia), 
 V. t., to have ; i be nalo, or i 
 bieni nalo he has something : 
 enia is the pronoun him, her, 
 it, suffixed to eni (for ani, q. v.) 
 the piep. or transitive particle, 
 the verb being bi (or be), 
 which (see preceding word) 
 denotes also to be. In E. bo 
 denotes to have, as well as to 
 be, and governs the accusative. 
 Dillmann, Gr., §176, h, §192, 
 1, b. 
 
 The Ef. i bi enia may be 
 simply he is to it, i.e., he has 
 it \ thus i ti-ka ki nia denotes 
 either he is not to it, or he 
 has it not = i ti bi enia he has 
 it not; so (d.) i be (be e) 
 nalo he is to something, i.e., 
 has something, i ti be nalo = 
 i ti-ka ki nalo he has not 
 anything. Note that ti-ka is 
 written tika, q.v. It is equally 
 correct to say namuruen i tika 
 ki nia he has not laughing 
 (lit. laughing is not to him), 
 and i tika ki namuruen he 
 
BI Kl] 
 
 has not laughing (lit. he is 
 not to laughing) : the former 
 is the order of words in ex- 
 pressing the notion " to have " 
 or "to have not" in H., A., 
 and S., " is to him," or " is 
 not to him." 
 
 Bi ki, V. t., d. for bei ki, q v., to 
 show. 
 
 Bi, s., only in meta-ni-bi small 
 openings in the ends of a house 
 through which light conies, 
 and which are left uncovered 
 in thatching. Of same stem 
 as preceding word, whence is 
 A. buhu a name of the sun, 
 and buh' the uncovered part 
 of a house or tent. 
 
 Bia, or fia, d. bisa, or fisa [Malo, 
 Santo, ic, visaj, v. i., or a., 
 how many 1 as ru bia ? they 
 are how many ? natamole bia ? 
 how many men 1 And, not 
 interrogatively, ru bia, they 
 are so many, few, natamole bia 
 so many men, i.e., a few men. 
 [Sa. fia, ad., how many ? Fi. 
 vica, ad., how many ? Ta. 
 kuva, ad., how many? My. 
 barapa (apa) how much, or 
 how many, much, many, some, 
 Mg., ad., firy how many ? mi- 
 tiry, V. i., into how many parts 
 does it divide ?] The final 
 part of bia or bisa, namely a 
 or sa, is the interrogative pro- 
 noun, as is apa in barapa. In 
 sa the s is a dem. prefixed to 
 the interrogative pronoun, and 
 probably the r in Mg. ry is 
 likewise a dem. The prefixed 
 bi or fi is the reflexive verb 
 preformative, Ef. bi or fi, Sa. 
 fe, My. bar, or ba (bar, be). 
 
 43 [bi 
 
 Mg. mi (fi), as the My. ba- 
 rapa seems to indicate (and 
 the r of barapa must in the 
 absence of anything to the 
 contrary be regarded as a 
 dem. like the r in ry and the 
 s in sa). On this reflexive 
 verb preformative bi. My. ba. 
 (be), Sa. fe, Mg. mi (fi), see 
 next word following. In sup- 
 port of this view let it be 
 observed that bia or bisa in 
 Ef. is never an adverb and is. 
 a verb, being usable as an 
 adjective only as every verb- 
 in the language is. In bakafia 
 or bakafisa (q.v.) make how 
 many times ? (Fi. vakavica) 
 the causative verb preforma- 
 tive baka has the same effect 
 as in bakarua, bakatolu, &c. 
 In A., S., and H., how many? 
 how much? is expressed by 
 ka, or ke, as, prefixed to the in- 
 terrogative pronoun, the com- 
 pound signifying literally " as 
 what " 1 H. kamah, S. kima', 
 A. kam, and with a different 
 interrogative, kay, kain' quot 
 (how many ? so many). Com- 
 pare Tanna keva, d. kuva. 
 Bi, or fi, reflexive verb preforma- 
 tive (ba, or baka, fa, or faka, 
 being the causative verb pre- 
 formative), as ru atu gia, v. t.,. 
 they smite him, ru fiatu, 
 V. r., they smite each other,, 
 they fight, auli a, v. t., 
 exchange, replace, substitute 
 for it, bauli a, or fauli a, 
 V. c, nearly the same, make 
 to take the place of, barter 
 for it, ru biauli, v. r., they are 
 bartering with each other, or 
 
44 
 
 [bibisinu 
 
 they are replacing each other 
 or taking each other's places 
 (as men at the oar). [Sa. fe 
 "the reciprocal particle " pre- 
 fixed to verbs, Fi. vei, My. 
 bar (i.e., ber) and be, prefixed 
 particle sign of the neuter or 
 intransitive verb, Mg. mi 
 reflexive verb preformative 
 (Griffith's Mg. Gr., p. 112), 
 ^nd with ha (the ka in baka), 
 miha : the r in My. bar or 
 ber (see under preceding word) 
 is held to be a dem. or pro- 
 nominal particle like the ha 
 in miha and maha (ka in 
 baka), and n (or na) in Mg. 
 man, mana, My. mang (the 
 ba or ma in these being the 
 causative verb preformative). 
 See ba and baka.] H. 
 mith-, mi- (as in middabber), 
 for the A. it-, i-, see Wr., 
 Gr. 1., §111, participle, Anc. 
 muta-, Mod. mut-, Ch. mit-, S. 
 met-, or meth- ; the m- belongs 
 to the participle, and without 
 it the prefix is in H. hit or 
 hith, Ch. it, S. et or eth, A. it 
 (for ta) ; and when the t of 
 tliis prefix was assimilated to 
 the initial radical of the verb, as 
 it often was, it became simply 
 i- followed by a doubled con- 
 sonant, as in H. hiddabber, 
 A. issaKata. Of this only the 
 prefixed i could remain, and it 
 has become the prevailing 
 form in such languages as Sa., 
 My., Mg., or Ef. It may be 
 remarked that in Mg. in all 
 verbs of this reflexive form 
 this prefix occurs without the 
 m, in the future and past 
 
 tenses, as simply i. As to 
 signification of verbs with this 
 prefix in A., H., and S., they 
 are primarily reflexive, then 
 reciprocal or passive (intransi- 
 tive) or transitive, governing 
 an accusative. In Ef. verbs 
 of this form are reflexive, or 
 recip., and intransitive, rarely 
 transitive. 
 
 Bia, bibia, d. biau or beau, s., a 
 child, youth, bia kiki little 
 children, bia turiai young 
 men ; and in names of child- 
 ren as bia-naru, &c. [TaSa. 
 pipi infant, Ml. U. bibi in- 
 fant. Ml. A. pepe infant, and 
 Fut. foi, in foimata, eye (but 
 lit. pupil of the eye), Ja. bayi 
 infant, child.] A. bu'bu' a 
 little boy (from baba to say 
 papa), the pupil of the eye, (at 
 Damascus) bubu a little child. - 
 
 Biau, or beau, s., wave, waves 
 [Sa. peau, id.. My. ombak, id.] 
 E. ababi, A. 'ubab', i.q. 'ubab' 
 flood, waves, from 'abba to have 
 broken waves (the sea). Hence 
 
 Biafiau (for biaufiau), v. t., to be 
 raised in waves, rough (as the 
 sea). [Sa. peaua rough (as the 
 sea), lit. wavy, full of waves ; 
 peau and the a. ending a.] 
 
 Biauli, V. r., d. bioli, barter or 
 exchange with each other ; 
 take each other's places, as 
 men at the oar or other work, 
 spell each other. 
 
 Bialo, V. r., to wave (beckoning) ; 
 reflexive of alo-fia, q.v. 
 
 Bib, s., d. for 6a6a, a board. 
 
 Bibisinu, v. i., to ring, sing (of 
 the ears) : sinu ; bibi is the 
 preformative bi doubled. 
 
bibe] 
 
 Bibe, V. i., or a., for bebea. 
 
 Bi6ila, v. i., or a., big, great : 
 redup. of 6ila. 
 
 Bifera ki, v, t., to show by a 
 fera (or omen) : fera. 
 
 Bigo. See buigo. 
 
 Bikutu ki, v. t., speak to each 
 other (against someone in 
 his absence) ; decide about 
 (someone). See kutu ki. 
 
 Bila, V. i., shine, lighten, gleam, 
 flash, appear ; bilafila, redup., 
 to do so repeatedly : lo bila 
 ki glance at ; fila lightning ; 
 bule-meta eyeball (gleaming 
 part of the eye). [Sa. pula, pu- 
 pula, pulapula to shine, may be 
 same.] A.barak, orbara',shine, 
 gleam, flash, glitter, appear ; 
 lighten (lightning), 2, open 
 the eyes, glance at, bark' 
 lightning, pi. buruk, H. barak, 
 S. barka : hence bila, or fila, 
 bile, or file, s., lightning : c. 
 art. nafila. 
 
 Bila ia, or bilai a, v. t., pick up, 
 gather up (anything, as fallen 
 leaves, fruits, fish lying on 
 the ground, &c. ) ; 
 
 Bila guru ki, bill lua, bill sai, 
 &.C. ■ See guru, lua, sai. Bilai 
 has the pref. b'. [Fi. vili-ka 
 pick up, as fallen leaves or 
 fruits.] E. 'araya gather (as 
 fruits, herbs), glean (as after 
 reapers) : c. pref ormative. 
 
 .Bila, also (dd. mbula, bur) ; 
 
 BiSila, redup. (intensive), and 
 
 5ilena, biiilena, v. i., or a. (-na, 
 a. ending), big, large, great, 
 [Mg. bolobolo, mibolobolo, a., 
 thick, close, dense.] A. 'abula, 
 'abila to be thick, big, 'aban- 
 bal' strong, great, large. 
 
 45 [bilaki 
 
 Bile, or bila, v. i., to be quick ; 
 hence sudden, confused, in- 
 accurate, to err, make a, 
 mistake : redup. bilebile (d. 
 belbel) quick, sudden, bilieli 
 sudden, quick, hence con- 
 fused, erroneous : tabile to be 
 hasty, cornmit an error. .Often 
 used adverbially, as ba bile- 
 bile go quickly, si bile shoot 
 missing (lit. hastily, errone- 
 ously, not hitting the mark), 
 &c. H. bahal, bahel, prop, to 
 tremble, be in trepidation, Piel 
 to hasten, to hasten (as if to 
 tremble) to do anything. Hi. 
 id., Ch. (bShal) Jthpeal inf. 
 hitbehalah, s., haste, speed, 
 with prefixed b6, ad., quickly. 
 
 Bile, d. bile, v. i., to dispute, 
 wrangle. [My. babil to 
 wrangle, squabble.] E. b6hil 
 (2) contradict, tabahala dis- 
 pute, wrangle, bahl dispute, 
 altercation, wrangle. 
 
 5ili, V. t., 6ili meta shut the eyes, 
 redup. biliuili, id. (of many) ; 
 hence 
 
 Bill, s., a blind person (with 
 closed eyes) ; and 
 
 Bilil, s., a tree (whose leaves at 
 a certain stage of their growth 
 cleave together) : d. 6il6ilo 
 wink, close the eyes. [Cf. 
 Ma. kimo wink, kikimo keep 
 the eyes firmly closed.] A. 
 "amas'a blink, wink, close the 
 eyes. 
 
 Bill a, V. t., d. for Jelu ki, q.v. 
 
 bilaki, V. i., to be terrified, 
 tremble (as it were) with fear. 
 H. bal^h to be terrified, to 
 fear, Piel billeah to terrify, 
 and suffix ki. 
 
See laga, laga 
 
 bile] 
 
 ^ile na, s. See 6ele na mother. 
 
 £ile-meta na, s., nephew or niece, 
 child of a man's gore na, that is, 
 his full or uterine sister. Lit. 
 mother, i.e., source, of the 
 tribe or family, such nephew 
 being a man's heir (and not 
 his, own son). 
 
 Bilaga, v. t., bilaga sa, seek, 
 search for it. 
 sa, id. 
 
 Bilele, v. i., r., to turn hither and 
 thither, to go backwards and 
 forwards, round and round : 
 lele. 
 
 Bilele, v. i., r., d. for bitoli, q.v. 
 
 Biliasa, ad., the morning (lit. 
 awaking) of the day after 
 to-morrow : bulo, asa ; bill as 
 in bili-bog, bili-mitamai. 
 
 Bilibog, ad.(d. bulbog), morning: 
 bulo, bog. 
 
 Bilieli, v., see bile, bilibile, to be 
 quick, Ac. 
 
 Bilikit ia, v. t., to peel (as a 
 banana). [Of. Fi. loqa-ta to 
 peel.] E. labasa to peel. 
 
 Bilimitamai, ad., the morning 
 (lit. awaking) of the morrow ; 
 bilimitamai ki nia the morrow 
 following it, sera bilimitamai 
 every recurring morrow : bulo, 
 mitamai. 
 
 BiMs ia, d. 6olis ia, uolis ia, v. t., 
 to spread out anything on the 
 ground as a mat ; hence to 
 make a bed ; hence na uol, s., 
 that spread out, a bed, d. na 
 mauol ; and from this latter is 
 mauoli ki make a bed with 
 (something), spread it out for 
 a bed. [Mg. velatra, mivelatra 
 to spread, expand itself (be 
 spread out), mamilatra, v. t., 
 
 46 [bilulu 
 
 to spread.] A. faras'a to 
 spread out anything, as a mat 
 on the ground, spread (a bed 
 for anyone), hence fars" a bed. 
 
 Bi\it\, s., the fat in the belly of 
 a pig: connected with 6ele na, 
 the belly. A. badana to grow 
 fat. 
 
 Bilisai, v., used as ad., together, 
 as i tili bilisai ki nia he told 
 (two or more things) together : 
 it is really a v. t., and tili 
 bilisai ki, lit. he told gathering- 
 together it: bila ia, or bilaia, 
 and sai (see saisai). 
 
 Bilo, V. i., d bulo, q.v., to awaken, 
 to open the eyes ; bulo nia, d. 
 bulobulo i, V. t., to awaken 
 (from sleep), to cause to open 
 the eyes. [Sa. ala to awake, 
 Ma. ara, v. i., wake up, whaka- 
 ara, v. t., rouse, Fi. yadra, open 
 the eyes, awake, yadrava, 
 watch for, vakayadra-ta, to 
 awaken.] H. 'ur to awake, 
 be awake, cause to awake, 
 Hi. to arouse, awake (from 
 sleep) ; to watch, followed by 
 the prep, 'al, to watch over 
 anyone. Ef. bilo has the pref. 
 b'. 
 
 Bilo sia, v. t., d. for bale nia, 
 wash. 
 
 Bilora, for bulora, q.v. 
 
 Bilu, or biliu, v. r., to go back- 
 wards and forwards between 
 two places or parties: liliu, 
 liu. 
 
 Bilu, uilu, uulu (wulu), q.v., to 
 dance (« woman or women ; 
 men dancing are said to sali). 
 
 Bilulu, V. r., vie with each other, 
 contend with each other for 
 superiority. A. 'ala' ('alu), 
 
BILUBAKl] 
 
 3, vie, compete, contend for 
 superiority : see lulu, or lu. 
 
 Biluiaki, v. r., to land cargo 
 from a ship, or to land pas- 
 sengers (land each other) : 
 lu6a-ki. 
 
 Bimeta na, v. and s., to be his 
 guide, lit. his eye : bi to be, 
 and meta eye. 
 
 Binako, v. t., d. banako, q.y., 
 to steal : bi, or ba, pref. 
 
 Binaka, s., mats, cloth: see 6anu. 
 
 Binata, and dd. bunats, and 
 
 Binauta, v. i., to be numb, 
 devoid of feeling, as one's 
 limb from stoppage of circular 
 tion of the blood in it : bi to 
 be, nata a person (as if the 
 limb belonged to some other 
 person). See ata. 
 
 Binen, v. i., d. syn. c. banotu, 
 q.v., and baina, q.v. ; the 
 difference between binen and 
 banotu is that the former has 
 the final n = there, the latter 
 tu = there ; the difference 
 betvFeen binen and baina is 
 that the latter has elided the 
 n of the prep, and has i = 
 ne = to. For n or na = there 
 (that, sc. place), see uan or 
 uana that, yon. 
 
 Binats, d. for banotu. 
 
 Binoinoi, v. r., be confusedly 
 together (as different kinds of 
 things, people of different 
 districts or languages), tumara 
 noinoi ra : 
 
 Binofinoi, a., confused, perplexed, 
 d. bunofunoi : noi, nea. 
 
 BinotS, d. for banotu. 
 
 .Binu na, s., head or, first part, 
 as 6inu nafanua head of the 
 country (the chief and.nata- 
 
 47 [biri-ofa 
 
 mole tabu are said to be 6inu 
 naf.), 6inu naui head of a yam, 
 syn. bau naui, 6inu namit first 
 part of a mat, from which the 
 weaving or plaiting begins ; 
 hence 
 
 7?inu, v., as birm namit make a 
 beginning of a mat, make the 
 part from which the plaiting 
 begins : connected with bau 
 head, bau sia to weave or 
 plait, bau namit plait a mat. 
 See bau. 
 
 2?inu, V. i., to whistle, dd. 6in, 
 b6g6. [Epi bobo, Am. mofin, 
 Ml. P. and TJ., puinpuin, . 
 winwin, Sa. mapu, To. mabc] 
 A. fallha, and fahfalia, 
 sibilavit. 
 
 Binunu, v., complete, ba binunu 
 ki, to go throughout, complete 
 (a piece of a fence) : nu, num. 
 
 Bio-so, V. i., to call or cry out, 
 shout, calling : bio, and so, 
 q.v. The verb bio, or fio (see 
 rafioso), means to cry out, 
 shout. [Sa. piapio an outcry, 
 a shouting, Mg. feo voice, 
 sound, report.] H. pa'ah, to 
 call, to cry out. 
 
 Bira gia, d., 
 
 Biri gia, d. firi gia, v. t. , to carry 
 on the back, take, bring, lead. 
 [Epi mbario, carry on the 
 back.] A. liamala, to carry 
 on the back, bring, send, im- 
 pel to do something, S. llmal, 
 collect, carry. 
 
 Biri-nala, s., the plaited or braided 
 (rope) handle of a carrying 
 basket : see ala, and bir ia to 
 plait. 
 
 Biri-ofa, s., the cloth in which a 
 child is slung and carried on. 
 
BIRAGORO] 
 
 the back of its mother : biri 
 (gia), and ofa (ia), d. afaia, 
 both of which verbs signify 
 to carry on the back. 
 
 ^iragoro, v., d. Soragoro, q.v., to 
 make, break into a noise near 
 someone : see 6ora ia, and 
 goro. 
 
 Biraka, v. r., to give presents to 
 guests at a naleouan (feast 
 after a death), lit. to give 
 presents (or rewards) to each 
 other : raka tia. 
 
 Birakana, s., the giving of such 
 presents. 
 
 Biri-raki, v. t., to give presents 
 to guests at a naleouan . biri 
 a (biri naJo ra, i.e., make their 
 hearts void of evil thoughts, 
 i.e., pleased or good), and raki. 
 
 Birausi, v. r., to follow each 
 other : rausi. 
 
 Bir ia, or biri a, v. t., to make 
 void, bring to nought, as 
 counsel, bisa biri nalo na : the 
 radical notion is break to pieces, 
 biri na maietoa break to pieces 
 or put an end to (one's) anger, 
 appease, biri nabo na bring to 
 an end the evil feelings of 
 one's heart, appease. This 
 verb is much used after other 
 verbs, as mitroa, bisa, &c., 
 think void, i.e., despise, kc, 
 and ba biri nafanua means to 
 go all through the land: tale 
 round, tale-firi all round ; re- 
 duplicated it is 
 
 Birifiri, nearly the same meaning 
 as biri ia. H. parar to break in 
 pieces, Hi. hefer to break, as a 
 covenant, make void, be void, 
 bring to nought : eg. para', 
 and following word. 
 
 48 [birigite 
 
 Biris ia, v. t., to break down, 
 destroy, birisi nakoro break 
 down a wall : the notion of 
 breaking in pieces, asunder, 
 is implied in this word, which 
 is cognate with the preceding. 
 H. paras to break, break 
 down. &c. 
 
 Biri, V. i., to warble, whistle 
 (birds). [Epi faru, forfaru.] 
 See 6ora ia, 6iragoro. 
 
 Biri, d. for biira to be full, q.v. 
 
 Bir ia, v. t., to plait a string or 
 rope. [Sa. fili to plait ; to be 
 entangled, involved ; filiga to 
 persevere, Ma. whiri twist, 
 plait. Ha. hili braid, plait, 
 twist, fasten, Tah. firi to 
 plait.] A. marra, 4, to firmly 
 twist (a rope) ; to wrestle, to 
 be locked together in wrest- 
 ling 1, 4), to fasten, 1, 4, to be 
 bitter (lit. and fig.), 10, to 
 persevere, mariraf' a rope 
 firmly twisted together, or a 
 long rope, mumarr' firmly 
 twisted together (a rope). 
 
 Bir ia, v. t., d., to stick, stab, 
 pierce, as biri naui to stick a 
 knife or fork into a yam while 
 being boiled to know whether 
 it is cooked. See bur ia. 
 
 Birife, v. r., to seize, pull hither 
 and thither (to take away a 
 man's property as a punish- 
 ment). See rau. 
 
 Birigirigi, v. r., to be moaning, 
 bemoaning oneself. See rigi. 
 
 Brigi, d., V. t., bri (i.e., biri), 
 prob. for meri, to do, make : 
 therefore it is bri-gi (biri-si). 
 bee men. 
 Birigite na, s., d. for bura na, 
 q.v. 
 
BIRIKl] 
 
 i?iriki, s., a part, side. A. farik' 
 a part, from faraka to divide, 
 separate, &c. Hence 
 
 ^irlki, s., a "falling" star, a 
 meteor: used also as a name of 
 men. 
 
 Biri-sai, v. t., to pierce open, 
 birisai na 6ago aso pierce open 
 the tunnel (or end of it) of 
 the robber-crab, fig. to lay 
 open some hidden wickedness : 
 biri to pierce, and sai, q.v. 
 
 Biroa, and biroaroa, v. r., to turn 
 each other (in some work, 
 causini; it to be done in some 
 other way), as, when one is 
 doing some piece of work, to 
 make him do it some other 
 way is to biroa : see roa to 
 turn, to change. 
 
 Bisa, fisa, or basa, v. i., to speak, 
 na fisan, d. nafsan, the act of 
 speaking, speech, a word ; 
 tabisa to speak earnestly (ta, 
 q.v., and bisa), tafisafisa, d. 
 tafisfiis, to speak earnestly ; to 
 pray (so used now in Christian 
 sense) ; to utter inarticulate 
 sounds (as those made by a 
 cocoanBt on the gravel which 
 a rat is turning about trying 
 to get at its kernel). [My. 
 bacha to read, recite, chant, 
 Tag. basa, Fi. vosa to speak, 
 talk.J A. nabasa and nabasa 
 to speak ; to peep or chirp (a 
 bird) ; nabsai' a word. 
 
 Bisafisa, v. i., redup. of foregoing, 
 to speak rapidly (as one in 
 delirium). 
 
 Bisa, or flsa, d. bia, q.v., to be 
 how many ? so many, a few ; 
 bisa-mau, d. bisi-&a to be only 
 a few, few. See mau. 
 
 49 [bisi na 
 
 Bisab, d. for bisif, v. i., or a., 
 surpassing, excelling, as fonu 
 bisab an excelling ( big) turtle, 
 i uia bisif it is good, surpassing 
 or excelling. See safe. 
 
 Bisai ki, v. t., to show, d. bisa 
 ki. See sai. 
 
 Bisakaui, d. for bisaku tia, q.v. 
 
 Bisaki (d. biski), d. transposed 
 for bakasa, q.v. 
 
 Bisaki a, or busaki a, v. c, to 
 raise up, to place above, fig. to 
 appoint or make one a chief. 
 See saki. 
 
 Bisaku tia, v. t., d. bakasau, q.v. 
 See siku tia. 
 
 Bisalot (for 6osa-lot), v. i., to 
 clap the hands, lit. bring (the 
 hands) together, sound, or 
 crack : 6osa ia, and lot. 
 
 Bisau, V. i., dd. futum, busuf, or 
 busofu, bisobu, to sprout forth, 
 spring up. See futum. 
 
 Bisaui, d. for bisaku tia, bisa- 
 kaui. 
 
 Biseka, v. i., d., to sit (as talking 
 with a neighbour) : seka. 
 
 Bisela, v. r., to bear, bring forth, 
 give birth to : sela tia 
 
 Bisera, biserasera, v. i., to be not 
 of one size, to be diiferent : 
 sera ia. 
 
 BiserS a, v. r., to be near : sere 
 a. 
 
 Bis ia (kwis ia), or uis ia, v. t., 
 to take with the hand, grasp, 
 take hold of, accept, receive. 
 H. kabas. Pi., to take with 
 the hand, hold, receive, A. 
 kabas'a take with the hand, 
 lay hold of, seize, S. hbas to 
 compress. 
 
 Bisi na, or biisi na, s., the pos- 
 teriors, the backside, the 
 5 
 
BIS Ia] 
 
 rump. Compare busi a, d. for 
 muri a, q.v. [Mg. vody the 
 posteriors, My. buri the back, 
 the rear, Ma. muri hinder 
 part, Sa. muli the rump.] 
 
 Bis ia, or bisi a, v. t., to beget, 
 procreate, make to be born, 
 as a father his child ; mafis 
 one begotten or born, na- 
 mafisien the being begotten 
 or born. A. nafisa to bring 
 forth [a woinan), manfus' one 
 born. 
 
 Bisi a, or fisi a, v. t., to rub one 
 stick on another to produce 
 fire, bisi nakabu produce iire 
 by friction. The rubbing 
 stick is pointed and rubs a 
 groove into the other, the 
 rubbed out dust at the end of 
 which gradually is ignited. 
 [Mg. fositra rubbed so as to 
 produce fire by the friction, 
 mifositra to produce fire by 
 friction.] A. fasa'a, 2, to rub 
 (a thing), so that its soft 
 and broken interior may be 
 emitted. 
 
 Bis ia, or bisi a, v. t.,to uncover or 
 dig up anything buried under 
 ground, to dig up, or uncover, 
 by removing the covering 
 earth, a dead and buried body, 
 or any other thing buried in 
 or covered with earth, as a 
 yam, &c. A. nabas'a to un- 
 cover what was covered or 
 ■ hid, as what lies hid under 
 ground ; to dig up again, or 
 uncover by digging (a corpse). 
 
 Bisiia, v. i., or a., d. for bisamau 
 (bisa-mau). See mau. 
 
 Bisif, v. i., or a., d. for bisab, 
 q.v. 
 
 50 [bital ia 
 
 Bisobu, V. i., to sprout forth, 
 spring up. See futum. 
 
 Bisua, V. r., to meet together, to 
 meet each other : sua. 
 
 Bisuaki, or fisuaki, v. r., or a., 
 order or command (or send) 
 each other ; i bisuaki he com- 
 mands, that is, he commands 
 some other person, or persons : 
 sua ki. 
 
 Bisueri, v. r., scold or vituperate 
 each other : sueri. 
 
 Bisuraki, or bisureki, i.e., bisu- 
 raki, v., to speak, lit. to speak 
 for, about : although raki is a 
 t. prep, this word is commonly 
 used absolutely, nafisuraki 
 speech, a word or utterance, 
 nafisuraki sa bad talk : bisa, 
 and raki. 
 
 Bisuru, V. r., lie (deceive each 
 other), bisuru ki lie to (some- 
 one) : suru, d. soresore. 
 
 Bita, V. r., to be joined together, 
 associated (of men) ; bita ki, 
 t., make to be joined together, 
 or associated : ta, bita-naki. 
 
 Bitaftelu, and, d., 
 
 Bitafetaielu, same as taSelu : 
 belu. 
 
 Bitago, V. r., beg (from each 
 other, or one from another), 
 also bitago sa, t., beg it, i.e., 
 beg (for himself) it : tago fia 
 (q.v.) beg of him. 
 
 Bitaki a, v. t., to place or fix the 
 hot stones on the nakoau in 
 the oven, d. uataki a, bitaki 
 nakoau : taki a. 
 
 Bital ia, or bitali a, d., v. t., beg, 
 ask him (for something) : pre- 
 form ative bi, and tall [Sa. 
 fesili to question, ask, sili, ps. 
 silia, to ask, inquire.] A. 
 
BITANAKI NIA] 
 
 51 
 
 [bo 
 
 sa'ala to question, 5, beg, 6, 
 question, ask each other. 
 
 Bitanaki nia, v. t., r., to accom- 
 pany one, bita-naki : bita (see 
 ta), and naki, t. prep. • 
 
 ■Bitau sa, v. t., to invite, and 
 
 Bitautau (of many) : tau, tautau. 
 
 Bitau ria, v. t., to marry her : 
 tau ria. 
 
 Bite, V. t., to cut ; bitesu, d. 
 biteiu, to cut reeds (see usu). 
 [My. potong to cut.] A. 
 batta (and batta) to cut ; 
 hence 
 
 Bits, s., an instrument for cut- 
 ting, knife. 
 
 Bitfe lua i. See butfe lua i. 
 
 Bitefa, v. r., to arrange them- 
 selves opposite to each other 
 for battle : tefa. 
 
 Bitei a, v. t., to paint, to smear 
 with intei ; tei turmeric, a red- 
 dish powder (made from a 
 plant) much used for smearing 
 the body, or wounds, or the 
 nafona (native cloth). A. 
 'a'da'u crocus, sanguis dra- 
 conis, a red gum used for 
 healing wounds, a plant with 
 which cloth is coloured or 
 tinged, yadda'a to tinge or 
 colour a thing with the thing 
 called 'a'da'u. 
 
 Bitelo, d. butol, bitol, v. i., to be 
 liungry. [Fi. vitolo to be 
 hungry.] A. talalla to have 
 an empty belly, tolilia id. 
 
 Biteriki, s., an old woman, a 
 matron, opp. to mariki an old 
 man, a senior ; ma-'riki, bite- 
 'riki, see fiteriki; bite means 
 " woman." The common word 
 for "woman" in one dialect 
 is matu [Ja. wedo], q.v. 
 
 Bitia, or titia, v. i., to put forth 
 bati na (of bananas and taro, 
 i.e., to put forth shoots) ; 
 formed from bati by the a. 
 ending a. See bati na, nabati 
 na. Dialect syn. sulia, from 
 suli na. 
 
 Bito, s., one lame, H. pasah, to 
 be lame, pisseah, lame. 
 
 Bitoli, V. r., to pass (or go before) 
 each other : toli a. 
 
 Bit6 sia, v. t., to extend, spread 
 out (as cloth, iSrc), H. matah, 
 S. mtali (or mathah, mthah), 
 spread out, extend. 
 
 Bituk sa, V. r., give it, place it; 
 hence bituana, s., a giving, 
 gift : tua i. 
 
 Bitua ki, v. t., place, lay down : 
 tua ki. 
 
 Bitu6etu6a, v. r., lit. to be touch- 
 ing each other (of things in a 
 series, then, to be continual, 
 uninterruptedly, constantly ; 
 not redup. it is 
 
 Bitub, to be touching or reaching 
 to each other, as in talS bitub, 
 it is all round (the two ends 
 of that which goes round), 
 meeting or touching each 
 other : tu5a ia. [My. tubi- 
 tubi, successively, uninterrup- 
 tedly.] 
 
 Bituma ki, v. r., to point to with 
 the finger : tuma ia. 
 
 Bo, conj., particle connecting 
 verbs thus, i tulena bo lotu he 
 arose and worshipped i tili a 
 bo ban he said it and went 
 away : the bo can sometimes 
 be and sometimes is omitted 
 as i tulena lotu: d. syn. kai. 
 A. fa, Wr., A. Gr., II., §140, 
 "One finite verb may be put 
 
»o] 
 
 52 [boa 
 
 in opposition to another. In 
 this case a) the first is the 
 preparative act, introductory 
 to the second," as in the above 
 Ef. examples : " the older and 
 more elegant form is to insert 
 the conjunction fa," its omis- 
 sion being a later construction. 
 As to the o in bo it seems the 
 same as the o in the following 
 word, q.v., but here denoting 
 the subject, i.e. bo = and he 
 or and she, d. syn. kai. 
 Bo, d., other dd. fo. mo, uo, o, a 
 particle used after another 
 particle to form the future 
 tense, thus i ga bo ban, dd. i 
 ga uo ban, i g'o ban, k'e fo 
 ban, i ba mo ban (or i mba 
 mo ban) he will go away : 
 without the bo (uo, o, mo, fo) 
 as i ga fan, &c., the meaning 
 is imperative, or permissive, 
 let him go, he must go, should 
 go, may go, lit. that he go, the 
 particles ga (or ka) and ba 
 being final conjunctions denot- 
 ing ut, that, to (as in, I told 
 him to go) : see supra ba, 
 conj., and in/ra ka (ga), conj. 
 In Ml. P., Motu, &c., this ba 
 alone forms the future tense, 
 and in Florida and Vaturanga 
 this k' (ka, ga) alone forms the 
 future, thus k'e fan, i.e., ke 
 fan that he go, Ef., is in these 
 two languages not only equiva- 
 lent to this, but also equiva- 
 lent to ke fo ban he will go. 
 It is therefore manifest that 
 the particle bo does not by it- 
 self express the future idea, 
 but, in Ef., is a mere adverbial 
 enclitic to a final conjunction 
 
 which does. It may perhaps 
 in this construction be best 
 rendered by ' then,' iga bo 
 ban he will go, lit. that he 
 then go, k'e fo ban he will go, 
 lit. that he then go. See the- 
 following — 
 
 Bo, an adverbial particle used to 
 form the present progressive 
 tense, as i bo ban he is going : 
 i ban denotes either he goes 
 or he went. This is the same 
 particle used in the future 
 tense denoting "then." As 
 used in the present progressive 
 tense, it may be best rendered 
 literally by '■ now :" i bo ban 
 he now goes, he is now going. 
 H. 'epo, ad., properly here, 
 there, but always in reference 
 to time now, then : according 
 to Ges. composed of 'e demon- 
 strative and po or poh (here, 
 there, this latter being for 
 pahu or bahu in this or that 
 (place) (the prep, b' and pron. 
 3 pers. masculine). 
 
 Bo na, redup. bobo na, or bobo 
 na, s., the heart {i.e., the 
 mind, the seat of the intellect 
 and affections). The original 
 meaning is seen in the phrase 
 na kasu naio na the carti- 
 laginous substance on the 
 front of the throat, lit. the 
 stick, or tree, of the bo 
 (pectus). [Mg. fo the heart, 
 mind.] A. bahw' the cavity 
 of the chest (pectus). 
 
 i?oa, V. i., to emit odour ; naio, 
 d. tamo, to emit odour, bon 
 odour. [Ha. po, puia, id.. My. 
 bau, Mg. fofona, odour.] A. 
 faha, fah'a (f a'a) to emit odour. 
 
BOBj 
 
 Bob', d., father (voc.) See ab, 
 babu, &o. 
 
 Bo bo. See 60 na. 
 
 Boljo, v., as bobo ki atelagi to 
 hail the new moon by making 
 an exclamation or a series 
 of sounds like bo ! bo ! bo ! 
 [Mg. babababa, cry, &c.] S. 
 yabeb clanxit, H. yabab, Pi. to 
 exclaim, cry out. 
 
 Boboi, s., a mask, cover, or 
 disguise ; not only a mask for 
 the face, but a cover of the 
 whole body, made of kaka 
 naniu, (fee, and painted so as 
 to appear terrific (to children) ; 
 used at the naleouan after the 
 death of a chief when the 
 naiea was set up. Perhaps so 
 called from covering oneself 
 with the mask or disguise. 
 See bo-fia, &c. 
 
 Bobu, s., redup,, d. bua, grand- 
 father (voc), mother's father. 
 See bua, tobu na. 
 
 Bo-fia, and reduplicate 
 
 Bobo-fia, V. t., to cover, to be 
 upon a thing, or above it, 
 covering it ; 
 
 Bo-gia, V. t., or bu-gia, to cover, 
 to excel, to be above, over a 
 thing, covering, not implying 
 so close proximity as bo-fia ; 
 
 Bo-gor ia, v. t., bo-gia, and gor 
 ia, to be covering over — see 
 gor ia ; 
 
 Bog-kor ia, v. t., to be above, 
 over, to overtop, overshadow, 
 as a tree over a smaller plant, 
 a higher chief over a lower : 
 the g in bog is the g of bo-gia. 
 See kor ia ; 
 
 Bogi, or bog, s., darkness (from 
 its covering), night, also day 
 
 53 [boka tia 
 
 in counting as " third day," 
 bog tolu, or mog tolu, &c., te 
 nabog some day, some time, 
 also naubog, i.e., na ubog ; 
 
 Bogien, s., darkness ; 
 
 Bog, s., a dark powder, used in 
 painting ; 
 
 Bog, s., symbol of chieftainship 
 (buried in the grave of a chief), 
 from bo-gia to excel, be over. 
 [Sa, po night, ps. pogia to be 
 benighted. Ma. po night, sea- 
 son. Hades (from being dark), 
 Ha. po night, darkness, v. to 
 be dark, become night, to be 
 out of sight, hence slain, lost, 
 to overshadow (as the foliage 
 of trees), assemble thickly to- 
 gether, a. dark, dark coloured, 
 ignorant, obscure, popoi to 
 cover, poi, id., Ja. bungi night.] 
 A. "am ma to cover, 4, to 
 submerge, H. 'amam to shut, 
 close, to hide, conceal, fig. to 
 surpass, excel, also to be hid- 
 den, A. "amma to be hidden, 
 covered with clouds (of the 
 sky), "amma' darkness, dust, 
 "ama to be cloudy (of the sky), 
 2, night came as a cloud, 
 'amo day, season or year, 'amiya 
 to be blind, hidden, "umiya 
 to faint, Sa. matapo blind, 
 matapogia to faint, Ef. meta- 
 buta blind (see infra, buta). 
 These words are all egg. ; ia 
 Ef . the egg. are numerous. See 
 bau (head), &c. ; cf. bau-goria 
 with bo-goria, <fec. 
 
 Bok, redup. bokauok, v. i., on- 
 omat., to blow, to pant. [Ma. 
 puka to pant.] H. puah to 
 breathe, to blow. Hi. to pant. 
 
 Boka tia, v. t., to strike, bisa 
 
BOKAS] 54 
 
 boka tia to reprehend. [My. 
 pukul, Mg. poka, strike.] A. 
 baka'a to strike with repeated 
 blows; to cut up; 2, reprehend. 
 
 Bokas, s., d. for bakas, flesh ; 
 Hades. 
 
 Bokauoka, redup. of boka tia. 
 
 Bokota, V. i., or a., dirty (as 
 water) : gota. 
 
 Bolai ia, d. for 6alaf ia : d. 
 bolbolaf ia. 
 
 Bolk sa, d. for Jala sa. 
 
 .Bolau ki, to steer (a canoe or 
 ship) : bouolau. 
 
 Bole, d. buele, v. i., to be lost, 
 absent : buele. 
 
 .Solo, V. i., or a., to be empty (as 
 a cocoanut) : balo. 
 
 Bolo, s., a small basket. [Ma. 
 paro a small basket, To. belu 
 a cup.] H. kpor, or kSpor, a 
 cup, E. kapar a basket. 
 
 Bolo, v., to do, redup. bolofolo, to 
 do, to act, nafolon, nafoldfolon, 
 deeds (doing, acting), woik, 
 conduct ; 
 
 Bolo, d., to behave deceitfully ; 
 and 
 
 Bolo sia, V. t., to do one, to treat 
 him (as in quarrelling), to treat 
 him, bolo sa, bolo uia ki, to 
 behave ill, to behave well to. 
 [Fi. vala, valavala, v. i., vala- 
 ta, V. t., to make or do, vala 
 to fight, valavala, s., work, 
 custom, habit.] H. pa'al to 
 make, to do, po'al or pool 
 deed, act, work, A. ba'ala 
 move oneself, act, do work, do 
 (something to someone), 8, 
 devise (deceit against some- 
 one), fi'F action, work, fa'ila< 
 custom. 
 
 .Bolls ia, d. for 6ilis ia. 
 
 [bow 
 
 Bolboloa, or boloboloa, d. for 
 6ale6alia, large. 
 
 Boloi ia, d. for 6alaf ia. 
 
 Bologa, V. i., to turn itself about 
 (as something sinking in 
 water), tafiloga, id. See bulo 
 ki. 
 
 Bolu, V. i., to be blunt (as an 
 edged tool). A. bohira to be 
 blunt (as a sword). 
 
 Bon, bono, v. i., to be shut, 
 closed, stopped, bono sa shut 
 because of it, bon, bonbon to 
 crowd together, crowded to- 
 gether : 
 
 Bono tia, or bonu tia (and mono 
 tia, bunu tia, munu tia), v. t., 
 to shut, close, plug, stop, 
 block up, and 
 
 Bon, a., and s., 1,000, d. manu 
 1,000, bunuti, bunti, 100. 
 These words denote, lit., a 
 gathering, crowd. [Sa. puni- 
 puni shut in, close in, cover 
 over, punita'i to stop with, 
 tapuni to shut, momono to 
 plug, monoti to cork, plug, 
 puipui to shut. Ma. pani, 
 papani block up, kopani shut 
 to, close up, close in, Mg. 
 kombona or hombona shut, 
 closed, mikombona to shut, 
 close, coalesce. Ha. pani to 
 close, shut, stop, Sa. mano a 
 myriad, a great number.] H. 
 'amam prop, to gather together, 
 to collect, to join together, 
 then to shut, to close, A. 
 "amma to cover, to obstruct, 
 cover in front (as the mouth 
 and nose of an animal), 'amm', 
 or 'ammon, a great crowd of 
 men. See monotia, munutia, 
 munuai. 
 
BONO-(;OR ia] 
 
 Bono-gor ia, to crowd together 
 (gor ia) about him or it. 
 
 Bonbon, d., a., redup. of bon, 
 crowded together, namer bon- 
 bon people crowded together. 
 
 Boolau. See boiiolau. 
 
 I. y^ora ia, or 6orai a, v. t., to 
 rend, split open, split; Sorai 
 uabati na part the teeth, i.e., 
 open the mouth to speak, hence 
 fcorai to make a noise, 6orai- 
 goro make a noise (as children) 
 about or near (one), iorai- 
 uora-goro, id., dd. 6ora-goro, 
 iira-goro, id., SorOrai, v. t , 
 redup., rend, split open, elo 
 ioroia the sun (rising) rend- 
 ing or splitting asunder or 
 bursting through (the clouds), 
 ta5are (taieirre), v. r. (passive), 
 to be split open, burst, hence 
 to be open (as a door), maora, 
 or mauora, redup. maoraora, 
 V. i., to be rent, hence uora a 
 place, especially a landing 
 place for a canoe (perhaps 
 from being an opening or split 
 in the reef), and, therefore, 
 often in names of places, a side 
 (of an island) as uora n tan, 
 uora n lig, lower, upper side 
 (of Efate), bora a basket 
 woven out of the frond of a 
 cocoanut palm whose stalk is 
 split asunder, and the frond 
 itself, bora the sides of the 
 head or face, the temples 
 (which women used to cut 
 and tear open with a sharp 
 shell (kai) in mourning for 
 the dead). A. fara' to split, 
 rend, slit, 5, tafarra' to become 
 slit, rent, burst, i.e., open, 
 faryai tumult, clamour. 
 
 ) [nORA-KAI 
 
 Bora, s., the temples : 6ora i. 
 
 Bora, s., cocoanut leaf, or basket 
 made of it, or plaited for 
 thatching houses : 6ora I. 
 
 Borabora, s., cocoanut leaf bas- 
 ket : 6ora i. 
 
 II. .Bora, V. i., to spring up, sprout, 
 grow (of plants), be born (of 
 men) ; bakauora ki, v. c, make 
 to hora, (men and plants), 
 nauora na, nauorauora na off- 
 shoot, offspring (of plants and 
 men), ora naui the vine of the 
 yam ; fara a cocoanut (fruit) 
 that begins to shoot. [Motu 
 vara to grow, to be born, Oba 
 6iri to grow.] H. parah (A. 
 farili'a, 2) to break out, burst 
 forth (of the young as issuing 
 from the womb), to sprout, to 
 flourish (a plant), Hi. to cause 
 to do so, sprout, shoot, H. 
 perall sprout, shoot, A. farli" 
 offspring, shoot or sprout. 
 
 5ora-bau, v. and s., over-head, 
 noon, only in the phrase elo i 
 6ora-bau the sun is overhead, 
 lit. splits-head : hora, i., and 
 bau. 
 
 ./?ora-goro, or 6orai-goro, or 6orai- 
 uora^goro, to make a tumult, 
 noise near (one) : bora i. 
 
 Borai, s., c. art., the sugar cane ; 
 
 Sorairai, s,, a reed like sugar 
 cane growing in streams. A. 
 bara', 4, to find sugar cane. 
 
 .Sora-kai, v. and s., to tear or 
 rend the kai (a shellfish, or its 
 shell): borai I. Men who were 
 worthless and died poor, and 
 had no pigs killed at their 
 death and burial, ftorakai in 
 Hades, their jaws being torn 
 and bleeding in doing so. 
 
BORA-KESE Na] 
 
 56 
 
 [bosa ia 
 
 5ora-kese na, s., gills of iish ; 
 6ora I. , andkesa (dark coloured) ; 
 dd. morese na, kurumase na. 
 
 Borau, v. i., to ride or be carried 
 (on a canoe or ship, horse, 
 vehicle, or other thing), to 
 voyage. [Fi. vodo embark, 
 go on board, ride, Sa. folau a 
 voyage, the crew and vessel. 
 To. felau to navigate, make a 
 voyage, a canoe, a fleet of 
 canoes, a voyage, My. prahu, 
 prau a canoe, boat, ship, general 
 name for any kind of vessel, bar- 
 prau to travel by boat or ship.] 
 A. markab', E. markab a ship, 
 vessel, A. rakib' navigating, 
 voyaging, rakiba to be carried, 
 to ride (A. markab' denotes a 
 vehicle, carrying-beast, chariot, 
 as well as a ship), H. rakab to 
 be carried (on a horse, chariot, 
 the clouds, ifcc. — so Ef. 
 borau). 
 
 Note. — A. markab' is an 
 infinitive, and therefore is 
 naturally in Ef . and Fi. a verb, 
 My. and Sa. a substantive, 
 and To. both a verb and a sub- 
 stantive. 
 
 ^orea, s., c. art. naborea, a 
 dream, or vision (in sleep) ; 
 
 5orea ki na6orea, v., to dream a 
 dream, or see a vision ;in 
 sleep). [Tall, ria a vision in 
 sleep.] H. mar'eh a vision (in 
 sleep), A. roya sleep, what is 
 seen in sleep, from ra'a' (H. 
 ra'ah) to see, then to have a 
 vision in sleep, E. id. 
 
 Bor ia, or bori a, v. t., to break, 
 bori nakasu break a stick, 
 mauori, mauoriuori to be 
 broken, and 
 
 Bori sia, redup. 
 
 Boriuori sia, v. t., break to 
 pieces. H. por inf. of parar 
 to break, break to pieces (pur 
 to break), Hithpolel to be 
 broken. 
 
 Borroa,, v. i., to grow crooked, 
 for ftoraroa : bora, ii., and roa. 
 
 Boro-silaia. See buru masila. 
 
 Boroaki, v., c. t. ending, to be- 
 queath to, or order to do (by will, 
 when dying) ; to commission 
 (one to do something), give 
 orders to. [My. pasan to com- 
 mission, enjoin, Sa. poloa'i to 
 leave commands (as on going a 
 journey or dying), to command, 
 Mg. hafatra (hafarana) a will 
 or testament, order, be- 
 queathed, ordered.] A. wasa', 
 2, to bequeath by will, 4, id., 
 and to give power to, or com- 
 mission, by will ; to command, 
 to enjoin. H., Pi., sivah to 
 charge, command, delegate, 
 commission. 
 
 Borori sia, contraction of boriuori 
 sia 
 
 5osa ia, v. t., to compress, manu 
 i tumana 6osa ia a bird com- 
 presses itself (with its closed 
 wings), i 6osai naniu he com- 
 presses a cocoanut (so as to 
 break the shell), press together, 
 squeeze (as a sponge), hence 
 6osa, or uosa, v. i., to be com- 
 pressed, i.e., narrow, and ta- 
 6osa (sela uosa a narrow track, 
 natamole taftosa a man thin 
 as if pressed together), re- 
 dup. uosauosa ; 6osa naru na 
 clap the hands, 6osa-]ot clap 
 the hands with a sound, d. 
 bosa, ki, i.q. 6osa ia. A, 
 
bosabosa] 
 
 hamaza to press with the 
 fingers or hand, to compress, 
 push, strike, bite, break. 
 
 5osa6osa, s,, froth (coming from 
 the mouth, as of one in sick- 
 ness), sputum, d. fut. [Mg. 
 fotafota slaver, spittle, foam, 
 mifotafota to slaver, to foam.] 
 A. bozak', bosak', saliva, spu- 
 tum. 
 
 Sota,, V. i., and a., to be, or 
 become, diiferent, other, alien ; 
 
 .Bota ia, v. t., to divide, part, 
 make one remove from the 
 other, 6otauota (or ftotota) re- 
 dup.; i toko Sotauota he is in 
 the middle or midst, exactly 
 between two things," lit. he is 
 parting or dividing (the two 
 things), mauota, or maota, to 
 be divided or parted, hence na 
 maota the midst or middle 
 space between two things, i.e., 
 the space by which they are 
 parted, removed, or distant 
 from each other. [My. beda, 
 or bida, distinct, separate, dif- 
 ferent, beda-kan to separate, 
 to distinguish, to make a 
 difference.] E. b'ud other, 
 Alien, different, A. ba'oda, and 
 ba'ida to stand apart, be dis- 
 tant, remote, 2, 4, make to be 
 so, 6, to be apart from each 
 other, also to recede or go 
 apart from someone, 3, make 
 to be apart or distant, also to 
 go apart or be distant, bo'd' 
 di.stance : cf. banaSota diverse, 
 different. Hence 
 
 .Bota, s., c. art., a person un- 
 married (apart) ; 
 
 jBotauota, and 
 
 .SotiJta ia, v. t., redup. of Sota ia. 
 
 57 [bua 
 
 Botu, V. i., to swell (of a girl's 
 breasts). A. nabata, 3), n. a. 
 nobot', begin to swell (a girl's 
 breasts). 
 
 Boua (bowa)j v. i., to rain, d. for 
 bk. 
 
 Boiia ki (bowa ki), v., d. ua ki, 
 to fruit, to produce fruit. Ch. 
 Pael 'abeb to produce fruit. 
 
 Bouolau ki, v. t., to steer (a 
 canoe or ship), then, fig., to 
 steer a country (bouolau ki na- 
 fanua), &c., that is, govern it, 
 bouolau ki em^romina govern 
 the world (of God). [Ml. dd. 
 barau, baro, walu, foro, Sa., 
 Ha., uli, Sa., also, muli. My. 
 mud-i in maraud i-kan, Ef. 
 uolau (wolau) in bouolau-ki.] 
 E. Iiadaf'a to steer (a vessel or 
 ship), then, fig., to govern men, 
 to steer, i.e., govern the world 
 (said of Jesus Christ), mahdaf 
 rudder, helm. See uolau, iv/ra. 
 Note. — Bouolau ki is redup- 
 licate, see 6olau ki (d.), id., and 
 uolau ki, and note the pref. b' 
 (for m) in 6olau. 
 
 Bu, d., verbal pron., 1 pi., excL, 
 dual moa : d. au, dual ara. 
 
 Bua, d. bobu (q.v.),voc., maternal 
 grandfather : c. art. tobu na, 
 q.v. [Fut. bua.] 
 
 Bu (nalo), v. t., to see (a thing). 
 See bunu, bunu sia. [Santo d. 
 vi to see.] A. ba"a' (final w 
 or u) to look upon, observe. 
 
 Bu, s., c. art., a bundle. [Fi. ai 
 vau.] See bau si and afa, 
 
 Bua, v., divide, as ta bua i cut, 
 divide it (cut it open), mafua, 
 and tabua, to be rent open, 
 cracked, ti bua i press rend it 
 (press burst it open, as new 
 
boa] 
 
 wine old wine skins), and fai 
 (or fae) in magafai a half, a 
 division (of a thing), and lao 
 fai (see fai). [Sa. vaega a divi- 
 sion, vaevae to divide in parts, 
 cut up, mavae to be split, to 
 be cracked open.] A. fa'a, 
 n. a., fa'w', or fa'y', 1, 4, to 
 split, cleave, 7, to be open, to 
 be separated, rent, cleft. 
 
 I. Bua, V. i., to be empty, vacant, 
 having nothing (as an empty 
 cocoanut), tabu, i.e., ta bu, 
 men having nothing, or naked 
 (name applied to the naked 
 people of some neighbouring 
 islands, i.e., people who use no 
 waist cloth). A. bahiya to be 
 empty and bare (as a house). 
 
 It. Bua, and bubu, d. mobu, 
 v. i., and a., to be deep (as the 
 sea, or a pit), i toko bua (said 
 of a yam down in the ground), 
 ebu or ebua in the deep part 
 (of a thing), i toko ebu or ebua, 
 and sofa ni ebu is consumption 
 or phthisis in the deep part 
 (i.e., inside) of the body (deep- 
 seated) ; ebua the abyss. Hades, 
 Malo abua, id., bua-riri abyss. 
 Hades (riri to sink), and bu-gia, 
 or bu bu-gia to sink deep, d. na 
 tibu the deep. [Ma. kopua 
 deep, An. ubo deep. Pi. tobu, 
 d. nubu, deep.] A. 'amuha 
 and ma'uka, 1, to be deep, 
 also, to be distant, far off 
 (eniai, ufea), 4, make deep, 6, 
 to be deep, H. 'amak to be 
 deep, 'ameli, 'amik deep, E. 
 'amaka to be deep, 'muk deep, 
 ma'mak any deipth, a valley, 
 the abyss (Hades). 
 
 HI. Bua or fua (in na fua-goro, 
 
 58 [bd gia 
 
 d. na mua-goro, a spring on th& 
 shore covered by the flood 
 tide), so called because the- 
 sea mua gor ia flows over it, 
 and mua v. i., to flow (the- 
 tide) ; 
 
 Buafua, v., na tas i buafua, or 
 naron i buafua the sea or 
 current flows or carries things 
 floating on it ; 
 
 Bua tia, v. t., to take (make to- 
 
 go); 
 
 Bue a, V. t., make to flow upon 
 (a thing), pour upon, moisten. 
 [Ha. puai to flow, as blood from 
 a vein, or water from a 
 fountain, to cast up ; to boil 
 up, as -water from a spring. 
 My. buwang eject, expel, oast.] 
 H. naba' to bubble forth, gush 
 out, Ch., S., A. naba', naba". 
 " The primary syllable is ba', 
 ba", like bak, imitating the 
 sound or murmur of boiling or 
 bubbling." Cf. egg. H. bu'a to 
 swell up, Arm. bg'a' to boil 
 up, H. ba'ah make to swell 
 and boil, A. ba"a to gurgle out 
 (as blood). The connection 
 between the ideas of goinct 
 or flowing out and taking out 
 (making to go out) is seen in 
 the eg. Ch. nSpak to go out, 
 caus. to take out, and also in 
 H. yabal to flow, caus. to bring, 
 bear, carry. 
 
 Bubu, V. i., to gargle. [Sa. pupu 
 to gargle.] See under pre- 
 ceding word, and cf. A. 
 ba'ba', or ba'ba'u gurgling 
 sound of water flowing from a 
 bottle or flask. 
 
 Bua na. See bui na. 
 
 Bu gia, and 
 
bubu-gia] 
 
 Bubu-gia, v. t., to sink down, to 
 dip (anything), put it down 
 into the water ; uta bugi 
 rarua load a canoe deep ; 
 
 Bubu, V. i., to be deep : bua ii. 
 
 Buele, d. bole, v. i., to be lost, 
 missing. [My. ilang to lose, ' 
 be lost, missing, Mg. very 
 lost, missed.] A. s'a'a to be 
 lost, missing. 
 
 Bugafuga, v. i., to be awake, to 
 awake, bugo nia, v. t., to 
 awaken one. [Sa. fagufagu, 
 fafagu to waken, rovise from 
 sleep, ps. fagua, Mg. foha, 
 fohafoha imp., awake, mifoha, 
 V. i., to awake, mamoha, v. 
 t., to awake, fohazina being 
 awakened.] Nm. fak, v. i., to 
 awake, 2, 4, v. t., awaken. 
 
 Bugo nia, v. t., to awaken. See 
 preceding word. 
 
 Bui na, or bua na, s., c. art., 
 backbone, tail, rump. [JFi. bui 
 tail, Fut. bua back, To. mui 
 after, the iiindermost end, tip, 
 or extremity of anything, Sa. 
 muli the end, the rump, Mg. 
 voho the back.] See muri. 
 
 Buigo, or iigo, v. i., to lote the 
 way, be at a stand, perplexed, 
 not knowing the way. [Com- 
 pare Sa. pogia to be be- 
 nighted.] See bog. 
 
 I. Buka, V. i., to be filled, swell 
 out, as the belly when filled 
 with food, or as a sail filled 
 with wind ; namarita na i 
 buka his belly is puiTed up or 
 swollen, or pants (with rage), 
 mafukafuka to be swollen or 
 puffed up, nafukana the being 
 swollen or puffed up. [Mg. 
 voky satiated, filled, mimoky. 
 
 59 [buka ia 
 
 V. i., mamoky, v. t., vokisana, 
 havokisana. My. bakat stuffed,, 
 filled, Ma. puku to swell.] A. 
 nafah'a to inflate, 8, to be in- 
 flated, to swell, naph'ai' in- 
 flation of the belly, manfuh' 
 ventrosus ; obese. 
 
 Biika, s., a swell, as a ground 
 swell. [My. bakat, id.] See- 
 buka. 
 
 Buk, s., as nabuk natamole a 
 band of men, [H. puu, a 
 gathering or collection, sign of 
 plural number, he puu kanaka 
 a gathering or band of men.] 
 See buka. 
 
 Note. — This word is used 
 in Ef. also for a gathering or- 
 collection of things, thus : 
 nabuk anena i oni au I am in 
 his debt, but lit. his collection 
 of things (which he has given 
 me) remains on me {i.e., I 
 have not yet repaid it). 
 
 II. Buka sia, or buki sia, v. t.,. 
 to open, as a roll of bloth, 
 buka tia (uwa) open the oven. 
 [My. buka to open, unclose, 
 uncover, Mg. voha opened,, 
 mimoha, v. i., mamoha, v. t., 
 to open.] A. fakka, v. t., to 
 open. 
 
 in. Buka, v. i., to bark (a dog), 
 buka ia bark at it, bukai 
 kusiie bark at a rat, d. syn. 
 oro-maki; also, buka to cough. 
 H. naball, A. naballa to bark 
 (a dog). Formed from the 
 sound. A. nabalia is followed 
 by ace. with or without a prep. 
 
 IV. Buka ia, v. t., to hit upon,, 
 meet, fall in with, find, as i 
 ba bukai uago buele he hit 
 upon, met, fell in with, or 
 
BUKAEU] 
 
 found a lost pig. H. paga' id., 
 as ill Ex. xxiii. 4. 
 
 Bukaru, or bakaru, d. fakaru, v., 
 to joke, jest, bukaru ki, v. t., 
 mock, deride. [My. gurau to 
 joke, and kara, id., bargurau, 
 nianggurau, joke, jest, maiig- 
 gurau-kan, v. t., mock, deride.] 
 A. kahara, 5), laugh, joke. 
 
 Buko na, s., c. art., protuberance 
 or knob, as nabuko naui pro- 
 tuberance or knob of a yam. 
 [Ha. puu.] See buka i. 
 
 Bukoro, s., enclosure round a 
 house at its base, name of a 
 tree and its fruit (from its 
 kernel being endoseA), a proper 
 name (of men). [Ma. pukoro 
 sheath, case, halo, net.] See 
 koro. 
 
 Bukota, V. i., or a., to be dark- 
 coloured, dirty, blackish (as 
 water with dust or earth in 
 it) : gota. 
 
 Bukubukura, a., full of little 
 swellings (pimples) : ra a. end- 
 ing. [Ha. puupuu, id.; Sa. 
 po'u pimple, po'upo'ua full of 
 pimples.] See buka I. 
 
 Bukutu, s., a rise, hill. [Ha. 
 puu, id., My. bukit a hill.] 
 See buka i. 
 
 Bul-meta na, s., eyeball, gleam- 
 ing, part of eye. See bila. 
 
 Bula, mbula, d. for feila, q.v., 
 big, large. 
 
 BulS, a., adult, nafera bulS a lot 
 of grown up men (adults). 
 A. bala"a to reach mature or 
 full age, bali" adult ; and 
 
 I. Bule, V. t., complete, used 
 after other verbs adverbially, 
 as i ba bule nafanua he went 
 completely through the land. 
 
 60 [bdlo 
 
 le bule nagusu it (a canoe) 
 completely rounded the point, 
 nafisan i soka. bule nafanua 
 the word shot (lit. leaped) 
 through the whole land, from 
 end to end, noai i sera fule 
 (or fulefule) nalia the water 
 ran completely throughout the 
 place. Bule is really a verb, 
 in these instances, in appo- 
 sition to the verb preceding 
 it, as he went — completed 
 (finished) the land, &c. [My. 
 bulah the whole. To. full all.] 
 A. bala"a, n. a. bulu" to com- 
 plete, go through to the end. 
 
 II. Bule, V. t., to strip off leaves, 
 ora naui i bule nakasu the 
 yam vine strips off leaves from 
 the tree, maf ule to be stripped 
 of leaves (a tree). [My. bulus 
 stripped of leaves.] A. 'abala 
 1, 2, to strip off leaves, foliis 
 nudavit arborem. 
 
 Bule, s., a shell, lit., gleaming, 
 shining, glittering. See bila. 
 
 Bulibog, d. for bilibog, for bulo- 
 bog : bulo. 
 
 Bfili, s., a corpulent person ; 
 
 Bulla, a., swollen ; and 
 
 Bulifulia, a., swollen here and 
 there (the body), a a. ending, 
 and mabulu and fuluara, q.v. 
 [Sa. fula stout, fulafula swel- 
 ling, fulafula, fufula to be 
 swollen.] H. 'afal, prop, to 
 swell up, be tumid, A. 'afila 
 to have a tumour or hernia. 
 See telatela. 
 
 Bulai, s., d. for belaki, and 
 
 Bulai, V. t., d. for belaki, to gird. 
 
 Bulo, V. i., d. for bilo. Bulo is 
 also thus used: iga uo bulo (bo) 
 mai, he will come by-and-by, 
 
BULO NIa] 
 
 lit. he will awake and come 
 (of a ship, man, or thing), 
 hence bulo-bog morning, lit. 
 awaking of day, or night, 
 bulo aaa, bulo metamai, and d. 
 bulbog, &c., and bilebog (for 
 bilo-bog) ; 
 
 Bulb nia, v. t., to awaken ; bulo 
 nameta na open his eyes ; 
 
 Bulobulo i, V. t., awaken him. 
 See bilo. 
 
 Bulo ki, V. t., to turn, to twist, 
 also bulo sia, bulu sia, buli 
 sia, taf olo to be turned, twisted, 
 tafulus to be turned, bologa, 
 to turn itself (as a thing in 
 sinking in water), taflloga, id., 
 bulora, or filora (ending ra), 
 twisted, confused (as a lot of 
 things turned or twisted about). 
 [My. pulas, Ja. pulir to wring, 
 twist, to turn aside (out of the 
 way), to turn, turn round, Sa. 
 milo to twist, mimilo, milo- 
 milo, ps. milosia, milosi, to be 
 twisted, to be perverse, milo- 
 milosi, Fi. mulo-ca to twist a 
 single thread, Ma. miro to 
 spin, twist, mimiro to move 
 swiftly, miro, s., thread, a 
 whirling current of water.] 
 A. malla, n. a. mallo, to turn, 
 to twist round ; to twist one- 
 self about, malmala, 2, to roll 
 oneself about, malla to hasten, 
 move quickly. 
 
 Buloki, V. i., or a., to be sticky, 
 d. bubulu. See bulu tia. 
 
 Bulora, v. i., or a., to be twisted; 
 a. ending ra. See bulo ki. 
 
 Bulu sia, or bulo sia, or bilo sia, 
 V. t., to wash. See balo nia. 
 
 Bulu sia, bulo sia, or buli sia, v, 
 t., to turn. See bulo ki. 
 
 61 [bulu aki 
 
 Bulu tia, V. t., to plaster, over- 
 spread with some sticky sub- 
 stance (as lime, paint, pitch),, 
 to cover with a plaster or 
 poultice, as a wound, nabulu, 
 s., plaster, (fee, bubulu, bulu- 
 bulut, buloki (and mabulu, 
 q.v.), to be sticky, as plaster. 
 [Fi. bulu-ta to bury or cover 
 with earth, to apply an ex- 
 ternal remedy, ai bulu an 
 external application or thing 
 that covers or buries, Sa. 
 puluti to glue, to pitch, 
 pulu glue, gum, resin, pulu- 
 pulu to cover the body with 
 a cloth, pupulu to interpose, 
 to meditate, ps. pulutia. Pi. 
 bulu-ta to repair an injury, 
 lit. to bury it, ai bulubulu a 
 peace offering, or thing offered 
 as a reparation of an injury.] 
 H. kapar, A. "afara to cover, 
 cover over : A. "afara to cover, 
 cover over ; to cover (white 
 hairs, with some dye or 
 tincture, Ef . bulu tia) ; to 
 pardon (sin), 2, to cover with 
 dust, H. kapar to cover, over- 
 spread with anything, as with 
 pitch, to pitch, Gen. vi. 14 
 (H. koper pitch); to cover (i.e., 
 pardon) sin. Pi. to make expia- 
 tion for au offence. 
 
 Bulu, bulufulu, and fulufulu : 
 bule I. 
 
 Bulu, V. i., to fall down (as fruit 
 from a tree, &c.), mala bulu 
 faint, fall down (a man), and 
 
 Bulu aki, v. t., throw down (as 
 firewood, &c.), (make to fall 
 down). H. napal to fall, S. 
 npal, Ch. ngpal, id.. Hi. hipil 
 to throw down (make to fall). 
 
BULU AKi] 
 
 Bulu aki, d. for bulo ki, to turn, 
 twist. 
 
 Bulum, or buliima, d. bulim, v. i., 
 to be changed, lit. turned : 
 luma. 
 
 Bum a, V. i., d. fuga, to flower or 
 blossom, nabuma na, s., its 
 flower or blossom. [Ml. P. pug 
 to blossom, pugan its flower 
 or blossom, Sa. fuga flowers, 
 blossoms. My. bunga flowers, 
 blossoms, Mg. vony flower, ma- 
 mony to blossom.] S. habeb 
 to produce flowers, hababa', or 
 habobo', flower. 
 
 Buna sum ia, v. t., to cork, plug, 
 hence 
 
 Bunaso, or funaso, s., c. art., a 
 cork or plug : see bono tia, 
 or bunu tia, and sume lia. 
 
 Bunats, d. for binata. 
 
 Bunofunoi, d. binofinoi, v. r., to 
 be confused, perplexed. See 
 binoinoi : noi, no i, no ia, nea. 
 
 Buma, s., an insect that makes a 
 shrill sound in the jungle in 
 the evening, hence buma i gai 
 (the buma makes its sound) is 
 often used for " it is getting 
 dark," " it is evening." 
 
 Bunu, d. for fanau, q.v. 
 
 Bunu lia, v. t., d. for balo nia, 
 bulu nia, 
 
 Bunu sia (bu-nusi a), v. t., to see 
 (a thing) : bu. 
 
 Bunu, s., death, destruction, as 
 ru sua bunu ; 
 
 Bunu ea, v. t., to kill or destroy 
 (fish, men, &c.), to extinguish 
 or quench (a fire, or lamp), ru 
 sua bunu they met destruction 
 (having fallen into the sea), 
 mafunufunu and mafunei, d. 
 fanei, to be ended, to be anni- 
 
 62 [buea 
 
 hilated. [My. bunoh to kill, 
 mambunoh, mamunoh to kill, 
 Mg. vono killed, mamono to 
 kill.] Hence 
 
 Bunufunu, redup. of preceding 
 word. A. fana', disappear, 
 pass away, vanish, 4, make 
 disappear, destroy, annihilate, 
 5, destroy and annihilate (wipe 
 out) each other (in war), fani 
 caducus. 
 
 Bunu tia, v. t., same as bono tia. 
 Hence 
 
 Bunutia, s., hundred, d. bunti 
 (cf. bon) ; and 
 
 Bunuta (and bunta), v. i., or a., 
 to be silent, lit. to be shut 
 (the mouth), ba funuta, be 
 silent, exactly equivalent to 
 the vulgar English " shut up," 
 hence nafunuta, s., a silent 
 person, one that says little (a 
 term of praise). 
 
 Bur, d. for 6ila, bula, to be big, 
 large. 
 
 Bura, or fiira, v. i., or a., to be 
 empty, to be devoid of, as i bi 
 an fura it is an empty shadow, 
 a bura ki nalo I am empty of 
 the thing, devoid of it, A. 
 fara"a, 1, 2, to empty. See 
 6avo. Hence 
 
 Bura, s., rubbish ; nabura naniu 
 the husk of the cocoanut, 
 nabura na the husk or worth- 
 less part of a thing : hence the 
 stalk of a fruit (as a worthless 
 thing thrown away as rubbish) 
 is called in different dialects 
 bura-tena, bura-gitena, bara- 
 tuna, biri-gitena, and miri- 
 gitena, i.e., the bura of it. 
 
 Biira, d. biri, v. i., or a., to be 
 full, bakafura to fill. [Mg. 
 
bueafuba] 
 
 feno full, mameno to fill, My. 
 panoh full, mS.ma,nohi to fill.] 
 H. mala' to fill, to be full, Pi. 
 to fill ; with another verb, to do 
 anything yttZZy, i.e., thoroughly, 
 .so Ef. bera-tia, d. bera-katia, as 
 lo b., look fully or thoroughly 
 at it, i.e., watch it, rogo b., 
 hear fully, i.e., obey, i uia b. 
 it is good fully, i.e., thoroughly 
 good, and it can also be said 
 tea berakati na, i.e., tea anena 
 berakati a thing fully or 
 thoroughly his ; A. mala', S. 
 mla', same as H. Hence 
 
 Burafura, furafura, s., the jungle, 
 forest, vegetation : so called 
 because it fills the land. A 
 place covered with any kind 
 of weeds, &c., is called nalia 
 bura a full place. 
 
 Bura-gitena, and 
 
 Bura-tena, see bura, s. 
 
 Burasa. See marasa. 
 
 Burau, s., a long or tall cloud ; 
 the sky : eg. barau. 
 
 Bui*e ia, fure ia, or bure a, 
 burei ki, furei ki, v. t., to 
 wash, rub, as bure naui wash 
 oflf the earth from a yam, 
 furei ki natuo na cleanse his 
 feet, furei ki lu nasoga, bure 
 biakik wash, cleanse a child, 
 bure nabau na ki narora rub his 
 hair witli oil, oil his hair. H. 
 marak (rub), polish, cleanse 
 by washing or anointing (egg. 
 marah, &c.) 
 
 Bure ia, or bura ia, v. t., d., to 
 leave, allow, forsake, abandon. 
 A. bara', 3, to leave, abandon. 
 [My. bir, to permit, allow.] 
 ■ Burei a, d. marag ki, v., to spit 
 out, to spit, to spit on. A., 4, 
 
 63 [buru 
 
 mara"a to emit saliva, bar', 
 mar" saliva. 
 
 Bur ia, buri, v. t., to pierce, 
 stick, buri uago stick a pig : 
 d. for biri. 
 
 Buria, V. i., or a., to be swollen 
 (of the body), to have the 
 dropsy. [Ma. kopurua drop- 
 sical, My. buru elephantiasis, 
 burut hernia.] The a in buria 
 is the a. ending. A. nabara to 
 laise up, heap up, 8, to swell, 
 uabrai a swelling on the body. 
 
 Buria (bauria, bouria), v., to 
 kindle or make a fire (in the 
 oven), ru buria ua (uwa), and 
 ru buria, they make a fire in 
 the oven, or, simply, they 
 make a fire, kindle up : this is 
 done every evening about an 
 hour before sunset. See bara 
 (H. ba'ar), and compare H. 
 bo'erah kindled (an oven). 
 
 Burog, V. i., or a., offensive, 
 mouldy, filthy (as food). [Ma. 
 puru mouldy, and kopuru, 
 kopurupuru, id.] A. mara"a 
 to be contaminated. 
 
 Buru masila, v. i., to roar (of 
 thunder), tifai i buru masila, 
 d. boro silaia, the thunder 
 roars, or thunders sounding : 
 for masila and silaia see sila. 
 [TaSa. biri thunder, and to 
 thunder, Ml. P. omburumbur, 
 Ml. A. amburambui', to roar 
 (of thunder), TaSa. roro to 
 roar (of thunder), Ml. P. 
 berver thunder.] H. ra'am 
 to roar (as thunder), ra'am 
 thunder, S. r'em to thunder, 
 ramo' thunder. 
 
 Buru, burufuru, v. i., or a., to be 
 short : d. »nito, q.v. 
 
liURUMA Kl] 
 
 i>uruma ki, or beruma (or biruma) 
 ki, v., to be in the relation 
 of son-in-law to parent-in-law, 
 or of parent-in-law to son-in- 
 law, syn. monaki (mo-naki) ; 
 
 Buruma, or biruma, c. art. na 
 buruma, s., one in that rela- 
 tion, son-in-law, mother-in-law, 
 father-in-law : see mo na. E. 
 (hamwa) tallamwa to contract 
 affinity, to be joined in affinity 
 (with someone), to marry the 
 daughter of someone, talima 
 affinity, specially the relation 
 between a father-in-law and 
 son-in-law, then (abstract for 
 concrete) son-in-law. 
 
 Busa, V. i., or a., redup. busafusa, 
 to be young, springing up (of 
 plants and animals), hence to 
 be inexperienced, foolish, to 
 be spotted (the skin, as with 
 cold, (fee.) [My. mud -a young, 
 immature, not deep in colour 
 (light), foolish.] A. wabis'a 
 to be spotted (with white and 
 black spots, as the nails or 
 skin), 4, to germinate, or put 
 forth plants (the soil). 
 
 Busa, s., or a., dumb, mute. A. 
 yabisa to be arid (see bes), 4, 
 to be silent, mute. 
 
 Busa, a., orphaned, meta busa 
 orphan. A. yabisa to be arid, 
 dry. An orphan is called 
 meta busa because deprived of 
 it's mother's milk. See bes, 
 besu. 
 
 Busi, V. i., to blow, spout (as a 
 whale). [Sa. pusa to send up 
 a smoke (also applied to spray, 
 dust, and heat), Tah. puha to 
 blow (as a whale), puhepuhi 
 to blow out of the mouth. 
 
 64 [buta 
 
 blow, as with bellows, Ha. 
 puhi to blow or puff, breaihe 
 hard, blow a trumpet, ifec, 
 Mg. fofotra blow^ing the bel- 
 lows, mifofotra to blow the 
 bellows. My. &mbus to blow, 
 make a current of air, am- 
 busan bellows, ambusi to blow, 
 drive a current of air.] A. 
 nafatha, i.q. nafall'a, to blow 
 with the mouth, blow out, 
 puff, eject venom from the 
 mouth (as a serpent), eject 
 spittle (a man). 
 
 Busa, s., nabusa a mist. See 
 under preceding word. 
 
 Bus ia, V. t., d., to lay down, 
 leave, and bis ia in turn bis ia 
 leave, abandon, allow ; 
 
 Busfus ki, d., redup., d. for 
 bure ia, or bura ia, q.v. 
 
 Busi a, or fusi a, v. t., d. for 
 muri a, q.v. [Mg. fody re- 
 turned, sent back.] 
 
 Busa ia, or fusa ia, v. t., break 
 or smash to pieces, smash (as 
 a yam), mafusai ps. H. pus, 
 or fus to break in pieces. 
 
 Buta, d., in meta-buta blind, lit. 
 eye dark. [Fi. matabuto faint, 
 buto darkness, Sa. matapo 
 blind, matapogia faint, My. 
 buta blind.] See bog, batu. 
 A. 'amiya to be blind, "umiya' 
 to be faint. 
 
 Buta, or futa, v. i., to spring up 
 or out, as water from a 
 spring ; to spring up or out, as 
 smoke from a fire ; to spring 
 out, as a musket ball from 
 a wound — i si buta ia he 
 shot him, the bullet springing 
 out from or glancing off his 
 body, wounding but not fatal ; 
 
butaputa] 
 
 Butafuta, d. futfut, redup., to 
 spring up or out, as water 
 from a spring ; 
 
 Butu-raki, or buti-raki, d., v. i., 
 to appear, come in sight. [Ma. 
 puta, V. i., pass through, in or 
 out, come in sight, My. tftrbit 
 to issue, come out, emanate, 
 spring, arise, appear, escape.] 
 A. nabata to spring up or out, 
 as water from a spring, 4, ps. 
 form, to appear, go or come 
 forth, come in sight. 
 
 Butaki, dd. mitaki, milai, q.v. 
 
 But, d. for Jota, unmarried. 
 
 Butia, or buti a, or futi a, v. t., to 
 pluck, as a fowl, pluck out or 
 up, as weeds, mafuta to be 
 plucked. [Fi. vuti-a to pluck 
 feathers, hairs off animals, 
 hence, to pull up grass or 
 weeds, Sa. futi to pluck 
 feathers or hairs, fufuti, ps. 
 futia. My. bantun to pluck, 
 pull out.] A. namasa, 1, 2, 
 to pluck out, as hairs. 
 
 Buti a (for ba-uti a), v., d. for 
 bakauti a, q.v. [Mg. vita com- 
 pleted, finished, mamita to 
 finish.] 
 
 Bute (lua i), v. t., to praise. A. 
 madaha to praise. 
 
 fluti na, 6iti na, s., a knob or 
 excrescence growing on a tree, 
 a joint (from its bulging out). 
 See 6otu. 
 
 Butili, bitili, fitili, v. r., to speak 
 of each other, speak of one 
 behind his back : till a. 
 
 Buto, V. i., to germinate, bud. 
 A. nabata germinate. Hence 
 
 Buto na, s., bud, d. muto na. 
 
 Buto na, s., navel, then middle; 
 malebuto (lit. the place of the 
 
 65 [e 
 
 middle), the middle (of the 
 body, a land, anything), d. but, 
 hence d. tu-but rainbow, lit. 
 stand in the middle (of the 
 sky). [TaSa. buto navel, taga 
 nabute stomach. To. bito, Sa. 
 pute, Tah. pito navel, Tah. 
 pitopito a button.] See pre- 
 ceding word and 6otu : the 
 navel is the knob, as it were 
 the bud (bursting or swelling 
 out). (Compare navel, from 
 nave, prob. from nabh to 
 burst.) 
 
 Butol, V. i., d. for bitelo, q.v. 
 
 Butua, V. t., d. for bitua, to 
 place, lay down, give ; ta 
 bituatua to speak (or pray) 
 while giving (or laying down) 
 an offering (to the natemate). 
 Hence 
 
 Butut, s. , a place where offerings 
 to the natemate are put : now 
 used for " altar." 
 
 Note. — The verb butua or 
 bitua is the reflexive of tua 
 ki : ba butua ki go backwards 
 and forwards between two 
 things, to halt between two 
 opinions. 
 
 Buturaki. See under buta, supra. 
 
 E 
 
 , article, for a, sometimes i : 
 a, ng, na, in. 
 E, dem., this, that, as mal e (for 
 mala uai) that time, then : e 
 is a contraction for uai ; rag 
 uai this time, now. See i 
 (d.), dem. This e, or i, is 
 used also as a tense particle — 
 see i. 
 
 6 
 
E, or i, prep., in, on ; t. prep. : 
 ani, ni, a, 1. [Sa. i in, at, 
 with, to, from, for, of, on, on 
 account of, concerning. Ma. i 
 of, &c., and t. prep.. My. i t. 
 prep., Fi. e, or i, in, with or 
 by (instrumental).] A. li, 
 H. Is, T. ng, Gurague ya, 
 
 _ or ia. 
 
 E, inter, ad., where 1 See se. 
 
 Ei, ad., yes. [Mg. ey, Sa. e, id.] 
 A. ey, or ei, yes. 
 
 Ei a, or ei ia, ad., yes, that's it : 
 preceding word, and dem. 
 
 Ei eri, ad., d. syn. ei a : ei, and 
 eri dem. 
 
 Ei, ad., here, d. i, q.v. 
 
 El (e-i), ad., no, it is not. [Er. 
 eyi, Mg. ai, id.] Neg. ad. e, 
 and i, dem. H. 'i, E. 'i, not. 
 
 Eba, V. See tali^eba, tali-ofa. 
 
 Ebau, ad., at the head (of the 
 island, i.e., the east), opp. to 
 etu at the foot (west) ; e prep, 
 and bau. 
 
 E6ago, ad., in the end (of the 
 house), inside : e prep., and 
 6ago. 
 
 Ebua, or ebu, ad., in the deep : 
 e prep., and bua ii. Also 
 ebua, s., the abyss. Hades. 
 
 Ebut d., in the middle ; e prep., 
 and but, d. for buto, q.v. 
 
 Egura, s., the stick used for 
 spreading (scraping) out the 
 heated stones of the oven : e 
 art., and gura ia. 
 
 Eis, ad., same as ais. 
 
 Eka na, s., a relative, family 
 connection. See aka. 
 
 Ekatema, ad., on the outside of 
 the house, outside : e prep., 
 and katema, q.v. 
 
 Eksakes, d. for kesakesa, q.v. 
 
 66 [eku 
 
 Eko, s. See neko, 
 
 Ekobu, ad., in the inside, in the 
 house, inside : e prep., and 
 kobu. 
 
 Eia, d. for elau. 
 
 Elagi, ad., ands., above, heaven . 
 e prep,, and lagi, q.v. 
 
 Elalo, or elalu, ad., in front, 
 before : e prep., and lalo, or 
 lalu, see alo, or alu na. 
 
 Elau, ad., on the sea, by the sea : 
 e prep., andlau 
 
 Elo, s., d. alo, the sun : ali. 
 
 Elo, or hV, V. i., to be sweet, 
 pleasant, agreeable, redup. 
 lolo. [Ha. olu to be pleasant, 
 agreeable.] A. bala', llalw', id. 
 
 Elol, ad., d., in the belly, inside : 
 e prep., alo na, lalo na. 
 
 Emai (or emai), ad., in the dis- 
 tance, afar, far away ; d. ufea : 
 e prep., and mai. [Sa. mao, 
 mamao to be far off, distant, 
 mamao, ad., far off, distant.] 
 A. ma'oka to be far off, dis- 
 tant, ma'k' distance. 
 
 Emalebuto, ad., in the middle, 
 inside : e prep., and malebuto 
 na. 
 
 Emate n, s., d. for namatigo na, 
 the grave : mate. 
 
 Enea, or inia, d., personal pron., 
 3 sing., he, she, it, dd. nai, 
 niga, kinini. 
 
 Enera, or inira, pi. of preceding 
 word, they, dd. nara, nigar, 
 kiniara. 
 
 En', vulgar pronunciation some- 
 times heard for nunu to wipe, 
 rub off. 
 
 Eni, v., d. for ani, contracted en, 
 an, to abide, be. 
 
 Enu, pers. pron., 1 sing., I, dd. 
 anu, kinau, kinu, keino. 
 
ERE Na] 
 
 Ere na, or feri na, d., mother. See 
 ani na, note. 
 
 Erai, dem., d., this : arai. 
 
 Eri, dem., this. See arai. 
 
 Erik, dem., this, here. See s. 
 arai and ka. 
 
 Eru, dem., same as eri, d. nro, nra. 
 
 Eru, s., c. art. nieru, arms, war : 
 aru na. 
 
 Esan, ad., here, there, and 
 
 Esanien, id., and 
 
 Esas, id. : e prep., and the de- 
 monstrative particles se, na, 
 q.v. See ais (eis). [My. sini, 
 sika, here, sana, sanan, situ, 
 there, and with prep, disini 
 here, disana, disitu there, Mg. 
 ato, eto, aty, ety, here.] 
 
 Esega. See asaga. 
 
 Esike, s., a forked stick, that 
 which sike tia grasps, seizes : 
 sike tia, e art. 
 
 Esai, or esei, s., the open, open 
 space, d. esai leba a road, lit. 
 
 _ big open space : sai. 
 
 Eso, or esa, d., ad. , yes : ei (supra), 
 
 _ and so or sa, dem. 
 
 Esu, d., ad., outside, away, e 
 prep, and su. [Of. Ei. esau 
 (e sau) on the outside, sausau 
 outskirts, sausau' kei vuravura 
 ends or outsides of the earth.] 
 H. hSsu, or liSu only, pi. 
 kaswe, kiswoth ends or ex- 
 tremities (of the earth), A. 
 kasa', n. a. kasw', kasa' to 
 stand apart, be afar oif. 
 
 Esuma, ad., in the house, at 
 home : e prep., and suma. 
 
 Et, V. i., or a., d., to be many. 
 Cf. A. 'ad a' to be many. 
 
 Etaku, ad., at the back, behind. 
 [Sa. i tua, id.] E prep., and 
 taku na. 
 
 67 [fafin'e 
 
 Etan, ad., on the ground, down : 
 e prep., and tano the ground. 
 
 Etu, ad., at the foot (of the 
 island, i.e., the west, opp. to 
 ebau) : e prep., and tua na 
 the foot. 
 
 Eiio (ewo), ad., no, it is not : e, 
 _ as in ei, and uo dem. 
 
 Euta, ad., on shore, ashore, on 
 land, opp. to elau : e prep., 
 and uta. 
 
 F 
 
 a (and f8 or fi), inter, pron., c. 
 dem. sa or se, safa, sefa, what 1 
 also where ? It is ma in 
 matuna, q.v. A. ma', H. mah 
 what ? 
 
 Faa na, s., d. mao na, the thigh : 
 mao. See bua, fai. 
 
 Fa, or ba, q.v., to go. 
 
 Faf a-sia, v. t. , redup. of ba-sia, to 
 tread upon (of many). 
 
 Fa, d. for mau, in mal fa nin = 
 male mau ua = this very 
 time, now. 
 
 Fafan, for bafano, to wash the 
 hands. 
 
 Fafaga, redup. of faga. 
 
 Fafatu, v. r., to trust, confide, 
 fafatu isa to trust or confide 
 in him, or in it. See under 
 fatu. 
 
 Faflne, s., d.,a woman(i.«., wife- 
 man), and, a., female. Fa-fine 
 (see Note 3, infra) is fa (for 
 which see mera, infra, man in 
 general), and fine a female, 
 and denotes lit. female-man, as 
 ata-mani denotes lit. male-man. 
 [Sa. fafine, Fut. fine, Mg. 
 vavy, My. parampiian woman, 
 
FAGAN Ia] 68 
 
 female, bini a wife.] H. 
 nkebah, f., a woman, a female 
 (a genitalium figura dicta) of 
 persons, and of beasts, S. 
 nekebta', pi. nekbata'. 
 
 Note 1. — The ni in fafine, 
 fine, the same as the ni in 
 kuruni and atamani and the 
 final n of the My. parampiiau, 
 is a suflixed particle ; fafi-ni 
 is thus the same as vavy, and 
 the difference between fafi-iii 
 and fi-ni is that the former has 
 fa or va prefixed. In fy (fi, 
 vy), as also (as it occurs in 
 various dialects) in fu, ueo, 
 bio, bo, foya, bayi (Santo d. 
 nekepai), bai, bua, the ancient 
 feminine termination, t, or th, 
 as in the H. form of the word, 
 is not heard : it is heard, as 
 in the Aramaic form of the 
 word, in matu (ivfra), bite 
 (-riki), or fite (-riki), Ja. wedo, 
 other dialects but, fid. 
 
 Note 2. — In Santo dd. 
 occur katsai, karai, a woman, 
 female : with katsai compares 
 Ysabel gase ; and with karai 
 Efate kurui, or koroi, kuruni, 
 nagurui, naguruni, Wango 
 urao : these belong to another 
 stem, for which see s. v. lai. 
 
 Note 3. — The fa, or va, in 
 fafini, vavy, is the same (by 
 elision of the r) as the para in 
 My. pSrampuan, Ja. parawan 
 or prawan (Ta. dd. pilaven, 
 bran, New Guinea d. mer- 
 wine). 
 
 Fagan ia, v. c, same as bagan ia, 
 q.v. Hence 
 
 Fagafaga, v., redup., and 
 
 Fagafaga, s., a bait, and 
 
 [fakaruku 
 
 Faga, s., that which is given to 
 eat, food ; a present, a bribe. 
 
 Fai (vai), c. art. nifai, dd. noai 
 (n'uai, i.e., n'wai), nai (n'ai), s., 
 water. [An. inwai, Er. nu, 
 Ml. nue, Epi ue, Sa., Fut. vai, 
 Ma. wai, Bouru dd. wai, waili, 
 Ceram dd. wai, waeli, arr. My. 
 ayer, i.e., ay (ai), and er.] H. 
 ma' unused in sing., pi. maim 
 construct, me' water; Nm. mai, 
 E. mai, water. 
 
 Fai, V. t., d., divide or cleave, as 
 lao fai plunge into, cleaving 
 fwith a spear) : bua to divide, 
 cleave, and see also maga-fai. 
 
 Fai, s., a, skate (fish). [Cf. My. 
 pari. Tag. pagi, skate fish.] 
 Der. unknown. 
 
 Fakal ia, same as bakal ia I. 
 Hence 
 
 Fakal, a. (in active sense) kano 
 fakal a comforting person, 
 comforter (in passive sense), 
 uago fakal domestic or tame 
 animals, lit. pigs cared for, or 
 taken care of. 
 
 Fakalo, or fakal, s., war. [My. 
 barkalahi (kalahi) to fight, to 
 quarrel, kalahi fight, quarrel.] 
 (Mahri ghorat war), H. garah, 
 Hith., to make war (with any- 
 one). 
 
 Fakamatua, s., c. art., an ancient 
 story : matua, tuai. 
 
 Fakamauri, i.q. bakamauri, q.v. 
 
 Fakarago, s., c. art., the rough 
 prickly scab that forms on a 
 sore : rago. 
 
 Fakarogo, i.q. bakarogo 
 
 Fakaru, i.q. bakaru. See bu- 
 karu. 
 
 Fakaruku, s., the under part, as 
 na fakaruku ki nakasu the 
 
fakasa] 
 
 under part of a tree (i.e., shade 
 or shelter under its overhead 
 foliage), ki nauot (tig.) the 
 shelter or protection of a chief : 
 rukua (and the caus. prefix), 
 
 Fakasa, s., a festival : bakasa. 
 
 Fakataliga, s., an ear pendant : 
 caus. prefix, and taliga. 
 
 Fakatokoi, or fakatokei, i.q. 
 bakatokoia. 
 
 Fakau, or fakaua, s., d. fikau, 
 tikaua, a messenger, ambas- 
 sador, agent sent to do 
 something for a chief or com- 
 munity ; and 
 
 Fakau, or fakaua, s., a message 
 such as the agent sent by a 
 chief or a community carries 
 to deliver, i ofi nafakaua he 
 carries the message (of state). 
 See kau, gau, gi'asp, take hold 
 of, carry, &o. [Sa. fe'au to 
 send for (v. r.), fe'au a message. 
 To. fekau to bid, command, 
 order ; a message, order ; My. 
 and Ja. panggawa a grandee, 
 a noble : in Java it is the 
 title of the five chief coun- 
 cillors of state, and the word 
 is derived from gawa to bear 
 or carry, convey, bring, Ef. 
 kau to carry, (as a club), Fi. 
 kau-ta to carry, Sa. 'au to send, 
 'au mai to bring, 'au'auna a 
 servant, 'au a troop, gang, 
 shoal, bunch (of bananas), Ef. 
 makau a bunch or cluster (of 
 fruit), d. umkau many, all 
 (collected).] 
 
 Faki, or fiki, transitive particle, 
 connecting the verb with its 
 object, after or sufiaxed to 
 the verb, consisting of the 
 preps, fa, or fi, and ki. 
 
 69 
 
 [fanua 
 
 Fala, s. (see under 6ala li.), a 
 ship's yards. 
 
 Falafala, s., cross sticks fastened 
 on a tree for a ladder to climb 
 it : 6ala ii. 
 
 Falea, s., a cave. [Tah. farefare, 
 a., hollow, fare a house. Ma. 
 whare, Sa. fale.] See 6ala iii. 
 
 Fam ia, or bam ia, v. t., to eat. 
 [Tah. amu to eat.] H. ba'aiii, 
 A. fa'ama, to have the mouth 
 full, to swallow down. 
 
 Fanau sa, v.t., d. bunu to teach, 
 to instruct : to preach (recent 
 use). [Fi. vunau-ca to ad- 
 monish, harangue, preach to.] 
 H. bin. Hi. to teach, to in- 
 struct, A. bana, 2, 4, make 
 clear, explain, lucidly expound, 
 5, render lucid. 
 
 Fanauen, s., c. art., the teach- 
 ing, i.e., either the act of 
 leaching or the thing taught, 
 law (as " law " of Moses, re- 
 cent use). 
 
 Fanei, v. i., d., to be extin- 
 guished, out (of a fire) : bunu 
 ea, bunue a. 
 
 Fanu,' s., darkness, shade, only 
 in kot-fanu, evening, lit. time 
 of shade, d. rag melu. See 
 melu. 
 
 Fanua, s., inhabited country, 
 land, My. b^nua, id. [Malo 
 vanua house^ Santo d. venua 
 house, village.] H. banah, to 
 build, as a house, ps. part, 
 banu' built, binyaha building ; 
 A. bana', S. bna'. 
 
 Note. — The Santo word has 
 best preserved the primary 
 meaning house, or building; 
 then a country, district, or 
 land is called banua, or fanua, 
 
FARA KI NAMETA Na] 
 
 70 
 
 [fasu 
 
 because, like a house or village 
 (or building), it is the dwelling- 
 place of men. 
 
 Fara ki nameta na, v. t., to fix 
 the eyes, stare with open and 
 motionless eyes. Nm. fajar, 
 or fagar, 2, fix (the eyes), 
 stare. 
 
 Fara, s., c. art., a cocoanut (fruit) 
 that begins to shoot. [Cf. Fi. 
 vara, a cocoanut ready to 
 shoot ] .Sora ll. 
 
 Fara, s., a chafed place on the 
 skin, especially on the thigh 
 (from being rubbed or chafed 
 in walking) : baro sia. 
 
 Fara, or fera, s., a row, or rank, 
 or band ; 
 
 Farafara, or ferafera, s., a row, a 
 lot, a band (as of sores on a 
 limb), lit. a number of rows ; 
 
 Bifara ki, or bifera ki, v. c, to 
 put or arrange in rows. [My. 
 baris a line, row, rank, file, 
 troops, mambaris, v., and baris 
 kan, v., and barbaris, v., bari- 
 san parade, place where troops 
 are exercised.] H. ma'arakah 
 (and ma'aroth for ma'arakoth) 
 disposing, ranging in order, a 
 row or pile, battle set in array, 
 army, or band ; from 'arak to 
 arrange in order, or in a row. 
 
 Fara-bule, s., c. art., a rank, row, 
 or band, of adults or full- 
 grown men : fara rank, and 
 bule adult. 
 
 Fara-kal, c. art., a row or band 
 of men connected together by 
 relationship, as of brothers : 
 fara, and kal, su bukal ia. 
 
 Fariiti, s., c. art., sticks fastened 
 above and upon the rafters of 
 a house : a. pr. name (the 
 
 name of the chief of Sesake, 
 the chief binding the people 
 together as the nafarkti (lit. 
 that which binds together) do 
 a house.) [My. baroti rafters, 
 Fi. vorati upper cross beams of 
 a house.] From bara tia, q.v. 
 H. hibar (E. aliabara, v. c.) to 
 bind together, connect or join 
 together. 
 
 Fare, farefare. See bare, bare- 
 fare, to move. 
 
 Farea, s., the public house of a 
 village, d. fare outside. [Mota 
 varea outside, Ml. P. vere, Ur. 
 vari outside, Mg. ivelany out- 
 side (i-velany).] A. barriyy' 
 outer, external (Ct. barri), 
 Nm. barrani outer, exterior, 
 (and barra, out). 
 
 Farea, d. for bi reko to be poor : 
 reko ; and bi to be. 
 
 Farofaro, a., tea farofaro, a thing 
 that rasps, &c. : baro sia. 
 
 Fasi, i.e., fa-si, v. t., tread upon, 
 fasi koro bind together the 
 reeds of the koro-fence (which 
 is done by treading upon 
 them) : basi a. 
 
 Fasu (na meta na), s., d., eye- 
 brows, tafasi, V. r., to make a 
 sign with the eye. A. "amaza 
 to make a sign (with the eye, 
 eyebrows), 6, make such signs 
 to each other. 
 
 Fasu, fasua na, s., a part, por- 
 tion ; member (of the body). 
 [Sa. fasi a piece, a place, 
 fasifasi to split up in pieces, 
 fasi to split, beat.] H. basa' 
 cut in pieces, A. bas'a'a 
 cut, cleave, bas"a< part, a 
 piece, eg. H. badad to divide, 
 bad a part, pi. members of the 
 
fata] ' 
 
 body, A. badda separate, dis- 
 join, budd' portion, part (of 
 anything), badad' part. See 
 s. V. H. badad. 
 
 Fata, s., a bench, shelf, stand, 
 platform, dd. uenr', uer6, 
 nets, kofeta {i.e., ko feta.) [Sa. 
 fata raised house for storing 
 yams in, a shelf, a bier, Tah. 
 fata altar, scaffold, piece of 
 wood to hang baskets of food 
 on, &c., Mg. vatra (and vata) 
 box, shelf for keeping rice, 
 •fee] H. 'omed platform, 
 place, 'emdah a lodging (place). 
 See fatu. 
 
 Fatok, same as batok and 
 matok : toko. 
 
 Fatu, same as batu and matu : tu. 
 
 Fatu (see matu ki), hence fafatu, 
 v., to trust in, rely upon, con- 
 fide in ; matu ki (na koro) to 
 set up the posts or supports (of 
 a fence), palo fulsit, stabilivit; 
 na matu na, the column of the 
 back, that is, the backbone 
 or vertebral column ; also, 
 post or stake (of a fence) ; fatu 
 stones or rocks ; na fatu 
 na bones ; fata (see ante) ; 
 uota (wota) a chief (column 
 or support or upholder of the 
 people). [Mg. vato a stone, 
 My. batu a stone, Sa. fatu a 
 stone, core or stone of fruit, 
 faafatufatu to persevere inde- 
 fatigably, fatu (-amoa) to have 
 a swollen shoulder (fron bear- 
 ing burdens), Tah. fatu the 
 gristly part of an oyster, the 
 core of an abscess, fatu lord, 
 master, owner.] A. 'amada 
 1, 2, 3, to sustain, prop up, 
 make firm or stable, with a 
 
 ■ 1 [fea 
 
 column, post, or stake, (matu 
 ki), 8, to rely upon, trust or 
 confide in (fafktu) ; also, 1, to 
 have the hump or the back 
 contused with carrying (a 
 camel), H. 'amad to stand (be 
 firmly set), confide in, endure, 
 persist, persevere (cf. Sa.), 
 A. 'imad higher structures, 
 column, stake, 'amod' prop, 
 column, stones put in the 
 ground for supports for the 
 foundation, column, prop of a 
 family, chief, lord, the back, 
 'amid' column and chief or 
 prince (of a people), H. 'amud 
 column, pillar, platform, scaf- 
 fold. See fata (ante). 
 
 Fatu, s., c. art. nafatu, the ridge 
 of a house, ridge-pole : see batu. 
 [TaSa. papatu,id., Malo uobatu, 
 id., Ml. U. uobut, Fut. tau- 
 fufu, id.. My. bubungan, 
 b&bungan, and bumbung, Ja. 
 wuwung, id., Mg. vovonana, 
 id.] 
 
 Fatuna, s., and ad., d. for ma- 
 tuna, q.v. 
 
 Fau, same as bau, a., new. 
 
 Faulu, s., barter, i.q. baulu. 
 
 Faum, d. fau, new ; na faumuen : 
 perhaps for faumau, redup. 
 
 Faus ia, same as baus ia, ask, 
 question ; hence 
 
 Faus, pr. n. (Questioner), a spirit, 
 officer of Saritau at the gates 
 of Hades. 
 
 Fe a, and fefe a, same as be a, 
 befe a ; nafeana, nafefeana, s., 
 the act of reading, or counting. 
 
 FS, conj,, if, should, for bS. 
 
 Fe, d., conj., then, but. A. fa, id. 
 
 Fea, same as be, or bea, to pre- 
 cede, first. 
 
fefe] 
 
 Fefe, same as befe. 
 
 Fei, or fe, d., inter, pron., who? 
 [Sa. o ai, Tah. o vai, Ta. ba, 
 Er. me, id.] H. mi, A. man, 
 men, mun, or min, also often 
 pron. 3 pers added man hu 
 who 1 (who-he ?), contracted 
 manu, menu. 
 
 Feifei ki, same as beifei ki ; na- 
 feifeien, s., the act of indicate 
 ing or showing, or the thing 
 by which something is made 
 manifest ; a sign, token. 
 
 Feko, s., a cockroach, and similar 
 insects. 
 
 Felak, s., c. art., d., a tribe, or 
 family clan, dd. syn. metarau, 
 kainaga : 6ala ill. 
 
 Felaki, s., c. art., girdle to which 
 the nafon, or loin cloth, was 
 attached : it is about six inches 
 wide : belaki. 
 
 Fera, c. art., a row. See fara. 
 
 Fera-bule, fera-kal. See fara- 
 bule, fara-kal. 
 
 Ferafera, rows. See farafara. 
 
 Fera, c. art., s., an omen, also 
 fefera ; the natamole tabu hav- 
 ing poured out some namaluk 
 (kava) to the natemate drinks 
 off his own cup, and then 
 looking into it sees some blood, 
 or a human hair, or some other 
 thing, which is called fera, an 
 omen, or indication, good or 
 bad, as the case may be : or 
 he perceives the omen, good 
 or bad, by " lo namo," which 
 is another species of divina- 
 tion. 
 
 Fefera ki, or fera ki, and bifera 
 ki, v., to show by a fera, as 
 the natemate are supposed to 
 do (see under the preceding 
 
 72 [fipis ia 
 
 word) ; to give an omen. [Mg. 
 fambara an omen, presage. 
 My. fal omen (A.)] A. fa'l' 
 omen. 
 
 Fera, v. i., fera ki, v. t., ferafera, 
 V. i., ferafera ki, v. t. ; 
 
 Feroa, c. art., s., a crumb : bera, 
 bera ki. 
 
 Fet, s., a bird's nest, made like 
 a platform of woven twigs. 
 [Sa. Jataniga. a nest.J See 
 fata. 
 
 Feta, c. art., s., a tribe : beta. 
 
 Fete, or fite, c. art. nafete, 
 inter, pron., what ? Nm. made 
 what ? 
 
 Fetta, s., soapstone, a soft stone 
 that can easily be cut : fatu 
 stone, and ta to cut. 
 
 Fi, v., to be : bi. 
 
 Fi, prep., after verbs, or bi, on, 
 (fee. A. bi, fi, id. 
 
 Fiare ki, v., to go into the 
 presence of someone, to be 
 unabashed ( opposite of maliare, 
 or maliere). See rairai. 
 
 Fiatu, V. r., to smite each other, 
 to fight, war : atu. 
 
 Fiere, v. r., d., to speak, con- 
 verse. A. hara, 6, to converse, 
 talk together. 
 
 Fifi, s., anything binding round, 
 as a fillet or turban, ifec, then 
 a thing going round, as a ship 
 round a cape or island, then 
 hostile talk (with which one's 
 adversary as it were binds 
 him round) ; 
 
 Fifi ki, V. t., to go round, as a 
 yam vine round a stake, a 
 ship round an island : fifi is 
 for fifisi, redup. of fisi, q.v. 
 
 Fifis ia, V. t., to bind round : 
 redup. of fisi. 
 
PIKIT I 
 
 Pikifc, or tikat, v. r., to be 
 savage, given to biting, lit. to 
 bite each other : kat ia. [Fi. 
 veikata, id.] 
 
 Fikoba, v. r., lit. to chase, or 
 pursue, each other : koba sia. 
 
 Fill, or fila, c. art., same as bila, 
 lightning : bila. [Sa. uila. 
 My. kilat, Mg. helatra, id.] 
 
 Filifili, s., a gleaming or flashing 
 shell worn as an ornament : 
 bila. 
 
 Filora, same as bulora, and, 
 redup., 
 
 Filifilora. See bulo ki. 
 
 Fimeri, v. r., to be doing some- 
 thing to each other, usually in 
 a hostile sense, to be fighting : 
 meri. 
 
 Fimuri, v. r., to be returning 
 each other, dismissing with 
 presents, repaying : muri. 
 
 Finaga, c. art., s., food : kan ia 
 (in finaga the k is elided 
 after the prefixed fi.) [My. 
 makanan, Mg. fihinana, id.] 
 
 Fira nia, v. t., supplicate, 
 or pray, him, and without 
 object, fira to supplicate, pray, 
 also bifira, bifira nia. [Tah. 
 pure to pray, pupure to pray 
 frequently.] H. falal, Hithp., 
 to supplicate, pray. 
 
 Firaka, v. i., to delay. A. 
 'araka, 5), to delay. 
 
 Fisa, v., fisan, c. art., s., to 
 speak, word : bisa. 
 
 Fis ia, or fisi a, v. t., to bind 
 round, to bind about, as a 
 fillet, turban, or vine round 
 the head, a string round a 
 parcel, a bandage round a 
 wounded limb ; fisi namanuk 
 to bind up a wound ; a yam 
 
 73 [piRi A 
 
 vine binds round a stake 
 (twines round it), and fisi 
 name to twist a rope (bind 
 round the one strand on the 
 other — -this is usually bulo ki) ; 
 a whip or rod binds round the 
 body to which it is applied, 
 hence tale fisi a to flog (see 
 tale to go round), lit. to go 
 round binding about, d. mafisi 
 a to whip, flog : often the final 
 s is elided hence fi-gote fia to 
 flog him to pieces (for fisi-gote 
 fia), lit. to flog — break him, 
 and see fifi (supra), and tafifi ; 
 the word of an adversary is 
 said to fisi the object of his 
 anger, that is, bind him 
 round ; fisi uago bind round 
 a pig (in order to its being 
 carried slung to a pole, so 
 that it may not be hurt). 
 [Sa. fisi to entwine as a 
 vine. To. fi to twist and fihi 
 entwine, twist. Ma. whiwhi be 
 entangled, whakawhiwhi wind 
 round, fasten. My. pusing to 
 turn round, twist.] H. liabas' 
 to bind, bind on, bind about, 
 as a head band, turban, tiara, 
 " the seaweed is bound about 
 (fisi na bau gu) my head," 
 Jon. ii. 6 ; to bind up a wound, 
 to bind fast, shut up. 
 
 Fisi, a. used as s., i bi fisi (a boy 
 that is circumcised, ru tefe a i 
 bi fisi they circumcise him, he 
 is fisi). A. 'afsa'u e praeputio 
 apparentem habens glandem 
 paer, faSa'a a glaude prae- 
 putium reduxit puer. 
 
 Firi na, c. art., s., d. fiti na, 
 q.v. 
 
 Firi a, or fir ia, v. t., same as bir 
 
FIRl] 
 
 ia, to make void, bring to 
 nought ; hence 
 
 Firi, in tale-firi, round bringing 
 to nought, i.e., all round. 
 
 Pirigia, same as biri gia, to 
 carry. 
 
 Fisau na, s., d., as nafisau naui 
 = ora naui, the sprout, shoot, 
 or vine of a yam : bisau. 
 
 Fisiko na, s., flesh. [Of. Bu. 
 juku. My. daging, id., TaSa. 
 veseko, id.] Cf. E. siga flesh. 
 
 Fiso, c. art , s., an annual reed- 
 like plant whose top is used 
 for food. [Sa. fiso a species 
 of reed.] Der. unknown. 
 
 Fisuaki. Same as bisuaki. 
 
 Fisueri. Same as bisueri. 
 
 Fisuraki, c. art., s., talk, speech : 
 bisuraki. 
 
 Fisurakien, c. art., s., the act of 
 talking : bisuraki. 
 
 Fisurua, c. art., s., a lie, or lies ; 
 and 
 
 Fisuruen, c. art., s., lying : 
 bisuru. 
 
 Fiti na, c. art., s., d. firi na, the 
 rib, or ribs, side. [Er. mperi, 
 Santo d. porera na. Ma. rara, 
 Mafoor raar, rib.] H. sela', 
 Ch. 'ala' rib, side, A. s'il', rib. 
 
 Fitaua, c. art., s., d. syn. with 
 fakaua or fikaua : tau. 
 
 Fit, V. i., d., to run. Cf. A. 
 fadda to run. 
 
 Fitferiki, or biteriki, s , an old 
 woman, matron, lady, as 
 mkriki an old man, senior, 
 sir : mariki is ma' man, and 
 riki old, and fitferiki is fite 
 woman, and riki old : for fite 
 see under fafine and matu ; 
 and for riki. or 'riki old, what 
 follows. [Ma. a,riki first-born 
 
 74 
 
 [fu na 
 
 male or female in a family of 
 note, hence chief, priest, 
 leader.] E. I6h6ka to advance 
 in age ; be the first-born, or 
 eldest, in a family ; be senior ; 
 alhaka to grow old, Ihik 
 advanced in age, aged ; con- 
 tracted lik chief. 
 
 Fitefa, same as bitefa. 
 
 Fitili, same as butili. 
 
 Fitia, same as bitia. 
 
 Fito na, s., d., syn. Jile-meta na, 
 q.v. : buto, v. i., and buto, s., 
 bud. 
 
 Fo, d. for bo, particle used in the 
 formation of the future tense ; 
 
 Foga, s., d. c. art. nafo, i.e., na 
 afo, whetstone, grinding stone, 
 and (because used as whet- 
 stone) pumice stone. [To. 
 fuaga (Ma. hoanga, Sa. foaga) 
 a grindstone, a whetstone, 
 fuafuaga pumice stone.] H. 
 liafaf to rub ofl^, scrape ofi', 
 A. taffa to rub oflF. 
 
 Fona, c. art, s., d. syn. tofe, the 
 native cloth, or clothing, made 
 from the bark of a tree. [E. 
 Mai funa, id.] H. llafaf to 
 to cover (kafah to cover, to 
 veil), A. liaffa to cover with a 
 garment. 
 
 Fonu, s., the turtle or tortoise. 
 [Fi. vonu. My. pafiu, Mg. 
 fany. To. fonu] A. 'awinai, 
 'ayina<, the tortoise or turtle. 
 
 Fu, v. i., d. for mu to hum, buzz, 
 lago fu humming or buzzing 
 fly (blow fly) : mu. 
 
 Fua na, or bua na, s., nafua n 
 rarua, the bottom (outside) of 
 a canoe or ship, lit. the back, 
 syn. na matu n rarua : bua na, 
 bui na. 
 
FUAGOEO] 75 
 
 Puagoro, s. See muagoro. 
 
 Puata, V. i., or a , to have raised 
 stripes on the skin (as from 
 blows with a rod, or as are 
 formed by the veins on the 
 arm). See bua ill., and bua 
 tia : the radical notion is 
 swelling out : ending ta. 
 
 Fua tia, i.q. bua tia. 
 
 Fuga, d. buma, q.v. 
 
 Pugaga, V. i., to well up, spring, 
 bubble up, -welling over or 
 spreading asunder (as a 
 spring) : fua, or bua ill., and 
 gaga, for which see maga. 
 
 Fugafuga, v. i., or a., i.q. buga- 
 fuga. [Sa. fagufagu.] 
 
 Fugafuga na, s., as fugafuga 
 nabiau, the whitened or 
 breaking crest of a wave, lit. 
 its blossom : fuga. 
 
 Fule, and fulefule, or bulefule. 
 See bule i. 
 
 Fulu, and fulufulu : i.q. pre- 
 ceding word. 
 
 Fuluara, v. i., or a., to have 
 swellings : bulifulia, q.v., syn. 
 
 Fulus, v., to turn : bulu sia. 
 
 Fumafuma na, s., d. syn. fuga- 
 fuga na, q.v. 
 
 Funaso, c. art., s., stopper : 
 bunaso. 
 
 Fura, same as bura, to be full. 
 
 Furei, s. See futei. 
 
 Furei ki, v. t. See burei a : rub, 
 cleanse ; furei ki natua na, 
 cleanse his feet, as by rubbing 
 or scraping them on a scraper, 
 ifec. 
 
 Furei a, same as burei a, or bura 
 ia, to leave. 
 
 Furiana, c. art., s., the being 
 swollen, or having the dropsy : 
 buria. 
 
 [(!A 
 
 Fus ia, same as bus ia, d. mur 
 ia. 
 
 Fusa ia, same as busa ia. 
 
 Fusfus ki, same as busfus ki. 
 
 Fut, c. art., s., d. for 6osa6osa. 
 
 Futei, dd. furei, futrei, mitoi or 
 mitei, s., the white ant. See 
 rei, tei. [Sa. loi, Tah. ro, ant,, 
 gen. name.] 
 
 Futfut, d. for butafuta. 
 
 Futum, V. i., dd. bisau, busuf, 
 busofu, bisobu, to sprout forth^ 
 spring up, grow. [Fila, Meli, 
 Aniwa, Fut., somo, To. tubu, 
 Sa. tupu, My. tumbuh, Ja. 
 tuwuh, Mg. tombo, id. In Ef. 
 (but not in all dialects) sobu 
 denotes also the first springing, 
 fortli or beginning of any 
 thing, as i sobu it sprang 
 forth, i.e., began; ru sobu meri 
 a they began did it, i.e., they 
 were the first who did it, were 
 the first beginners of the doing 
 it.] H. samali, Kal and Piel, 
 to sprout forth, to grow (as. 
 plants, trees, the hair), and 
 fig. used of the first beginnings 
 of things which occur in the 
 world, as Is. xliii. 19, " Be- 
 hold I make a new thing ;. 
 now it shall spring forth," Hi„ 
 make to sprout forth or grow, 
 and fig. make something spring 
 up or exist, H. semah off- 
 spring, Ef. atuma, id. 
 
 G 
 
 (pronounced ng). 
 Ga (nga), d., pers. pron., 3 sing., 
 he, she, it (nom. suf. n, or 
 na). [Ma. nga pi. art., Sa. na- 
 
<3A] 
 
 he, she, this, that, these, those 
 Ha. na, pi. art., and sign of pi. 
 number, My. iiia (inya) he, 
 she, it, they.] Mod. S. ani, 
 'ni, they, also sometimes he 
 or she, and pi. art. (St., p. 22, 
 and fol.) 
 
 ■Ga, conj., usually go, q.v., and : 
 ka, in kai, conj. 
 
 •Ga, final conj., that, ut, d. ka, or 
 k', q.v. 
 
 ■Ga, dem., this, here, there, 
 always (in this form) suffixed 
 as in nag, naga, q.v., alaga 
 (alia ga) this place, or place 
 here, i.e., here (d. li ke, see 
 ke) ; but alaga may be a con- 
 traction for alia naga : ka. 
 
 ■Gabuer, a., and s., grey-haired, 
 aged, a grey-haired, i.e., aged 
 person : kabuer. 
 
 Gafa, s., a fathom (six feet). 
 [Sa. gafa a fathom.] A. 
 kama< (Nm. llama) a fathom 
 (six feet). 
 
 Gafikafi, s., a small basket ; and 
 
 Gafikafi, v., to feel for or take 
 hold of a thing in a basket 
 with the fingers. A. lioflFa< a 
 basket, kafia to take stealthily 
 between the fingers. 
 
 Gaga, V. i., to well out, or bubble 
 up, as water from a spring, in 
 fugaga. See maga. 
 
 Gai, orgei, redup. gaigai, v. i., to 
 cry, sing, ifec. : kai or kei 
 
 Gai (ga, final conj., and i, tense 
 and mood particle of the fut.) 
 See i. 
 
 Gaigai, v. i,, to pant, be out of 
 breath. [Sa. ga'ega'e to be 
 out of breath, Ha. nae, naenae 
 to be out of breath, to pant.] 
 S. kah to pant. 
 
 76 [galu 
 
 Gai-tagoto, v. i., to scream (as in 
 pain) : gai, and tagoto, for 
 which see koto to break. 
 
 Gakalau ia (gkalau ia), redup. of 
 galau ia. 
 
 Gakarafi (gkarafi). See karafi. 
 
 Gakasi (gkasi). See kasi. 
 
 Gakatak (gkatak). See kati. 
 
 Gakau sa, v. t., to grasp (as an 
 oar, in pulling, or a branch of 
 a tree) : usually pronounced 
 gkau. See gau, kau. 
 
 Gakua, inter, ad., used with 
 verbal pron., as i gakua how? 
 lit., let it be as what 1 indefi- 
 nitely, let it be as somewhat, 
 let it be so, thus, yes (assent) : 
 ga, final conj., and kua, q.v. 
 
 Gala, V. i., or a., small : kala. 
 
 Galakala, v. i., to laugh. [My. 
 galak to laugh loud continu- 
 ously.] A. karkara to laugh 
 loud and long, karkara to 
 laugh, cf. kalla, 7, to laugh. 
 
 Galau ia, v. t., to cross over, d. 
 (transposed) lakau ia, q.v. E. 
 lialafa to cross over, alilafa 
 make to cross over. 
 
 Gale-baga, s., d. 
 kale-baga. 
 
 Gal ia (al ia, kai ia), v. t., to stir 
 round (as water or any liquid). 
 [Ma. ngaru a wave, ngarue 
 shake, move to and fro. Ha. 
 ale well up, aleale make into 
 waves, stir up, as water, ale a 
 wave, Sa. galu a wave, gagalu 
 to be rippled, galu to be 
 rough, break heavily on the 
 reef, kc, My. alun, Mg. 
 alona, a wave.] H. galal to 
 roll, hence gal fountain, well, 
 pi. waves, S. galo' a wave. 
 
 Galu, c. art., s., husks, peel, &c. 
 
 bowstring : 
 
GALU TIA] 
 
 (for pig's food), better part of 
 a Ihing; pudenda; d. the 
 inner bark of trees : see kalu 
 tia. Cf. Ch. gilla', S. gelo', 
 A. gillu, guUu chaff, &c., a 
 covering, better part of a 
 thing. 
 
 Galu tia, V. t., galuti nasu to 
 put the bowstring on a bow, 
 naiela galu covering board on 
 end of a canoe ; and 
 
 Galu, c. art., s., bowstring. 
 See kalu tia. 
 
 Galugalua, v. i., or a., d. sagalu- 
 galu, to be aged, experienced 
 (of persons), to be mature, 
 also to be worn out as with 
 age (of anything), as if to be 
 full of agedness, and mere 
 husk or skin : it has the a. 
 ending a; nagalu matua an 
 aged, full-grown, or full- 
 bearded person, or one not 
 immature. A. galla, 2, to be- 
 come aged and expert or ex- 
 perienced. 
 
 Gan ia, ganikani a, v. t., to eat : 
 kan ia. 
 
 Gara, v. i., to be dry : kara. 
 
 Garagara, v. i., to be strong, 
 vehement, and garakarai : 
 kara, karakarai. 
 
 Gara sa, v., to meet (any person 
 or thing), to come upon, hit, 
 as ru ba gara nata they went, 
 met a person, i ba gara sa it 
 (as a calamity) came upon 
 him, i si gara sa he shot (hit) 
 it or him, i bisa gara sa he 
 spoke* met (or hit) it, i.e., he 
 spoke to the point. H. karah 
 and kara' to meet. 
 
 Gara ki, v. See kara ki. 
 
 Gara, d., pers. pron., 3 pi., they: 
 
 77 [gere na 
 
 ga and 'ra. [Ma. ngara they, 
 
 them.] 
 Gar ia, v., and, redup., 
 Garikari a. See kar ia. 
 Garo i, v. t. See kar ia. 
 Garu tia, and redup., 
 Garukaru. See karu tia. 
 Garei ki. See karei ki. 
 Garaf ia, v. t. See karaf ia. 
 Gari, a., d. for kasi. 
 Gasa, inter, ad. See kasa. 
 Gas ia, v. See kas ia. 
 Gasua, and gasukasua, a. See 
 
 kasua. 
 Gat. See gaut. 
 Gat ia, v. See katia. 
 Gat, V. See kat. 
 Gatikati. See katia. 
 Gati, d. for kasi. 
 Gato na, d. karo na, 
 Gau, V. t., to grasp : kau. 
 Gaua, a., barbed (of a spear) : 
 
 kau, V. t., tagau. It has the 
 
 a. ending a. 
 Gaut, d. gat, in bati-gaut a plant 
 
 with kook-like thorns, lit. 
 
 grasping teeth : kau, v. t., 
 
 'tagau. 
 Gel ia, v. t., to clasp (in order to 
 
 lift or carry), carry away ; 
 Gele tia, v. t., id. ; and 
 Gelakela, v., used of many carry- 
 ing away. See kele tia and 
 
 kalu tia. 
 Gel ia, for gal ia. 
 Gema, d., verb suf., 1 pi., excl. : 
 
 gami, nami. 
 Gemi, d. gami, nami, nom. suf. 
 
 1 pi., excl. 
 Geraf ia, for garaf ia. 
 Gere na, s., in mele-gere na the 
 
 hollow in the tail of a fish. 
 
 [Ml. P. kare, tail ; My. ekor, 
 
 ikur, tail.] H. 'alior, A. 
 
<3ESa] 
 
 'oh'or', hinder part, rear, end ; 
 Nra. ekir, end. 
 
 'Gesa, gesakesa, for kesa,kesakesa. 
 
 <ji, prep., and ki, q.v., to, 
 belonging to, of. 
 
 •GT, s., porpoise : perhaps so 
 called because of the squeaking 
 noise it makes on rising out 
 of the water. See next word. 
 
 ■Gia, gki, giki, v. i., creak, squeak, 
 ping, moan. [Fi. gi to squeak, 
 Sa. 'i'i squeak.] A. nakka, 
 nakik' creak, &c. 
 
 •Gie na, or gia na, s., name, dd. 
 kiha na and gisa na, q.v. 
 
 <3ih sa, or gie ki, v. (see pre- 
 ceding word), to have or 
 acquire a name for or in con- 
 nection with soDiething. 
 
 Giki. See kiki, small. 
 
 ■Gil ia, or kil ia, or kili a, v. t., 
 to dig. [Sa. 'eli. My. gali, 
 Mg. hady, to dig.] A. kara', 
 n. a. karw', to dig. 
 
 Note. — Kili natano dig the 
 ground, kili ki nakasu natano 
 dig a stick into the ground. 
 
 Gkiliki {i.e., gikili ki), redup., 
 intensive, as ba gkiliki 
 natuoma dig thy feet (into the 
 ground), i.e., stand firm, or 
 simply ba gkiliki. 
 
 Gkita, i.e., gikita, v. redup. See 
 gita, kita. 
 
 Ginit ia, v., gini gota fia. See 
 kinit ia. 
 
 Girigiri, v. i., or a., to be bright, 
 brilliant, shining, polished. 
 [To. gigila bright, brilliant, 
 polished. My. gilang and gilau 
 to shine, glitter, be bright, 
 brilliant, dazzle.] A. gala' to 
 be clear, shining, &c., galiyy' 
 bright, shining, polished. 
 
 78 [goba 
 
 Note. — The A. word also 
 denotes to be or appear un- 
 covered : Ef. d. karo to be 
 unclothed, have the clothes 
 removed, naked. 
 
 Gis, or gisa, ad., together, lit. as 
 one, with numerals, as rua rua 
 gis two two together, in twos, 
 and so with all the numerals. 
 H. k'ehad as one, i.e., together, 
 Ch. kahada. See ki as, and 
 sa, s, one. 
 
 Gisa. See kisa, or kesa. 
 
 Gisa na, s., c. art., name, dd. 
 gie na, kiha na (for kisa na). 
 [TaSa. kitsa. Ml. U. se, Malo 
 isa, Epi (Ba.) sia, (Bi.) kia, 
 Ta. dd. rige (narige), na'ge 
 Cge), An. da (tha), Fi. yaca 
 (yatha). Am. sa, Paama isa, 
 Ta. d. bge (nahge).] A. 'ism' 
 and sim', H. s'em name. 
 
 Note. — The Ef. gisa (kiha, 
 gia) has the dem. k' (or g') 
 prefixed, as Epi kia and 
 TaSa. kitsa. This dem. is not 
 prefixed in Epi sia. Ml. se. 
 Am. sa, Malo and Paama isa : 
 in all these the final m of the 
 the original is elided, as it is 
 in tra (q.v.) blood, and nu 
 (for num) ; this final m ap- 
 pears as ng in Ta. 
 
 Gis ia, V. t., to feel, touch, and 
 
 Giskis, redup. See kis ia. 
 
 Gita ia, v. t. See kita ia. 
 
 Gite troa i, for gita troa i. See 
 kite troa i. 
 
 Go, conj., connecting substan- 
 tives and sentence*, and. 
 [Ml. P. ga, ka. Ml. U. ko, Fi. 
 ka, and.] Amh. ka and (with 
 numerals). 
 
 Goba (gote tia), v. t., to cut, as a 
 
<30BA SIa] 
 
 nakoau with a knife. [Mg. 
 kafa cut, mikapa, v. t., to cut.] 
 H. gub, A. gaba, to cut. 
 
 Goba sia, v. t. See koba sia. 
 
 Gobera, or gobara, s., or kobara, 
 side, as kobara kerua the other 
 side : ko dem , and bora i. 
 
 Gofu sa, V. t. See kofu sa. 
 
 Gof kofua, a. See kof kof ua. 
 
 Okofita (for gokofita), a., sticky, 
 gluey. [Mg. tita, fitaka, clay 
 adhering, wet, sticking to.] 
 A. 'amada, 2, 5) to be wet so 
 as to stick (earth or clay). 
 Note the prefixed ko (or go), 
 as in Fi. ka, Ja. ka, the 
 sense of the compound being 
 passive. 
 
 Gogo, V. i., to wade, to wade half 
 swimming ; 
 
 Gogo, s., an aquatic bird. [An. 
 agag to swim, Sa. 'a'au to 
 swim, Fila kaukau to bathe, 
 Ma. kau swim, wade. Ha. au, 
 auau, swim, bathe, hasten, cf. 
 Ja. kumbah to wash.] A. 
 liamma, 1 , hasten, 4, bathe, or 
 wash oneself in cold water, 
 10, bathe in hot water ; and, 
 general term, wash the body. 
 
 Goi a, or go ia, v. t., or ko ia, as 
 goi naniu to rub, scrape, or 
 grind out by rubbing or scrap- 
 ing the kernel of the coeoanut, 
 suru-go ia (cover-drain out) to 
 cover with one's mouth the 
 the aperture of a drinking 
 vessel and drain out the con- 
 tents, koi a mark or boundary, 
 also koika nafanua ; redup., 
 
 Goko ia, v. t., to scrape (nafona); 
 to mark paint, or smear 
 (nafona, i.e., native cloth), koko 
 the paint used for this, gokoi 
 
 79 [gkox 
 
 (or gokai or gokei) nafona. 
 [Sa. 'o'ai to mark or paint 
 native cloth.] H. liakah, i.q. 
 liakak cut into, hack, engrave, 
 carve, draw, paint, delineate, 
 liok a defined limit, a bound, 
 A. hakka, 3), grind by rubbing, 
 1), hack, cut, pierce, 7), drain 
 out (as milk), liakka scrape, 
 rub ; hence also 
 
 Gko, or goko, v., to cut into, cut, 
 hack, always followed by 
 another verb, as gko 6ora ia, 
 gko gote fia (used of cutting 
 up the nakoau or native pud- 
 ding), na kokoen, s., the cutting 
 up. 
 
 Gpkolau, see gakalau (gkalau ia). 
 
 Gol6, s., a cripple, one lame. 
 A. gayala to be lame. 
 
 Gkola (gokola). See kola, ko- 
 kola, to be dry. 
 
 Gkola. See kola shout. 
 
 Gkolau. See kolau. 
 
 Goli na, c. art., s., bird's beak, 
 lips, mouth. [Sa. gutu mouth 
 (of animals, wells, bottles). 
 Ma. ngutu lip, rim, whaka- 
 ngutungutu grumble at, scold, 
 Pi. gusu mouth. Put. ragutu 
 beak.] A. nakara to peck 
 with its beak (a bird) ; to 
 scold, nakrai foramen (gulce), 
 mankar bird's beak. 
 
 Goloia, V. i., to be filthy, dirty. 
 Karafa, 3, to be defiled, 4, to 
 be infected, contaminated, 
 Nm., 4, to disgust. 
 
 Golu tia, V. t. See kalu tia. 
 
 Gon, V. i., to be firm, fast : kon. 
 
 Gkon (kokon), redup. of pre- 
 ceding. 
 
 Gkon(gokon), v. i., to be bitter : 
 kon, kokon. 
 
GONAl] 80 
 
 Gonai a, v. t. See konai a. 
 
 Gor ia, or kor ia, v. t., to enclose 
 or surround with a fence 
 (nakoro) ; then to enclose as 
 •with a fence a sick person 
 (shutting out and prohibiting 
 evil spirits or evil influences 
 from him) — this is done by 
 the " Sacred Man" (natamole 
 tabu) — hence gorokoro to 
 divine, and nekoro divination, 
 or incantation, with its accom- 
 panying rites ; redup., gorokor 
 ia (native Christian prayer, 
 Atua O, ba gorokoro gamia uga 
 toko loga namolien anago — 
 O God, enclose us that we may 
 abide in the loga (enclosure) 
 of Thy salvation) ; gorb sa to 
 conceal it (as a crime with 
 which one is charged) ; gor ia 
 to prohibit, as tuba gor ia 
 prohibit, impede, obstruct, 
 bisa gor ia speak impede, or 
 obstruct him ; tu gor ia stand 
 obstruct ; gkoro (gokoro), 
 v., and nakokoro, s., a pro- 
 hibition, also an obstruction 
 or thing put to close up or 
 obstruct the entrance to a 
 house, a door. This verb is 
 much used after other verbs 
 as ba gor ia to go obstructing, 
 i.e. to meet, d. bakor to meet, 
 or rather to come or go before, 
 i.e., appear before (anyone), 
 then to arise, come into sight 
 (as a man, ship, &c.), and 
 take place (as an event) ; meri 
 gor ia, bati gor ia, like gor ia, 
 simply mean to enclose or 
 surround with a fence, sera 
 gor ia to enclose or encircle 
 (the head) with a fillet, hence 
 
 [gota 
 
 seragoro-bau a hat ; gore na a 
 brother's sister, or sister's 
 brother, brother and sister 
 being children of the same 
 mother, or of the same na- 
 kainaga. A. liagara impede, 
 prohibit, interdict, 2, to have 
 a halo surrounding it (the 
 moon), (see koro), 4, to 
 conceal ; lligr', hogr' a fence, 
 a wall, what is prohibited, 
 genitals of a man or a 
 woman, kindredship, relation- 
 ship, hagir' a fence ; H. hagar 
 to gird, Iiagor a girdle, clad. 
 Nm., 2, to fence round, confine, 
 forbid ; E. hagar town, village 
 (Fi. koro, id.) 
 
 Gore na, s., brother's sister, 
 sister's brother. See under 
 preceding word. 
 
 Goro, v. i., or koro, to snore. 
 [Ma. ngongoro (redup.). My. 
 ngorok, Mg. erotra, id.] H. 
 naliar, A. (h'arra, li'arli'ara) 
 nall'ara, S. nhar snort, breathe 
 hard through the nose, E. 
 nghSra snore ; 
 
 Gore na, c. art., s., the nostrils, 
 nose, dd. usu, gusn. [Ei. ucu, 
 Sa. isu. Ma. ihu. My. id'ung, 
 Ja. irung, Mg. orona, nose.] 
 H. nLiraim, du., the nostrils, 
 S. nhiro' the nose, A. noh'ra< 
 aperture of the nose. 
 
 Gorot ia, v. t., to cut round, as 
 to cut round a stick in order 
 to break it ; hence 
 
 Goro gote fia, v. t., cut round, 
 break it (as a stick). Nm. 
 ll'ara< to shave off in turning, 
 H. liarai (q.v.). S. hmt cut in, 
 engrave. See karati. 
 
 Gota, redup. gogota, v. i., or a., 
 
<30TA PANU] 
 
 black, dirty, bukota dirty (as 
 water with dust or earth in 
 it). [Gilolo kokotu, kitkudu, 
 black.] A. hatama to be 
 dusty, 9, black, hatim' dirty, 
 black, katam' black, blackish, 
 &c. 
 
 Gota fanu, s., or ad., evening, d. 
 kot' fan, d. syn. rag melu, lit. 
 time of dusk, or sunset : gota, 
 or kot', a time (see kota). A. 
 wakata, 1, 2, to fix a time, 
 wakt' a time, a point or part 
 of time : fanu. [Santo punu 
 to set (the sun), puni dusk.] 
 H. pun (perhaps i.q. A. 'afana 
 = 'afala, cf. H. 'apal, see 
 melu) to set (as the sun), to 
 be darkened. 
 
 Got, v., cut. See koto fi. 
 
 Gote fi, V. t. See koto fi. 
 
 Gotokoto, V. i., to begin (break 
 or cut, as it were, into the 
 doing of something, " break 
 ground " in the matter), as 
 i gotokoto bat ia he began — 
 did it : koto fi. 
 
 Gu, d. mu, nom. suf., your, 2 
 pL (ku verb, pron., 2 pi.) : 
 separate pron., 2 pi., kumu. 
 
 Gu, dd. mu, kama, verb, suf., 
 you. See preceding word. 
 
 Gu, d. k (for ku), nom. suf., 1 
 sing., my, as narugu my hand. 
 
 Gua, inter, ad., how ? lit. as 
 what ? It is used with the 
 verbal prons., as i kua it is 
 how ? Indefinitely i kua it is 
 so (a.ssent), lit. it is as some- 
 what : kua and gua are equally 
 used, d. kasa as what ? how 1 
 The sole difference between 
 kua and kasa is that in the 
 latter the dem. s' is prefixed 
 
 81 [guea ia 
 
 to the inter, pron. See ka as, 
 and sa what 1 Ch. kSmah how ? 
 (as what 1 ), A. kama' as, so. 
 
 Gua, V. i. See kua. 
 
 Giiku, V. i., to shrink, shrivel, be 
 incurved, maguku to be in- 
 curved, 5'uku rumu ki mo na 
 to shrink or incurve the bosom 
 to her son-in-law (of a mother- 
 in-law shrinking together and 
 covering her bosom and face 
 so as not to be seen by her 
 son-in-law), d. kuku ruma. 
 [Mg. kainkana aged, kainkona 
 bent, curved, shrivelled.] E. 
 guililiuS (gwilikwa) to be in- 
 curved, bent, specially from 
 old age, hence guhuk' one aged, 
 bent, and shrunk together. 
 
 Guku-taki, v. t., to make guku. 
 See guku. 
 
 Gulu tia, V. t. See kalu tia. 
 
 Gulu, V. i. See kulu. 
 
 Gum ia, v. t., or kum ia, to 
 absorb in the mouth (as a 
 lolly). H. gam a' to absorb^ 
 to drink up, to swallow, i.q. 
 Oh. 
 
 Gum ia, V. t., dd, um ia, gu ia 
 (gw ia), m ia (mw ia), to seize, 
 grasp, catch, hold, with or in 
 the hand. [Sa. 'u'u to take 
 hold of, to grasp, ps. 'umia, 
 Pi. qumi-a, ququ, id., My. 
 gtogam, Ja. gftg4m to clutch, 
 to clench, the fist, the clenched 
 hand.] A. kamkama to collect, 
 to seize or catch with the 
 hand, to take. 
 
 Gunut ia, v. t. See kinit ia. 
 
 Gura ia, v. t., to scrape off, gura 
 
 ua to scrape or rake off the 
 
 heated stones from an oven, 
 
 magir ia, v. t., scrape, magura, 
 
 7 
 
GURE SIa] 
 
 V. i., or ps. a., diminished, 
 lean, igura, d. igiri, the stick 
 for scraping or raking the 
 stones from an oven, gura biri 
 ki (d. syn. sera biri ki) to 
 startle (one) (as by coming 
 behind one and suddenly lay- 
 ing or sweeping the hand on 
 him) : kar ia, garu. H. gara' 
 to scratch, to scrape, scrape 
 off, then take away, withhold, 
 to diminish, Ni. to be taken 
 away, withheld. Note the Ef. 
 magura denotes lit. taken 
 away from, i.e., diminished, 
 lean, with the prep, ki, magura 
 ki to withhold from (one), 
 meta magura ki he eyes with- 
 holds (something) from (one) 
 he is stingy ; in one d. i meta 
 makur ki is said to denote he 
 eyes withdraws from (one), he 
 is covetous, lit. he eyes scrapes 
 off (from someone). 
 
 Gure sia, v. t., to gnaw : see 
 gura ia and kar ia. [Sa. gali, 
 gnaw, Fi. quru, v. i., quru-ta, 
 V. t., to eat anything unripe, 
 to scranch, eat ravenously, to 
 gnaw, My. greb to gnaw.] 
 This word seems properly to 
 denote scranch, scrape off, 
 absorb, H. gara' scrape off, A. 
 gara 'a to absorb, swallow. 
 
 Guru ki, v. t., to gather together, 
 guru-maki, v. t., id., or kuru 
 ki, kuru-maki, gkuruk (guku- 
 ruk) gather together (with- 
 out object) ; and 
 
 Gurua, s., c. art., a field (of 
 battle, of yams), so called be- 
 cause men or things are 
 gathered together in it : kuru. 
 H. gur, 3), to be gathered, to 
 
 82 [i 
 
 gather together, 'agar collect, 
 gather in. 
 
 Gurui, and 
 
 Guruni, s., c. art. naguruni, a 
 woman, wife, female. See 
 fafine, Note 2, and lai. 
 
 Gusu, V. i., to stoop. A. nakasa 
 to stoop. 
 
 Gusu na, s., c. art., tlie nose : 
 gore na. 
 
 Gusugisu ki, v. den., from pre- 
 ceding word, to nose (a thing), 
 i.e., smell it. [Mg. oroka 
 (from orona the nose), mioroka 
 to kiss by touching noses.] 
 
 Gusi, V. i., to be crooked, con- 
 torted, magusi crooked, con- 
 torted. A. 'akis'a to be 
 crooked, contorted, 5, id. 
 
 Gusu, V. i. See kusu, kosu-mi. 
 
 Gusu-mi, V. t. See kosu-mi. 
 
 Gut ia, V. t., and gukut ia 
 (gkut ia). See kut ia. 
 
 Gutu ki, V. t. See kutu ki. 
 
 I 
 
 , verb, pron., 3 sing., he, she, 
 it, sometimes pronounced e ; 
 also dd. i, e, verb, suf., 3 sing., 
 him, her, it. [Epi Ba. o, Epi 
 Bi. e, him, her, it ; Fut. i, 
 Ml. P. i, TaSa. i, he, she, it.] 
 Separate pron. nai, dd. inia 
 or enea ga, or niga, he, she, it. 
 
 I, dem., d., this, here, d. ei, rag 
 i, for rag uai, this time, now : 
 like e, q.v., contraction of uai. 
 
 I, or e, a tense particle used 
 after ka (sign of past tense, as 
 i ka fano he went), and ga, 
 and ba (final conjs.) thus, i kai 
 bano he had gone, i gai banc 
 
^} 
 
 let him have gone, the notion 
 expressed being that the action 
 (as going) was done or is to be 
 done before the doing of some- 
 thing else. Dialect syn. ko, 
 ba i bano = ba ko bano = that 
 thou have gone, lit. that thou 
 now (before something else to 
 follow) go. [Of. e after verbs 
 in Ha. and Tah.] Probably the 
 dem. e this or that (contrac- 
 tion of uai, this, now, that, 
 then), thus i kai (or ka e) bano 
 he went then (that time), ba i 
 bano go now (this time), d. kui 
 ban, you now go (as bidding 
 farewell). 
 
 I, in ei, it, or that, not that, no : 
 syn. eiio. 
 
 I, no, compare e in ei. [This 
 neg. ad. is seen in Sa. i (in i'ai 
 no). To. i (in ikai no) ; for the 
 kai, see tika.] 
 
 la, verb, suf., 3 sing., dd. i, e, 
 him, her, it. 
 
 I, prep, (also e), contracted from 
 
 1 ni (li), often t. prep. [Ma. i, 
 id.] 
 
 Note. — The verb, suf., 3 
 sing., is often combined with 
 this prep, ia, d. i, for iia, ii. 
 
 la, s., d. for bia, child. 
 
 Iak,s.,d., mother (vocative). See 
 aka and i art. [Mg. kaky 
 and ikaky, my father (voc.)] 
 
 Ibe ! iebe ! iboi ! interj., ex- 
 clamation of wonder, surprise, 
 and pleasure, d. bai. See bai ; 
 i as in io, iore. 
 
 Igam (i, art.), dd. agam, nigami, 
 kigami, kinami. 
 
 Igin, d., ad., here ; i prep., and 
 gin (or kin), q.v. [Sa. i 'inei, 
 Fut. ikunei, id.] 
 
 83 
 
 [in 
 
 Igira, d. for igita. 
 
 Igiri, s., and 
 
 Igura, s. Same as egura. 
 
 Igita, dd. agita, nigita, kigita, 
 nininta : i, art., and gita, for 
 nita. 
 
 Ika, s., c. art. naika, fish. [Sa. 
 ia. My. ikan, Santo d. ika.] 
 Cf. H. dag, pi. const. d6ge 
 and dagah, const. dSgath, fish. 
 It is possible that ika is the 
 same by the elision of the d. 
 
 Iki, a., small, little; in kariki 
 (kar' iki) little children. See 
 kiki. [To. iki small, little.] 
 
 Ikin, or kin, s., c. art. nikin, a 
 bird's nest. [Mg. akany.] H. 
 ken, A. wakn', wukunai, 
 id. 
 
 Ilibagoen, s., a basket with 
 closed bottom, a purse, or 
 wallet : ala (basket), 6ago, 
 uon. 
 
 Ili-fiki, v., also lele- or lili-fiki, d. 
 syn. kelu-faki, as rarua i ili- 
 fiki nagusu the canoe rounds 
 the point, or cape. See lele, 
 lili ; fiki or faki is a com - 
 pound of the two preps, fi (or 
 fa) and ki. 
 
 Ilisela, ad., throughout, for lili" 
 sela, lit. all round (throughout) 
 the way : lele (or lili) sela . 
 
 Imrum, d. imrau, ad., inside the 
 house : i prep., moru hollow , 
 um house. See katema. 
 In, s., c. art. nla, the wind, the 
 air : lagi. [My. angin, Mg. 
 anina, the wind.] 
 In, dem., this, d. na. [Cf. Sa. 
 nei this now, Mg. iny that, 
 this, My. ini this.] S. hana 
 this. Oh. 'ahen, Assy, annu, 
 this. 
 
inia] 
 
 Inia, inea, or enea, d., pers. pron., 
 
 3 sing., he, she, it. 
 Inin, here : i prep., and nin this. 
 Inini, d., s., c. art. nainini, spirit, 
 
 soul. See anu. 
 Inira, inera, or enera, d., pers. 
 
 pron., 3 pi., they. 
 Inira, or nira, or nera, d., verb. 
 
 suf., 3 pi., them. 
 Inuma, s., d. for isuma. 
 lo, ad., yes. [Sa. io, Fi. io or 
 
 ia yes, Ja. iya.] H. 'ihu', E. 
 
 'ewa, yes. 
 Ior6, ad., d. org, yes. [Fi. iarai 
 
 yes.] From io, and ri dem. 
 
 See eri. 
 Iru, or em, or ru, verb, pron., 3 
 
 pL, they, d. iu, or u. 
 Ira, or Sra, or ra, verb, pron., 3 
 
 dual, they two. 
 Ira (d. ir), or ra, verb, suf., 3 pi., 
 
 them. 
 Isi, s., c. art. naisi na, basis, 
 
 foundation; naisi matuana its 
 
 great foundation, naisi matua 
 
 nafisan the great foundation of 
 
 the discourse or speech, its text, 
 
 naisi namal the foundation of 
 
 the affair ; and 
 Isuma, d. inuma (s to n), s., a 
 
 clearing for a plantation, lit. 
 
 the foundation of the clearing 
 
 for cultivation. See uma. A. 
 
 'iss', &c., a foundation. 
 Is, ad., or interj,, no, not so. 
 
 [Mg. isy, id.] I, neg. ad., and 
 
 s' dem. See s6. 
 Ita, s., c. art. naita,. d. for nata, 
 
 a human being, man. See ata. 
 Ita, interj. of exhortation, come! 
 
 now then ! come now ! [Ta. 
 
 ita, id.] A. hi'ta adesdum, 
 
 adeste. 
 Itaki, s., dd. otaki, uataki, a 
 
 84 [ka 
 
 split stick for grasping and 
 lifting hot oven stones, the 
 native tongs : i art., and taki. 
 
 Iu, or gu, verb pron., 3 pi., d. for 
 
 „ iru, or Sru, they. 
 
 Iu, s., c. art. naiu or naiyu, d. 
 for nausu. See usu. 
 
 K, 
 
 ., d., verb, suf., 2 sing., thee, 
 d. ko. A. ka thee. 
 
 Ka, ki, or kg, ad., as tera ki 
 mala move (lit. fly) like a 
 hawk (of the dancing of 
 women who move with both 
 arms stretched out like the 
 wings of a hawk) ; usually 
 prefixed to another particle, as 
 kite as, kasa as what 1 d. kua 
 (kuwa) as what ? A. ka, H. 
 kg as. 
 
 K, d. gu (ku), nom. suf., 1 sing., 
 my, as naruk my hand. [My. 
 ku, Mg. ho.] 
 
 Ka, k', tense particle, past in- 
 definite, as a ka bano, I went, 
 i ka bano he went, d. ki ban 
 he went (ki is k' tense particle, 
 and i he, the verbal pron. 
 being after the tense part,, 
 whereas in i ka it is before it). 
 In one dialect the particle te is 
 added, as a kate ban, ku kate 
 ban, i kate ban, &c. In 
 another dialect the particle te 
 is added thus, kate ban (k' 
 tense part., a verb. pron. I, 
 and te tense part.) I went, 
 kute ban (u represents the 
 verb. pron. you) you went, 
 kite ban (i verb. pron. he or 
 she) he went, tu kute ban (1 
 
^1 
 
 pi., incl.), agam kute ban (1 
 pi., excL), we went, kute ban 
 you (pi.) went, ru kute ban 
 they went : used sometimes 
 for pluperfect. See te. As 
 to ki ban he went, it may also 
 denote the present, " he goes," 
 or what practically is not dis- 
 tinguishable from it. [Fi. ka 
 a sign of the past tense, some- 
 times of the present.] See 
 the word following the next. 
 K', d. ga, d. ka, final couj., that, 
 in order that : prefixed to the 
 verbal pron. it loses its vowel : 
 in the d. in which this particle 
 is pronounced ga, the verb, 
 pron. is put before it— ^i ga he 
 that, i.e., that he, d. ke (k' 
 that, e he) that he, ka (k' that, 
 a I) that I, d. a ga : the order 
 seen in ka that I, ke (or ki) 
 that he, is the older and more 
 ■correct : examples, ka fan that 
 I go, ke fan that he go, let 
 him go, and so with every 
 verb in the language. This is 
 aiot a tense but a mood, though 
 the idea of futurity is implied : 
 to make the future tense fo 
 {see bo, mo, uo) is added, thus 
 ka fo ban I shall go, I will go, 
 ke fo ban he will go (he shall 
 go is rather ke ban, i.e., he 
 must go, but also let him go, 
 and he may go, and to go or 
 that he go). As final conj. 
 A. ka', H. ki, that, in order that 
 {with the future), Latin ut 
 {with the subjunctive). It is 
 not surprising that k' in 
 some dialects denotes the 
 future. Thus in Florida it 
 denotes the future, as ke bosa 
 
 85 [ka 
 
 (k particle of tense, e he) he 
 will speak, compare Tigre Mat. 
 xvi. 27 (when the Son of Man) 
 sJiall come (Aimatse), for the 
 simple future in Ethiopic : this 
 Tigre ki is k' the particle 
 in question (A. ka') and i, verb, 
 pron. or preformative, 3 sing. 
 [Ef. d. ga, d. k', final con- 
 junction, Ysabel ge, gi, Rara- 
 tonga ka, usually kia. Ma. kia 
 (the a is a dem. added). To. 
 ke, Mg. h': Earatonga ka, 
 future, in some places past, 
 Florida k', future, Mg. h', 
 future.] 
 
 Ka, d., dem. ki, or ke, this, 
 there (near), as nauot ka this 
 chief; ke, and ga in naga. See 
 word after next below. [My. 
 iki, ika, iku, this, that, TaSa. 
 aki, or ake, this.] E. ka dem., 
 seen in z6ku, Amh. y6h, or ih6, 
 for Iks this. Arm. dek, dak, 
 deka', dake', A. daka. With 
 the Semitic demonstrative ka, 
 Dillmann, Gr. Eth., § § 62, 6-5, 
 seen in these words (whence 
 E. kia, prefixed to personal 
 pronouns) compares probably 
 Assy, aga this (Sayce, Assy. 
 Gr.) 
 
 NoTB. — This Semitic dem. 
 ka is seen also in E. 'elku, 
 'elketu, Ch. 'illek, A. 'olaka, 
 <fec., these, those. 
 
 Ka, prep., usually ki, rarely ka, 
 as d. i ba ka tafa (commonly 
 i ba ki tafa) he went to the 
 hill : ki, or gi (ngi) is to, be- 
 longing to, of, for, from, and 
 transitive prep, after verbs ; 
 prefi^xed to the nom. suf. it 
 forms poss. prons., as kagu, 
 
ka] 
 
 kama, kana, &o. ; kana his, for 
 him, is syn. c. kakana, kanana. 
 [My. ka to, unto, towards, 
 after, according to, much used 
 in composition in the forma- 
 tion of other preps, and ads., 
 as in kan transitive prep, after 
 verbs, and akan to, &c., and 
 particle of the future tense, 
 Mg. ho to, for, belonging to, 
 and particle of the future 
 tense. Ma. ki to, towards, &c., 
 and, after verbs, transitive 
 prep.J Amh. ka to, of, from, 
 Himyaritic k? or ki after 
 verbs transitive prep. ; H. ki is 
 a conj., that; compare 'ad ki 
 until (conj.), or until that, with 
 E. and Amh. 'eska, 'es, for H. 
 'ad, prep, to, unto. Thus the 
 same particle which is a final 
 conjunction (see above, under 
 k' (ga, ka), final conj.) in A. 
 and H. is a prep, in Him- 
 yaritic and Amh. 
 
 Ka, or ki, dem., rel. pron., art. 
 (same as word before the pre- 
 ceding, above), prefixed to 
 nouns, as kafika the scented, 
 that which is odorous, kalumi 
 that which lumi, spider ; to 
 numerals, as karua second, 
 katolu third, &c. (twoed, &c.) 
 to poss. pron , as kakana, 
 kanana, kinin, kiana ; to pers, 
 prons., nom., kinau, kigita 
 [My. ka, Mg. ha, Ja. ka, Fi, 
 ka. Ma. (^atea, Aotara, <fec.) 
 and see under baka, note ] 
 
 Kaba sia, d. See koba sia, to 
 follow. 
 
 Ka6e, s., a small basket. [Ma. 
 kakapu a small basket for 
 cooked food, so called from 
 
 18 [kabuera 
 
 being curved (kapu) like the 
 hollow of the hand (kapu).] 
 S. kapo' poculum, H. kaf, or 
 kap, hollow of the hand, pi. a 
 hollow vessel, pan, or bowl, 
 H. kafaf to bend, curve. 
 
 Ka6S, s., a kind of crab. 
 
 Kabe, d. kkfini, s., a pigeon, d. 
 kime. [Ma. kukupa, Tah. 
 uupa. Am. um, Epi ama, id.] 
 A. llama' pigeons. 
 
 Kabu, s., d. koau, the native 
 " pudding " (tied up in a 
 bundle, and cooked in the 
 oven) ; the main article of 
 native food : see kofu. [Tah. 
 ohu a bundle of some food tied 
 up and baked in the native 
 oven, Sa. 'ofu'ofu to envelope 
 in leaves (for cooking).] A. 
 kobbai, kabab', "kibby", the 
 national dish of the Arabs, 
 made of pounded or brayed 
 wheat and fish or flesh, 
 gathered into a round mass, 
 and cooked in the oven. See 
 the verb under the word kofu. 
 
 Kabu, s., fire ; and 
 
 Kabu tera gia, v., to burn heating^ 
 it (cold food), to warm or heat 
 (cold food). [My. api, Sa. afi, 
 Mg. afo fire, Sa. afia, ps., to 
 be burnt accidentally.] S. 
 hab to burn, A. hobahib' 
 (redup.) fire. 
 
 Kabu, s., in talekabu na. See 
 kobu. 
 
 Kabuer, v. i., or a., to be grey- 
 haired, aged ; 
 
 Kabuer, d., s., a husband, lit. 
 an aged man ; 
 
 Kabuera, d., s., a wife, an aged 
 woman, d. abuera, or abura, 
 c. art. nabuera, nabura (k 
 
kaf] 
 
 elided)>i, A. kabira to be ad- 
 vanced in age, kabir advanced 
 ill age and fully grown, E. 
 'eber old woman (k elided). 
 
 Kaf, V. i., to be bent (as with 
 hunger). See also kai. [Ma. 
 kapu curly, kapu the hollow 
 of the hand.] H. kafaf to be 
 bent, kaf hollow of the hand. 
 
 Kafika, s., the rose apple. [Fut. 
 kafika, Fi. kavika, Ml. P. 
 havih, Malo avica, TaSa. 
 kabika (khabika), id.] H. 
 tapuali an apple (so called from 
 its scent, from nafali), A. 
 toffall' an apple, not only the 
 common one, but also the 
 lemon, citron, &c. 
 
 Note. — The ka-, in kafika, 
 is not for ta-, but the Oceanic 
 prefix ka, that (that which). 
 
 Kafini, s., d. kabe, q.v. 
 
 Kafikafi, v., gafikafi, q.v. 
 
 Kafu tia, or gafu tia, v. t., to 
 wrap up (a thing, as a stone, 
 with cloth, so as to cover it 
 all round), same as kofu sa, 
 which is used of thus wrap- 
 ping up food to be cooked ; 
 hence 
 
 Kafukafu na, s., pellicle, as of an 
 egg or fruit (its wrapper or 
 covering), d. kamu. 
 
 Kai, V. i., to be bent, for kaf, 
 q.v. 
 
 Kai, conj., d. syn. bo, conj., q.v.: 
 ka (see ga, conj .) and i, he, she, 
 it. 
 
 Kai, or kae, tense particle (com- 
 pounded of ka, q.v., sign of 
 past tense, and i or e) of the 
 pluperfect. See i. 
 
 Kai (or kei), gai, v. i., to cry, 
 sing (men, birds), sing out. 
 
 87 [kala 
 
 sound, &c. [Ml. P. keke to 
 sing.] E. nakawa to sound, 
 give forth a sound (of the 
 human voice, songs of birds, 
 (Src), A. naka'a to cry out, 
 sing out. 
 
 Kai, s., a sharp shell used for 
 scraping : goi a. 
 
 Kaimi sia, v. t., to make to exist, 
 as (the heathen used to say of 
 the sea, &c.,) i tumana kaimi 
 sia it made itself to exist ; and 
 
 Kaimis, s., c. art. nakaimis one 
 that does anything hiddenly 
 and wonderfully, as destroy- 
 ing an enemy by changing one's 
 form magically and deceiv- 
 ing, &c. H. hum arise, exist, 
 go forth, grow up, stand (be 
 fixed). Hi. cause to arise, exist, 
 A. karaa, 2, rightly appoint 
 and dispose (a thing), 4, pre- 
 pare (evil again.st a person), &c. 
 
 Kainaga, s., c. art., a tribe or 
 family clan. [Sa. 'aiga a 
 family, relations. To. kainaga 
 a meal, victuals.] See kan ia. 
 
 Kakana (kakagu, kakama, kaka- 
 gita, &c.), poss. pron., syn. 
 agana, (fee, q.v. : kaka (= aga) 
 is ka dem. or rel., and ka 
 prep. [Epi gka, gkana his, 
 &c.] 
 
 Kakei, s., c. art. nakakei, a story 
 (traditional). A. llaka' to 
 narrate, Nm. liucfeya, narra- 
 tive, tale. 
 
 Kaka, s., kaka naniu. See under 
 aka. 
 
 Kakat, s , a bite. See kati a or 
 kat ia. 
 
 Kala, V. i., or a., little, small. 
 See under bakal ia ii. [Mg. 
 kely, id.] 
 
kal] 88 
 
 Kal, s., a child. See under j 
 bakal ia i. 
 
 Kalai, d., s., a spider's web, and 
 d. nilau, and I 
 
 Kalau, d., id., lit. that which is 
 woven. [My. labalaba and 
 lawalawa a spider.] H. 'arab 
 to weave. See kolau. 
 
 Kaiau, gkalau. See galau ia. 
 
 Kale-baga, s., d. kaleraaga, bow- 
 string (made out of the baga 
 or maga tree) : kalu. 
 
 Kali, s., native spade, digging 
 stick : kil ia. 
 
 Kal ia, or gal ia, q.v., and redup., 
 
 Kalikal ia, 
 
 Kalu, and galu, s., bowstring, 
 kalu nasu : kale in kale baga. 
 See kalu tia. 
 
 Kalu, s., d. kul, cloth, clothing, 
 lit. a covering ; and 
 
 Kalu tia (same as galu tia), d. j 
 kulu tia, V. t., to cover, as 
 with a mat or rug, i kalu ki 
 nakalu he covers (himself) 
 with cloth or clothing, i kalu, 
 d. i kulu or i gulu,' middle 
 sense, he covers (himself), as 
 with bedclothes, i.e., mats or 
 such like, also to put the bow- 
 string on a bow (or galu tia), 
 and to clasp round with the 
 arms (a violent man, to re- 
 strain him, or a pig, &c., 
 stooping to lift it in order to 
 carry it) : the vowels of this 
 word are changed in kalu, 
 kulu, kele Cgalu, gulu, gele), 
 golu. See similar changes of 
 vowels in the My. word under 
 kela, iv/ra. A. galla, 2, to 
 cover, 5, to be covered, clothed, 
 gullu coverings, clothes, 4c., 
 as rugs : the idea of covering 
 
 [kamh.am 
 
 arises from that of wrapping 
 round or rolling up — see the 
 eg. H. galal to roll, and its 
 related words in Ges. Diet., 
 and see below, under kela, 
 kelu. 
 
 Kalumi, s., the spider, lit. that 
 which lu?ni. See lumi to 
 swell. 
 
 Kama, d. for kabu, in anekama, 
 q.v. 
 
 Kama, d., verb, suf., 2 pL, you, 
 d. mu. 
 
 Kamam, d. for kinami, q.v. 
 
 Kami, d., pers. pron., 2 pi, you. 
 
 Kami a, v. t., to seize, grip, take 
 with the fingers, or with 
 nippers, compress or squeeze 
 between two things (like alat 
 ia) ; same as kamut ia, q.v. 
 
 Kamu na, s., pellicle, d. for 
 kafukafu na, q.v. 
 
 Kamut ia, or gamut ia, v. t., to 
 take, grasp with the fingers, 
 nip, then (like alat ia) to nip 
 or cut with scissors, to cut the 
 hair ; hence 
 
 Kam, s., c. art. nikam, native 
 tongs (a split stick for grasping 
 hot oven stones, and lifting 
 them), lit. that which (kami 
 or kamut) nips, seizes, grasps, 
 d. kau, q.v., or gau (agau), and 
 
 Kamkam, s., scissors. [My. cubit, 
 or chubit, Ja. juwit, to nip, 
 pinch. My. angkub = agau, 
 tongs, nippers. Ha. umiki to 
 pinch with the fingers, Fi. 
 qamu-ta to take hold of, or 
 hold as with pincers, to shut 
 (the mouth), ai qamu, anything 
 to qamuta with (My. angkub) 
 as pincers, bullet mould, vice.] 
 H. kamas to squeeze together, 
 
KANA-] 
 
 hence to take with the hand, 
 hamat to hold fast with the 
 hands, to sieze firinly, kafas 
 contract, shut (as the mouth), 
 kabas to take, grasp with the 
 hand, A. kabasa to take with 
 the tips of the fingers, kabas'a 
 take, grasp with the hand. 
 Kana-, pref. to nom. suf., forming 
 poss. pron., kanagu, kanama, 
 kanana, <fec. : kanana, d. kinin, 
 is syn. o. kakana, q.v. [Epi 
 kana-, "d. kona-, as kanaku, 
 my, &c.] Kana- is ka, dem., 
 and na, prep. See ni. 
 Kana, v. i., also kin, and ki, d. 
 kano, to shrink from, to be 
 unable ; i kana bat ia he is 
 unable to do it (shrinks from, 
 or is afraid), i sua bo kin, or 
 bo ki, he takes (acquires) a 
 mind shrinking from, afraid, 
 unable (to do something). H. 
 ka'ah to. be fearful, faint- 
 hearted, A. ka'a to abstain or 
 decline from fear. 
 Kan ia, v. t., to eat, redup. kani- 
 kani: tea kanien that which 
 is for eating, nakanien act of 
 eating, the eating, food, finaga, 
 q.v., food, bagan ia to feed, 
 make to eat, or fagan ia, q.v., 
 and faga, fagafaga, nakabu 
 faga devouring (eating) fire, 
 nalagi kanikani a strong wind, 
 kana a squall ; kainaga a 
 tribe, family clan (from eating 
 together). [Fi. kana to eat, 
 kani-a, to eat, vakani-a feed, 
 cause to eat, used also of the 
 heat of the sun, and violence 
 of the wind, Sa. ai. My. makan, 
 Mg. (m transposed) homana, 
 hanina, to eat.] A. 'akala to 
 
 89 
 
 [kanoa 
 
 eat, 3, eat together, 4, to feed, 
 cause to eat, 'akil' one who 
 lives with one, messmate, 
 familiar friend (cf. kainaga, 
 and A. 3), H. 'akal to eat ; A. 
 'akala, 2), to scratch (thehead), 
 'akila to be itchy, Ef. makini- 
 kini to be itchy. 
 
 Kana, s., a squall. See under 
 preceding word. 
 
 Kanau, or kanao, s., d. kanoa, 
 kano, child ; nasuma ni kanoa, 
 or kano, the womb, lit. house 
 of the child (or foetus). In E. 
 Mai this is called kiri fanau 
 the cover (kiri = kuli = skin 
 or covering), or skin of the 
 child. This word is familiarly 
 used by men to each other as 
 a vocative, as kanao, or kano, 
 mate ! (child !), pi. kanO maga 
 you people, d. nakanoa, kano 
 ni Efate man of Efate, pi. 
 nakan Efate people of Efate, 
 lit. children of Efate, d. nati 
 ni Efate (see ani, ati, child) : 
 hence kano is sometimes equiv- 
 alent to " person," as kano 
 sa, kano uia, a bad, a good 
 person ; 
 
 Kan, c, art. nakan, children (of 
 a place) ; 
 
 Kano, or kanoa, s. — see kanao; 
 
 Kanoa, s., c. art. nakanoa, see 
 kanao. [^^y. kanak child, 
 related to anak, id., as Ef. 
 kanao to ani, q.v., child : that 
 is, kanak and kanao have the 
 prefix ka, and kanao ^= that 
 born, that which is born, so 
 Mg. zanaka (anaka), with a 
 different prefix or article, and 
 Sa. fanau has the prefix fa or 
 f, the anau being identical 
 
KANO] 
 
 with the anao in kanao.] A. 
 "walada, H. yalad, E. walada 
 to bring forth, bear (of a 
 mother), to beget (of males), 
 and used in E. also of 
 the earth bringing forth its 
 produce. 
 
 Kano, or kanoa, d. kanau, or 
 
 Kanoka, v. i., or a., to be pro- 
 duced (as it were born, of 
 yams), naui i kanoa (d. kanau) 
 the yam is produced, born, or 
 growing (as if the insat had 
 brought it forth new born), 
 naui kano new or growing 
 yams. See preceding word. 
 
 Kara, or gara, redup. garagara, 
 V. i., or a,, strong, hard, and 
 d. karakarai, or garakarai, 
 strong, tagaragara strong, 
 vehement. [My. kras hard, 
 violent, strong, vehement, 
 force, Mg. hery power, 
 strength, force, might, mihery 
 strong, powerful, mighty, hery 
 being forced to, compelled, 
 constrained.] See next word. 
 
 Kara, or gara, redup. garagara, 
 V. i., or a., to be dry, bagara 
 ia, V. c, to make dry, to dry 
 (a thing), nakaran the being 
 dry, also the being (bare and 
 dry) poor, poverty ; kara dry, 
 then (see preceding word) 
 hard, strong, stiff, rigid (as 
 dry wood). See also kara, s., 
 and makarakara, v. i., infra. 
 [My. kring dry, kring kan to 
 dry '(a thing), Mg. haraka 
 dried up, scorched, parched.] 
 H. liarar to burn, be hot (cf . 
 A. harra, E. harara) ; the 
 primary idea is that of " the 
 shrivelled roughness of things 
 
 90 [kar lAi 
 
 that are dried or scorched,"" 
 Ges. ; to be burned, to be 
 dried up. 
 
 Kara, s., c. art. nekara, the 
 nettle (so called from its- 
 burning ; compare makarakara 
 to be burning, to be hot, as 
 the mouth with pepper, or the 
 skin stung by a nettle). See 
 preceding word, and compare 
 H. barul the nettle, so called 
 from its burning, from the 
 root haral ^= Larar. 
 
 Kara ki, or gara ki, v,, to seize, 
 grasp, and 
 
 Kar ia, or gar ia, v. t., to 
 scratch, scrape, shave, seize, 
 redup. garikar ia, also karu 
 tia, or garu tia, v. t., to 
 scratch, and karo i, or garo i, 
 V. t., to scratch, scrape, redup. 
 garokaro, and karokaro, karo- 
 karoa, or garokaroa, itchy, 
 scratchy, scabby, and garu 
 and tagaru, v. t., to seize, 
 grasp, garu sera (grasp every- 
 thing) be grasping, redup. 
 garukaru, id., karo to scrape, 
 sweep, to swim (i.e., sweep 
 with the arms — to swim with- 
 out doing this is afa, or ofa), 
 karati, karakarati scratched, 
 marked, scored ; kari, s., a 
 plane (from being moved with 
 a sweeping or sawing motion, 
 or shaving) ; kare sia, or kares 
 ia, V. t., to scratch, scrape; 
 gure sia, v. t., to gnaw. 
 scranch. [My. garis, Ja. 
 garit to scratch, score, garu to 
 rake, &c., garut scratch, scrape, 
 claw, garok to scrape, g^rap 
 grasp at, gftraji a saw, greb to 
 gnaw, karat, karot, kftrot 
 
KARATl] 
 
 grind or gnash the teeth, make 
 a grating noise, karut to 
 scratch, k8,rok to rub, currj 
 (a horse), kikir to rasp, file, a 
 rasp, file, avaricious, Mg. 
 haratra shaved, nianaratra to 
 shave, kory gnaw, scrape, Fi. 
 kari, or karikari, v. i., kari-a, 
 karitaka, v. t., to scrape, karo- 
 karo prickly heat, itch, Sa. 
 'ili a rasp, file, saw.] A. 
 garra to drag, snatch, sweep, 
 seize, H. garar to scrape, 
 sweep, saw (primary meaning), 
 to drag or snatch away, to 
 saw (mggerah a saw), to gargle, 
 produce rough sounds in the 
 throat (see Ef. karo, throat, 
 infra), cognates S. gra' to 
 shave, H. gara' scratch, scrape 
 (see Ef. gur ia, magir ia), &c. 
 
 Karati, and redup., 
 
 Karakarati, a., see kar ia. 
 
 Karaf ia, v. t., to scratch, scrape 
 (the earth or ground) ; hence 
 
 Karafi, v. i., to creep 6a the 
 ground (as it were scratching 
 or scraping on the ground) : 
 see kar ia. Karafi a is kara fi a, 
 fi, q.v., prep. 
 
 Karaka, v. i., to move tremul- 
 ously (creep), as crabs and 
 such like animals do ; karaka 
 ki naburuma (a mother-in-law) 
 creeps or shrinks away from 
 her son-in-law (trembling and 
 afraid) : kara-ka, compare pre- 
 ceding word. 
 
 Kare sia, or kares ia, d. karas ia, 
 V. t., to scratch, scrape, and. 
 from the idea of scraping to- 
 gether, beinggathered together, 
 
 Karesi, or karisi, s., a cluster 
 (as of cocoanuts), and 
 
 91 [kasa.. 
 
 Karesibum, pr. n., of a person 
 mentioned in a myth, one of 
 the two sons of a woman who 
 came down from heaven, lit. 
 blossoming-cluster. See kar 
 ia. 
 
 Karei sa, d. karei ki nia, v. t., tO' 
 dislike, be averse from, hate.. 
 [My. iri to hate, Mg. hala. 
 hated, detested, abhorred.} 
 A. kariha to dislike, abhor. 
 
 Karei, or garei turi a, to dislike 
 (the thing he is bidden or sent 
 to do) abiding with him (some- 
 one). See turi a, and cf. kita 
 roa sa. 
 
 Kari, s., a plane. See. kar ia. 
 
 Kari, v. i., to hasten, takari, id. 
 [Of. Ma. kari rush along 
 violently.] A. kara, 1, 8, to- 
 hasten. 
 
 Kari-iki (kariki), s., little child,, 
 little children, and 
 
 Kari-kiki (karikiki), s., id. (kik£ 
 little), and 
 
 Kari-riki (kaririki), s., d., H. 
 'eker a shoot, and riki little. 
 
 Karo, karoi, garoi, v. i., to swim- 
 (sweeping with the arms) : kar 
 ia. 
 
 Karokaro, and 
 
 Karokaroa, scabby, itchy : kar ia. 
 
 Karo na, s., c. art., dd. gato na 
 (garo na), kanro na, the throat,, 
 gullet, H. garon the throat 
 from garar (see kar ia), E. 
 guSre the throat. 
 
 Karo, V. i., d., to be uncovered,, 
 have the clothes ofi", naked. 
 H. galah to be naked. See- 
 girigiri. 
 
 Karu tia, or karut ia. See kar 
 ia. 
 
 Kasa, and kasafa, also kasana,. 
 
kasana] 
 
 inter, ad., as what ? how 'I 
 ■why 1 d. kua : ka, ad., as, and 
 sa, or safa, q.v., what 1 
 
 Kasana, inter, ad., as what ? 
 kasa, with the dem. na suffixed. 
 
 Xasau, s., c. art., small branch, 
 fruit stalk, nakasau na its 
 small branch, d. (transposed) 
 sakau, id., and also a reef. 
 See sakau. [My. gusong a 
 reef of rocks.] A. kas'ib' 
 long and slender branch, H. 
 ikisbe', pi. const., " the ends, 
 i.e., the roots of the mountains 
 (in the depth of the sea)," 
 Jon. ii. 7 ; perhaps the branches 
 of the mountains (running out 
 into the sea). 
 
 IKas ia, or kasi a, gas ia, v. t., to 
 rub, wipe. [My. gosok, gosot, 
 gosoki, gisik, kisil, to rub, 
 Mg. kasoka rubbed, mikasoka 
 to rub.] A. kas's'a, 3), to rub, 
 has'a' (kasV) to rub, wipe. 
 
 .Kas-toru, s., handkerchief, lit. 
 sweat- wiper : kas ia, and 
 toru, q.v. 
 
 JKasi, V. i., or a., to be sweet, 
 redup. gkasi (gakasi), dd. gari, 
 gatr, kati. [Cf. Mg. hanitra 
 fragrance, manitra sweet smell- 
 ing, My. manis sweet, luscious, 
 mild, gentle.] A. nakusa to 
 be sweet, nakis' sweet, frag- 
 rant with sweet odour. 
 
 Note. — The k elided and 
 initial n retained in My. and 
 Mg., and the final has also 
 been elided in Tab. mona 
 sweet, and Ef. mina sweet, 
 pleasant. 
 
 Kasu, s., an old man, a kind of 
 priest or sacred man. [Fi. 
 qase an old man.] S. kas'is'o 
 
 92 [kat I a 
 
 an old man, a priest, from 
 kas' to grow old (Freytag), 
 A. kas's' a Christian Presbyter. 
 
 Kasu, or kas, d. kau, s., c. art. 
 nakasu, tree, wood. [Epi. dd. 
 iesi, lakai, Ml. dd. nice, nai, 
 TaSa. tagai (taghai), Fut- 
 rakau, Sa. laau, My. kayu, 
 Mg. hazo, tree, wood, Mg. 
 hazo hard.] H. 'es tree, 
 wood, Ch. 'a', from H. 'aSah, 
 A. 'asa' to be hard, firm. 
 Note. — Kasu has the art. k. 
 
 Rasua, or gasua, d. kasu, v. i., 
 or a., hard, strong, redup. 
 kaskasua, id., jiakasuana, s., 
 the being hard or strong, 
 strength. [Ja. kakas hard, 
 firm, rigid, stiff, cf. kuwasa 
 strong.] H. kas'ah, A. kasa' 
 to be hard, stiff, H. kas'eh 
 hard, firm, fast, strong, power- 
 ful. 
 
 Note. — In Ef. naSona i 
 gasua his heart is hard, meri 
 gasua ki nia treat him hardly, 
 or with violence. 
 
 Kat, or kati, v. i., to thunder, 
 tifai i kat, or i gat, the thunder 
 thunders. See following word. 
 
 Kat ia, or gat ia, v. t., to make 
 fast, as nakasu i gati natua na 
 the log makes fast his foot, i.e., 
 jambs it and holds it firmly 
 fixed against something ; to 
 compress between two things, 
 hence to bite, redup. katikati, 
 na kakat, s., a bite, fikit to 
 bite each other, savage, to be 
 pressed together, hence to be 
 inspissated, clotted, curdled, 
 katak, redup. gkatak, gakatak, 
 with the suffixed k as in kanok 
 or kanoka ; nalagi i katikati 
 
KATAU] 
 
 the wind becomes fixed (in a 
 certain direction) ; i tua gat 
 ia sa he gave him by compact 
 or computation for it, i mate 
 gat ia he died by compact or 
 computation for it, i.e., he died 
 for it as for sin; i kati, or gati, 
 to thunder, is said to be the 
 same word, tifai i gat, and 
 when a " thunderbolt " rends 
 a tree it is said tifai i gati 
 6ora ia the thunder bites, rend- 
 ing it (6ora i.) The Efatese say 
 that the thunder has teeth, 
 and the idea in tifai i gat is 
 that the tifai is biting i.e., 
 grinding its teeth together, or 
 rending with its teeth. [Ma. 
 kati block up, closed, kakati a 
 bundle, sheaf, and, v. t., tie 
 up in bundles, katikati, v.i., 
 champ, move the jaw as in 
 eating, Pi. kata (vei kata = 
 fikit) to bite, a., close together, 
 as boards on a floor. My. gigit 
 to bite, gigitan a bite, Mg. 
 hehitra, s., hold, grasp, seizure, 
 clutch, bite, kaikitra a bite, 
 bitten, manaikitra, v. t., to 
 bite, kekerina being bitten.] 
 A. 'akada to bind, fasten, to 
 make a compact, to compute, 
 to coagulate, become clotted, 
 inspissated. 
 
 Katau, s., a kind of crab. [Cf. 
 My. k&tam a crab ; to nip, 
 snip off.] Cf. A. katama to 
 bite, cut off. See koto a kind 
 of crab, infra. 
 
 Kati, d. for kasi, sweet, redup. 
 kakati. 
 
 Kate, tense part., d., past, a 
 kate, ku kate, i kate, au kate, 
 &o. : ka, and te. 
 
 93 [kau 
 
 Kate, d. Same as a kate, but 
 with the a verb. pron. after 
 the k', or between the k' and 
 te. See ka. 
 
 Kate, s., c. art. nakate, any- 
 thing, a thing, lit. the that- 
 that, d. nete (ne te, the that). 
 See ka, and te. [Fi. ka a 
 thing,] 
 
 Kate, s., kate ni rarua the stick 
 on the outside of the canoe- 
 superstruction on the side opp. 
 to the sama. 
 
 Katema, ad., outside of the 
 house. H. hus outside, and 
 ema house. See imrum, suma. 
 In ekatema, q.v. 
 
 Katoro, s., a basket. A. ka'tarai 
 a basket. 
 
 Kau, or gau, redup. kaukau (c. 
 art. agau, d. ni kam, tongs,, 
 forceps, nippers, for grasping), 
 V. t., to grasp with the hand, i 
 kau naio he grasps a club 
 (carried on his shoulder), then 
 to carry anything on the 
 shoulder, i kau nauos he grasps 
 the oar (in rowing), i kaukau 
 nara nakasu (the flying fox) 
 grasps the branch of a tree 
 (moving along it as it were 
 hand over hand, till it finds a 
 resting place), hence ba kaukau 
 (of men) go seeking a resting 
 place. See kam, kamut ia 
 [My. gawa, Fi. kau ta, to 
 carry.] 
 
 Kau, d. au, a lizard, perhaps 
 from grasping or clinging. 
 
 Kau, V. i., to bend (as with 
 hunger), also kai, and kaf, q.v. 
 
 Kau, s., d. for kasu, tree, wood. 
 
 Kau, V. i., or a,, d. for kasua, 
 hard, strong. 
 
kaua] 
 
 Xaua, s., an open worked wicker 
 basket or trap for catching 
 fish : so called because 
 
 Kaukaua, a., full of openings or 
 apertures, as if windowed, or 
 apertured : the final a is the 
 a. ending. A. kaww' an 
 opening in a wall, kawwai 
 a window (Nm. couwa dormer 
 window), Ch. kaw a window, 
 from kawab, or kavah. 
 
 Kaukau, s., c. art. nakaukau, 
 the upper cross (i.e., above 
 and across the kiat) or binding 
 sticks between a canoe and its 
 outrigger (sama) ; from grasp- 
 ing or holding together, kau, 
 V. t. 
 
 Kg, or ke (cf. kei), dem., this. 
 See ka, id., and ko id. ; kerua, 
 ketolu, d. karua, &c. 
 
 Ke, d., that he, k', final conj., 
 and e (or i) verb, pron., 3 sing.: 
 ka, k. 
 
 Ke, keke, interj. See ake ! and 
 ako ! [Florida ke ! keke !] 
 
 Ke, d., verb pron., 2 sing., you, 
 dd. k, ma, ko. 
 
 Ketaku, or keitaku, s., the 
 hinder end of a canoe, ad. 
 behind : for ko itaku. See 
 kobe. 
 
 Keikei, s., c. art. nakeikei, tattoo 
 marks or lines upon the skin. 
 [Fi. qia to tattoo.] See goi a 
 (or koi a, or kei a). 
 
 Kei naniu, for koi naniu. See 
 goia or goi a. 
 
 Kei, d., dem., this, that (near), 
 for koi, q.v. 
 
 Kekel, s., d. for kal, child, 
 infant. See under bakal ia I. 
 
 Kei, redup. gkel (kekel), v. i., 
 to sweep round or wheel in 
 
 94 [kelu 
 
 curves (of a bird in flight with- 
 out moving its wings); and 
 
 Kela, s., the curved beam or 
 wall-plate that goes round the 
 end of a native house ; and 
 
 Kele tia, v. t. (see golu tia, 
 gele tia, gel ia, gulu tia, 
 kalutia), as keleti, kei, or golu 
 nasu put the bowstring on a 
 bow, nuana i laba i keleti 
 nara nakasu its (a tree's) fruit 
 plentiful bends the branch of 
 the tree, i keleti wago (or 
 other heavy thing to be 
 carried) he stoops down and 
 clasps the pig (or other heavy 
 thing) to lift and carry it, 
 hence kelakela, or gelakela (of 
 a people carrying such things, 
 as in going to a naleouan) ; and 
 
 Kelu-faki v. t., to round or 
 double a cape (of a canoe or 
 ship), eg. syn. ili-fiki ; and 
 
 Kelu, a., going round, as bagana 
 kilu its (the army's) rear or 
 hinder part (see bago, baga) 
 going round, making a detour 
 (to surprise the enemy). [My. 
 guling, goling, giling, gulung, 
 to turn round, revolve, roll, 
 roll up, igal to whirl, curly, 
 and ikal to whirl, gyration, 
 Mg. kodia a wheel, rolled, 
 mikodia, mikodiadia to roll, 
 and mikodinkodina, &c., also 
 koriana, twirled, mikoriana to 
 twirl, and mitsingerina, mit- 
 singeringerina to turn, wind, 
 roll, revolve.] H. 'agal, i.q. 
 galal, to roll, to revolve, 'agar, 
 hence 'agur revolving, whirling, 
 gyrating (of a bird in flight), 
 A. karkara to turn (a mill) 
 round, 2, to revolve, wheel (as 
 
ken] 
 
 a bird in flight), H. gilgal a 
 wheel, (fee. 
 
 Ken, for kana, v. i. 
 
 Kerikeri, v. i., to be deep, as a 
 pit, the sea. A. ka'ara to be 
 deep. 
 
 Kesa, kesakesa, gesa, gesakesa. 
 See kisa. 
 
 Ki, ad., see ka, ad., as : also in 
 kite. 
 
 Ki, d., that (because) he : k', 
 that, and i, verb, pron., 3 sing. : 
 ka, k'. 
 
 Ki, d., dem., this, or kg, id. : ka, 
 dem. 
 
 Ki, V. i. See ken, kana, d. kano. 
 
 Ki, prep, (the usual form), c. 
 art. aki the, that which to, or 
 of, also gi, agi. See ka, prep. 
 
 Ki, same as ka, art. 
 
 Ki, redup. kiki, v. i. See gi, 
 gki (giki), V. i. 
 
 Ki, d., verb, pron., 2 pi., you, 
 dual kia : ku. 
 
 Kia-, or kie-, pref. to the nom. 
 suf. forming possessive pro- 
 nouns kiagu, kiama, kiana, 
 kiagita, kiagami, kiamu, kiara 
 or kiata : kiana his (country, 
 plantation, house, vicinity) ; 
 kia (or kie) is ki, dem., the, 
 that (same as the first ka in 
 kakana), that which, and a or 
 •e, q.v., prep. The use of 
 kakana is different, his or 
 its (as a weapon to kill him, 
 a door for a house, oar for 
 a boat, &c.) [Epi kiaku, 
 kiamo, kiano, kiandro, kie- 
 memi, kiemiu, kialo, same as 
 Ef. kiagu, kiama, &c.] 
 
 Kia, d., verb. pron. 2 dual, you 
 two, d. ko ro. [Epi ko, An. 
 ekau, id.] 
 
 95 [kili 
 
 Kiag, d. for kiama, thy (vicinity) : 
 kia-, and g suf. pron., 2 sing. 
 
 Kiat, s., c. art. nakiat, the sticks 
 which cross from the canoe to 
 the outrigger (sama) joining 
 them together. [Sa. Tah. 
 iato, Ta. niciatu, Fut. akiato. 
 Ha. iako, id.. Ma. kiato 
 thwart of a canoe.] A. gaiz' 
 pi. gawaiz', 'agwizai, gizan', 
 <fec., beam which crosses from 
 one wall to another joining 
 them together, from gaza to 
 cross over, go across. 
 
 Kie, s., c. art. nakie, the plant 
 whose leaf is baked, dried, and 
 split into thin threads to be 
 woven into mats, &c. [Sa. 
 'ie a fine mat, cloth.] See 
 under neko. 
 
 Kigami, d. kinami. 
 
 Kigita, d. syn. nigita. 
 
 Kiki, V. i., or a., and iki in kariki, 
 small. [To. iki id.] See under 
 neko. 
 
 Kikita, or gkita, redup. of kita. 
 
 Kilakila, a., knowing sagacious, 
 shy, i meta kilakila (of an 
 animal). [Fi. kila wild, sus- 
 picious, on the lookout, as an 
 animal.] A. 'akala, 1, 2, to 
 be intelligent, prudent, saga- 
 cious, 'akil', a., id. 
 
 Kil ia, or kili a, v. t., to dig, 
 hence kali, s., a digging stick, 
 and nakili, s., a current (as in 
 the sand, lit. that which digs). 
 [Sa. 'eli to dig. Ma. 'eli to be 
 dug. My. gali to dig, Mg. hady 
 ditch, trench, &c., dug, mihady 
 to dig.] E. karaya, A. kara', 
 H. karah, Oh. kera', to dig. 
 
 Kili, s., c. art. nakili, d., a cur- 
 rent : kili a. 
 
KILIKILl] 
 
 Kilikili, v., redup. of kili a, used 
 of many digging : ru kilikili 
 they (as the people of a dis- 
 trict and whose yams are ripe) 
 dig. 
 
 Kiliti, s., a sow, a mother-pig. 
 [An. karite, or kerite, an 
 animal that has had young.] 
 Kiliti, lit. that brings forth 
 (young), or the bringer forth, 
 i.e., mother. See ki or ka, 
 art., and for liti, see ani, note. 
 
 Kin, s. See ikin, nest. 
 
 Kin, d., dem., this : ki dem., and 
 in dem. [Assy, agannu this, 
 aga dem., and annu dem.] 
 
 Kinam, d. kinami. 
 
 Kinami, pers. pron., 1 pL, excl., 
 we, they. 
 
 Kinau, pers. pron., 1 sing., I, 
 shortened kinu, dd. keino, anu, 
 enu : ki, art., or dem. prefix, 
 and nau (for naku, hence nom. 
 suf. gu, d. k). [An. ainyak, 
 Epi. nagku, TaSa. enau, Sa. 
 o a'u (for ko aku), My. aku, 
 Mg. izaho, aho, I.] H. 'anoki, 
 shortened 'ani. Assy, anaku, 
 Aram, 'ftna', 'eno', E. 'ana, I. 
 
 Kinit ia, also ginit ia and gunut 
 ia, T. t., nip with the fingers, 
 nakini na the fingers (nippers), 
 kini gote fia nip, breaking it 
 (reeds for thatching), hence 
 nakini-got reeds for thatching. 
 [Fi. kini-ta nip, pinch between 
 finger and thumb, Sa. 'ini to 
 take hold of with the nails, 
 pinch, ps. 'initia. Ma. kini, 
 Ha. iniki. My. gantas (cf. Ef. 
 d. gint ia, for ginit ia) to 
 break ofi^, nip oft', snap oft'.] 
 A. karasa, to nip (with the 
 fingers), pinch, grasp with the 
 
 96 [kihi na. 
 
 points of the fingers or hand, 
 snip off. 
 
 Kini na, s., c. art., the fingers, 
 or toes, lit. the nippers, or 
 graspers ; also claws, talons. 
 
 Kini gote fia, v. t., and 
 
 Kinigot, s., c. art., see kinit ia. 
 
 Kintu, dem., that (near) : kin. 
 dem., and tu. 
 
 Kinu, I, see kinau. 
 
 Kiri, d., s., c. art. nakiri, d. syn. 
 ori, rubbing stick for produc- 
 ing fire. [Sa. 'ili rasp, file, 
 saw.] See kar ia, magiri a. 
 
 Kirikiri, s., gravel, pebble. [Sa. 
 'ili'ili, Ma. kirikiri. My. kri- 
 kil, karikil, karikil, gravel, 
 pebble.] H. garger, A. girgir^ 
 a berry, from H. garar, see 
 kar ia, eg. A. garal' gravel. 
 
 Kirikiri, a., small, like pebbles, 
 in bia kirikiri little children. 
 See preceding word. 
 
 Kis, s., a shell, used for cutting. 
 A. giz'ai a shell, from gaza'a 
 to cut. 
 
 Kis, d., dem., this, here : ki, 
 dem., and s6, dem. 
 
 Kisa, a., in mita kisa blind (the 
 eyes sunk into the head). A. 
 has', id. And 
 
 Kisa, or gisa, v. i., or a., redup., 
 
 Kisakisa, v. i., or a., to be 
 putting forth leaves, hence to 
 be green ; hence 
 
 Kisa, s., c. art., nakisa, d. takis, 
 a green stone or chalk (used 
 only for painting himself by a 
 a chief), a chief's grave (in the 
 bush, sacred). A. li'awisa to 
 have the eyes sinking into the 
 head, 4, to put forth leaves (a 
 plant), to germinate. 
 
 Kihi na, d. kui na, q.v. : kihi na, 
 
KIS Ia] 
 
 i.e., kisi na (h being for s in 
 that d.) 
 
 Kis ia, or kisi a, v. t., also gis ia, 
 redup. giskis, to feel, touch, 
 lo giskis to look, exploring (as 
 at a person's body partly un- 
 covered). A. gassa to feel, 
 touch, to explore or grope 
 •with the hand or with the 
 eyes, H. gas'as'. Pi., E. gasasa 
 to feel, touch, S. gas' to feel, 
 touch, to explore. 
 
 Kisau, V. t., d. kisur, to remove, 
 get out, stand apart : i kisau 
 ki nabua he removes from, or 
 stands out, or gets out of the 
 road, ba kisau get out (of the 
 way), remove, stand away. A. 
 kasa', kasww', kusuww', kasa', 
 to stand apart, to be remote. 
 
 Kistu, dem., this here : kis 
 dem., and tu. 
 
 Kisur (ksur), d. for kisau. See 
 (d.) esu. 
 
 Kita, a., little, small, li kita 
 small place (name of small 
 boat entrance of Havannah 
 Harbour) opp. to li leba big 
 place (name of large entrance 
 to Havannah Harbour). [8a. 
 iti, itiiti, small, few. Ma. and 
 Tah. iti, itiiti, small, little, 
 My. kate, kite, diminutive.] 
 E. liasasa, hasa to be small, 
 minute. 
 
 Kita (rare), or kite, ad., as, takes 
 the verb, pron., as i kite fatu 
 it is as (or like) a stone, kite 
 or kite uan as, as if, i bisa i 
 kite i maieto he speaks as if he 
 were angry, i marafi kite nifila 
 it is quick as lightning. A. 
 kada like, as this, as that. 
 See ki, as, and te, kite, or 
 
 97 [ko 
 
 kita, lit., as that, or like 
 that. 
 
 Kita, or kite, conj., or, d. ko : 
 rarua kite boat a canoe or 
 boat ; inter, particle at the 
 end of sentences, d. ko, as i 
 bano kite 1 has he gone ? 
 fully this is, i bano kite i tika ? 
 has he gone or not 1 For 
 kite, disj. conj., see ko, conj., 
 infra. 
 
 Kita, v., to divine, redup. kikita, 
 gkita, lit. to perceive or feel 
 with the eye or the mind (cf. 
 rogo, rorogo), bati kita ia, or 
 gita ia to try (cf. bati rog ia), 
 lit. make or do feeling or per- 
 ceiving or knowing or finding 
 out. [Ma. kite to see, know, 
 perceive, find out, discover, 
 matakite to divine, s. one who 
 foresees an event.] A. wag- 
 ada to find with the eye or the 
 mind (a thing sought), to per- 
 ceive by the feeling of the 
 body (a thing), or by the 
 mind, 4, make to find or to 
 perceive. 
 
 Kitk ia, and gita ia, v. t., to hate, 
 redup. kitakita ia, to be en- 
 vious of, to hate ; and 
 
 Kita roa sa, or kita roa i, to hate 
 turning after him (someone), 
 as a boy sent a message meet- 
 ing another boy and (hating 
 to do the message) turns after 
 him to play. See roa. H. 
 kut, followed by prep, be, to 
 loathe, also kuS and nakat. 
 
 Kita, in-bakitaand bakitakita. 
 See makitakita, id. 
 
 Kite. See kita, ad. 
 
 Ko, verb, suf., 2 sing., you (pi. 
 for sing.), dd. k, ke, ma. 
 8 
 
KO] 
 
 Ko, d., verb, pron., 2 sing., you, 
 d. ku. 
 
 Ko, sign of imperative, 2 pi. 
 (sing, ba), lit. that you : 
 k' final conj., and o fragment 
 of pars, pron., 2 pi. 
 
 Ko, d., ad. of assent., d. syn. na, 
 and redup., 
 
 Koko, id., d. ko, interj. See 
 ako and kori : ko, dem. 
 
 Ko, ad., now, d. syn. uo (wo), as 
 i ko toko (d. i uo toko) he 
 now remains (has not yet gone) 
 ba ko toko remain now, or 
 just now, d. syn. ba i toko 
 (bai toko) ; and i ko toko, d. 
 i uo toko, in another d. is i ta 
 toko. For i, uo, and ta, see 
 these words. H. koh, ko' 
 (from kahu, k' as, and the 
 pers. pron., 3 sing., as a dem., 
 like as this) (so, here), now. 
 [An. ko just now ; in this 
 way]. 
 
 Ko, dem. See koi, kofeta, 
 kofakal : E. ku (ka dem., and 
 u (o) pron., 3 sing.) 
 
 Ko, d., disj. conj., or; inter, 
 particle at the end of a 
 sentence as, i bano ko ? has 
 he gone 'i fully, i bano ko i 
 tika ? has he gone or not 1 D. 
 syn., in both uses, kite or 
 kita. [An. ka, id., Er. ku or.] 
 H. ki or, 1 Kings xviii. 27, syn. 
 c. A., S., 'aw, or, in this 
 passage). 
 
 Note. — Kite and ko have 
 both a dem. suffixed to ki, the 
 former te, the latter o (the o 
 in the preceding word), and 
 therefore lit. denote or — this. 
 
 Ko, s., c. art. ntiko na (for n 
 ako), the face, a part ; nakona 
 
 98 [kobu 
 
 his face (see nako, infra), 
 nakonako ki to face (someone), 
 nako nafakotoen a part of 
 the price, ba tu au nakon give 
 me a part, nakon ru bano 
 nakon ru toko a part (of the 
 whole number of men) go, a 
 part remain ; and, without 
 the article, shortened to ko, 
 as ko-be ni rarua, or nakobe, 
 the fore part of a canoe, ke- 
 itaku ni rarua, or nako-itaku 
 the after-part of a canoe ; 
 ko-be the part before, the 
 front, i baki kobe he goes to 
 the front, ke-itaku the part 
 behind, behind, i baki ke- 
 itaku he goes behind, or to 
 the rear. A. wagi' (wagto) 
 the face, a part or side, wigaf 
 a band, wagaha, 3, to face 
 (someone). 
 
 Koa, a., fibrous, stringy, as a 
 yam when cooked, naui koa : 
 aka, ako, and a a. ending. 
 
 Koakoa, redup. of koa, very 
 stringy or fibrous. 
 
 Koau, s., c. art. nakoau, d. kabu 
 the native pudding. See kofu 
 sa. 
 
 Koba sia, v. t., to follow, to 
 drive away, to pursue : i koba 
 naftona he follows his own 
 heart (does or strives to do 
 what is in his mind) ; v. r., 
 fikoba to follow each other, or 
 to drive away each other ; 
 
 Kobausi a, v. t., i.e., koba, and 
 usi to track ; to follow after. 
 A. kafa to follow, to drive 
 away. 
 
 Kobara, s., see gobara : ko dem. 
 prefixed. 
 
 Kobu, d. See kubu. 
 
kofa] 
 
 Kofa, s., and redup., 
 
 Kofakofa, s., an alcove, tem- 
 porary house or shed, tent. 
 H. kubah a tent, chamber (so 
 called from its arched form, 
 from kabab to make gibbous 
 and hollow, to arch, to vault). 
 A. kubbat tent, vault, cham- 
 ber, hence the word alcove. 
 
 Kofakal, s., a herd of pigs cared 
 for, lit. the or that cared for: 
 ko dem., and fakal. 
 
 Kofe na, s., nakofena, his skull, 
 the skull. A. kihf the 
 skull. 
 
 Kofeta, d., s., fata, q.v., with 
 dem. ko prefixed, a bench, 
 platform. 
 
 Kofu sa, V. t., to enclose (as 
 fish in a net), wrap up or en- 
 close (as a pudding in leaves, 
 to be put in the oven). See 
 kabu, d. koau, the native pud- 
 ding ; and 
 
 Kofukofua, a., redup., and with 
 a. ending a, bent up at the 
 edges, as a shovel, or any- 
 thing, as it were rolled up or 
 turned over. The pudding, 
 koau, is laid on a mass of 
 leaves, very wide and long, 
 which are rolled up or over it 
 ajl round, completely enclos- 
 ing it, and then tied up. [Fi. 
 kovuta, kokof u blistered (small 
 balls or pimples), kovu banana 
 leaf in which native puddings 
 are done up, d., a coat, kovuna 
 to do up in a kovu, Sa. 'ofu a 
 garment, 'o'ofu put on a gar- 
 ment, 'ofu'ofu to envelope in 
 leaves (for cooking), 'ofulua 
 twenty leaf dishes of native 
 food; Ma. kohu, kokohu, a., 
 
 99 [koko 
 
 somewhat concave, bent or 
 warped so as to become con- 
 cave (cf. Ef. kofukofua), kohu 
 to cook in a native oven any 
 article contained in a hollow 
 vessel. To. kofu to enclose or 
 wrap up, to clothe. Ha. ohu 
 to roll up (as the sea that 
 does not break) a roller, a 
 swell, ohua a crowd of people, 
 ohui to twist round, ohuohu 
 heavy, burdensome, a wreath 
 worn round the neck, to dress 
 in uniform, Tah. ohu a bank 
 or ridge of earth thrown up, a 
 bundle of native food tied up 
 and baked in the native oven, 
 to bend downwards as the 
 branch of a tree, to stoop, to 
 twirl round as a wheel.] A. 
 kabba to roll up into a ball, to 
 make into balls (food) for 
 cooking, to invert, to stoop, to 
 be heavy, A. kobbai', kabab' 
 (see under kabu, d. koau, 
 supra) : kobbai also denotes 
 a mob of horses, crowd or 
 mass of men, herd of camels, 
 a ball of threads rolled up to- 
 gether, a heavy ponderous 
 thing, a hill, kabkaba, 2, to 
 be wrapped up, enveloped, to 
 wrap up or envelope oneself 
 (in one's garment). 
 
 Koi, d., dem., this, d. kei : ko 
 dem., and i dem. 
 
 Koia (ko-ia, ko-ya), same as 
 preceding. 
 
 Koi, s., and 
 
 Koika, s., a boundary, from 
 
 Koi a, or ko ia, v. t. See goi a. 
 
 Koko, s., c. art. nekoko, reddish 
 juice or paint for nafona made 
 from a plant (also called ne- 
 
KOKORO] 100 
 
 koko) : goko ia. [To. koka, 
 Sa. 'o'a, id.] 
 
 Kokoro, s. See under gor ia. 
 
 Kokoti, s., a net for catching 
 fish : koto. 
 
 Kola, d., and redup., 
 
 Kokola, V. i., to be bent, kola ki 
 na buruma (a mother-in-law) 
 bends or stoops to the son-in- 
 law. See kele tia (golu tia) 
 <fec. 
 
 Kola, V. i., and redup., 
 
 Kokola, V. i., or gkola, to be 
 arid, dry ; hence 
 
 Kola, s., a dry stick or log. A. 
 kahala, kohol', to be arid, dry. 
 
 Kola, V. i., and gola, and redup. 
 gkola (kokola), to call out, 
 cry out, to speak loud ; hence 
 
 Kola oli, s., echo, lit. calling out 
 like. See oli a. [Fi. kaila to 
 shout, Mg. akora, s., shouting.] 
 H. kara' to cry out, call out. 
 
 Kolau, redup. gkolau. See galau 
 ia. 
 
 Kolau, s. See kalau, spider's 
 web, dd. kalai, nilau {i.e., lau) ; 
 namera kolau web of fat on 
 the inwards of a pig. [An. 
 nilva = kolau, nilvanilva ^^ 
 namera-kolau]. 
 
 Kolau (see preceding word), pr. n. , 
 prob. originally given to a 
 warrior full of stratagems. 
 See also the verb under kalau, 
 to weave, to lie in wait, watch 
 in ambush (as in war). A. 
 'aruba to be wily or cunning. 
 
 Kolobu na, s., its joint (of a 
 bamboo or reed), applied also 
 to the knobs or rivets on a 
 tank. A. karibu joint of a 
 bamboo or reed. 
 
 Kolofa, V. c, to be bent, as 
 
 [koho 
 
 with hunger or famine, • 
 redup. gkolofa. See lofa ia, 
 lofa. The prefixed ko is the 
 dem. [Fi. kalove bent, from 
 love-ca to bend.] 
 
 Komam, dd. kinami, kimam. 
 
 Kon, V. i., or a. (with ending n), 
 and redup., 
 
 Kokon, gkon, to be bitter (of 
 anything), kona ki to be bitter 
 towards (someone), namarita na 
 i gkon his belly is bitter (he 
 is angry). [Sa. 'ona, 'o'ona, 
 bitter, sour.] A. ko' and 
 ko'a' very bitter. 
 
 Konai na, s., c. art. nakonai na, 
 his gall or bile : kon bitter. 
 
 Kona, V. i., gona, to stand firm, 
 to be fixed, firm, then, to have 
 the mind fixed upon, to be 
 occupied with, kona ki. H. 
 kun prop, to stand upright. 
 Hi. to set up, found, then to' 
 apply one's mind to, Ni. to 
 stand firm, fixed, steady, firm, 
 constant. 
 
 Kona gor ia, v., to stand firm 
 protecting him (as in war). 
 See gor ia. 
 
 Kona ia, or konai a, v. t., and 
 gonai a, to pierce (as a board 
 with an instrument like an 
 awl). E. kanawa to pierce. 
 
 Konai sai a, v., to pierce through. 
 See sai a. 
 
 Kore na, s., see gore na, brother's 
 sister, sister's brother, children 
 of the same mother (actually), 
 or, if not, members of the same 
 nakainaga. 
 
 Kor ia. See gor ia. 
 
 Kor6 sa, v. t., conceal it (as 
 misconduct of which one is ac- 
 cused) : gor ia. 
 
KORO] 
 
 ' Koro, s., c. art. uakoro, a fence, 
 a wall, d. ara, c. art. nara : 
 gov ia. 
 
 Koro, s., a fish fence, enclosure 
 for catching fish ; a ring (or 
 lialo) round the moon : gor 
 ia. 
 
 Koro, s., c. art. nekoro, incanta- 
 tation or rites of divination ; 
 and 
 
 Koro, v., to divine : gor ia. 
 
 Koroatalagi, d., or nakoroatelagi, 
 the sky, dd. koroinlagi, riki- 
 telagi, lit. the fence, or that 
 which surrounds or encloses 
 the atalagi, q.v. 
 
 Koroinlagi, s., d., the sky, lit. 
 the fence, or that which en- 
 closes heaven. See lagi, elagi. 
 
 Koroki, v., to insist (as in argu- 
 ment), provoke, irritate. S. 
 gareg (Pael) to provoke. 
 
 Kori, or koria, also kuri, or 
 kuria, s., a dog : cognate oro, 
 to bark. [Sa. uli, id.. Ma. 
 kuri a dog, any quadruped. 
 To. kuli a dog, Fut. kuli, Ta. 
 kuri, Epi kuli, kuliu, TaSa. 
 vuriu, Malo vuria. Ml. kuri, 
 Mg. alikia, id.] A. gorw' a 
 young dog. 
 
 Kori, interj., also in akori, kori 
 la ! this now indeed ! here, 
 or there indeed ! : ko dem., ri 
 dem. 
 
 Koro, V. i , to snore. See goro. 
 
 Koroi, d. kuriii a woman ; and 
 
 Koruni, kuruni, q.v. See faiine, 
 
 Note 2, and lai. 
 Kos ia, kus ia, v. t., to cut or 
 shear off (as the end of the 
 outer covering of a young 
 cocoanut fit for drinking) ; 
 and 
 
 101 [koto bolo 
 
 Kosu mia, v. t., to husk a cocoa- 
 nut, also kusu mia, gusu mia ; 
 i gusu, V. i., said of a ripe 
 cocoanut which separates it- 
 self and falls from the tree, 
 kusu mia or gusu mia, v. t., to 
 gather copoanuts from the 
 tree, kusu, or gusu, v. i., to be 
 ripe, soft, makusukusu to be 
 ripe, soft, kusue na, s., the 
 soft place on the top of a 
 child's head, the last to close 
 up, makus, q.v., s., cutter or 
 knife. A. gazza to cut off, 
 shear; to cut (grass, &c.) in 
 order to gather provender, to 
 cut off the clusters of dates 
 from the tree ; to begin to 
 ripen (dates), 4, to have 
 (sheep) ready for shearing, or 
 ripe grain, to be ready to be 
 gathered from the tree (dates), 
 to be ripe or ready for gather- 
 ing (fruit of the palm tree), 
 for reaping (grain), for shearing 
 (sheep) ; migazz' a cutting 
 instrument. 
 
 Kosu, -s., a cutting instrument 
 made of bone : preceding word. 
 
 Kosoafa, s., c. art. nakosoafa, dd. 
 nasoafa, soafa, a plant used in 
 ceremonial or ritual purifica- 
 tions : it is swept down the 
 limbs to carry away the un- 
 cleanness ; lit. the tree that 
 carries (away) : kosu (see 
 kasu), and afa ia. 
 
 Kota, s., a time, in i ta kota ki 
 (a person) he appoints a time 
 to or for (someone) ; and in 
 
 Kotfan, d. for gotafanu, gota 
 fanu, q.v., evening. 
 
 Koto bolo, s., a basket (see bolo). 
 [Ml. cat, Malo cete, To. kato, 
 
KOTO 
 
 102 
 
 [kubu 
 
 Sa. 'ato, a basket.] A. ka'ta^ 
 a basket (for carrying dates). 
 
 Koto, s., a kind of crab : so 
 called from nipping. See fol- 
 lowing word. 
 
 Koto-fia V. t., kote-fia, kotu-fia, 
 gote-fia, redup. kotokote fia, 
 gotokote fia (intensive), to cut, 
 to cut off', break off; eni gote 
 fia to lie across it, bala tagoto 
 inclined across, across, ba gote 
 fia go across it, soka gote fia 
 leap across it ; sai gote fia, tuba 
 gote fia pronounce judgment 
 against him, condemn him to 
 death, i gotokoto bat ia hemade 
 a beginning, first did it {broke 
 ground in the doing of it), 
 makoto broken (a stick, or 
 anything), ceases (as war), a 
 makoto ki I cease from (a 
 thing, as a thing I have sold), 
 have no further connection 
 with, separate from, cease 
 from (a thing or person), kuti 
 nakoau cut up the pudding 
 (cooked), gkuti (gukuti) to 
 make a stealthy invasion or 
 inroad, i gai tagoto, or mako- 
 tokoto he screams abruptly, 
 cries out in sharp, sudden, 
 broken screams ; kokoti a net 
 (cutting oft" the fish) ; bagote 
 fia to buy it, make it separate 
 from its former owner) ; i 
 kote fiau isa he breaks me off" 
 from it (a thing I possessed) ; 
 bikutu, V. r., decide about (some- 
 one), bikutu ki nia decide about 
 him, sera makoto to be startled, 
 surprised, makot a place. [Sa. 
 'oti to cut (as the hair), 'o'oti, 
 'oti'oti, Fi. koti-va to clip, or 
 shear, ai koti scissors or shears 
 
 (originally a shell or shark's 
 tooth).] A. kata'a cut, cut 
 off", separate, cross (a river) ; 
 cease; decide about (a thing) ; 
 to snap (as a rope, break) ; to 
 break off, cease from (a jour- 
 ney, &c. = makoto ki) ; to 
 invade, or make an inroad, 
 stealthily &c. ; makta' a place. 
 
 Ku, verb, pron., 2 sing., and p]., 
 you. 
 
 Ku, dem., this, as nai ku na, d. 
 gil kin, this (is) he, or it, nai 
 ua naga, nai ua, nai naga, nai 
 kis. [My. iku that.] E. ku, 
 id. See ko, ka, ki'. 
 
 Ku, d., kua, or gua, v. i., to cry 
 out, vociferate, cry or call 
 out, low (an ox). H. ga'ah, 
 S. g'o' cry out, vociferate, low 
 (an ox). 
 
 Kua, gua, preceding word. 
 
 Kua, ad., inter., and indef. : gua. 
 
 Kuba na, s , c. art. nakuba na, 
 its or his day ; d. for uba na, 
 or ube na, q.v. 
 
 Kubega, s., d., a net (for catching 
 fish). [Sa. upenga, Tab. upea, 
 Ma. kupenga, id.] A. kiffa< 
 a net, from kafi'a to wrap 
 round, ifcc. 
 
 Kubu, s., inside, the belly, also 
 kobu, and kabu, d. kama (in 
 arekabu, q.v., anekama), then, 
 inside (a house), and with the 
 prep, e, ekubu, ekobu in the 
 inside, inside : then, ekobu in 
 one d. denotes also a house. 
 [Mg. kibo the belly, kobany 
 its centre or middle, kobony 
 the inside, inner part, entrails.] 
 A. ga'fu the belly, interior 
 cavity of a thing, inside (of a 
 house), from gafa to be hollow. 
 
kufagufa] 
 
 103 
 
 Kufagufa, d., v. i., to fly, to flap 
 the wings, flutter. [To. kapa- 
 kapa to flap the wings, My. 
 kapak to fly, flapping the 
 wings, not gliding.] A. li'a- 
 faka 1, 4, to fly, to flap with 
 the wings. 
 
 Kui na, d., s., c. art. nakui na, 
 d. kihi na {i.e. kisi na, in that 
 d. h is for s), the back, rump, 
 tail : kui na is for bui na, and 
 kihi na (i.e. kisi na) for bisi 
 na, by the change of b to k. 
 
 Kuka, V. i. See guku. 
 
 Kuli na (d. uili na), s., the skin, 
 bark. [Ha. ili. Ma. kiri, skin, 
 bark. My. kulit skin, hide, 
 pelt, leather, bark, rind, husk, 
 shell, Mg. hoditra skin, bark.] 
 See mulu sia. 
 
 Kulu, V. i., to wrap oneself up, 
 to cover oneself up (as in 
 bed). 
 
 Kulu tia, V. t., same as kalu tia ; 
 
 Kulu, s., c. art. nakulu, cloth, 
 covering, that which covers ; 
 
 Kulekule, or kulukulu, d., id. : 
 kalu. 
 
 Kuma na, fe., or guma na, c. art. 
 na kumana, inner bark, pel- 
 licle or cover, as of an egg, 
 orange, &c. : d. for kamu na. 
 
 Kum ia, v. t. (see gum ia), to 
 absorb, redup. kukumi. 
 
 Kumu, d., pers. pron., 2 pi., you, 
 dd. akam and akamus, kami, 
 nikam, nimu, nem or neSm, 
 egu. [My. kamu. Tag. kamo. 
 Ml. P. hamdi, Epi. kamiu, Ta. 
 ituma, id.] 
 
 Kunuti na, s., c. art. nakunuti 
 na, the kernel of fruits, as the 
 almond; also new yams : kano, 
 kanoa, kanoka. [Of. To. kano 
 
 [kus 
 
 the inmost substance of any- 
 thing, kernels of fruit, also 
 flesh, kano he mata eye-ball 
 (Mg. anaka in anakandriamaso 
 pupil of the eye).] 
 
 Kura, s., c. art. nakiira, a plant; 
 so called from its bitterness. 
 Of a stingy man who with- 
 holds food from a visitor it is 
 said nalo anena i bi naktira. 
 See under gura ia. 
 
 Kuraf, d. for karafi, q.v. 
 
 Kuri, or kuria, s., same as kori, 
 koria, dog. 
 
 Kuru, or kiira, a., shrivelled, 
 dried, nali kuru shrivelled 
 dried leaves (as banana leaves 
 when withered and dry are). 
 See kara, or gara. 
 
 Kuru ki, v. t., to gather together ; 
 and 
 
 Kuru maki, v. t., to gather to- 
 gether ; and 
 
 Kuruk ; and 
 
 Kukuruk (gkuruk), v. i., or 
 mid., to gather itself, or to 
 be gathered together : see 
 guru ki ; belonging to this 
 stem are also takara, crowd 
 (of men), and makara to be 
 gathered together, d. (trans- 
 posed) maraka, or meraka. 
 
 Kuruni, s., a woman. See fafine. 
 Note 2, and lai. 
 
 Kurui, s., and 
 
 Kuruku na, s., kuruku natua na, 
 the ankle : kuruk. The ankle 
 is so called because the leg 
 gathers itself, as it were, into 
 the knob of the joint. 
 
 Kurumase na, s., d. (transposed) 
 for borakese na, q.v. 
 
 Kus, d., V. i., to be hidden ; d. 
 gusu {i.e., kusu), q.v., to stoop. 
 
KUS Ia] 
 
 104 [laba 
 
 As to connection of these two 
 meanings, see 6elu : a man 
 stoops to avoid being seen, or 
 to be hidden. 
 
 Kus ia, or kusi a, v. t., to go in 
 the track of, follow, usually 
 usia, q.v. (the k being elided), 
 rafe kus ia to go through 
 following it (as a pig going 
 through a hole in the fence of 
 a garden following another 
 pig), hence the proverb, uago 
 iskai i 6ora bua nakoro, uago 
 laba i rafe kus ia one pig 
 bursts open the ferice, many 
 pigs go through the opening 
 following (or after) it : in takus 
 ia, rukus ia (nrukus ia) the k 
 also is not elided. See usi a. 
 
 Kusu na, d., s., dd. kui na, kihi 
 ua, bui na, q.v. 
 
 Kusu, V. i., and 
 
 Kusue na, s. See kosu mia. 
 
 Kusue, or knsuiie (pronounced 
 kusuwe), d. kusu, s., rat (or 
 mouse). [Ta. yasuk. Ml. dd. 
 khasup, akasu. Pa. asua, Santo 
 dd. karibi, keriu, Ma. kiore, 
 Sa. iore. My. tikus, Mysol 
 kelof, Gilolo luf, lupu, id.] 
 A. kutrub' rat. 
 
 Kut ia, V. t., to cut, and 
 
 Kukut ia (gkut ia), redup. : i 
 gkuti ban he goes- to make an 
 inroad stealthily (as in time 
 of war) ; also si kut ia (si to 
 shoot) to shoot not killing, 
 but only cutting or wounding; 
 and 
 
 Kutu ki, bikutu ki, to decide 
 about (someone). See koto 
 fia. 
 
 Kutu, s,, louse ; the back of the 
 head. [Sa. 'utu louse, an in- 
 
 sect which eats the skin of the 
 hands and feet. My. kutu louse, 
 To., Fut., kutu, Ta. kiget, An. 
 cet. Ml. P. cut, Malo utu, 
 louse.] A. kuddai, pi. hiri- 
 dan, flea (and kiddan flea, an 
 animal biting like a flea), 
 kudad' the back of the head 
 between the ears, pi. fleas, Ef. 
 6ala kutu na the hollow of the 
 back of his head (Jala in.), 
 from kadda to cut. 
 
 Note. — There is no other 
 word for flea in Ef., but to 
 distinguish a flea from a louse 
 the former is called kutu n 
 koria the kutu of the dog, 
 so Fut. kutu kuli. My. kutu 
 anjing (anjing dog), TaSa. utu 
 vuriu, but Malo utu (simply). 
 The Efatese say there were no 
 fleas in the island before 
 Europeans brought them. In 
 Sa. flea is 'ututiti, and in Fi. 
 kutu ni manumanu. 
 
 Jja, d. le, ad., indeed, certainly, 
 surely, particle of emphasis, 
 as uisi la yes indeed, i la masi- 
 kina he indeed is one, or one 
 only, i le sa he is indeed bad, 
 i ga fano la let him go indeed. 
 [Sa. la, My. lah, id.] A. la. 
 certainly, surely, indeed. 
 
 La ia, or lai a, v. t., to put out, 
 or eject from, the mouth, as 
 food, froth, the tongue (see le) : 
 lua. 
 
 Laba, V. i., to be much, many ; 
 laba or leba, labalaba or leba- 
 leba, to be or become big. 
 
laba] 
 
 grow up, d. lafulafu to be or 
 become (grow) big, Jalaba, or 
 leleba big, great, leba elder ; 
 tea laba or leba plenty, enough 
 (no more), it is enough, milaba 
 last, nameligu milaba i en lu 
 ua my last footprint is in this 
 place, i.e., I will come no more 
 here, tea milaba the last 
 (person or thing), i libi milaba 
 sa he ■ looked upon it for the 
 last time, d. leb, indeed, very; 
 barab (barau, &c.) long. [Sa. 
 lava to be enough, indeed, 
 very, loa long (and leva long, 
 of time), Mg. lava long, tall, 
 continuing long (= Ef. barab, 
 baraf), My. luwas, luas wide 
 extensive, large, ample, Fi. 
 levu great, or large ; in great 
 numbers, all, as era sa lako 
 levu they are all, or many, 
 gone (= Ef. ru laba banc), 
 vakalevu-taka to increase ; 
 cause to be great or many, 
 balavu long.] H. rabab to 
 become much or many, to be 
 increased, to be much or 
 many, inf. rob a being much 
 or many, abundance, mul- 
 titude ; poetically multitude is 
 almost used for " all" (so in 
 Fi. and , Ef. levu, laba), a 
 being great (of might), a 
 being long (of a way), rab 
 much, many ; enough, (it is) 
 enough (no more, cease, leave 
 ofT, so Ef . ) ; big (great, large, 
 vast), applied to a wide 
 space, to a long way, and to 
 things generally in the sense 
 of great, big ; elder. The 
 cognate and supplementary 
 verb is rabah, to be multiplied, 
 
 105 [laga ia 
 
 increased, often to be many ; 
 to become great, to grow up, 
 to be great. 
 
 Labalaba, or lebaleba, v. i., and 
 a., redup. of laba, or leba, 
 V. i., and a., to be great, big, 
 as natasfi leba the great sea. 
 See laba. 
 
 Labo, s. See leba : leba boa. 
 
 Laf ia, or lafi a, v. t., to take, 
 take up, carry (a thing), take 
 up (a song). [Ha. lawe (ps. 
 lawea) to take, carry.] A. 
 rafa'a, to take up, carry. 
 
 Lafi na, s., c. art., the cover, 
 sheath, or envelope of the 
 flowers or buds of the cocoa- 
 nut palm ; the hard substance 
 (of same shape) of the cuttle- 
 fish (d. naniagi rofarofa = 
 little canoe of the cuttle-fish). 
 A. " ilaf a cover, sheath, or 
 envelope, H. 'alaf to cover, 
 to wrap up, A. "alafa to 
 enclose in a sheath or vessel. 
 
 Lafuis, dd, jifalu, libuis, lifaru, 
 q.v. 
 
 Lafulafu, d., v. i,, and a., to 
 grow up, big : laba. 
 
 Laga, V. t., to seek, search for, 
 laga sa seek it, bilaga sa, id., 
 and redup., 
 
 Lagalaga sa, v. t., id. (frequenta- 
 tive). A. rama to seek, search 
 for, n. a. niaram'. 
 
 Laga tia. v. t., to raise, lift up 
 (as a thing from the ground), 
 and 
 
 Laga, s., that which raises: laga 
 laga ti (the planks of a boat). 
 
 Laga ia, or lagai a, v. t., to raise, 
 
 lift up (as the wind raises 
 
 , thatch from a roof) ; then to 
 
 raise (a thing, so as to make 
 
laga] 106 
 
 it conspicuous), as i mirama 
 laga tia it (the mooB, &c.) 
 shines raising it (into view, 
 making it conspicuous) ; hence 
 
 Laga (without object) to shine 
 (to raise into view, make con- 
 spicuous), bisa laga tia to 
 speak raising it (into view), 
 laga tia to speak with a loud 
 voice, laga, v. i., to sing, and 
 
 Lagalaga, v., redup. (in all these 
 senses) : nalagalaga na, s., a 
 thing raised from or off some- 
 thing (as a scale from the eyes, 
 husk from grain, &c.) ; malaga, 
 malagalaga, to be raised (so 
 as to bo conspicuous, as a ship 
 on the sea); balaga tia, v. c, 
 to make raised (a thing), 
 balaga-saki nia, v. c, Malaga 
 na (see under these words), 
 tafelaga, v. r., to raise itself, 
 be raised (from above, or off, 
 anything) ; 
 
 Lagi, s., with prep, elagi, ad. 
 (used also as a prep.) and s., 
 the sky, heaven, above : ulua, 
 lua, lulu. [Sa. laga to rise up, 
 to raise up, redup. lagalaga, s., 
 a stick for raising up flat 
 coral, v., to raise up (as a 
 heavy weight), lagalagaola to 
 raise the finger nails from the 
 flesh, lagi the sky, heaven, v., 
 to call out with a loud voice, 
 to sing, Ha. lana to float (on 
 water), float (i.e., be lifted up, 
 raised) in the air, lani sky, 
 heaven, luna the upper side of 
 anything, the upper, the above, 
 a., upper, higher, above, and, 
 with a prep., ad., or prep., 
 above, Sa. iluga, id.. My. 
 langit sky, firmament, lalangit 
 
 [LAGI 
 
 the palate, an awning, canopy, 
 Mg. lanitra sky, heaven.] A. 
 'ala' to be high, to be above or 
 upon (a thing), 2, to raise, 
 lift up, 3, to manifest, to call 
 with a loud (high) voice, 4, to 
 raise, 6, to stand out high, &c., 
 hence prep, 'ala' above, 'ilian' 
 and 'iliyyan' tall (high), high 
 voice, and 'illiyyuna the seventh 
 heaven, paradise, Assy. ad. 
 (used as a prep.) eliinu, elan, 
 above, also ellaon, and elien, 
 elinitu high, a being high, 
 which has n the a. ending, and 
 suffixed to it the abstract 
 ending t in the usual "way). 
 
 Lagaraf, v. i., or mid., to mourn 
 (as for the dead) : laga tia, to 
 raise, and teraf ia to scratch, 
 from raising the hands and 
 tearing or scratching the 
 cheeks in mourning (see Jora 
 I., bora na the temples). 
 
 Lagafaru na, v. and s. com- 
 pounded, to raise its wings 
 (a bird) : laga tia, and afaru 
 na. 
 
 Lagafasu ki, v., make a sign to : 
 laga tia, and fasu na. 
 
 Lagilagi, v. i., to be proud, up- 
 lifted. [Ha. lanilani to be 
 high-minded, proud, show 
 haughtiness.] See laga tia. 
 A. 'ala', 5), to be proud. 
 
 Laga ki, v. t., to have, to possess. 
 See laka. 
 
 Lagi, s., c. art. nalagi, the wind : 
 other forms of this word are 
 In and redup. agiegi, with 
 article- nln, nagiegi, the air, 
 the breeze. [Ml. nien, Paama 
 lag. Am. lig, yig, Fi. cagi 
 (thangi), My. angin, Mg. anina 
 
LAOO 
 
 the wind, Sa. matagi to blow, 
 be windy, ps. matagia, s., 
 the wind. Ma. matangi the 
 wind, kotengitengi gentle 
 wind, kohengi or kohengihengi 
 wind.] A. nasama to blow 
 gently (the wind), nasam' a 
 light wind, na'sam' and nasim' 
 a light wind, breeze, air. 
 
 Lago, s., fly ; lago fu buzzing 
 fly, blow-fly. [Sa. lago, a fly, 
 My. langau a large fly, a blue- 
 bottle.] A. lakka'u a fly, from 
 laka'aprehendit extremo rostro 
 rem. 
 
 Lago, s., the wooden pins whose 
 sharpened ends are driven into 
 the sania (outrigger), and 
 whose upper ends (crossed) 
 hold and bear up the nakiat 
 of a canoe. [Sa. lago props 
 of a canoe.] See preceding 
 word. 
 
 Lagor, or 1 agora, or lagoru, ad., 
 d. lakor, q.v. 
 
 Lai a. See la ia : redup., 
 
 Lailai, v. t., frequentative or in- 
 tensive. 
 
 Lai, or lei, contracted to le, li, s., 
 woman, as le kiki little woman 
 (in addressing a female child or 
 girl), le or li meroan women, 
 ladies (in addressing an as- 
 sembly of women) : this word 
 is used before names of fe- 
 males, as ma, q.v., is before 
 names of males, as lei, le, or li 
 mako madam, mistress, miss, 
 or lady, mako. [Fi. adi, con- 
 tracted di, id., Mota iro, ro, id.] 
 H. 'is's'ah, Ch. 'ita', S. 'atto', 
 A. 'untha, woman, Ch. emph. 
 'itta', 'intta', id. 
 
 Note. — For other forms of 
 
 107 [lake 
 
 this word see koroi, kurui, 
 kuruni. See under fafine. Note 
 2. Koroi, &c., have the dem. or 
 art. k' prefixed. 
 
 Lai, s., c. art. nalai, or inlai, or 
 nilai, sail (of a canoe or ship). 
 [Sa. la. Ma. ra, Mg. lai. My. 
 layar, id. ; My. layar, to sail, 
 to navigate, also barlayar and 
 malayar.] A. killa'ai sail of a 
 ship, liala'a, 4, to make sail, to 
 sail, to navigate. 
 
 Lailai, v. i., to be delighted, re- 
 joice. [Mg. laolao play, play- 
 things, milaolao to play.] .A. 
 laha', n. a. lahw', to play ; to 
 be delighted. 
 
 Lai a, or lei a, or la ia, v. t., to 
 pluck, to gather (fruit), lai 
 nua nakasu to pluck or gather 
 the fruits of trees. See bila 
 ia, or bilai a. [My. l&li to 
 pluck, to gather.] E. 'araya, 
 H. 'arah, to pluck, to gather 
 (as fruits). 
 
 Lai a, or lei a, v. t., to tie up, as 
 lei namanuk to tie up a wound. 
 A. 'ara' to tie up ; fasten. 
 
 Lak, d. for lako, q.v. 
 
 Laka, s., laka leo, foundation or 
 cause of a matter or affair ; 
 and 
 
 Laka, or lake, c. art. nalake na, 
 its foundation, then, its cause, 
 as nalake na tafa the founda- 
 tion of the hill or mountain, 
 Atua i bi nalakegita God is our 
 foundation, i.e., our upholder, 
 te uane i bi nalake nafakal 
 that is the cause of the war, 
 then nalakena because, lit. its 
 cause ; and 
 
 Lake, or laki, v. i., to marry (of 
 a woman) : lake ki nanoi marry 
 
Jt.AKAUj 
 
 a husband, lit. betake herself 
 to a husband ; and lake kiena 
 betake herself to his house, 
 and then generally of anyone, 
 i lake he betakes himself (to 
 dwell somewhere), i lake en 
 lu ua he has betaken himself 
 to dwell here ; laga ki, v. t., 
 to have, to possess, d. lakea ki, 
 telakie na its possessor, or 
 telake na, c. art. atelakie na 
 ■or atelakea na, or atelake na, 
 id., Atua i bi atelakea gita God 
 is our possessor, possesses us. 
 {Ma. taketake, a., well founded, 
 take, s., root, stump, post of a 
 pa, cause, putake, s., base, 
 root, reason, cause.] A. 
 rakalia to lean upon (some- 
 thing) ; to betake oneself (to 
 someone) ; to place upon, 
 found, as to found (his house 
 upon a rock), 4, to support 
 (prop up), 5, to abide (in some 
 place ; to use free power (in a 
 matter) ; rukali' the firm side 
 of a mountain, by which it is 
 upheld, pi. 'arkali' a founda- 
 tion. 
 
 Note. — The expression tu- 
 lake is composed of tu to give 
 (or tua), and lake, and means 
 to give in trust to (to give 
 relying upon or trusting in) — i 
 tulake is he gave in trust it, i 
 tulak ira sa he gave in trust 
 to them it (as a present or 
 money to be taken charge of 
 and conveyed by them to the 
 person for whom it is in- 
 tended). 
 Lakau, v. t., d. (transposed) for 
 galau ia, q.v., to cross over. 
 [Sa. la'a to step, to pass 
 
 108 [lako 
 
 over, ps. la'asia, redup. lala'a, 
 la'ala'a ; la'ai to pass over, 
 break over (as a wave over a 
 canoe from one side over to 
 the other), la'aga, la'asaga a 
 step, a stepping over.] Hence 
 
 Lakau, s., a crossing place in a 
 fence ; a stile. 
 
 Lako, s., d. lak, a small enclosure 
 (like a hole, for putting or 
 confining a pig in). See fol- 
 lowing word. 
 
 Lako, V. i., dd. laku, loku, loko, 
 roko, nrok, to stoop, be curved, 
 then stoop or crouch, conceal- 
 ing herself (as a mother-in- 
 law from her son-in-law), to be 
 concealed (as one stoops in 
 order to be concealed, see 
 6elu, kusu), redup. lakolako, c. 
 prep, ki lakolako ki to be 
 crouching and stooping and 
 concealed from (someone), toko 
 loku to abide concealed or in 
 concealment, luku, id., luku- 
 taki nia, or loko taki nia, to 
 place him in concealment (as a 
 wounded warrior for surgical 
 treatment), ba lako-saki nia to 
 creep upon it stealthily (as a 
 hunter upon a bird), hence ba 
 lako to hunt (birds), lit. to go 
 concealed, luku or luk a hole 
 or pit, luku noai a well, lako, 
 or lak (see preceding word), 
 6aluku {i.e., ba. luku) a curved 
 ba. (concavity). [Fi. roko a 
 bowing form or posture, a., 
 bent like a bow, ad., sa lako 
 roko goes stooping or bowing, 
 ai roko bowstring, roko-ta 
 bend a bow, roko-va bow to, 
 pay respect to, rokoroko, rev- 
 erence, respect, bakaroko bow 
 
LAKOLAKO] 
 
 down with weakness, or go 
 stooping, Sa. lolo'u to bend, 
 bend down, bend round.] A. 
 raka'a, n. a. roko', or ruku', to 
 stoop, or be curved or bent, 
 to bow or be bent down (as in 
 prayer), ruk'a< a hole, pit. 
 
 Lakolako ki, redup. of preced- 
 ing word ; and 
 
 Lako saki, the same, c. compound 
 prep. saki. 
 
 Lakor, ad., i.e., la-kor, indeed 
 now : lakor is sometimes prac- 
 tically syn. with la as i fi la 
 mai matol, or i fi lakor mai 
 matol he may indeed come to- 
 morrow, or the latter may be 
 rendered, he may indeed now 
 come to-morrow. This is the 
 lit. translation, but it might 
 be expressed, he may perhaps, 
 or possibly, come to-morrow, 
 hence i lakor sa ko maki it in- 
 deed now is bad, or don't-know, 
 and simply i lakor sa expresses 
 that the thing very probably 
 is bad in the speaker's opinion, 
 who, however, does not state, 
 as a positive, ascertained fact 
 that it is so : la ad., and the 
 dera. particles ko and r' (ra, 
 ri, ro, ru). 
 
 LakorS, s., a kind of flute. A. 
 nalior' cornu, tuba, Nm. 
 naqour clarion, A. nakara, 3, 
 to make hollow, hollow out 
 (as wood). 
 
 Lala, s., an idiot, one demented, 
 a fool. [Fi. lialia, s., an idiot, 
 a., foolish, out of one's mind, 
 Mg. adala, s., an idiot, one 
 destitute of reason, a lunatic, 
 a fool, a., foolish, infatuated.] 
 See alialia. 
 
 109 [las I a 
 
 Lala gor ia, v. t., to conceal, 
 deny : gor ia, and lala for 
 laulau, redup. of lau. 
 
 Lalo na, or lalu na, s., c. art. 
 inlalo na, the belly, then the 
 front (see elalo), and the 
 under side (as of cloth) : alo 
 na. 
 
 Lam ia, d., v. t., to eat, lience 
 
 Lamien, s., c. art. nalamien, act 
 of eating, food. H. laliam to- 
 eat. 
 
 Lao. See lau. 
 
 Lasa, or las, s., a bowl (as a kava 
 bowl), a dish, a cup. [Ml. P. 
 ras, Malo lasa, Santo las, id.] 
 A. tas' vasculum, Ct. tass, a 
 bowl, Nm. saucer, flat cup. 
 
 Laso na, s., c. art. inlaso na, the 
 testicles. [Pa. ksi, Am. luho, 
 Ml. dd. lisi, erasi, Fut. raso, 
 id., Sa. laso scrotum.] A. 
 ll'isy', and h'uSy', and ll'usya^,. 
 pi. h'usa', the testicles. 
 
 Lasoa, v. i., or a., to have swollen 
 testicles : preceding word and 
 a. ending a. 
 
 Las, or lasi, v. i., or a., big, large, 
 great, sufficient ; and redup., 
 
 Lasilasi, id. ; and 
 
 Las ia, or lasi a, v. t., to meet, 
 i.e., to suffice, be sufficient for, 
 as nafinaga i lasigita the food 
 is sufficient for (meets) us and 
 you, tilasi a, id., also to meet, 
 come upon, come acro.ss (a 
 person) i tilasinami nabua he 
 met us — them on the way, 
 bakatilasi a to suffice, redup. 
 tilatilasi a, id. A. 'aras'a to 
 meet, 'arus'a to be wide, large, 
 5, ta'arrasa, for which is used 
 also ta'arras'a to meet, 2, to 
 make wide, large. 
 
lav] 110 
 
 [le 
 
 Lau, s., the sea; usually with 
 the prep, e, elau, or a, alau, q.v. 
 
 Lau, s., c. art. nilau, dd. kalau, 
 kolau, q.v. [Bisaya lawa a 
 spider's web, Fi. lawa a net ; 
 an ambush ; to lie in ambush.] 
 
 Lau ia, V. t., to plant (a yam or 
 other plant) ; to plant any- 
 thing upright, as a post or 
 stake ; to plant (a spear in 
 anyone) ; laulua i to plant 
 (words in anyone), putting him 
 out, or exposing him in his true 
 colours ; lau suru ea to plant 
 (words, in anyone) tempting 
 him ; and 
 
 Lau, V. i., to stand upright (to 
 be planted), lau tu lit. to stand 
 planted, i.e., to stand upright; 
 to fall down (planting itself), 
 as rain, &c. ; and 
 
 Lau gor ia, v. t., to plant, sur- 
 rounding or concealing him or 
 it ; redup. lala gor ia (for lau- 
 lau gor ia), id., intensive ; and 
 
 Lau fai ia, v. t., d. lau bua i, to 
 plant (as a spear, in anyone) 
 piercing him. See fai, bua. 
 [Sa. to, to plant, to build, to 
 fall (as rain), &c., To. tau to 
 implant, to plant, to drop, to 
 fall, &c.] H. nata', fut. ita', 
 inf. ntoa' to set (anything) up- 
 right, to plant (any plant); to 
 plant (anything, as a people) ; 
 to fix, fasten in ; set up (as 
 a tent, an image). 
 
 Launa, s., c. art. nalauna, redup. 
 nalalauna, a community, as 
 the people of a village or 
 district : rau. [Ha. launa, v., 
 " probably, a spreading out," 
 to associate, be on friendly 
 terms with, a., friendly, social.] 
 
 Lausa. See lousa. 
 
 Lausu na, s., the nose, d. for 
 nagusu na ; la art. (usually 
 na), and usu, for gusu, q.v., 
 nose. 
 
 Le, s. See lai woman. 
 
 Le, V. t., for lai a, or la ia : i le 
 mina he puts out the tongue. 
 
 Le, ad., d. for la. 
 
 Le, also leo, and lo, v., to see, as 
 lo nasan see evil, lo nafanua 
 see the land, to look, I6bi or 
 libi (li bi) look upon, libisia 
 (d. limsi) look upon him, libi 
 nata look upon, see a person, 
 d. le 6a nata look upon a 
 person, le 5a ia, or le 6a i, look 
 upon him, see him, d. leka 
 nata look at a person, leka 
 look at him, see him ; 
 
 Lele is, redup., to look for it, d. 
 leoleo sa, rai, q.v., aspect, 
 look, forehead, rairai to be in 
 countenance, unabashed, un- 
 ashamed, leo, or lo, to watch, 
 i.e., to look, ba lo behold. 
 [Sa. leo to watch, redup. leleo; 
 leoleoga a watching, leoleosa'i 
 to watch, My. liat to see, to 
 look, liati, liatkan, &c., Mg. 
 hiratra sight, seeing. Pi. rai, 
 a., seeing, rai, rairai to look, 
 rai-oa to look at, rairai a 
 prophet (a seer), vakarai-taka 
 to show.] H. ra'ah to see, 
 ra'ah bg look upon, see, ra'ah 
 'eth look at, Hi. to show, 
 ro'eh a prophet, seer, A. ra'a' 
 to see, 4, show, E. re'ya to 
 see. See also borea, naborea. 
 
 Le, leo, lu (in lu rik, d.), lo, s., c. 
 art. nale na, naleo na, nalo na, 
 his voice, speech, word, rogi 
 nalo na hear his voice, i.e., obey 
 
LEA Kl] 111 
 
 liitn, or rogi berakati nalona, 
 or naleona, d. nalen ; without 
 the nom. suf. and with or 
 without the art. it signifies a 
 thing, something, as nalo sikai 
 one thing, nalo laba many 
 things ; nalo nagiena on 
 account of, for the sake of, 
 his name, lit. the thing of 
 his name ; lo-soko true, lit. 
 true thing, le-soko, lo 6alo 
 empty, worthless thing, lo sa 
 bad thing, lo uia good thing, d. 
 lo amau true, lit. true thing, 
 hence the expressions sera- 
 loamau, or sera-lesoko to 
 believe, seraloftalo to deem 
 worthless, despise. [Sa. leo 
 the voice, a sound, leoleoa, a., 
 loud talking, To. lea speech, 
 voice, language.] A. la"a' to 
 speak, n. a. la"w' sound, voice, 
 lo"a< word, language, dialect 
 (see misleo, infra). 
 Lea ki (or le-aki), v. t., to throw 
 away, throw down (anything), 
 to throw down (as the wind 
 trees), and redup., 
 Leleaki, v. t., intensive. [To. 
 li to toss (anything light), 
 liagi (liaki) to throw away, 
 lei and leilei to throw away, 
 leina a throwing away.] E. 
 warawa to throw away, throw 
 down. 
 Leana, v. i., or a., d. lena, d. leg, 
 to be straight (not crooked), 
 then to be right, upright, 
 righteous, bisa lena speak 
 straight, i.e., right, natamole 
 lena a straight, i.e., upright 
 or righteous man ; tu lena to 
 stand straight, stand up. [Fi. 
 donu straight, then righteous. 
 
 [leg 
 
 vakadodonu-taka to make 
 straight. Sa. tonu, a., right, 
 straight, correct, To. tonu 
 straight, direct, clear, faka- 
 tonu to make evident, mani- 
 fest, tonuia righteous, tu tonu 
 (stand) upright.] H. thakan 
 to be or become straight, Pi. 
 to make straight, to dispose 
 rightly (proverbs). 
 
 Le ba, i, le ba i, or le be ia, d., 
 V. t., d. syn. le ka, to look 
 upon it : le to look, and prep, 
 ba. 
 
 Leba, redup. leleba, lebaleba 
 (intensive), v. i., or a., to be or 
 become big, great : nalebale- 
 ban, greatness, the being great : 
 laba. 
 
 Leba, s., c. art. naleba, s., a 
 species of earth, clay, mud, 
 dirt, lebalebara, a., dirty, 
 soiled (a. ending ra), d. leba- 
 leba, a., id. (a. ending a), d. 
 la6o (i.e., leba bo, or 6oa) 
 stinking leba slush, mud. 
 [Ha. lepo to be dirty, defiled, 
 soiled, s., dirt, ground, clay, 
 lepolepo dirty (intensive).] 
 A. tabi'a to be dirty, tabe', 
 taba' dirt, mud, taba'a to 
 impress or seal, 4), to make a 
 water vessel from clay, tub 'an 
 clay. 
 
 Lebaleba, v. i., or a. See leba, 
 laba. 
 
 Lebaleba, a. See leba, s. 
 
 Lebalebara, a. See leba, s. 
 
 Lebule, v., i.e., le (lele) to go 
 round, and bule,.q.v., to com- 
 plete, to go completely round 
 (of a canoe, as round a point 
 or headland) : lele, ili-fiki. 
 
 Leg, V. i., or a., d. for lena, leana. 
 
LBl] 
 
 Lei. See lai, s., woman. 
 
 Leka, v. t., d. le to look, and 
 prep, ka to, at, leka look at 
 him, leka nata look at, see a 
 person : le. 
 
 Lele, or lili (He, or le, Hi, or ili, 
 1') to wind, to go round, turn, 
 curve, as raru i sefa, soko, or 
 ba lele ki nafanua the ship 
 runs, moves swiftly, or goes 
 curving round the land 
 (island), nafisan i soka lele 
 nafanua the word moves 
 swiftly round (i.e., all through) 
 the land, le-bule, q.v., le, or 
 li-taku na, or lele taku na to 
 turn behind his back, lele 
 takuna sa to turn behind one's 
 back with it (i.e., to do, say 
 something, concealing it from 
 someone), ili-fiki, or lili-fiki 
 nagusu, to ro\md the point or 
 cape (a canoe), ilisela or lili- 
 sela as i surata ilisela he 
 walked all the way, lit. round 
 the way (see sela), i talele (or 
 talle or tale) he turned aside, 
 i talele ki he turned or turns 
 aside from (a person or thing), 
 malele to be bent or curved 
 (as a branch of a tree heavy 
 with fruit), bilele, v. r., to 
 turn hither and thither, liisi a, 
 or lulusi a (i.e., lele usi a) lit. 
 to go round following or 
 tracking it, as lulusi noai sera 
 he follows the stream, walking 
 in the water, lusi nakasu 
 goes along a stick, lili maroa 
 lit. to go round turning itself. 
 [Fi. lele-ca to bend.] H. lul 
 to wind, twist about, eg. to 
 galal, 'ul, &c., hence lul, pi., 
 winding stairs, lula' loops. 
 
 112 [les 
 
 Note. — See the cognate liu, 
 liliu. 
 
 Lele, s., tortoiseshell, the cover 
 of the turtle ; a tortoiseshell 
 bracelet. The shell of the 
 turtle is called lele from its 
 round or curved form. See 
 preceding word. [Mg. rere 
 the largest kind of tortoise.] 
 
 Lena, d. leana, q.v. 
 
 Letnina : le, v. t., to put out, and 
 mina, s., the tongue, to put 
 out the tongue, syn. lua mina. 
 See le, v. t. 
 
 Leo, to look, see le ; le or leo 
 goro gita to watch, look for, 
 expect us. 
 
 Leo, s., c. art. naleo, thing, affair; 
 hence 
 
 Leouan, s., c. art. naleouan {i.e., 
 naleo uan that thing, or affair), 
 a feast (in heathenism), or 
 heathen gathering, in which 
 offerings or sacrifices are made 
 to the natemate, and presents 
 given to the guests. 
 
 Ler,. V. i., d. for liliu, q.v., to 
 return, go or come back, also i 
 mer ler brigi he did it again, 
 lit. he mer (q.v.) returned did 
 it. 
 
 Lesilesi, for lasilasi. 
 
 Les, s., c. art. nales, a plant with 
 thick dark leaf ; and 
 
 Les, a., dark or dusky, as in 
 fal'les (fale les) dark or dusky 
 cave (name of a big cave at 
 the entrance of Havannah 
 Harbour) ; ra les Dark-ril or 
 Dusky-ra, a name of Hades. 
 See ra. A. la'isa n. a. la'as' 
 to become dark, or blackish, 
 'al'asu of a dark colour, dusky ; 
 niultus et densus, de planta. 
 
LES] 
 
 Les, s., coral rock, or stone. Cf. 
 A. radha* a rock in water ; 
 radai rocky, stony, a place 
 like a rugged hill. 
 
 Let, V. i., or a., to be stifi", rigid ; 
 redup., 
 
 Lelet, id., intensive ; and 
 
 Let, s., spasm, rigidity, as in 
 tetanus ; and 
 
 Letilet, or 
 
 Letilot, V. i., to crackle, as the 
 bubbles of boiling water ; and 
 
 Letilot, s., c. art. naletilot, d. 
 naltelta, froth, i.e., lit., burst- 
 ing bubbles. See lita. 
 
 Let ia, for alat ia ; 
 
 Leti bati ore, same as alatera- 
 bati ; 
 
 Leti lua i, v. t., to grasp, or 
 seize, taking it away, leti lua 
 i kiana grasp it away from 
 him ; 
 
 Letileti, a. : natamole letileti, a 
 grasping man : alati a. 
 
 Li, s., place : for alia. 
 
 Li sia, V. t., to lay down, put 
 down, and 
 
 Li-saki, v. t., to throw down, 
 throw away : leaki. 
 
 Lia, s. Same as li, or alia, a 
 place. 
 
 Li, transitive prep. See ni, id. 
 
 Li, s. See lai, woman 
 
 Li, v., d. See lulu. 
 
 Li6a, s., an arrow with a broad 
 point (about the size of a 
 shilling) for shooting birds, or 
 the arrow head of such an 
 arrow ; and 
 
 Lifta ia, v. t., to shoot birds 
 with the li6a (which does not 
 pierce them, but kills them by 
 a violent blow or shock). A. 
 lagaf a to strike violently ; 
 
 113 [libu 
 
 iagif an arrow with a broad 
 head. 
 
 Libi sia (li-bisia), d. Ie6a i, or 
 leba ia (le-ba ia), v. t., look 
 upon him, see him : le to see, 
 look, and prep. bi. 
 
 Note. — In two other dd. 
 this compound occurs (the 
 prep, b changed to m) as lim 
 si or limi si, and lumia, or 
 lumia (lu-mi a), look upon 
 him. 
 
 Libo, V. i., hide, to vanish, dis- 
 appear, be hidden, talibo, id. ; 
 hence libo, s., a vanishing 
 demon, a demon that assumes 
 the aspect of someone to 
 deceive, and appears to one in 
 the forest, and then vanishes 
 after the evil deed is com- 
 mitted, leaving the victim to 
 return home to die ; liboki, c. 
 art. naliboki, a name of Hades 
 (the invisible world, or hidden 
 refuge or home of the dead) ; 
 
 Libo, s., an evil demon. See 
 libo, V. i., 
 
 Liboki, s., c. art. naliboki, the 
 invisible world, or hiding place 
 where departed souls dwell. 
 Hades. [Sa. lafi to hide one- 
 self, lalati (of many), lafita'i 
 to conceal, lafitaga a hiding 
 place, Mg. levina buried, in- 
 terred.] A. s'aba', n. a. s'ab'a 
 and s'ubu', to hide (in the 
 earth), 8, to hide, be hidden 
 (hide one's self), cf. s'aba to 
 lie hid in wait for the enemy, 
 mas'ba' hiding place. 
 
 Libu, V. i., to be covered or dirty 
 with ashes, ash-coloured ; 
 
 Libu, s., an oven stone, the stonefe 
 that are heated red hot for 
 9 
 
LILIBU Kl] 
 
 cooking in the oven (so called 
 because covered with ashes, or 
 ash coloured) ; hence 
 
 Lilibu ki, v., to put the libu on 
 the oven fire to be heated. 
 See abuobu. 
 
 Libu, or lebu, s., d., the middle of 
 the lower part of the body at 
 the upper part of the back of 
 the pelvis. [Ml. TJr. livu, 
 TaSa. libuka, the middle.] H. 
 leb the middle, heart, lubbu 
 cor et medulla rei, &.C. 
 
 Libuis, d. lifaru, q.v. 
 
 Lifa ia, v. t., to bend, and redup., 
 
 Lifalifa ia, id., intensive; malibai, 
 to be bent, see also lofa, ma- 
 lofa, and lufa. [Sa. lavalava 
 wrapper round the loins, 
 lavasi to tie round and round, 
 entwine (as a serpent), lave- 
 lave, lave, to entangle, be 
 intertwined, intricate, My. 
 lipat (lampis, lapis, lampit, 
 lapit), Ja. lapit, to fold, lap, 
 lay in plaits, Mg. lefitra 
 folded, bent, plaited.] A. 
 laffa to be intricate, involved, 
 intertwined ; to wrap up, 
 wrap round, to fold : Nm. 
 wrap up, roll up, loffa coil of 
 turban, winding of road, lifafa 
 wrapper, envelope, bandage, 
 8, to be wrapt, ifec. 
 
 Li-fiki, for ili-fiki, q.v. 
 
 Lifalifa, v. i., to blaze, nakabu i 
 sor lifalifa the fire burns 
 blazing, or putting forth 
 flames. [Ha. lalafa, lafalafa, 
 to blaze (of a fire).] A. 
 lahiba, n. a. lahb', to blaze, put 
 forth flames. 
 
 Lifaru, s., and a., dd. libuis, 
 r&falu, rifalij, a part, some, as 
 
 114 
 
 [likoliko 
 
 , natamole lifaru some men, 
 lifaru ru bano lifaru ru toko 
 some went, some remained. 
 [Fut. efaru some, many, Niue 
 (Savage Island) falu some.] 
 A. ba's'u a part, some, and c. 
 art. alba's'u some {= lifaru, 
 dd. libuis, rifalu, rafalu). 
 Lifu, s., d. for rifu, q.v. 
 Lifu, V. i., and redup., 
 Lifulifu, V. i. (intensive), to be 
 covered, dirty, with ashes, as 
 in mourning, d. for libu, id. 
 Liga, s., d. taliga, ear, the ears : 
 
 taliga. 
 Liga, V. i., to sing, and redup., 
 Ligaliga, id. (of many), and 
 Ligana, s., c. art. naligana a 
 
 song, d. nalag : laga. 
 LigUg, V. i., to be proud : lagi- 
 
 lagi- 
 Ligi sia, V. t., to pour out, maligi, 
 or maligsi, to spill, be poured 
 down. [Sa. ligi, liligi, Ugiligi 
 to pour, maligi to spill, to be 
 poured down, maligi, s., a 
 pouring (of rain). Ma. ringi, 
 riringi to pour out. An. aijag- 
 jig to pour out.] H. nathak, 
 Ni. to be poured out (of water, 
 rain), Hi. hitik to pour out. 
 Liko tia, v. t., to tie, fasten 
 (with a rope, as a boat to a 
 ship, an animal to a stake, 
 ifec), and 
 Liko, V. i., to be fastened to, 
 affixed to, adhere to : i lik6 sa it 
 is fastened to it, as a leech to 
 the body, &c. ; 
 Liko, s., c. art. naliko, a rope 
 
 for fastening or suspending ; 
 Likoliko, redup. of liko tia (used 
 of fastening or suspending the 
 yams to a horizontal pole). 
 
to go round 
 
 LIKAu] 
 
 [My. lakat to adhere, Iftkatkan 
 to fasten, Ja. rak^t to adhere, 
 Mg. raikitra, stuck, adhered 
 to, miraikitra to adhere, 
 rekitra, id., mandrekitra to 
 fasten.] A. 'alika to adhere, 
 be affixed, be fastened to, 2, to 
 suspend, 4, make to adhere, 
 fasten, 'alako a rope. 
 
 Likau, for lakau, v. t. 
 
 Lilia, d. for hliu, q.v 
 
 Lili-maroa, v. i. 
 
 turning itself : lele, or lili, and 
 maroa. 
 
 Liliu, V. i., to return, go or come 
 back : liu. 
 
 Lima, num., five ; d. c. art. 
 nalima na his hand ; bakalima, 
 q.v. [Sa. lima five, the hand, 
 My. lima, Mg. dimy five, Epi 
 jimo (and limo) five, juma 
 hand ; d. lima, yima, or sima 
 hand ; d. lima five, ma hand ; 
 An. nijman, ornikman ( = Ef. 
 nalimana) his hand, five.] A. 
 ll'amsai, h'ams' five, alli'ams 
 digiti ; Mahri khomo, Sokotra 
 khemah, five. 
 
 Lim si, d. for libi sia, q.v. 
 
 Lina, s., the light. [Mota dina. 
 My. dina, Er. dan, day.] As 
 i en lina it is in the light (not 
 concealed), d. i en ali : aliati 
 ali. 
 
 Lirea, v. i., or a., for litea, q.v. 
 
 Lira, redup. liralira, dd. nrirnrir 
 (i.e., tirtir), litralitra, litalita, 
 V. i., or a., to be bright, shin- 
 ing, gleaming, brilliant. A. 
 nas'ara, 2) and b), nas'ira, 
 4, to be bright, shining, 
 gleaming, brilliant. 
 
 Lisoa, V. i., dd. tiso, toto : toto. 
 
 Lita, V. i., and liti, to crackle, to 
 
 115 [UTA-KURUMA 
 
 burst, explode, as wood, or a 
 stone in the fire, see letelot, 
 also lot to crackle (as a fire), 
 explode (as a gun), to sound 
 (as a crack or explosion), and 
 melita to crack or crackle (as 
 wood in the fire, <fec.), and 
 then nagiena i melita his name 
 resounds ; and 
 
 Lita ia, or litai a, or litai ia, 
 V. t., lita i lita ia a spark, or 
 fragment of something, burst- 
 ing or crackling or exploding 
 in the fire, leaps or explodes 
 on to him ; also, a wasp stings 
 him ; 
 
 Lita, s., a spark, fully lita na- 
 kabu (see preceding word) ; 
 also a red wasp (because it is 
 red like a spark, or because 
 its sting burns like fire) : d. 
 
 . (transposed) tila ; 
 
 Lita-kuruma na, v., to have the 
 breast (kuruma, see ruma) 
 thrust forward or out (bulging 
 or swollen out), in a spasm 
 (the opisthotonic) of tetanus, 
 then, to be bulging or swollen 
 stifily out (of the face of a 
 log or board that should be 
 level) : see let spasm, or 
 rigidity, as in tetanus ; let, 
 lelet to be stiff, rigid (of any- 
 thing, as of a dead body, &c.) 
 [Fi. lidi, lidilidi, to burst, or 
 explode, s., report of an ex- 
 plosion, as of thunder, or a 
 stone in a heated oven, lidi-ka 
 to strike in flying ofi", lidi ni 
 buka a spark, lidi-ka to crack 
 between the finger and thumb 
 nails, as a louse. My. ]8,tok to 
 crackle, to decrepitate, latup, 
 and latub, id., latum to boom,^ 
 
litea] 
 
 or give out a booming noise.] 
 A. s'at'iya to burst, break (be 
 broken), 5, to burst, exploding 
 into fragments ; and, 1, to swell 
 out, stiffening, so that the 
 hands and feet stand out stiff 
 and rigid (of a dead body), 
 s'aSa' to become rigid and 
 fixed ; to swell out, becoming 
 stiff and rigid, so that the 
 hands and feet stick up (of a 
 dead body), 4, to make rigid 
 or stiff and fixed, s'ata' id., 
 s'at'iyyai fragment of anything 
 burst or exploded off or out 
 from it. 
 
 Litea, a., or v. i., dirty, to be 
 dirty, d. lirea : used of any- 
 thing, as cloth, &c. Also, as 
 in English we speak of a 
 " dirty-looking " sky or night, 
 so tokalau meta lirea dirty- 
 looking tokalau (tokalau is an 
 easterly wind). [My. latah, 
 Ja. latup, turbid, foul, muddy, 
 Mg. loto dirtiness, filth, dirty, 
 soiled, maloto dirty, filthy, 
 foul.] A. latall'a, n. a. latli', 
 to be dirty. 
 
 Liu sa, V. t., to go before, to 
 precede him, to be greater 
 than him, d. toli a, i.e., to, to 
 abide, to be, and 'li a to go 
 before, precede (this to may 
 be prefixed to any verb, and 
 is to liu and d. toliu sa ^ 
 toli a = liu sa, with the added 
 sense of continuance) ; 
 
 Liu uaki (waki), or liu aki (see 
 also lu-aki), v. t., to turn, as 
 to turn a stick end for end, d. 
 lia ki, and lilia ki ; 
 
 Liliu, d. lilia, d. ler, v. i., redup., 
 to turn back, return, go or 
 
 116 [loa 
 
 come back : biliu, luaki, q.v. 
 [Sa. liu to turn, to turn over, 
 to turn into, to change, redup. 
 liliu, liuliu, faaliliu to turn 
 round, maliuliu to be able to 
 turn, Fi. liu, v. i., to precede, 
 go before, be greater than, 
 V. t., liu-taka to precede, go 
 before, ai liuliu the first : liu 
 c. preps, e, mai, ki, eliu, 
 mailiu, kiliu, ad., before, afore- 
 time, preceding in time or 
 space, Mg. aloha (ha forma- 
 tive), a., first, before, previous, 
 ahead, mialoha to precede, go 
 before, taloha before. My. 
 daulu first, to precede, Ja. 
 talu beginning.] A. 'ala to re- 
 turn, to rule; b), to precede, go 
 before; 2, to order to return; 
 to interpret (in Mod. A., espe- 
 cially in malicious sense), to de- 
 clare, institute, direct, define; 
 hence tawil' interpretation of 
 the hidden sense, allegorical 
 interpretation, 'awwalu first, 
 before, the first thing, the 
 beginning, 'awwaliyyu first, 
 before. 
 
 Lo, s., d. li, alia, as lo koi, or 
 koia, d. li ke, this place, here. 
 
 Lo, s., thing, and c. art. nalo : le. 
 
 Loamau (lo thing, and amau 
 true), s., a true thing, truth, 
 a., true, d. syn. losoko or le- 
 soko (lo, or le thing, and soko 
 true). 
 
 Lo, V. i. and t., to look, to see: 
 leo, le, id. 
 
 Loa, s., c. art. naloa, dirt (on 
 anything). 
 
 Loa, redup., loaloa, a., and v. i., 
 to be black, to be blackish. 
 See also malolo, or milo, mi- 
 
liOA i] 117 
 
 lolo. [Fi. loa a black cloud, 
 black paint for the face, loa- 
 loa, a., black, loanimata the 
 black ■ part of the eye which 
 surrounds the pupil, MI. U. 
 aro, P. roro, dirty.] This be- 
 longs to the word following, 
 loa i, loa sia, loa ria, to smear 
 with lolo (the face), or with 
 intei (the body, cloth), hence 
 the body, &c., so smeared soon 
 becomes milo dirty, covered 
 with dirt, yellowish from the 
 intei (milolo), black from lolo, 
 nikis, loaloa. So H. liel'ah 
 rust (i.e., dirt covering) of a 
 pot. 
 Loa i, V. t., to rub, smear; and 
 Lo-fia, V. t., same as alo-fia, q.v., 
 
 to rub on, to smear ; also 
 Loa sia, v. t., and red up., 
 Loloa sia (d. loloa ria), v. t., to 
 
 rub, also to flatter ; hence 
 Lolo, s., paint (for the face). 
 [My. lulut, and lulur, to cleanse 
 the skin by friction and cos- 
 metics, to rub the skin with 
 cosmetics, to smear.] H. hala' 
 to rub, strip, A. liala' to rub 
 and to smear the eyes with 
 collyrium, lialo' oil or paint 
 (used by women for their 
 faces), H. hala' (A. hala', see 
 hlo, lolo, sweet, pleasant), Piel 
 to stroke, to soothe anyone, 
 from the primary idea of the 
 roots hala', halah, i.e., that of 
 rubbing, hence to stroke any- 
 one's face, i.e., to soothe, flatter. 
 Lobu (r, art.), s., bamboo (the 
 plant) ; also bamboo water 
 vessel and bamboo knife. 
 [Santo lumuo, Ml. nambu (n, 
 art.), New Guinea dd. bau. 
 
 [lolo 
 
 ifa, inba, diem (d', art.), kem 
 (k', art.), Sa. 'ofe. To. kofe (k', 
 art.), bamboo. Ha. ohe bam- 
 boo, a reed generally, bamboo 
 knife, a kind of flute.] H. 
 'ebeh a reed, A. 'aba'ai' a reed, 
 'abau reeds. 
 
 Lofa na, s., c. art. nalofa na, 
 his track (so called because 
 his track is marked by bent 
 grass, &c.) : lofa, Ufa ia. 
 
 Lofa ia, v. t., to bend ; same as 
 Ufa ia. [Sa. lofa to cower 
 down, crouch, Fi. love-ca to 
 bend, kalove bent.] 
 
 Lofa, s., hunger or famine (be- 
 cause it bends one) ; a sword 
 (because it is flexible) : lofa 
 lofa ia hunger or famine bends 
 him : lofa ia. 
 
 Lo-fia, redup. lolo-fia. See loa i, 
 loa sia. 
 
 Loga (ending ga), s.,an enclosure, 
 the inside of an enclosure ; 
 given as d. syn. for elol (in 
 the sense of enclosure, that is, 
 the inside of an enclosure). 
 See alo. 
 
 Lokoloko ki, same as lakolako 
 ki ; lako, v. i. 
 
 Loko-taki, v. t., same as luku- 
 taki : lako, v. i. 
 
 Loku, a., concealed, i toko loku 
 he remains concealed : lako, 
 V. i. 
 
 Lokuloku ki, same as lokoloko ki. 
 
 Lolo, s., voc, uncle, redup. of 
 alo ana, q.v. 
 
 Lolo, s., and c. art., a black paint 
 for the face (under the eyes) : 
 loa i, loa sia. 
 Lolo, s., c. art. nalolo, thread : 
 the native thread was made 
 by rubbing the fibre between 
 
LOLO] 
 
 the hand and tlie thigh : loloa 
 sia, 
 Lolo, a., or v. i., redup. of elo, 
 
 q.v,, sweet, pleasant. 
 Lolo-fia, redup. of lo-fia, and 
 Loloa sia, or 
 
 Loloa ria, redup. of loa sia, q.v. 
 Lolo-mina, a., lolo sweet, pleasant, 
 and mina, q.v., gentle and 
 pleasant. 
 
 Lolofa, a., or v. i., d. lulum, lumu 
 to be wet, moistened : see tiu, 
 d. luma. [Fi. luvu to sink in 
 the water, luma to kill by 
 putting the head under water. 
 Ma. rumaki to dip in water, 
 Mg. roboka plunged, dipped, 
 soaked.] Ch. seba' to dip into 
 (H., A., id.) Ithpael 'istaba' 
 to be wet, moistened. 
 
 Lor, s., d. roro, the oily milk 
 expressed from the grated 
 kernel of the cocoanut for 
 puddings. See ror, roro ia. 
 
 Los, or loso, redup. lolos, or 
 loloso, v. i., or mid., to bathe, 
 to wash (oneself). [TaSa. lalos, 
 Ml. roso, Malo loloso, id.. 
 Ml. roso-vi to wash (clothes, 
 &c.)] A. rallas'a, n. a. rahs', to 
 wash (clothes, the body), H. 
 ralias to wash (the body), to 
 wash oneself. 
 
 Losia, V. i. See lusia. 
 
 Lot, V. i., to crackle, as a fire ; 
 explode, as a gun, &o. ; 
 
 Lotelot, V. i., redup., to crackle 
 frequently and rapidly, as the 
 bubbles in a boiling pot ; 
 
 Lotelot, s., c. art. nalotelot, same 
 as naletilot, froth ; also. 
 
 Lot, s., c. art. nalot, froth (i.e., a 
 mass of bursting or crackling 
 bubbles). See lita. 
 
 118 [lu 
 
 Louua, d. for loamau (lo a night, 
 and uua, i.e., uwa, for amau, 
 true). 
 
 Lousa, redup. lolousa, v. i., to be 
 wet, or losa, lolosa. See lusa. 
 
 Lu, s., d. for lo a thing, in lurik, 
 a thing, lit. little thing. 
 
 Lu, s., a place, for li, alia, as lu 
 ua, this place, here, lu uan 
 that place, there. 
 
 Lu, V. i., to rise up, as intano i 
 lu the ground rises up (as when' 
 the swelling yams below heave 
 it up), redup. lulu, nabiau i 
 lulu the waves rise up ; also 
 lu, d. lua, to take up, then to 
 take out, away, also to throw 
 up (lua i and lua ki nia), i.e., 
 to vomit, to put up, also to 
 put out, as to put out the 
 tongue, lua mina (also lai 
 mina and le mina) : lua, lua- 
 lua to take out, or put out 
 (anything, as yams from the 
 ground or a plantation, or 
 demons from a man possessed), 
 lua nafunaso take out the cork 
 or stopper (take it up) ; lulu 
 to be uplifted, proud (see lagi- 
 lagi, liglig) bau lulu a proud 
 person (lit. high head), also 
 lulu, d. li, to vie with, contend 
 for superiority, bilulu, v. r., to 
 vie or contend with each other 
 for superiority, bilulu ki vie 
 or contend with each other 
 for superiority about (some- 
 thing) ; lu e a take it up (used 
 of water taking up a solid, as 
 a medicine, dissolving in it, 
 because the medicine, as a 
 preparation of iron, lies at the 
 bottom of the water, and, as 
 it dissolTCS, rises in it) ; na- 
 
LU] 
 
 119 [luaki 
 
 ka^bu i lua nasu the fire puts 
 out, or sends up, smoke : to this 
 stem belong also ulua to grow 
 up, uli, all, and ula, a leaf, and 
 lulu the hair (of the head, 
 face, or other part of the 
 body), redup. uluulua to be 
 growing up, putting forth 
 leaves, also to be hairy, to 
 be woolly (as a sheep) to be 
 covered with down (a plant) : 
 to this stem also belong (the 
 -ga, or -gi, being formative) 
 laga tia, laga ia, lagi, elag, 
 elagi, lagilagi, malaga, &c. 
 See supra under the word lagi. 
 [Fi. lua, lua-ra, lua-raka, to 
 vomit, Sa. luai to spit out. 
 Ha. luai to vomit, lualuai to 
 ruminate, chew the cud, to 
 raise the food again from the 
 stomach to the mouth, as 
 ruminating animals. Ma. ruaki, 
 Tah. ruai to vomit. My. luwat, 
 or luat, to vomit, luwar, or 
 luar, out, away, luwari and 
 luwarkan to put out, expel, 
 Mg. loa, s., vomit, mandoa to 
 vomit, loatra, ad., over and 
 above, loatra taken up, put 
 out, mandoatra to take out or 
 up, loarana being taken up.] 
 See A. 'alu, H. 'alah under 
 the word lagi. A. 'ala', n. a. 
 'uluw', to ascend, go up, be 
 above it, over it, overlay it, 
 become supernatant upon it ; 
 overcome, become superior ; 
 exalt (himself) ; recoil (from), 
 remove, or go away (from), 2, 
 to take up or off, 3, to vie, con- 
 tend, or compete for superior- 
 ity, 4, take up, take out, &c. 
 H. 'alah to go up : inanimate 
 
 things are also said to go up, 
 as smoke, a rising ground, a 
 plant which sprouts forth and 
 grows, whence the participle 
 'oleh (a plant) sprouting forth 
 (Ef. ulua, ulu), and 'aleh a 
 leaf (Ef. ull, all) ; used also of 
 things which are taken up, 
 carried away. Hi. (causative) 
 to take out or up (as out of a 
 pit), to take up, or away, to 
 put up (the cud, from the 
 stomach into the mouth, Ha. 
 lualuai). of ruminatinganimals, 
 generally, to make to go up 
 (out or away), E. redup. la 'ala, 
 'al'ala to make to go up, lift 
 up, take up, le'lena height, 
 highness, &c. 
 
 Lua, V. t., see under preceding 
 word. This verb is much 
 used after other verbs, as sela 
 lua i bear or carry (taking) 
 out, or away, ba lua i, &c. ; 
 miroa lua i think (taking or 
 putting) out or up (discover it 
 by thought), &c. 
 
 Lualua, v. t., redup. of preceding. 
 See lu. 
 
 Lua, s., c. art. nalua, aland slip: 
 lua, lu. 
 
 Lualua, s., c. art. nalualua, an old 
 plantation (out of which the 
 yams have been taken) ; the 
 hair or grass-like growth on 
 rocks under the sea : lua, lu. 
 
 Luaki, s., an allegorical utter- 
 ance, a proverb or parable ; 
 
 Luaki, V. t., i luaki nafisan he 
 makes his speech allegorical 
 (turns it from the obvious 
 sense), i tili luaki lau era sa he 
 utters a proverb (parable, or 
 allegory) planting it on them 
 
LUBA Kl] 
 
 (lit. planting, piercing, or fix- 
 ing them with it) : liu uaki, 
 or liu aki. 
 
 Lu6a ki, V. t., to pour out (as 
 water, grain, &c.), Iu6a, mid., 
 to pour (itself) as rain ; also 
 used of pouring out anything 
 (as men) from a ship, lu6a 
 kira pour them out, or land 
 them, hence biluSaki, v. r., to 
 pour each other out, to land 
 (men) ; maluftaki to be spilt, 
 poured out (water or fluid), 
 talu6aki to be spilt or poured 
 out (as water or fluid). [My. 
 tumpah to spill, shed, pour 
 out, manumpah, id., Fi. livi-a 
 to pour gently, or in a small 
 stream, talivi to be poured 
 out, spilt. A. Sabba to pour 
 out (of all things, and of things 
 dry) ; to pour, be poured out, 
 5, 7, 8, to be poured out, and 
 
 , Saba, n. a. sa'b', to pour out. 
 
 Lufa, s., loin wrapper, girdle 
 round the loins. See lifa ia. 
 
 Lug ia, V. t., to bend, make 
 curved, and redup., 
 
 Luglug ia, id., d. nugnug ia; 
 hence 
 
 Lug, s., c. art. nalug, d., the 
 native pudding (see nakoau, 
 kabu), so called because 
 wrapped in leaves which are 
 bent or curved round it. 
 [My. lengkok bent, crooked.] 
 A. laga, n. a. la'g', 2, to make 
 curvwd, to bend. 
 
 Luk, or luku, s., a hole or pit, a 
 well : luku iioai well (pit or 
 hole) of water : lako. 
 
 Luku, a., same as loku. 
 
 Luku-taki, v. t., same as loko- 
 taki. See lako, v. i. 
 
 120 [ld.mlum 
 
 Luluk, s., a thing rolled up (as 
 cloth). See lulu ki (luluki). 
 
 Luke, V. i., same as liko, v. i. 
 
 Luku tia, v. t., same as liko tia. 
 
 Luko, s., c. art. naluko, same as 
 liko, s. ; takes the nom. suf. 
 nalukona, or nalikona, its 
 rope, i.e., the rope for tying or 
 fastening it. 
 
 Lukuluku, same as likoliko. 
 
 Lukoluko, and 
 
 Lukuluku ki, same as lokoloko 
 ki : lako. 
 
 Lulu, V. i., redup. ; and 
 
 Lulu, V. t., I'lu, d. li, vie, con- 
 tend with for superiority, dis- 
 pute with : lu, and see bau 
 lulu and bilulu. 
 
 Lulu, s., 0. art. nalulu, as nalulu 
 nabau na the hair of his head, 
 nalulu na his hair : lu, and 
 see uluulua. 
 
 Lulu, V. i., to roll : i lulu ban, it 
 rolls away ; 
 
 Lulu ki, V. t., to roll up (as cloth 
 into a bale) ; hence 
 
 Lulu, s., c. art. nalulu, a roll, a 
 bale ; and talulu, and talu or 
 tal'lu, s., a roll (of cloth), a 
 crowd (of men), a herd (of 
 pigs), a heap (of stones) : see 
 also malilu to roll. H 'alal 
 to roll, hence to be round, 
 thick, eg. galal, lul, kc. 
 
 Lulu, V. i., to sink, d. tutu, q.v. 
 
 Lulia, and 
 
 Luluia, v. i., for ululia : alialia. 
 
 Lumi a, i.e., lu mi a, to look 
 upon it, see it : d. for libi sia, 
 d. lim si, d. le ba i or le ba ia. 
 See le, leo, lo. 
 
 Luma, or lum, v. i., and redup., 
 
 Lumlum, to be wet. See lolofa, 
 d.; 
 
euma] 
 
 Ltima, s., the wet, as luma iga 
 luma the wet is about to wet, 
 or will wet (" it will rain," or 
 " is going to rain ") ; 
 
 Lume a, v. t., lunie nafanua to 
 wash (immerse) or cleanse the 
 land by a religious service or 
 ceremony performed by the 
 natamole tabu, or priest: so 
 if a man has been poisoned, 
 natamole tabu i lume a ki the 
 poison, cleanses or washes him 
 from the poison by a religions 
 service or ceremony. When 
 the land is suffering from 
 drought, natamole tabu i lume 
 a, or lumi a, and the hard- 
 baked and therefore barren 
 earth becomes soft and moist 
 (lum, lulum), clothed with ver- 
 dure, and fruitful, yielding 
 abundance of food ; red up., 
 
 Lulume a, id. The radical mean- 
 ing of the word is to dip, to 
 immerse (see under lolofa). 
 [Fi. lomo-ca to dip, to dye, 
 luvu to sink in water, to be 
 flooded (as the land).] H. 
 Saba', A. sab"a, to dip into, to 
 immerse, then to dye, to tinge, 
 S. sba' to tinge, Saba' to wash, 
 E. tam'a to tinge, to immerse 
 (in water). See also riu, tiu, 
 tutu, tuma. 
 
 Lumg sia, v. t., to turn, d. 
 lume to wrap up, buluma, or 
 bulima, to be turned, to be 
 changed (in form or appear- 
 ance). [Tah. rumi to wring, 
 turn over, upset. Ha. limu to 
 turn, to change, to have various 
 appearances, 1 imulimu twist- 
 iug, turning.] E. tawim to 
 roll up, fold up. 
 
 121 [m' 
 
 Lumi, V. i., to swell up, d. lugi. 
 A warama to swell (eg. H. 
 'aram, rum). 
 
 Lusa, V. i., to be wet, also lousa, 
 lolousa. E. relisa to be wet. 
 
 Lusi a, redup. lulusia. See lele 
 (and usi a). 
 
 Lusia, V. i., to be dirty, faded, i 
 bi naniau lusia (of a lazy, 
 languid husband). [My. lasu 
 languid, feeble, Mg. lazo 
 fading, withering, faded.] A. 
 latha to dirty, to be slow, 5, 
 to be dirty, lutha< langour, 
 laziness, 'alwathu languid, 
 faded, withered. See milesu. 
 
 IVi (ma, mi, or m6), a formative 
 prefix or preformative particle : 
 the m' is sometimes changed to 
 b and f, as toko, or to, mato, 
 bato, or fato ; in the causative 
 prefix it is b' or f, being the 
 initial consonant of baka or 
 faka, rarely ba or fa ; in the 
 reflexive prefix it is b' or f, 
 being the initial consonant of 
 bi or fi. In bi, or fi, q.v., the 
 i is a fragment of the ancient 
 reflexive prefix, as the a in ba 
 or fa, q.v., is the ancient 
 causative prefix. In many 
 cases ma- (often mi-) is found 
 prefixed to verbs having a 
 passive sense, the same verbs 
 being without the ma- active : 
 in these cases we may regard 
 the word as representing the 
 ancient ps. part. The pre- 
 formative m (originally ma) in 
 H. and Arm. mS or m', A. mo, 
 
122 
 
 [meat 
 
 or mu, E. ma, Amh. ma, was 
 attached to infinitives and 
 participles (active and passive). 
 Sometimes ma- in Ef., or m' 
 (b'l f) is to be regarded as 
 originally prefixed to the sim- 
 plest form of the verb. See 
 mago (6ago), borau (A. mar- 
 kab, an infinitive), &c. 
 
 M, ad., contraction of mo, q.v. 
 
 Ma, s., day ; in mas, maisa, mes, 
 masus (nanum, nanu, nanofa, 
 nanoasa,nasa, uasa, asa) to-day, 
 lit. this day. H. yom, A. ya'm', 
 S. yom, Ch. emphatic yoma', 
 and sa, dem. 
 
 Ma, prep., for, contraction of 
 magi or of mang (d. mini), as 
 i manai (or maginai) bat ia, d. 
 i manena bat ia, d. i masa bat 
 ia. See magi. [Ma., Fut., 
 &c., ma, id.] 
 
 Ma, s., contraction for maga, in 
 names of places. [Ma. ma, 
 id.] Maga. 
 
 Ma, d. me, prep., with (of 
 accompaniment), and. [Ha. 
 me. Ma. me, with, and, Mg. 
 amana with, and, Mota ma, 
 me.] H. 'im, A. ma' with, 
 together with : may, like me, 
 &c., sometimes be translated 
 by and. 
 
 Ma, V. i., for mam : ani, v., q.v., 
 c. preformative m', 
 
 Ma nia, v. t., to rub, grind, or 
 grate (as yams) ; 
 
 Ma, s., c. art. nima, a fern tree; 
 the rough bark of it (used as 
 a grater) : nima that which 
 ma, i.e., grates. See foga, afo. 
 [Mg. fafa swept, cleared off, 
 wiped , cleansed, mif afa, maf afa, 
 to sweep, wipe, clear away.] 
 
 H. liafaf II. to rub off, scrape 
 off, A. liaffa to rub off. 
 
 Ma, s., a man, a male, opp. to 
 lai (lei, le, li) a female, a 
 woman ; used also before 
 names of men, as lai before 
 names of women ; as ma 
 tuele, Mr. tuele ; ma-riki lit. 
 old man, senior, sir, often 
 used also before names of 
 men, like ma : ma is a con- 
 traction of mare, q.v. [Ysabel 
 (Gao) mae male, and used also 
 before masculine names.] 
 
 Note. — This ma (contrac- 
 tion of mare) occurs also in d. 
 ma'ani, mani (sometimes pro- 
 nounced mwang, or moan), 
 and denotes male (the ni in 
 mani, like the ni in kuruni, is 
 non-radical, being a suiBxed 
 particle), thus nata-mani, or 
 ta-mani, a male, male, lit. a 
 male human being, and in 
 another d. the initial m is 
 elided and for mani we have 
 anoi, q.v., a male, male. 
 
 Ma'ani, or maani, or mani (or 
 mwani, or moan), a., male, d. 
 anoi, s. and a., male : see pre- 
 ceding word. [Malo muera, 
 Oba amera, Celebes burani 
 (husband, Wallace), Ambrym 
 milig, Bali muwani, Epi d. 
 man, and Ef. ta-, or ata-mane, 
 Epi dd. sumano, atamani (su- 
 mano, ata-mani), Ta. yeru- 
 man, TaSa. la-mani, Fi. ta- 
 ngane. To. ta-ane, Fut. and 
 Sa. tane (ta-ane), id.] 
 
 Mba, V. i., for ba, or ma, v. i. : a 
 mere euphonic change. 
 
 Mbat, s., d. na6e, a club. [To. 
 raata a kind of club.] Nm. 
 
mask] 
 
 nabboud a club ; also nabbout 
 a staff, club. 
 
 Ma6e, s., c. art. namaSe, the 
 chestnut tree and its fruit. 
 [Tah. mape, id. ; also the kid- 
 neys of any animal ; An. 
 mop(o) the chestnut, also the 
 inside (i.e., belly) of a box, 
 inside (i.e., belly) of an ani- 
 mal, the pluck, the heart, 
 liver, and lungs, Malo mabue 
 chestnut.] See under amo, 
 amoamo. 
 
 Mafielu, mafeelubelu, v. i., d. ; 
 refl. of 6elu ; to be bent, 
 doubled, folded : 6elu. 
 
 Maftor, d. mauora, q.v. 
 
 Mabulu, V. i., or a., d. mafulu, 
 fat : bulia. 
 
 Mabulu, s., a large kind of pigeon. 
 
 Mabulu, V. i., or a., sticky ; 
 waxy, as a yam when cooked : 
 bubulu, bulu tia. 
 
 Mafa, a., swollen, in las mafa, d. 
 las miiu, swollen testicles (mau 
 for mafu). H. bua', ba'ah, 
 A. ba"a' to swell. See fuata, 
 bua III. 
 
 Mafa, V. i., as i maf ban he goes 
 hiddenly or unobserved = i bi 
 6ei ban ; 
 
 Mafa na, s., his being hid or 
 unseen (in going) : see 6ei, 
 and afa. 
 
 Mafa, d., v. i., or a., to be broken, 
 cracked, d. mafua, q.v. [To. 
 mafa crack, rent, split.] 
 
 Mafa ia, or mafai a, v. t., to 
 cover : 6o-fia. 
 
 Mafaifai, v. i., or a., to be 
 smashed to pieces : fai. See 
 bua to divide, cleave. 
 
 Mafaku, v. i., to be plucked up, 
 or out : baku sa. 
 
 123 
 
 [maga 
 
 Mafiritiri, v. i., to be loosed, to 
 be made void : bir ia, v. t. 
 
 Mafasu, v. i., to be broken off, 
 snapt off. [To. mafachi, id.) 
 Ba.se a. 
 
 Mafis, s., a knife, d. for makus, 
 q.v. 
 
 Mafisi, s., a child, one begotten 
 or born, and 
 
 Mafisi, V. i., or a., to be begotten, 
 born, brought forth ; 
 
 Mafisien, s., c. art. namafisien 
 the being born or brought 
 forth : bis ia, v. t., to beget. 
 
 Mafisi a, v. t., to beat : fisi a. 
 
 Mafu, s., c. art. namafu (d. 
 namam), a mist; ceremonial 
 uncleanness : abu, abuobu. 
 
 Mafua, V. i., to be split, cracked : 
 bua to divide, cleave. [Sa. 
 mavae to be split, cracked.] 
 
 Mafukafuka, v. i., to be swollen 
 out, puffed up : buka i. 
 
 Mafule, v. i,, to be stripped of 
 leaves : bule. 
 
 Mafunai, or mafunei, v. i,, to be 
 consumed, annihilated, as wood 
 in the fire ; and 
 
 Mafunufunu, v. i., to be brought 
 to an end, to be ended, finished, 
 annihilated : bunu ea. 
 
 Mafusai, v. i., to be smashed to 
 pieces, as a yam : busa ia. 
 
 Mafuti, V. i., to be plucked : but 
 ia. 
 
 Maga, V. i., to gape (see maka, 
 gaga, fugaga), open out, then 
 to wonder, then to gape or 
 open the mouth (to speak), 
 to speak, maga asi is to speak 
 about it, lit. to open the jaws, 
 part asunder the jaws (asi), 
 maga lua i speak it up or out, 
 lit. gape outing it, maga lo 
 
Maga, 
 
 maga] 
 
 saki, d. maka lo saki, to gape 
 looking up ; hence 
 
 Maga, s., a small canoe, namaga ; 
 and 
 
 s., c. art. namaga, d. 
 nabaga, the banyan ; and 
 
 Magan, s,, c. art. namagan, the 
 art of gaping, wonder ; and 
 
 Magamaga, v. i., redup., to gape 
 often and rapidly, to pant ; 
 and 
 
 Maga-fai, s., a division, a part 
 (see fai, bua) ; and 
 
 Maga, s., the first part in names 
 of places, as gorges or valleys, 
 and especially of places in the 
 depths of the abyss of Hades ; 
 sometimes, but rarely, con- 
 tracted to ma, as maga-tika, or 
 ma^tika, the lowest abyss in 
 Hades. [Ma. maga brook, 
 watercourse, ditch, and con- 
 tracted ma in names of streams, 
 Sa. f aamaga to open the mouth, 
 to gape (To. fakamaga) ; maga 
 a, branch (as of a tree, road, or 
 stream, or anything having a 
 branch, or forked), Tah. maa 
 •cloven, divided. My. nganga 
 to gape, mangu wonder, amaze- 
 ment, mangah to pant, palpi- 
 tate, manga open.] E. naka'a 
 to gape, to yawn, to be rent, 
 parted or sundered, and of 
 water gushing forth (see 
 fugaga), A. manlia' a place 
 where water remains {i.e., a 
 hollow, fissure in the earth, 
 or valley), nalia'a to rend 
 asunder, E. nka'a< an opening, 
 gap, fissure ; 
 
 Maga, s., see above, in names 
 of the following places in 
 Hades, signifies chasm, yawn- 
 
 smelling 
 
 124 [maga 
 
 ing chasm, gulf, or abyss, of 
 which there are several, some 
 say six, one below the other, 
 viz. — 
 
 Maga-6oa6oa, evil-smelling abyss 
 — see 6oa ; 
 
 Maga-bua, profound abyss — see 
 bua ; 
 
 Maga-lulululu, sinking sinkmg 
 abyss : lulu ; 
 
 Maga-na6ona6o, evil 
 abyss : nafto ; 
 
 Maga-seasea, abyss of oblivion : 
 seasea ; 
 
 Maga-tika, or ma-tika, abyss of 
 annihilation (this is the lowest 
 abyss) : tika ; 
 
 Maga-tiro, sinking abyss. See 
 tiro. 
 
 Note. — Magatiro in one 
 dialect is magalulululu in 
 another ; and maga6oa6oa and 
 magana5ona6o denote the 
 same. Thus there are five 
 abysses yawning one below the 
 other in succession. All these 
 are below abokas, which is the 
 uppermost, and the first to 
 which departed souls go, and 
 also the general name of 
 Hades. 
 
 Magaliu, s., name of a place in 
 Efate, lit. the turning gap. 
 See liu. 
 
 Magali, V. i., to be turned round: 
 elo i magali the sun is turned 
 round (it is late in the after- 
 noon). See kelu. 
 Magasi, v. i., to speak about, lit. 
 to open or part the jaws : 
 maga, asi. 
 Maga, prep, and pron. of 3 per- 
 son, denoting with-them, thus 
 — (1) kihe magal who they? 
 
maga] 
 
 d. se mani ? d. se mai ? d. fei 
 tnanag? (2) John maga, d. 
 John manag, d. John mera uan 
 (or meroan), John and his 
 companions ; (3) natamole 
 maga, d. manag, d. mera nan a 
 man with them (i.e., a man 
 with those beside him), some 
 men, indefinite plural. The 
 literal meaning of maga in 
 (1), (2), (3 J, is with-them 
 there : kihe maga ? who he 
 with-them there (beside him), 
 or together . with them there 
 (beside him) ; John maga John 
 together with them there be- 
 side him ; natamole maga 
 the man together with them 
 there (beside him). It is 
 probable that maga is a con- 
 traction of which manag is the 
 fuller form ; and the -ga (for 
 naga) is the dem. there (see 
 ga, dem.) This manag = 
 with them there : in address- 
 a number the speaker says 
 tagu maga, or manag, or mera 
 uan, my friends, lit. my friend 
 with them there (beside you); 
 so tai manag, &c., brother with 
 them there (beside you), 
 brothers. The expression 
 mera uan is me with, together 
 with, ra them or those, and 
 uan, dem., (that) there, and 
 manag and maga differ in 
 having the r elided (as it is 
 in eu, u, for eru, ru, they, 
 verb, pron.) and the suffixed 
 dem. nag or naga, q.v., in- 
 stead of uan, q.v. Mani (and 
 mai) are not used as in (2) 
 and (3), but only as in (1) in 
 the above example. [Ma. ma, 
 
 125 [mago na 
 
 Ha. ma, Fut. ma, Ta. min, d.. 
 mi (m^h) pi., ml, dual.] 
 Magasaga, v. t., to make a saga 
 (crotch, fork) : maga, and 
 
 Magau, pr. n., c. art. namagau, 
 for nabagau. See bagau. 
 
 Magi (d. syn. mini), comp. prep., 
 for, contracted ma, q.v. : magi 
 is agi, q.v., and m' on account 
 of, in, to, and thus aginai = 
 what is his, his, maginai on 
 his (account), in his (interest), 
 i.e., for him ; in one d. the 
 genitive prep, nig, q.v., of, 
 denotes also for, niga = his, 
 "and also = for him. Both 
 magi and nig, when = for, 
 are placed between the verbal 
 pronoun and its verb, thus, i 
 maginai, or i niga mati, he for 
 him died. The prep, m' or mi 
 is, except in this case, mostly 
 used before the object of a 
 verb — see le bai limi sia, lu 
 mia, li bi sia, in which it occurs 
 as mi, bi, and ba, and see also 
 bai, or bei. [Mota mun for. 
 An. imi to, for, Ma. ma for, 
 &c.] 
 
 Magie na, prep, and s., for his 
 name, i magiena bat ia he for 
 his name did it, tuga magie- 
 gita bat ia let us for our names 
 (i.e., for each of us) do it, &c. : 
 ma, i.e. magi, for, and gie 
 name. 
 
 Magiri a, v. t., to scratch, scrape : 
 giri a. 
 
 Mago na, s., c. art. namago na : 
 bago na, q.v. for meaning and 
 origin, is the same word by 
 change of m (the preformative) 
 tob. 
 
MAGOAGO] 
 
 Magoago (m' prep.), d., ad., 
 dawn, early morning, lit. at 
 dawn. [Of. Arag vaigogo to- 
 morrow.] E. golia to dawn, 
 goh dawn. 
 
 Magoro, s. See muagoro. 
 
 Magura ki, v., to withhold from, 
 d. makur ki : gura ia. 
 
 Magura, v. i., or a., to be lean, 
 d. makur : gura ia. 
 
 Mkgura, s., c. art. namiigora, 
 contraction of muagoro. 
 
 Maguku, V. i., to be bent, 
 &c. : guku. [An. mecuo 
 old, wrinkled, makaka bent, 
 crooked.] 
 
 Magusi, V. i., to be crooked, con- 
 torted, cross-grained, as wood ; 
 also, nabona i magusi his heart 
 is crooked. 
 
 Mai, ad., here, as bano-mai to 
 come here, lo mai look here, 
 &c., and V. i., d. for the full 
 expression bano-mai, d. umai, 
 to come here. See banotu, 
 note, and bai, bei, be. 
 
 Mai, s., c. art. namai, a rope, a 
 string. See d. me. 
 
 Mai a, or ma ia, v. t., to chew 
 (softening food for an infant). 
 [Sa. mama to chew, ps. maia.] 
 A. ma"ma"a to chew (meat), 
 but not wholly. 
 
 Mai, d. for m^ni, as sei ? who (is) 
 he ? se mai ? who (are) they ? 
 See maga. 
 
 Maia, s., a species of banana. 
 
 Mai, distance, only in emai, ad., 
 q.v. 
 
 Maita, or maieta, d., and 
 
 Maito, or maieto, d., v. i., or a., 
 to be black, black. [My. itam, 
 Mg. mainty, Bisaya maitum, 
 Tagala itim, black.] A. 
 
 126 [maka 
 
 'adhamo' ('ahtamo, 'athamo, 
 &c., id.) black, 'idhamma, 
 and 'ithamma (i.e., dahama, 
 tallama, 9), to be black. 
 
 Maieto, maito, v. i., to be angry, 
 maito sa to be angry on 
 account or because of it, 
 maito ki nia to be angry at 
 him, maito ki nik sa to be 
 angry at him on account of it. 
 A. ma'it'a to be angry, ma'it'o, 
 and ma'it o angry. 
 
 Maietoa, and 
 
 Maietoan, s., c. art. namaietoa 
 anger, namaietoan the being 
 angry, anger. 
 
 Mailoa (ma-, prep.), s., ad., d., 
 dawn, early morning, lit. at 
 dawn. [An. imraig to-morrow, 
 Mg. maraina morning.] See 
 aliati. 
 
 Mailua. See raalua. 
 
 Mailum,niailumlum. See malum. 
 
 Maimai, v. i.,. to be in a tumult 
 (of haste or passion), namarite 
 na i maimai his inside (heart, 
 feelings) is in a tumult. [Mg. 
 maika, and maimay, a., hasty, 
 in a hurry.] A. ma'ma'a to 
 do a thing hastily, to be in a 
 tumult, ma'ma'a* crackling 
 (of burning reeds or such like). 
 
 Mairi, v. i., to live : dd. mauri, 
 moll. 
 
 Maisa, ad., to-day, dd. mas, mes, 
 masusa. See ma, day. 
 
 Mak, V. i., d., to fall, become 
 mild, gentle, die away, as the 
 wind : eg. mao. S. mak to be 
 cast down, prostrated, humble, 
 mild. 
 
 Maka. See mako. 
 
 Maka, v. i., or maga, q.v., to 
 gape, to wonder, to be amazed, 
 
makaka] 
 
 i maka sa, or maga sa, he is 
 amazed or gapes at (because 
 of) it ; and maka lo saki, or 
 maga lo saki, he gapes looking 
 upwards. See maga. 
 
 Makaka, v. i., or a., to be ragged 
 or fissured, as cloth. See aka. 
 
 Makal, s., an ant (so called from 
 its smallness, or quick and 
 light movements) : kala, and 
 bakal ia ll. 
 
 Makal, s., shame, pudenda. See 
 under bakal ia ii. 
 
 Makal, v. i., or a., and redup., 
 
 Makalkal, to be sharp : bakal 
 ia II. [To. machila, sharp.] 
 
 Makalakala, v. i,, or a., to be 
 itchy : connected with makal, 
 ant, thus, makal i makamakala 
 ki nau an ant moves about on 
 (is creeping or running on) 
 me, and therefore a makala- 
 kala I am itchy : bakal ia ii. 
 
 Makamakala ki, v., to move 
 about or creep on (one), of an 
 ant (makal), hence makalakala 
 itchy. 
 
 Makara, v. i., to be assembled, 
 to be a crowd or many to- 
 gether, dd. maraka (trans- 
 posed), and mera, or mara (k 
 elided) : kuru, guru. 
 
 Makarakara, v. i., or a., to be 
 burning, as the throat from 
 eating currie with too much 
 pepper : kara. 
 
 Makas ia, v. t., to pluck out or 
 off, as a scab or anything from 
 the skin, loose bark from a 
 tree, husk from a cocoanut. 
 A. nakas'a, 3), to pluck out. 
 See bakasa ki. 
 
 Maki, V. t., to be ignorant of, 
 not to know ; redup., 
 
 127 [makita 
 
 Makimaki, as i makimaki isa he 
 is ignorant of, does not know, 
 it; 
 
 Maki, don't know (in answer to 
 a question) ; 
 
 Maki, pr. n. of a demon or spirit, 
 one of the ofiicers of Saritau at 
 the gate or entrance of Hades. 
 When the spirit of a deceased 
 person presents himself after 
 death for admission to Hades, 
 Faus (another spirit) asks 
 " Who is it ? " If Maki says, 
 " Maki " (i.e., don't know) a 
 dreadful punishment is in- 
 flicted by Saritau ; if he says 
 " He is one of our people" ad- 
 mission without punishment 
 is given. [My. mukir, Ja. 
 mangkir (mungkir), to deny, 
 disavow.] A. nakira, 1, 4, 6, 
 10, to be ignorant of, not to 
 know, 4, to deny, to disavow, 
 Munkar' name of the angel 
 who together with Nakir is 
 said to have the oiSce of 
 examining deceased persons in 
 the grave. 
 
 Makinikini, v. i., to be itchy : 
 kan ia. [Sa. ma'ini, ma'ini'ini, 
 to tingle, to smart.] 
 
 Makit ia, v. t., to seize or take 
 with the uataki (native tongs) 
 the hot oven stones, ru sela 
 uataki makiti fatu isa, or 
 maki fatu isa. H. hatah to 
 take, take hold of, seize. It 
 is once applied to a man, else- 
 where always to fire or burning 
 coals. 
 
 Makita, redup. makitakita, v. i., 
 or a., to be bent, curved, only 
 in the expression lo makita to 
 look bent, i.e., to look round 
 
MAKO] 
 
 or back, lo makitakita, id., d. 
 bakita, bakitakita. A. ka'at'a 
 to bend, to curve) mak'ut" 
 bent, curved. 
 
 Mako, and maka, s., offspring ; 
 in pr. names, as maka folu, lai 
 or li mako, &c. : aka (ako). 
 [TaSa. maka pi grandchild 
 (offspring, or offshoot, of grand- 
 father, pi), Fi. makubu, or 
 mokubu, grandchild.] 
 
 Makota, or makoto, v.i., to be 
 broken, and redup., 
 
 Makotakota, to be much broken ; 
 and 
 
 Makota ki, to be broken from, 
 i.e., to cease from (some person 
 or thing) ; and 
 
 Makota, s., a part (of a planta- 
 tion), a place, makot i milate 
 the place is cold, i.e., there 
 is no one about the place 
 (on calling at a house and find- 
 ing no one at home), makota 
 ua this place, lit. this part : 
 koto-fi a. 
 
 Makus, s., a wooden knife (used 
 for cutting up puddings), d. 
 mafis. 
 
 Makuskus, or 
 
 Makusukusu, v. i., to be soft 
 (ripe) : kosu mia. 
 
 I. Mala bulu, v. i., to faint, fall- 
 ing down (of men), to become 
 weak and falling down (of 
 breadfruit) — see bulu ; and 
 
 Mala, s., faint, as mate ki mala 
 to faint, lit. to die in a faint ; 
 a species of hawk (of a 
 faded colour) ; 
 
 Malamala, v. i., to be foolish 
 (My. babal, silly, doltish), c. 
 art. namalamala, a fool, one 
 foolish ; and 
 
 128 [mala 
 
 Mala, s., 0. art. namala, a fool, 
 one stupid, foolish, senseless ; 
 and 
 Mala nono, v. i., to abide sense- 
 less, deprived of sense or 
 motion (as by terror) : no to 
 abide. H. nabal to be or 
 become faded (used of leaves 
 and flowers falling off from 
 being faded), to fall down, to 
 faint, to lose one's strength (of 
 men : bulu, q.v., to fall down, 
 H. nafal, is eg. to mala, and 
 the two verbs occur together 
 (cf. mala bulu) in Job xiv. 18, 
 (of a mountain falling and 
 lying prostrate, like a dead 
 man) ; to be foolish (the mind 
 faded), flaccid, devoid of vigour, 
 stupid, nabal foolish, senseless. 
 II. Malamala, v. i., or a., to be 
 
 naked, naked ; and 
 Mala, s., or malala (intensive), the 
 cleared place at each village, in 
 the midst of which the nabeas 
 are set up, and in which are 
 performed the sacrifices, sing- 
 ing, and dancing of the in- 
 tamate ; often in the names of 
 places (because cleared or bare, 
 because having a mala, or 
 cleared place). [Ma. marae 
 enclosed space in front of a 
 house, yard. Tali, marae, a., 
 cleared, as a garden, or a place 
 of worship, s., the sacred place 
 formerly used for worship, 
 where stones were piled up, 
 altarserected, sacrifices offered, 
 prayers made, and sometimes 
 the dead deposited, Sa. malae 
 the open space where public 
 meetings are held.] And also 
 Mala, s. (also male) a place or 
 
malmal] 
 
 part (as of a garden), a part 
 of time, and 
 
 Malmal, s., a small place, or part. 
 See under ali or alia. 
 
 III. Mala, V. i., or a., d. malala, to 
 be loose, and redup. malamala, 
 id. A. halla to loosen, mahlul' 
 loosened, loose, Ct. mahlul 
 loose. 
 
 Malamala ia, or malamalai a, d., 
 redup. of (malai a) milai a, or 
 milei a, q.v. 
 
 Malafiafi, v. i., or a., to be thin. 
 [Ha. lahi, lahilahi, thin. My. 
 ramping thin.] A. raffa, n. a. 
 rafaf , to be thin. 
 
 Malari, d. for milati, q.v. 
 
 Malasilus, redup. of milesu, q.v. 
 
 Malat, s. See melat. 
 
 Malatiga, d. malandigi, ad., and 
 prep., near, malatiga ki near 
 to : mala place, and tiga, tigi. 
 
 Malau, V. i., to be bad tasted (as 
 stale food>, to be corrupt (as 
 bilge water), faded (as a fallen 
 leaf). [Tah. marau old, worn 
 out, fading.] A. malah'a to be 
 bad tasted, have a corrupt 
 taste (food), maluh'a to be in- 
 sipid (meat), malih" corrupt, 
 insipid (food). 
 
 Malei a, or male ia, v. t., to re- 
 quite, malei au isa requite me 
 for it. [My. balfts, mal^s, to 
 reply, requite, Mg. valy, ma- 
 maly, to reply, requite.] See 
 liu, liliu : the idea is "make 
 return." 
 
 Maleoleo, d. malolo, v. i., to 
 become tame, gentle (i.e., in- 
 telligent), as an animal does 
 when domesticated. A. ra'a', 
 4, 'ar'a', n. a. 'ira', to become 
 prudent, intelligent. 
 
 129 
 
 b 
 
 Malebuto, ad. and s., middle 
 part; inside, heart: mal(mala) 
 place, part, e prep., and buto 
 the middle. 
 
 Malele, v. i., or a., to be bent, 
 curved : lele. 
 
 Malera, v. i., to be thin, running, 
 of a fluid, as paint. See lor, 
 roro, ro ia, roro ia. 
 
 Maler, d. malgru or maliru, v. i., 
 to be transparent, shining (as 
 smooth water or glass re- 
 flecting the light : lira. 
 
 Maletiletl, v. i., to be stiflT (as the 
 back, in some disease) : let, let. 
 
 Mall, and redup. malimali, v. i., 
 to be drooping, as the coun- 
 tenance in shame ; and 
 
 Mali, s., 0. art. namali, a plant 
 (which when eaten is said to 
 make one so) ; and 
 
 Maliferi, i.e., mali-eri, v. i., to be 
 ashamed, lit. to be drooping 
 or abashed in the face or 
 countenance : see rai face, 
 forehead. [My. malu to be 
 ashamed, abashed, malumalu 
 bashfully, Mg. malo, malo- 
 malo, bashfulness, mimalo, mi- 
 malomalo bashful, meek-eyed, 
 shamefaced.] H. 'amal, 'amel 
 to languish, to droop, prop, to 
 hang down the head. 
 
 Maliblib, v. i., weak, limber, d. 
 maliflif : lifa ia. A. laflafa 
 weak. 
 
 Malibu, s., widow (also widower), 
 i.e., one mourning, lit. covered 
 with ashes : libu. 
 
 Maliflif, d. maliblib, q.v. 
 
 Malifus, dd. malus, maus, v. i., 
 or a., bent : lifa ia. 
 
 Maligo, V. i., to be dark ; and 
 redup., 
 
 10 
 
MALIGOLIGO] 
 
 Maligoligo, id., intensive ; and 
 
 Maligo, s., c. art. namaligo, 
 darkness, d. malik, q.v. 
 
 Malik, V. i., redup. malikoliko ; 
 namalik, s., to be dark, dark- 
 ness, d. maligo. [Epi miko- 
 leko, Vanua Lava malegleg, 
 meliglig, black.] A. lialika 
 to be very black (holakliko 
 very black), part, mahluk'. 
 
 Malilu, V. i., to roll away, to 
 roll, malilu ki, v. t., to make 
 to roll, to roll (a thing) away : 
 lele. 
 
 Malilua, V. i. See malua. 
 
 Malio ki, v. t., to forget (a thing) : 
 lailai. [My. lalai, Ja. lali, to 
 forget.] A. laha, n. a. lohiyy' 
 being diverted to forget (a 
 thing). 
 
 Malis, d. for malus : malifus. 
 
 Malitiga, dd. maririgi, multig : 
 malatiga. 
 
 Malo, s., a place, part ; a part 
 of time ; mal or malo tageli a 
 crooked part (either a place 
 difficult of access, or crooked 
 conduct) : c. art. na malo na 
 the trunk (of a tree or the 
 body) : mala. See ali, alia. 
 
 Malo, s., a kind of rock in the 
 sea. [Santo malo a rock.] 
 Of. A. marw' very hard stones. 
 
 Malo, v. i., to be weary, unwil- 
 ling, averse ; malo ki, v. t., to 
 dislike (a thing). [My. malfts 
 averse, &c.] A. malla to dis- 
 like, to be tired, weary ; mallo 
 disgusted, wearied. 
 
 Maloi, »., a mask. [To. bulo to 
 mask, to veil, buloa and bulo- 
 bulo a mask ; veil for the 
 head. Ha. pulou to cover the 
 head, veil the eyes, s., a veil.] 
 
 1 30 [malujilum 
 
 A. barka'a to cover the face, to 
 veil, 2, to be covered with a 
 veil, veiled, burka'o a veil, 
 burku' id. 
 
 Maloiloi, v. i., to be feeble, 
 tottering from weakness. [Ha. 
 loeloe, maloeloe, feeble.] A. 
 la'la'a, 2, to be twisted and 
 moved (from hunger), to be 
 infirm and weak from disease 
 or languor. 
 
 Malolo. See maleoleo. 
 
 Malosu, d. milesu, q.v. 
 
 Malu, V. i., or a, to be bare, 
 cleared ; redup., 
 
 Malumalu, id. See ali, alia, 
 mala. 
 
 Malua, V. i., to do anything 
 gently and quietly^ not to be 
 in a liurry, to do after a time, 
 by-and-by, d. mailua, malilua, 
 d. malulu. [Fi. malua go 
 gently, not to hurry, by-and- 
 by, vakamalua gently.] A. 
 mahala mahlu, to do anything 
 gently and quietly, not in a 
 hurry, 2, to grant that a thing 
 may be done by-and-by. 
 
 Malubaki, v. i , to be spilt : luba 
 ki. 
 
 Malum, V. i., to be weak, faint, 
 soft ; to do anything weakly, 
 i.e., gently, not in a hurry. 
 
 Malumlum, redup.. also mailura, 
 mailumlum. [Fi. malumu, 
 malumulumu, weak, faint, sick. 
 My. lamah, Ja. lamas, soft, 
 flexible, weak, feeble, faint, 
 Mg. lemy softness, meekness, 
 gentleness, malemy soft, meek, 
 gentle, TaSa., nalum. Ml. 
 malum, id.] A. s'a'afa, n. a. 
 S'a'f ', s'u'f to be weak, infirm, . 
 S'a'uf ', id. ; also to fold, double. 
 
MALUS] 
 
 mas''uf' (part.) weak, debili- 
 tated. 
 
 Malus, d. for malifus. 
 
 Mal-tageli. See malo, s., and 
 tageli. 
 
 Mam, V. i., or a., to be soft (as 
 ripe fruit), ripe. A. ma'w' 
 ripe or ripening dates, ma'a, 
 to have such dates (a palm), 
 ma' soft, mild (of food). 
 
 Mam, s., c. art. namam, d. for 
 mafu. 
 
 Mama, s., voc, father, dd. ab, 
 abab. 
 
 Mamau, redup. of mau, q.v. 
 
 Mani, V. i., or man, contracted 
 ma, to abide, to be : ani. 
 
 Manamana, s., c. art. namana- 
 mana, a pudding mixed with 
 pig's fat wrapped up (munu 
 tia) in leaves to be cooked in 
 the oven ; a captive taken in 
 war (because such were cooked 
 in the oven and eaten). See 
 munu tia, bunu tia, ifec. 
 
 Miinag, d. maga, q.v. : manag, 
 i.e., ma with them or those, 
 nag (dem.) there. 
 
 ManSii, v. i., to stay for the 
 night, to rest, as a guest ; 
 
 Manaki, s., c. art. namanaki, one 
 who does so, a guest. [My. 
 mftn^ng to rest.] Mod. S. 
 maneh to rest, Mafel, i.e., the 
 causative with the preforma- 
 tive m ; H. nuah to rest, A. 
 nali'a to kneel down, as a 
 camel, monah' a place where 
 camels lie down (to rest or 
 sleep). 
 Mandu, d. for matru. 
 Maneinei, v. i., to be weak. A. 
 
 na'na'a to be weak. 
 M^ni, as sei who (is) he ? se 
 
 131 [manubu 
 
 mani who (are) they ? d. kihe 
 maga ? See maga. 
 Manifenife, v. i., or a., to be 
 thin. [Sa. manifi, manifinifi, 
 My. mimpis, mipis, nipis, tipis, 
 Mg. manify, thin, hanifisina 
 being made thin.] A. nahifa 
 and naliufa, n. a. nahafa<, 
 naliif, manhuf thin, slender. 
 Ot. nahif thin, nahafat thin- 
 ness. 
 Manru, d. for matru. 
 Manu, s., a multitude; d. a 
 thousand (d. bon a thousand), 
 manumanu (d. bonbon) a very 
 great number, or multitude ; 
 see bon, bono tia, bunu tia, 
 munu tia. [Sa. mano a great 
 number, manomano innumer- 
 able.] 
 Manu, s., a bird, birds. [Ja. 
 manuk, Ta. manug, Er. 
 meiiok, Vanua Lava mon. 
 Tag. ibon, Poggi umah, Sa. 
 manu, id.] H. 'of birds, fowl 
 (feathered creatures), 'uf to 
 fly; E. 'awif to fly, 'ef a 
 bird. 
 Manumanu, s., a streamer or flag 
 of a native canoe sail : preced- 
 ing word. [Fi. manumanu, id., 
 also a bird.] 
 Manu na, s., the palate and 
 upper part of the throat. A. 
 lianaku the palate and lower 
 part of the mouth answering 
 to it (eg. nanoa na, q.v.), A. 
 hanaka to rub food with the 
 palate, 2, to rub the palate. 
 Manua, v. i., to be finished, 
 
 ended ; and 
 Manunu, id., d. manubu. See nu. 
 Manubu, v. i., to be finished,, 
 ended ; and 
 
MANUBUNUBU] 132 
 
 Manubunubu, id., redup. : nubu, 
 num, nu. 
 
 Manubunubu, d. matumutumu, 
 to be soft, sleek, as the skin 
 of a newly born pig, or of an 
 infant. See nubu, tumu, noba. 
 [Ha. nopunopu to spring or 
 swell up, a,, soft, spongy, 
 thoroughly cooked, plump, fat, 
 swelled out, nopue plump, 
 round, as a well fed, fat hog.] 
 
 Manugnug, d., v. i., to be bent : 
 luglug ia. 
 
 Manuka, s., c. art. namanuk, 
 wound. [Sa. manu'a to be 
 wounded, s., a wound.] A. 
 naka' to wound. 
 
 Mao na, s., d. faa, thigh. [My. 
 paah, id., also the limbs or 
 quarters of a slaughtered ani- 
 mal, Mg. fe the thigh : cf. 
 Sa. vae the leg, vaega a 
 division, vaevae to divide in 
 parts, cut up a slaughtered 
 animal, mavae = Ef. mafa, d. 
 mafua, and see Ef. fai.] See 
 bua (also fai, maga-fai). 
 
 Mao, and redup., 
 
 Maomao, v. i., to be gentle, mild. 
 A. mahiha to be mild, eg. 
 mak. 
 
 Maoni, v. i., d. mani : ani, v. i. 
 
 Maole, or mauol6, s., c. art. na- 
 maole, a bed ; hence 
 
 Maole ki, v., to make a bed with 
 (something) : d. uol, see bills 
 ia (bolis ia, and uolis ia). 
 
 Maon, s., d., c. art. namaon, 
 sweat : der. uncertain. 
 
 Maora, v. i., to be rent, redup. 
 maoraora (intensive) : bora ia. 
 
 Maosa, d. taos, v. i., to be 
 fatigued, tired. [Fi. oca 
 (otha) weary, tired.] A. 
 
 [maease 
 
 fatha', 4, to be fatigued, 
 weary, 'aftha' fatigued, worn 
 out. 
 
 Maota, or mauota (mawota), v. i., 
 to be parted asunder ; redup., 
 
 Maotaota, id., and 
 
 Maota na, s., c. art. namaota, 
 interval : 6ota ia. 
 
 Mara uoka, a., having the hands 
 chapped with hard work, as 
 with digging with the kali, or 
 with using an axe, naruna i 
 bi mar a uoka : maras, and 
 boka tia (or uoka tia). 
 
 Mara, v. i., to rest, stop, mara tu 
 stand still ; 
 
 Mara bakarogo, v. i., or a., to be 
 quiet, rest quiet, peaceable : 
 mara, i.e., maro, q.v., and 
 bakarogo. 
 
 Marag ki, v. t., d., to spit out, 
 to loathe. See burei a, burog. 
 
 Marafi, v. i., to hasten, be quick; 
 redup., 
 
 Marafirafi, id. See sarafi. S. 
 rhab whence sarhab, Pael, to 
 hasten, mgsarhiba sudden, 
 mgsarhibat hastily, quickly. 
 Uhlemann (Syr. Gr., §25, A,b) 
 gives sarheb (Saphel, similar to 
 Aphel) to permit to hasten, 
 and to hasten = arheb (H. 
 rahab to urge on, press, <fec.) 
 
 Maraka, v. i., or a., to be willing, 
 desirous, 
 
 Marakaraka, id., redup. See 
 raka. 
 
 Maraka, or meraka, v. i., d. for 
 makara, q.v. 
 
 Marasg, v. i., to be softened or 
 excoriated (as the hands with 
 work), to be peeled off, exco- 
 riated, tamaras peeled off (of 
 the skin of a body softened 
 
maeaserase] 
 
 or macerated in water). A. 
 maras'a, maratha, to macerate 
 in water, rub, scratch with 
 the nails ; and 
 
 Maras6ras§, redup., to be peeled 
 or excoriated here and there, 
 as the skin. Compare maratS. 
 
 Marasa, or murasa, d. burasa, 
 V. i., used as an ad., gently, 
 slowly, by-and-by, as ba 
 marasa mer ia do it gently, 
 not in a hurry, slowly, or by- 
 and-by. A. ratha to delay, 
 to be slow, 2, soften ; be 
 fatigued, murayyath' slow. 
 
 Marate, v. i., or mareti, to be 
 excoriated, peeled, as the hand 
 with hard work. See marasS. 
 H. marat, to make smooth ; 
 to polish ; to make bald, 
 pluck out the hair ; marut 
 to be peeled (as the shoulder 
 with carrying burdens). Oh. 
 to pluck (wings), to be 
 plucked, A. marata to pluck 
 from the body (hairs), 3, 
 pluck out hair and wound 
 with the nails. 
 
 Mar^tg, or marfetS, a., in fatu 
 marete oven stones (hard, 
 smooth or bare stones, worn 
 smooth by the sea) : preceding 
 word). 
 
 Mare, v. i., to be turned, lo mare 
 to look turned (round), look 
 back. See roa, rea. 
 
 Mare, s., a man (male, not fe- 
 male). Sir, Mr., as Mare uota 
 Sir or Mr. uota : see ma, 
 maani, or mani, and mariki. 
 [Tab. maroa a boy, a male 
 (tamaroa boy, tamahine girl), 
 Motu mero a boy (not a girl), 
 Malo muera, Oba am era, a 
 
 1.3.3 [maeo NA 
 
 male, vir.] Ch. mare' lord, 
 S. mar, A. mar' (also homo, 
 see infra mera), mor', mir', id., 
 mara'a, 2) to be virile, mascu- 
 line, and brave, as becomes a 
 man. 
 
 Mariki, s., lit. senior, sir, old 
 man, Mr., opposite to fite riki 
 matron, old woman, Mrs. : ma, 
 for mare, and riki. 
 
 Marita na, or marite na, s., the 
 belly, bowels, also a rope or 
 string; hence 
 
 Maritausa, v. i., to be angry, or 
 marita sa, or marita na i sa : 
 and marita uia to be well or 
 kindly disposed. See sa, uia. 
 A. muryita' the belly. See 
 the verb under marate. 
 
 Maritau, v. i., to wither, be 
 withered. A. salia, 2, v. t., to 
 wither or dry plants (as the 
 sun, wind), 5, tasawwalia to be 
 withered. 
 
 Maro, V. i., to breathe, to rest, 
 be quiet, to be glad, restful, 
 contented, satisfied ; maro ki, 
 V. t., to perceive the odour of 
 (to breathe or inhale the odour 
 of), to smell ; redup., 
 
 Maromaro, v. i., to breathe ; to 
 rest ; hence 
 
 Maromaroan, s., c. art., the act 
 of breathing or resting, rest ; 
 and 
 
 Maro na, s., c. art , breath. A. 
 ralia, n. p. maroll, to rest (i.e., 
 respire) ; to be glad ; to per- 
 ceive the odour of ; to blow 
 (wind), 2, to be quiet, to rest, 
 4, to breathe, H. ruali to 
 breathe, blow, Hi. to smell ; 
 to be pleased, glad (smell with 
 pleasure). 
 
maeoa] 
 
 Maroa, v. i , to turn round : roa. 
 MaroJaroSa, v. i., to fall down, 
 
 as the smoke of a fire signal. 
 
 See taruJa. 
 Marou, and marourou, s., d. 
 
 (transposed) for rum a. 
 Maru, V. i., or a., d. meru, to be 
 
 limpid, clear, pure (of water). 
 
 A. namiru, namiru, id. 
 Maru, d. for matru, q.v. 
 Maru sa, v. t., to rub ; mastur- 
 bate ; to joke. A. marall'a, 
 
 n. a. marli'u, to joke, to anoint, 
 
 to soften (the body with oil), 
 
 H. marah to rub. 
 Maruen, s., c. art. namaruen, 
 . joking, &c. 
 Marua, v. i., to cease, leave ofi", 
 
 marua ki to cease from ; and 
 Maruana, s., c. art., cessation : 
 
 baro, V. i., barua. 
 Mas, s. See maso. 
 Mas, ad., d. for maisa, mesa, 
 
 masusa. 
 Mas, and sam, ad., alone, only : 
 
 ma for mau (as in sikei mau), 
 
 and 's, sa, one. 
 Masa, d., v. i., to go, to walk. 
 
 A. mas'a, id. 
 Masana, s., c. art. namasana, the 
 
 going, walking. 
 Masa ia, v. t., to rub, rub olf, 
 
 masa ia nafo rub it on the nafo 
 
 (to rub the rust oif it) ; 
 Masamasa ki, redup., rub (as 
 
 the rust ofi' a needle, on a 
 
 stone) ; and 
 Masamasoa ki, v. t., end. 'a, to 
 
 stroke, smooth, flatter ; and 
 Masa, V. i., at ease (as wild 
 
 animals in their lair, as if 
 
 smoothed into gentleness) ; 
 Masamasa(n)ta, d., v. i., or a., 
 
 end. ta, smooth, as a board : 
 
 134 [maseee 
 
 dd. musi ki, mus ia, to stroke, 
 smooth, rub. H. mas'aL to 
 stroke, anoint, A. masaha to 
 stroke, to flatter, wipe oS', 
 ma'asa to rub strongly, 
 ma"as'a to rub gently, maslli' 
 smooth, S. nis'ali to anoint ; 
 to measure; A. masaha to 
 measure (land), H. mis'hah, 
 mas'liah a pait, a portion (Ef. 
 mas, maso, mis, id.) 
 
 Mas, s., also maso, mas6, and 
 mis, a part, a portion, a place 
 (part of the land), as bau-maso 
 na, q.v., masleo a portion of 
 speech or words, as of a song, 
 masleo naligana, a portion of 
 human speech, dialect (see leo), 
 maso ua this part, or place. 
 See preceding word. 
 
 Mas', or masu, v. i., d., to come ; 
 hence 
 
 Masuen, s., c. art. namasuen, the 
 act of coming. E. mas'a to 
 come (H. masa' means to come 
 to, i.e., to attain to, to arrive 
 at, anything). 
 
 Mas ia, v. t., to shave, as masi 
 nasina to shave the chin or 
 part of the face covered with 
 the beard . masi noai shave 
 ofi' the surface of water, bail 
 out : hence, redup., 
 
 Masimasi, v., to bail out (a canoe 
 or boat), and 
 
 Masi, s., a knife, and 
 
 Masimasi, s., id., d. mismis. A. 
 masa to shave, musa' pi. 
 mawasi a knife. 
 
 Masaki. See misaki. 
 
 Masei, s. See masoi. 
 
 Masere, s., c. art. See miseri. 
 
 Masere, v. i., to be treated 
 kindly : sere a, bakasere a, te 
 
maseeeJ 
 
 masere, one treated kindly, as 
 a beloved child. 
 
 Masere, v. i., to be torn : sere. 
 [Pi. kasere, id.] 
 
 Masifta, v. i., to be broken, done 
 into fragments ; and redup., 
 
 Masi6asi6a, id., intensive: siia ia. 
 
 Masi-6alo, s., wilderness, lit. 
 empty part (of land). See 
 mas, maso. 
 
 Masika, v., in sera maslka sa to 
 desire, covet (a person or 
 thing). A. s'aka, 5, to be 
 desirous of. 
 
 Masiki na, d. mihi (for misi), 
 V. i., taking the nom. suf. 
 agreeing in number and per- 
 son with its subject as, a 
 masikigu I alone, ku masikima 
 thou alone, i masikina, or 
 masikinia, he alone : siki, and 
 pref. ma. 
 
 Masila, or masili, v. i., to be 
 thin ; and 
 
 Masilasila, d., redup. ; and 
 
 Masila na, s., c. art. namasila 
 na, chip, shaving. See sila ia. 
 
 Masila, in buru-masila, q.v. See 
 sila. 
 
 Masirsir, d., v. i., to sob (as after 
 crying). A. zabara to utter 
 the voice, to give forth a 
 sound, to pant or gasp with 
 vehemence and groaning. 
 
 Mas-leo, s. See mas, s., part or 
 portion, and leo voice, speech. 
 
 Maso, s. See mas, s., a part, 
 portion, place. 
 
 Maso, V. i., or a., to be cooked, 
 done, d. mahi. [My. masak, 
 Mg. masaka, Ma. maoa, and 
 maoka, and maonga, cooked, 
 also ripe, Bugis motasok ripe, 
 Tah. maoa cooked, ripe, Fut. 
 
 13S [masol 
 
 moa, Santo, d., maa, cooked, 
 To. momoho ripe.] A. sawa' 
 2, to finish off (see ivfra su, 
 si), 8, to be finished ; and (of 
 food) to be cooked, done ; 
 Nm. (Part.) mostewi cooked 
 (meat), ripe (fruit). 
 
 Masoi, masoei, or masei, s., star, 
 stars, d. mohoi, c. art. na- 
 mohoi. [Epi d. mohoei, Pila 
 masoi, Eut. fatn, Sa. fetu, 
 Santo dd. vitu, matsoi, vitui, 
 vitiu, My. bintang,. wintang, 
 and lintang, Mg. kintana and 
 vasiana, Tag. bitoin, Sumbawa 
 bintoing, Sulu bitohon, Tobo 
 toi, Matabello toin, Menado 
 bituy, Sanguir bituin, Cajili 
 tulin, Mayapo tulu, Gani 
 betol, id.] A. dara'a, 7), n. a. 
 duruw', to glitter and twinkle 
 (a star), durriy' glittering and 
 twinkling (star), and dar'ariy' 
 glittering and twinkling stars. 
 
 Masoi, or masei, star, is used in pr. 
 n., as Masei, Mare Masei, &c. 
 
 Masok, V. i., to be violently 
 agitated or enraged, as namari- 
 tania i masok, lit. his belly or 
 his bowels leaped up : soka 
 to leap. 
 
 Masoko, a., true, exact, to the 
 point, as nafisan masoko a 
 word or speech true, exact, or 
 to the point ; as an adverb, 
 bisa masoko to speak truly, 
 exactly, or to the point, ba 
 masoko to go exactly, ba ma- 
 soko sa go exactly upon it, 
 &c. : soke. 
 
 Masol, V. i., to turn aside, de- 
 cline. A. zala, n. a. zuwul', to 
 decline (as the sun) ; cease to 
 be in place, remove ; start on 
 
MASU] 136 
 
 a journey and change one's 
 mind. 
 
 Masu, s., c. art. namasu, the time 
 of harvest, or of plenty of food, 
 opposite to sukei, q.v., lit. the 
 coming, namasu nafinaga the 
 coming of food, as yams, 
 taro, bread-fruit, &c. : mas' 
 (or masu), v. i., to come. 
 
 Masua na, s., c. art. namasua na, 
 the top, crown, or summit (of 
 anything) : sua, su. 
 
 Masua, v. i., or a., to be bald. 
 A. nazi'a to be bald about 
 the temples, manzu''. 
 
 Note. — Sa. tula. My. sulah, 
 Mg. sola bald, A . sali'a to be 
 bald on the fore part of the 
 head, sul'ai place of baldness. 
 
 Masuku-taki. See musuku-taki. 
 
 Masula ki, v. t., to scorch (as the 
 skin of a pig in order to its 
 being scraped and prepared 
 for cooking) : sulu. 
 
 Masusa, ad., for mas, maisa, to- 
 day. 
 
 Mat', V. i., to ebb; to be low 
 water ; hence 
 
 Mat', s., c. art., namat, the ebb ; 
 low water; the shore left bare 
 at low water. [Sa. masa to be 
 low tide ; to be sour ; to have 
 an offensive smell ; To. maha, 
 mamaha, to ebb, Fi. mati, to 
 ebb, and s., namati the ebb.] 
 A. matha to macerate and 
 dissolve (a thing in water), H. 
 masas, eg., to melt, flow down, 
 to waste away. 
 
 Mata (or mwata), a snake. [Sa,, 
 Fut., Fi. gata, id,, Male moata, 
 Santo dd, mata, maura. My. 
 ular, id. (Ma. ngata snail, 
 slug, leech).] A. h'af a to creep 
 
 [matigo 
 
 along like a thread (a serpent), 
 mah'if place of a serpent, 
 through which it creeps. 
 
 Mata, s., the eyes, usually mita, 
 or meta, q.v. 
 
 Mataisau, s., a carpenter. [Sa. 
 mataisau, id.] ; 
 
 Matakseu, d., id. Mataisau is lit. 
 the eye (or director or master) 
 of cutting. See (mata), meta, 
 and sau. 
 
 Mataku. See mitaku. 
 
 Mataloa, s., a pig with crooked 
 tusks, one on each side, that is, 
 a mature, full-grown pig. A. 
 sala"a and sala"a to have or 
 acquire a tooth or tusk on each 
 side. 
 
 Matata, s., a phosphorescent 
 worm (which gleams brilli- 
 antly). [Fi. matata to clear up, 
 as the weather, the sky.] A. 
 s'a'a to shine ; Nra. mos'ui 
 phosphorescent. 
 
 Matau, s.,d. na mitau, an anchor: 
 tau. 
 
 Matautau, v. i., to utter sounds 
 as one in sickness or pain, to 
 groan, moan. A. 'aha, n. a. 
 'awh', to say ah ! alas ! oh ! to 
 be in pain, (2), 5, id. With 
 matautau cf. A. part, of 5. 
 
 Mate, V. i., to die ; and redup., 
 
 Matgmate, v. i., to be quiet, soft, 
 gentle ; and 
 
 Matien, s., c. art. namatien, act 
 of dying, death : 
 
 Matigo na, s., c. art., the grave, 
 d. emate n ; tamate, v. i., to 
 become calm (wind, wave), s., 
 peace, a calm ; also a series of 
 feasts or festivals held every 
 fifth day (see d. syn. belaki). 
 [Sa. mate, My. mati to die, 
 
Matiratira] 
 
 137 
 
 MATURU 
 
 Mg. maty, a., dead, matimaty 
 lukewarm.] A. mata to die ; 
 to become calm (the wind), 4, 
 to soften by cooking. This 
 word occurs in all the Semitic 
 languages. 
 
 Matiratira, v, i., or a., to be 
 shining, bright (as any polished 
 Surface). See tare. 
 
 Matiu, d., V. i., to sink. See tiu sa. 
 
 Mato, and 
 
 Matoko, V. i., to remain, abide, 
 to sit : to, toko. [Mg. mito- 
 atra, mitoetra, mitoitra, mito- 
 moetra, to reside, dwell, abide, 
 sit, rest.] 
 
 Matol, ad., to-morrow : tola. 
 
 Matoltol. See matultul. 
 
 Matu, V. i., to abide, to abide 
 standing : tu. 
 
 Matu, s., c. art. namatu, d., 
 woman : fafine. [Ja. wedo, 
 Sula nifata, Tidore foya, id.] 
 
 Matu ki, V. t., to strengthen or 
 support with posts (a fence), 
 matu ki nakoro ; and 
 
 Matu na, s., c. art. namatu na, 
 post or stake (of a fence) ; the 
 backbone, vertebral column, 
 the back : fatu. 
 
 Matru, V. i., to be thirsty, to 
 thirst, dd. manru, mandu, 
 maru. [Sa. galala to have 
 intense thirst. Ml. P. meruh, 
 Epi mereu, TaSa. maroku, 
 Malo madoce, Bugis madoka, 
 Santo (Pelia) marara, Marshall 
 Islands maru, New Caledonia 
 malu, to thirst.] A. "alia, 1, 
 b), and 8, to thirst, "alalF 
 thirst, "air thirsty, ma"lul' 
 intensely thirsty, &c. 
 
 Matua, V. i., or a., to be old, ma- 
 ture, elder, then (full-grown) 
 
 large, great ; also wise, op- 
 posite to busa, as meta raatua 
 wise, lit. old or mature, i.e., 
 experienced eye, bo matua, 
 wise, lit. old, mature, i.e., ex- 
 perienced heart; te matua the 
 aged, or the ancients ; meta 
 matua ki to withhold from (a 
 person, something); 
 
 Matuatua, redup. of preceding 
 word, very old ; 
 
 Matua, s., or ad., the right hand, 
 or side : tuai. [Sa. matua 
 aged, elder, mature (matuatua, 
 dim.), a parent, Fi. matua 
 mature. My. mftntuwah a 
 father or mother-in-law, Mg. 
 matoa eldest son or daughter, 
 matoatoa a ghost, apparition, 
 Malo matua right hand.] 
 
 Matuki, a. used as s., one trusted 
 in, confident, brave, as a 
 warrior : tuki. [Mg. matoky 
 confident, brave, trusting.] 
 
 Matulu, V. i., or a., to be swollen, 
 thick ; and redup., 
 
 Matultul, id. : telatela, telatelana. 
 
 Matumutumu, d. manubunubu, 
 q.v. 
 
 Matuna, s., and ad., c. art. na- 
 matuna, d. fatuna, something, 
 anything, somewhere, any- 
 where, somehow ; also a ghost 
 or apparition, lit. something : 
 ma, or fa (the inter, pron. 
 used indefinitely), q.v., and 
 tuna, dem., te (or tu) with the 
 dem. na added to it. See safa, 
 or sefa. H. mah anything, 
 something, whatever, Ch. mah 
 di whatever, what that, that 
 which, A. ma' that which, 
 whatever. 
 
 Maturu, d. matur, v. i., to sleep. 
 
MAU] 138. 
 
 bakamaturu ki to put or make 
 to sleep. [My. tidor, Ja. turu, 
 to sleep, Mg. tory, s., sleep, 
 mitory to sleep, Bugis matimo 
 to sleep, Ml. P. metur, Malo 
 maturu, TaSa. tsuruve, Santo 
 dd. chinaru (tshinaru),chinaro, 
 chiranu, noro, rontui, An. 
 UBijeg (umjeng), Fi. moce 
 (mothe), Sa. moe, ps. moea, to 
 sleep.] H. yas'en, A. wasina 
 to sleep, sinai', H. s'enath, and 
 s'enah, sleep. 
 
 Mau, V. i., to recover from sick- 
 ness, be well : abu. 
 
 Mau, V. i., a., and ad., to be 
 together or all together (as a 
 number of men), to be whole 
 (of a thing) redup. mamau, id. ; 
 nai mau it wholly, or only (of 
 a substance), nara mau they 
 wholly or only (of a number 
 of persons) ; and 
 
 Mau na, s., c. art. namau na, d. 
 nabai na covering of it (a bird), 
 i.e., its feathers ; na mau the 
 bunch of feathers worn as an or- 
 nament on the top of the head ; 
 na mau nasuma (d. na bau 
 nasuma), nakasu, the top of 
 the house, of a tree ; mau 
 naliati (d. bau naliati) mid-day; 
 
 Maumau, s., redup., the surface 
 of the land or sea. See bau, 
 bai. [Epi momou the whole. 
 Ha. pau, a., all, ad., wholly, 
 Mg. aby all, every one, the 
 whole. Ma. hou a feather (see 
 under bau sia).] H. 'amam, 
 A. 'amma, to gather together 
 (see bau sia), to be or become 
 universal, to include or affect 
 all, to cover wholly (see deri- 
 vatives, Lane's Diet.), complete 
 
 [mad 
 
 perfect, universal, whole, nu- 
 merous, all. 
 
 Mau, or amau, a., true, lo-amau, 
 or lo-mau, a true thing, d. 
 mauri, or mori. [Tah. mau 
 true, Fut. mari. To. mooni. 
 Ma. pono, Sa. moni true] ; and 
 
 Mau, a., used as s., one firm, 
 intrepid, brave, i.e., warrior of 
 such a character, also, in Mau- 
 tukituki, pr. n. of a mytho- 
 logical hero. [Sa. mau to be 
 firm, to be decided, unwaver- 
 ing] ; and 
 
 Mau sa, v. t., to come upon, ob- 
 tain, find, bamau ria reach 
 to. See bamau. [Sa. maua to 
 obtain, reach to, Tah. mau to 
 seize, take hold of] ; and 
 
 Mau asa, d. mau is, v. t. (to trust 
 in), to desire, tea maumauen, 
 a thing trusted in, or desired, 
 te namauena, id. [Ma. po- 
 pono to covet] ; and 
 
 Sera lo-amau asa, v. t., to be- 
 lieve on or in (him or it). 
 [Ma. whakapono, Fi. vakabau]; 
 and 
 
 Mau, ad., very, indeed, continu- 
 ally, as bisa mau to speak 
 continually, toko mau abide 
 continually, constantly, (fee. 
 [Ha. mau continually] ; elagi 
 mau above indeed, in the 
 highest place, toga mau very 
 far away, malitiga mau very 
 near, etaku mau, or mau- 
 mau (intensive) behind indeed, 
 the last (as the last day), 
 male mau ua naga this very 
 time, d. mal fa nin (fa for 
 mau), bisa mau few indeed, 
 very few, d. bisiba (ba for 
 mau), sikei mau one only. 
 
mau-tiaJ 
 
 [Fi. dua bau, Sa. tasi pe, one 
 only] ; mas (for mau sa only- 
 one), and sam (for sa mau one 
 only), are like sikei mau (but 
 without the kei suifixed to the 
 numeral sa or s6) ; ti bano 
 mau did not go indeed [ Aniwa, 
 Fut., si fano ma, si fano mana, 
 id.] ; this mau after a verb 
 preceded by the negative is 
 very commonly used, but may 
 be omitted, and ti bano, ti 
 bano mau, are both used, 
 though the latter is the more 
 common. H. 'aman to prop, 
 stay, sustain, support ; to 
 carry (sustain) a child ; 'amen 
 to be firm, unshaken, faithful, 
 A. 'amuna to be faithful, 
 'amana to confide in, trust, 
 'amina to trust, be secure ; H. 
 Niphal to bear in the arms, to 
 be firm, to be of long continu- 
 ance, continual ; to be sure, 
 certain ; Hi. to lean upon, 
 trust, confide in, believe; stand 
 firm, still, A. 'amana generally 
 the same ; S. 'eman to perse- 
 vere, be constant, and, con- 
 trarily, to cease, Aph. to 
 believe, 'amen, &c., verily, 
 truly, certainly, E. 'aman id., 
 also truly, and 'amanawi, id., 
 'amana to believe ; 
 
 Mau-tia, v. t., to save, to pro- 
 tect : mu-tia. 
 
 Maua ki, v. t., to give food to 
 (people, as to those who have 
 been doing something for one) ; 
 and 
 
 Maua, s., c. art. namaua, food, or 
 provisions. A. mana to give 
 food, mawunai provisions. 
 
 Mau, d. for mafa, swollen. 
 
 139 [me 
 
 Maiiaiia (mawawa), v. i., to be 
 
 separated. See mafa, bua. 
 Maiiori (mauori), v. i., to be 
 
 broken, and redup., 
 Maiioriiiori, intensive : bori a. 
 Mauri, s., as mauri nalagi the 
 
 place where the wind ends at,. 
 
 to leeward ; the left hand or 
 
 side, opposite to matua. [Sa. 
 
 muli matagi. To. mui matangi,. 
 
 the place where the wind ends 
 
 at, Ma. maui, Malo marao, Ta. 
 
 maul, Epi dd. mali, mau, left, 
 
 on the left hand.] See muri.. 
 
 Mahri manghura behind. 
 Mauri, v. i., to live, dd. mairi, 
 
 mole, bakamauri make to live;. 
 Maurien, s., c. art. namaurien, 
 
 life. [Ei. bula, Sa. ola, Eut. 
 
 mauri. My. id up, Ja. urip, Ta. 
 
 murif, Mg. velona, to live,. 
 
 Epi d. meouli, mauli.] A. 
 
 'as'a, n. a. 'ais", ma'as", ma'is" 
 
 to live, 4, make to live. 
 Mauri, a., true, tili mauri speak 
 
 true; 
 Mauri, s., c. art. namauri, a 
 
 prayer or incantation, lit. 
 
 what is true : mau true. 
 Milus (mawus), d. for malus- 
 
 (malifus). 
 Mauta, d. mautu, s., a rising 
 
 ground ; one's native land : sO' 
 
 called because (i tu mau tu) it 
 
 remains firm or continuing. 
 
 See mau. [Sa. mauga a hill ; 
 
 a residing at a place (from. 
 
 mau).] 
 Me, prep., d. ma, q.v. 
 Me, or mea, v. i., to make water y 
 
 also, redup., 
 Meme, id., and 
 Me, s., urine, me-riki dysuria,. 
 
 lit. small or scanty me ; and 
 
me] 140 
 
 Me, or mea, v. i., to flow, wet, 
 us i mea the rain pours out, i 
 rae nakoau it (a fluid, as water) 
 flows upon or moistens the 
 pudding ; nai me a flood or 
 freshet, lit. flowing water, d. 
 naum a stream, lit. flowing 
 water; na bisi me semen geni- 
 tale. [Mg. mamany to urine, 
 amany urine. Ha. mi, mia, mimi, 
 to make water.] A. maha 
 to have water (a well), leak (a 
 ship), 2, to pour water; to wet 
 with water ; emit water (the 
 ground), ma' juice (of any- 
 thing), semen genitale (H. me), 
 H. me (of the feet) euphemism 
 for urine. See Ges., Diet., 
 s. V. ma', who gives a root mo' 
 to flow. 
 
 -Me, s., c. art. name, d. namai, a 
 rope, or string. [Sa. maea. 
 To. maia, id., Mg. fehy tied, 
 mifehy, mafehy to tie, kofehy 
 a cord or string, i.e., that 
 which ties.] E. mawaklla, 
 contr. moklia to tie, bind, 
 mokli a bond, band, rope, 
 vinculum. 
 
 Me, and 
 
 Meamea, long ; as tali me tuturu 
 (see tuturu), a rope long, 
 hanging down, i barau meamea 
 it is long, like a long streak of 
 water running down a tree, or 
 the face of a cliff". See me, 
 mea to flow. 
 
 Jfemi, d., v. i., to be gentle, 
 tame : mao, maomao. 
 
 Mela, melamela, for mala, mala- 
 mala, fool, foolish. 
 
 Melat, s., c. art. namelat, or 
 malat, flower (of a plant), 
 then flower (of anything), that 
 
 [mena na 
 
 is, crown or most excellent 
 part, as namelat natamole the 
 flower of men, the most ex- 
 cellent of men. A. warada 
 2, to flower, ward' a flower. 
 
 Mele na, s., c. art. namele na, 
 the hollow ; as nameleru na 
 the hollow (palm) of the hand, 
 d. nal'naru na (see alo, aru, 
 belly, hand), namele natuo na 
 the hollow (sole) of the foot 
 or feet, namele gere na the 
 hollow of the tail of a fish. 
 [Mg. faladia, i.e., fala dia, sole 
 of the feet.] A form of the 
 word iele na belly, hollow. 
 
 Melesia, d. melesira. See milesia. 
 
 Meliboi, or melibai, v. i., to he 
 bent, as grass by the wind, <fec. : 
 Ufa ia. 
 
 Meliki, d., v. i., to be dilatory, 
 slow : malua, and suffixed ki. 
 
 Melita, v. i., to crackle, resound 
 (as one's name) : (lot) lita. 
 
 Melu, V. i., d. meliki : malua. 
 
 Melu, s., shade, rag melu time of 
 shade, evening, melu na its 
 shade, or his shade (protection) ; 
 
 Melu, v. i., to be shady (as the 
 day), and redup., 
 
 Melumelu, id. [Sa. malu to be 
 shaded, to be protected, malu- 
 malu to be overcast, cloudy, 
 Mg. malomaloka shady, cool, 
 gloomy.] H. 'afel obscure, 
 dark (of the day), 'afal to be 
 obscure, dark : eg. 'amal or 
 'amel. See mali. 
 
 J/elu, s., that which, or what 
 milu departs or removes(from), 
 separates (from) : milu. 
 
 Men, a. See niina. 
 
 Mena na, s., the tongue (of 
 animal) ; of fire (flame) ; of 
 
MENA Ia] 
 
 141 
 
 MERIMERX 
 
 knife (blade or edge) ; of 
 breaker (edge of the wave) ; 
 to be the namena, or tongue, 
 of anyone is to be his spokes- 
 man ; hence 
 
 Mena ia, or 
 
 Menamena ia, v. t., to lick it 
 with the tongue, tongue it. 
 [Epi mena, TaSa. me, Santo 
 (P.) meme, Guebe mamalo, 
 the tongue.] A. manmul' the 
 tongue, from namala to be a 
 detractor ; to creep, climbing 
 up (a tree), &c. 
 
 Mer, ad., d. mero. 
 
 Mera (for mara), s., c. art. 
 namera, man in general, 
 people, as namera ni Efate, 
 the people of Efate : mera is 
 contracted to fa in fa-fine, 
 q.v., and especially Note 3. 
 A. mar', mir', a male, or, in 
 general, man, Ot. mir'a man in 
 general. 
 
 Merai, a, used as s., pertaining 
 to a male, the male organs of 
 generation, virilia : merai gara 
 (gara bare) addressed to young 
 boys not yet wearing a waist 
 cloth, or naked ; a man is 
 sometimes jocularly or dis- 
 respectfully spoken of as 
 merai tamana the merai of his 
 father : mare, q.v., with the 
 a. end. i. A. mar'yy' virilis, 
 pertaining to a male. 
 
 Mera, s., d. mara, a rippling (of 
 water) : meromero. 
 
 Mera, conj., lit. with them, or 
 with those : me with, and 'ra 
 them or those, as John mera 
 Peter John and Peter ; this 
 can also be expressed John me 
 Peter, and John nara .Peter 
 
 (John they Peter) ; with dem. 
 uan, 
 
 Mera uan, dd. syn. manag, maga, 
 as John mera uan John and 
 his companions, lit. John with 
 those there (beside him); mera 
 uan can also be used of inani- 
 mate things, as fatu mera uan 
 a stone with those (stones) 
 there (beside it), stones. 
 
 Mera, d. contraction for meraka,. 
 maraka, for makara, q.v. 
 
 Mera, ad., again, d. for mero, q.v. 
 
 Merafalu, some, as koria mera- 
 falu some dogs : me with, and 
 rafalu, see lifaru. 
 
 Merafalu, s., c. art. namerafalu,. 
 contraction of namera rafalu, 
 some people. 
 
 Meik gi, d. for 
 
 Mera kia, v. t., to go before,, 
 leading, to lead. 
 
 Merakien, s., c. art. namerakien 
 act of leading, also meramera, 
 redup., leading, and namera- 
 meran, s., act of leading or 
 ruling, kingdom, that led or 
 ruled, natamole nieraki, or 
 meramera, leading or ruling 
 men. E. marha to lead ; to 
 go before. 
 
 Merakolau, s., web-like fat on 
 the intestines (of a pig) : mera 
 fat (see merei), and kolau, 
 q.v., a web (spider's). In An. 
 this is called nilvanilva (redup. 
 of nilva spider's web). 
 
 Meraroa, v. i. , to turn round : roa i. 
 
 Mer ia, v. t., to do, to make to 
 work, act, namerien, s., act of 
 doing, what is done, conduct ; 
 fimeri to be doing something 
 to each other, fighting ; 
 
 Merimeri, v., to keep on doing. 
 
MEREl] 
 
 A. 'amila to work, Nin. to 
 work, act, be active, practise, 
 4, cause to work. 
 
 Merei, s., marrow ; eel ; cater- 
 pillar ; medulla of banana 
 fruit. H. meri' fat. 
 
 Mero, ad., again, dd. mera, mer, 
 moro, mro, ro, and mo, m, 
 contraction of mero, as i mero 
 bano he again went, lit. he 
 turned went, d. i mer ler ban 
 he again went, lit. he turned 
 returned went : roa i. 
 
 Meromero, v. i., hoarse, gruff, as 
 i bisa meromero he speaks 
 hoarse, gruff. [Mg. barabara 
 hoarse, having a rough voice, 
 bara-feo a coarse, gruff voice, 
 farina hoarse.] A. "ar"ara, 1, 
 2, to make rough sounds in 
 the throat (whether with the 
 voice, or liquor, or the breath), 
 "ar"ara< hoarse sound ; sound 
 of boiling water. 
 
 Emeromina, ad;, and s., in the 
 world, the world,- lit. in the 
 light, opposite to awkas in the 
 under-world, Hades (which is 
 dark and gloomy) : e prep., 
 and meromina, s., formed from 
 mirama, or meraraa, to shine. 
 
 Meru, v. i., d. for maru, q.v. 
 
 Mes, ad., d. for maisa, to-day. 
 
 MSsa, ad., perhaps, expletive 
 used at the beginning of a 
 clause. E. 'emsa but if, 
 quodsi. 
 
 Mesau na, v. t., to desire, and 
 redup., 
 
 Mesausau, desire much, be lust- 
 ful ; 
 
 Mesauen, s., c. art., desire, will, 
 what one wills : sau. 
 
 Meta, V. i., or a., to be raw, then, 
 
 142 [milago 
 
 unripe, crude, green. [Sa. 
 mata, raw, unripe, Mg. manta 
 raw, unripe, crude, green. My. 
 mantah raw, unripe.] A. 
 'anut'a to be raw. 
 
 Meta, s., the eye, the eyes : mita. 
 
 Metita, v. L, or a,, to be rotten, 
 to be falling to pieces from 
 rottenness. A. tha'ita to be 
 rotten ; to be falling to pieces 
 from rottenness. 
 
 Mi, v., to be, d. for bi, q.v. 
 
 Mi a, redup. mimi a : for gumi a, 
 q.v. 
 
 M iel, V. i., or a., to be red, and 
 redup., 
 
 Mimiel, id. [Sa. melomelo, 
 memelo, red. My. merah, red ; 
 the ruby ; bay colour in a 
 horse.] A. ma"ir' reddish, 
 'am"aru of the colour of red 
 clay. 
 
 Mihi, d., masiki, q.v. 
 
 Mikit ia, v. t., d. for makit ia, 
 q.v. 
 
 Mila, v. i., or a., to be shy, 
 skittish, to be wild, opposite 
 to malolo. [My. liyar wild, 
 untamed, shy.] A. hali'a to 
 be uneasy, timid, impatient, 
 shy. Hence 
 
 Mila, s., a wild animal ; a 
 warrior sleeping out in the 
 bush and watching to cut off 
 stragglers. 
 
 Milau, for malau, q.v. 
 
 Milaba. See laba. 
 
 Milag, s., a part, or half, c. art. 
 namilag. Ch. pelag a half, 
 A. filag' a part, a half. 
 
 Milago, V. i., d., to be sick, to 
 be ill, have a disease. A. 
 S'aniya, 2), n. a. s'ana' to be 
 ill, to be sick with a latent 
 
milagoen] 
 
 disease, Nm. mos'na' faint, 
 languid, moribund. 
 
 Milagoen, s., c. art., the being 
 ill, disease. 
 
 Miliikesa, or milakisa, v, i., or 
 a., to be darkish green : milo, 
 kisa. 
 
 M'lame, d., s., c. art. nam 'lame, 
 dew : mala clear (rainless), 
 and mea. 
 
 Milatg, dd. malarS, milanr, v. i., 
 or a., to be cold, cold. [Sa. 
 maalili. Tab. m^riri. Ma., 
 makariri, Fut. makiligi, id.] 
 A. makrur' cold, from harra 
 to be cold. 
 
 Milate, s., c. art. namilatS, cold, 
 the being cold, also namilatea ; 
 and redup., 
 
 Milamilati, v., to be coldish : 
 milate. [New Hebrides, TaSa. 
 makariri, Ml. XJ. milas, Malo 
 macariri. Ml. P. mereus, Epi 
 meneni, cold.] 
 
 Mile na, s., place, its place, d. 
 for alia na, q.v., and see malo 
 a place. 
 
 Mile ki, mile raki, v. t., to seek 
 for (as for a pig in the bush), 
 milemile ki, id., also mole ki, 
 mole raki, molemole ki. A. 
 'ala, 2), to go through a place, 
 4, to seek for; to desire eagerly. 
 
 Mile, or milei, v. i., or a., used 
 adverbially, to be good, good, 
 as noa milei a tell good (well) 
 it, bati milei a make good 
 (well) it, syn. noa uia ki, bati 
 uia ki (uia good), dd. mita ki, 
 buta ki, as noa mita ki nia, 
 bati buta ki nia, id. [Rara- 
 tonga meitaki, Tah. maitai, 
 Niue mitaki, Kla, Mali, Ma. 
 marie, Ha. maikai, to be 
 
 1 43 [mina 
 
 handsome, good.] A. malih' 
 beautiful, good, Nm. melieh 
 elegant, good. 
 
 Milfesia, V. i., or a., d., and 
 
 Milesira, id., to be faded, dirty, 
 mouldy : endings a and ra ; 
 and 
 
 Mil^s, V. i., or a., to be faded, 
 drooping, withered : lusia. 
 [Mg. malazo withered.] 
 
 Miles, s., c. art. namiles, the 
 forest, the jungle, the bush. 
 [My. alas a forest, alasan a 
 forest country ; a foundation, 
 alas-kaki footstool, Mg. ala a 
 forest, a wood, Bugis alok, id., 
 Fi. ra below.] A. 'aras'a and 
 'arus'a to abound in grasses 
 and herbs (of the land) ; 'ars" 
 the earth, soil, region, what- 
 ever is below, H. 'eres the 
 earth, land, country, region, 
 soil, Ch. 'ara' earth ; below. 
 
 Miles, s., a plant with dark 
 leaves : les. 
 
 Milo, or miloa, redup. milolo, or 
 miloaloa, d. malolo, d. milo, 
 V. i., or a., to be dirty, to be 
 darkish, of a dark, dirty 
 colour : loa. 
 
 J/ilu, V. i., to depart, go away 
 (from), remove, namiluen, s., 
 the removing, departure. See 
 s. v. lu. A. 'ala' ('alw) to 
 remove, or go away (from). 
 
 Mim, or mam, q.v. 
 
 Mimi, s., voc, aunt (paternal) 
 See simam. [Fut. moma, id.] 
 
 Mimita, s., a sign, a showing of 
 something. See mita, mimita, v. 
 
 Mina, a., sweet, pleasant, nice. 
 See kasi. [Tah. mona, mona- 
 mona, momona, My. manis, 
 Mg. manitra.] 
 
mineanin] 144 
 
 Minranin, d., ad., now ; mi nra 
 nin, mi time, nra nin this 
 here ; as to mi compare ma 
 day. E. yom to-day, now, 
 this time. 
 
 Mina, tongue. See mena. 
 
 Mini gia, d. minu gia, munu gia, 
 d. munuma (munu-ma), v. t., 
 to drink, also minu, munu ; 
 hence namunuen and na- 
 munugien, s., drinking, drink. 
 [Fi. gunuva, unuma. Ml. min, 
 Malo inu, Epi muni, Sa. inu, 
 ps. inumia, s., inumaga, Santo 
 o'o-mia, ulu-mia. My. minum, 
 Mg. minona.] Ch. s'tha', 
 'is'tho', S. s'tho, H. s'atha, 
 E. sataya ; and with the th 
 changed to k H. s'ahah, A. 
 saka', E. sakaya, to drink. 
 
 Mira gi, d. for mera kia. 
 
 Mirama, v. i., to be light, to 
 shine ; namirama, s., light ; 
 emeromina in the light, the 
 world ; 
 
 Mirama ni a, to shine upon or on 
 it, or him. [Sa. malama to be 
 light, malamalama, v., to be 
 light, s., light, malama, s., the 
 moon, a lamp, torch. Ha. lama 
 a torch.] A. lama'a to shine, 
 &,c. 
 
 Mirara, v. i., or a., to be light 
 (not heavy), slender, small. 
 A. raklia to be thin, slender, 
 slight, rakaraka to pour out 
 not much (water or other 
 thing). 
 
 Mirati, redup. miratirati, d. min- 
 rat, minratinrat, v. i., or a., to 
 be loosed, untied : rat ia. [Ma. 
 matara,Sa. matala, matalatala, 
 Tah. matara, mataratara, to be 
 untied.] 
 
 [miseei 
 
 Misafe, misafesafe, v. i., to be 
 separated (as a cocoanut from 
 its branch) : safe. 
 
 Misaki, d. masaki, v. i., to be 
 sick, to have fever, to be ill. 
 [My. sakit, Sa. ma'i, Fut. maki. 
 Ml. P. mesek, Epi dd. msaki, 
 miei, id.] And 
 
 Misaki, or misakia, s., c. art., 
 sickness. [Fut. makiga sick- 
 ness.] A. s'aka', 2), to afflict 
 (someone, a disease), s'akai 
 disease, mas'kuww' afflicted 
 with a disease. 
 
 Misal, V. i., or a., to be removed, 
 separate (from others). A. 
 'azala to remove (one), 5, 6, 7, 
 8, to be removed, 8, separate 
 (from others), manzul', separ- 
 ated, removed. 
 
 Misal, misalsal, or misali, misali- 
 sali, V. i., or a., to be light (not 
 heavy). See sail. 
 
 Misaru, v. i., to hang down, pros- 
 trated : saru. 
 
 Misei, or misai, miseisei, v. i., or 
 a., to be open, cracked : sai. 
 
 Misera, v. i., or a., to be parted, 
 disjoined (as joints), separated: 
 sera. 
 
 Miseroa sa, v. t., to desire, covet : 
 soroa sa. 
 
 Miseroana, s., c. art., coveting, 
 covetousness. 
 
 Misferi, s., c. art., part of a 
 woman's dress, consisting of a 
 little mat, terminating in a 
 bulky fringe, attached to the 
 waist cincture and hanging 
 down like an apron. See seri 
 A. 'azzara to cover the body 
 with the covering or garment 
 called 'izar', mizar', a garment, 
 covering, Nm. an apron. 
 
MISIMIS] 
 
 Misimis, s., d. inasimasi. 
 
 Misimis, v., d. inasimasi. 
 
 Misa, or misa, v. i.,to be stinking, 
 rotten, decayed, wasted away ; 
 and.redup., 
 
 Misimisi, v. i., to be wasted away 
 (of a very old man). Oh. mfisa, 
 S. msa to be decayed, putrefy. 
 
 J/it, s., c. art. namit, a mat ; so 
 called because plaited — see bau 
 sia, Ml. vij, Epi mbie, to plait 
 (a mat). [Ml. devij, Epi 
 yembi, a mat.] 
 
 Mita, V. t. (also meta), to look at, 
 watch, observe, view, as i mita 
 natai-inlagi he watches or ob- 
 serves the cloud (to see if it 
 will rain) mita sa, or mimita 
 sa, look at, watch it (any- 
 thing) ; and mita gita, or 
 bakamita gita = leo goro gita 
 (see leo) watch, look for, look 
 out for (expecting) us : baka- 
 mita, V. t., same as mita. 
 [Sa. mata to look at, mata- 
 mata to look, to view, ma- 
 mata, id. (of many). Ha. 
 makai, makaikai, to look at 
 closely, inspect, search out, 
 spy, act the part of a spy, to 
 look on, look at, to examine 
 secretly for evil purposes. To. 
 mamata to look, look at, be- 
 hold, discern.] A. 'ana 1, to 
 emanate (water), to be a spy, 
 2, to flourish, produce flowers 
 (a plant), to show, make con- 
 spicuous, 3, to see, look at or 
 on, 5, to look at malevolently, 
 to look at well, accurately, to 
 be manifest, conspicuous, 8, 
 to look at malevolently, to be- 
 come a spy, to. view or watch, 
 to look out for. 
 
 145 [mitailau 
 
 Note, — Mita is probably 
 mu'tan' Mod. A. mu'tan, the 
 n. ag. (Participle) of 8. 
 
 Mita na, s., c. art. namita na, 
 the eye, that which sees, looks 
 at, watches, or observes ; mita 
 noai a fountain ; mita the 
 beginning ; mita bud, shoot, 
 " eye " (as of a potato), bud, 
 germ, offshoot (of men) ; mita 
 nalagi eye of the wind ; mita 
 ftagona eye of its end, point 
 of its end, end ; mita a win- 
 dow, door, or other opening, 
 as the eye (of a needle) ; 
 i bi mita na to be the eye (i.e., 
 guide) of someone ; namita 
 nalo the eye (price) of some- 
 thing; mita kita a spy (in 
 war), see kita ; mita ni elo 
 (or al) the sun (eye of light, or 
 fountain or source of light), 
 lit. eye of the sun. [My. 
 mata, Mg. maso, Sa. mata, 
 the eye, <fec., Ei. mata eye, 
 source, opening, point.] See 
 mita, V. 
 
 Mita, V. i., to bleed, mita ni a 
 bleeds on it, as i tumana 
 mita ni a, redup. mitamita ni 
 a, he bleeds on himself (covers 
 himself with blood), used also 
 of rust — it rusts (covers itself 
 with rust) : ra blood. [My. 
 b^rdarah, Bu. madara, to 
 bleed.] 
 
 Mita-6ago na, s., end, lit. point 
 of its end : mita, s. 
 
 Mita-busa, s., orphan child: mita 
 s. (bud, shoot), and busa, q.v. 
 
 Mitaga, and mitagataga, v, i., to 
 be heavy : d. miten, q.v. 
 
 Mitailau (mita-i-lau), s., d. syn. 
 bile-mita, q.v., lit. germ or 
 11 
 
MITAKi] 
 
 source of the tribe or com- 
 munity. See launa. 
 
 Mitaki, v. i., to be inclined to 
 one side : taki, ta. 
 
 Mitaki, i.e., mitaki, d. milei, q.v. 
 
 Mitakisa, s., blind, the eyes re- 
 receding into the head : mita 
 eye, and kisa. 
 
 Mitakitik, d. matakitaki, a., last 
 or first of a row (as of men) ; 
 from closing up, or, as it were, 
 binding together the series : 
 taki a. 
 
 Mitaku, or mataku, v. i., to 
 fear, be afraid ; mitaku or 
 mataku ki, usually contr. to 
 mitau ki, or matau ki, v. t., to 
 be afraid of, to fear ; baka- 
 mataku ki, to frighten (one) ; 
 hence 
 
 Mitakua, s., c. art. fear ; and 
 
 Mitakuen, s., c. art., act of fear- 
 ing, fear. [Sa. mata'u, ps. 
 mata'utia, My. takut, Mg. 
 tahotra, s., fear, matahotra, 
 V. i., to be afraid, to fear.] 
 A. taka', V. t , to fear (derived 
 from waka', 8), takiyyai fear, 
 caution, taking heed, takwa, 
 fear of God, takiyy' fearing 
 God. See infra, mita-taku. 
 
 Mitamai, or matamai, or miti- 
 raai, ad., to-morrow. [Mota 
 matava morning, Sa. tafa to 
 dawn.] A. sabalia, 4, to be 
 morning, to be early, to dawn, 
 E. sabha to become light, or 
 day, to dawn, A. sabah' morn- 
 ing, masbab' and musbah' 
 morning, dawn. 
 
 Mitanielo, s., the sun, lit. eye 
 of the sun : mita ni elo. 
 [My. mata-ari, Mg. maso- 
 andro. ] 
 
 146 [iMITEPUTEFD 
 
 Mitao, d., V. i., d. mitefe, q.v. : 
 
 tao, roa. 
 Mitarau, s., c. art. tribe, lit. 
 
 the bud, or germ, spreading 
 
 out into many branches : mita, 
 
 s., and rau. 
 Mitariki, s., the seven stars, lit. 
 
 little eyes : mita, s., and riki. 
 
 [Sa. matalii. Ma. matariki, 
 
 Mitariki, s., as, lo mitariki to 
 look with little (i.e. con- 
 tracted) eyes. Same word as 
 preceding. 
 
 Mitaru, v. i., to sink down : tiro. 
 
 Mitasabo, s., a stranger, lit. eye 
 not knowing : mita, sabo. 
 
 Mitataku, v. t., as, i tumana 
 mitataku na he heedfully 
 watches himself, he being 
 afraid watches himself ; mita, 
 V. t., and see mitaku. 
 
 Mitau, or matau, v. i., to abide, 
 continue : tau. 
 
 Mitau ki, v. t., to fear : contrac- 
 tion for mitaku ki. 
 
 Mitaukien, a., dreadful, to be 
 feared. 
 
 Mitausi a, v. t., to look after : 
 mita, V. t., and usi, v. t. 
 
 Mitefe, d., v. i., to fall down, as 
 a portion of a precipice : tiie. 
 See roua, roa. 
 
 Mitefe-risu, v. i., to fall down (see 
 preceding word), rushing or 
 slipping to a distance : risu. 
 
 Miteftef, v. i., and 
 
 Mitefutefu, id., to twitter, chirp, 
 peep (of a bird or fowl), to 
 make a whispering noise (of 
 men). H. sifsaf to twitter, 
 peep, chirp (of birds), to make 
 a whispering, peeping sound 
 (of the voice of a wizard). 
 
MITBl] 
 
 147 
 
 [mithoan 
 
 Mitei, or mutrei, s., c. art., 
 breadfruit cheese (salt and 
 sour), that is, breadfruit fer- 
 mented and preserved. [Sa. 
 masi, id.. My. masin, salt (as 
 water), Mg. masimasina saltish, 
 rano-masina the sea (salt 
 water).] A. masi' salt (of 
 water). 
 
 Mitela, v. i,, or a., to be broken 
 (as crockery, or pottery). A. 
 thala'a to break (the head), 
 muthalla' broken. 
 
 Mitela, s., c. art. namitela, a 
 fragment, lit. that which is 
 broken, the broken. 
 
 Mitfen, V. i., d. mitaga, to be 
 heavy, to be burdened : tien, 
 or tiena, q.v., as also tago, 
 tagie. [Mg. entana, s., bur- 
 den, voa entana lifted up, 
 mientana to set out, taingina 
 placed upon (a horse), tongoa 
 placed upon, My. tunggang 
 to I'ide, be conveyed by any 
 vehicle, tanggung to bear, 
 carry.] S. fan to carry, 
 Aph. to burden, load, ta'no' a 
 burden, H. ta'an, Oh. 16 'en to 
 be laden, A. t'a'ana, 8, to sit 
 on a camel, H. sa'an to move 
 tents, go forward (as a no- 
 madic tribe), A. t'a'ana, id., 
 E. sa'na, Sa'ana, to put on a 
 horse, &c., and consequently of 
 other things where one sits, is 
 placed, upon another, s6un 
 burden. 
 
 Miti, V. i., to move rapidly, to 
 strive, quarrel, to jump back- 
 wards and forwards excitedly 
 in a quarrel or a rage, to land 
 or remove from a canoe; miti 
 goto depart or go rapidly 
 
 across (as an arm of the sea) ; 
 and redup., 
 
 Mitimiti, v. i., to throb, flutter 
 (as the pulse). H. nasah to 
 fly. Hi. hissah to quarrel, 
 massah strife : cf. tiri. 
 
 Mitiri a, v. t., to write, to carve, 
 cut or make figures ; 
 
 Mitimitiri, a., figured, as cloth 
 (" print ") ; 
 
 Mitiri, d. mautsiri, s., c. art., 
 writing, figures ; and 
 
 Mitirien, s., c. art., act of writing, 
 what is written. [Santo d. 
 turi, My. tulis to draw, 
 delineate, paint, picture, 
 figure, write, Mg. soratra 
 colour, writing, written, 
 misoratra to be spotted, 
 printed, of different colours, 
 and soritra, misoritrato mark, 
 engrave.] E. sa'ala to paint, 
 figure, A. Sara, 2, to figure, 
 paint, 5, to be formed, musaw- 
 wir sculptor, painter, Nm. 2, 
 to form, draw, trace, paint. 
 The radical idea is that of 
 cutting. 
 
 Mitiri, s., a kind of locust or 
 grasshopper (so called from its 
 mode of moving) ; 
 
 Mitiri, v. i., to leap flying (as a 
 grasshopper) : tiri. 
 
 Mitroa, v., to think, mitroa ki, 
 v. t., to think of or about, 
 dd. miroa, mitoa, mintoa, 
 minroa; redup., 
 
 Mititroa, d. minintoa, v. i., to 
 be thoughtful, sensible ; 
 
 Mitroan, s., c. art., act of 
 thinking, thought : ro, roro, 
 trotro, rara; or trara, romi or 
 rumi. [Mg. eritra, eritraritra 
 cogitation, mieritra, mieritre- 
 
MITO] 
 
 ritra, Fut. mentua, To. ma- 
 natu (Sa. manatu), to think.] 
 S. 'etra'i to think, Ethpa. of 
 r'o', Ch. rg'ah to think, H. 
 ra'ah, (3), to delight in, rea' a 
 friend, lover, one loved, 
 thought, will. Oh. ra'yon 
 thought. 
 
 Mito (m.wito), V. i. or a., to be 
 short, redup., 
 
 Mitemito, id., d. buru, burufuru. 
 [Tab. mure, muremure. Ma. 
 poto.] H. kasar to cut, baser 
 to be cut off, to be short, short, 
 A kasara to be short, 3), to cut 
 (hair), to make short, maksur' 
 short. 
 
 Miu, V. i., to be wet : eg. mea. 
 A. mai' fluid, ma'a to flow 
 gently on the surface, 4, to be 
 dissolved in liquid. 
 
 Miura, s., c. art., dew : miu, and 
 ura, q.v. 
 
 Mo, ad., contraction of mero. 
 
 Mo, d. for bo, dd. fo, uo, o. 
 
 JHo na, s., father or mother-in- 
 law, son-in-law. See buruma, 
 s. ; hence, 
 
 il/o-naki, v. t., to be related to 
 (one) in this relationship : 
 buruma ki. E. liam father-in- 
 law, son-in-law, A. ham', hamo, 
 ham'o, &c., father-in-law or 
 kinsman of the husband or 
 the wife, Nm. liamou father- 
 in law, hamaya mother-in-law, 
 H. ham, Assy, emu, father-in- 
 law, Samaritan, a son-in-law, 
 also, one espoused. "The 
 proper signification of the 
 word lies in the idea of 
 affinity." 
 
 Note. — E. Mai ma = Ef. 
 mo, Eila ma, brother-in-law. 
 
 148 [momoa 
 
 vugona (vungona, nearly pro- 
 nounced like vumona = (in 
 meaning) Ef. buruma ; in 
 Tah. momoa to espouse, to 
 contract marriage. 
 
 Moa, d., verbal pron., 1 dual, 
 excl., pi. bu. 
 
 Moas, d. for mafasu. 
 
 Mobu, d. m'bua, v. i., to sink : 
 bua II. 
 
 Mofa, s., when the blood of men 
 or animals has been shed, and 
 forms a pool on the ground, 
 one feeling the smell of it, or 
 of any similar thing, says i 
 naSo mofa it smells mofa ; 
 taumofa (tau mofa) to make a 
 sacrifice or offering to the 
 natemate. See taumofa. A. 
 ma'habai a small pool. 
 
 Mok, s., water flowing from the 
 eye; 
 
 Mokemok, v. i., to flow from the 
 eye (of water), to water (of 
 the eye) : eg. miu, mou. H. 
 mug to flow, flow down, dis- 
 solve. 
 
 Mokot, d., s., tongs : mikit ia. 
 
 Mola,, V. i., to yawn. [Ma. ko- 
 whera to open, gape.] H. 
 pa'ar to open the mouth with 
 a wide gape, S. f'ar, A. 
 fa"ara. 
 
 Mole, d. 6alo, v. L, q.v. 
 
 Mole a, or mole ki, molemole ki, 
 d. mile a, mile ki, q.v. 
 
 Moli na, s., d. batoko na, q.v. 
 
 Moli, V. i., d. mauri, to live ; 
 
 Molien, s., c. art., d. maurien, 
 life. 
 
 Momoa, or momo, d., v. i., to 
 yawn. [Tah. mama to open 
 the mouth, Sa. mavava, Fut. 
 mava, to yawn, Mg. vava the 
 
momoa] 
 
 mouth, vavana talkative, vava 
 opened, mivava, v, i., mavava, 
 V. t., to open, vavatra spoken.] 
 H. peh mouth, A. fah' mouth, 
 faha to speak, fawiha to have 
 a wide mouth. 
 
 Momoa, v. i., d. for amoamo, 
 amo'mo. 
 
 Monamona, v. i., or a., to be 
 yellow. [Ma. pungapunga 
 yellow colour, Mg. vony, s., 
 yellow, Amboyna poko, d. 
 apoo, Oeram poko, yellow, d. 
 uninim. My. kuning, id.] A. 
 faka'a, n. a. fuku', to be 
 yellow. 
 
 Monam, d. monau, s., c. art., 
 grass (of any kind). A.nama' 
 to grow, namaya vegetation, 
 manma', place of (a tree's) 
 growth. The word " grass " 
 is connected with " grow." 
 
 Mono ti a. See munu ti a. 
 
 Mori, d., a., true, tili mori speak 
 true : mori true, used like 
 loamau, lesoko, also amori : 
 mauri, mau, true. 
 
 Morese na, s., d. borakese na, 
 q.v. 
 
 Moro, ad., d. mero, q.v. 
 
 Moru, V. i., to sink, or be 
 covered with water, as a canoe 
 in the waves ; 
 
 Moru aki, v. t., to sink, over- 
 whelm (a canoe), as, nabeail i 
 sera moru aki rarua the waves 
 rush, sinking, or covering, or 
 overwhelming the canoe ; 
 
 Morua, s., c. art., the deep, i.e., 
 the deep sea ; 
 
 Moru, s., any deep place, as a 
 hole, pit, grave ; hence imrum 
 (d. imrau) inside of a house, 
 i.e., moru nasuma, or moru 
 
 149 [mot 
 
 uma, the hole, i.e., the inside, 
 of a house. A, "amara to 
 cover (a thing with water), 
 "amar' much water, deep (of 
 the sea), Nm. to overwhelm, 
 drown, "amra deep water, 
 abyss. 
 
 Mos ia, for amos ia, q.v. 
 
 Moso, s., the entrance to a har- 
 bour; a space or tract of 
 country, as that between two 
 mountains; pr. n. of the village 
 and district on the northern 
 end of Deception Island, at the 
 boat entrance to Havannah 
 Harbour, and in Ro-Moso, 
 name of an inland village and 
 district. H. mahoz a sea- 
 port, coast, Ch. id., also a 
 region, A. ha'z' border, side, 
 region, hence also a port. 
 
 Mota., s., c. art., and redup., 
 
 Motamota, id., rubbish, refuse, 
 as leaves of trees fallen on the 
 grouhd, (fee. [Sa. ota rubbish, 
 Ma., Tah., ota. Ha. oka.] And 
 
 Motei, V. i., or a., to be covered 
 with rubbish, dirty. [Sa. 
 otaota full of rubbish : a. end- 
 ing a.] A. "ota' rubbish, 
 refuse, husks, leaves, and scum 
 mixed together, "ata' to have 
 rubbish mixed with scum (as 
 a river). 
 
 Mot ia. See mut ia. 
 
 Mot, s. See mut, s. 
 
 Mot, or motu, s., c. art. namot, 
 as nataku namot back of the 
 land, or island ; lit. what is 
 broken off, hence a district or 
 place. [Sa. motu islet, dis- 
 trict, motu to be broken off, 
 ps. motusia, v. t. motusi, s. 
 motusaga, v. i. moturiaotu, s. 
 
MOU] 
 
 motumotuga, My. putus to 
 break, Mg. maito broken 
 asunder, snapped, maitoito 
 broken in pieces, otosana being 
 cut, broken, snapped.] A. 
 makta' a place. See the verb 
 under koto-fia. 
 
 Mou, moumou. Same as miu, 
 q.v. 
 
 Mu, verbal suf. pron., 2 pl.^ you, 
 d. kama. 
 
 Mu, V. i., to coo (as a dove), to 
 hum — see fu. [Tah. mu, a buzz, 
 mumu to make a confused 
 noise, as of a multitude of 
 persons talking together. Ha. 
 mumu, id., Sa. muimui, to 
 murmur, Fut. mu to buzz, Mg. 
 nioimoy hum, murmur.] H. 
 hamah coo, hum (as a multi- 
 tude), A. hamhamah to mur- 
 mur, &c.,Nm. to whoop, drone, 
 sing lullaby. 
 
 Mil nia, v. t., to take out (a 
 thing, as out of a basket;. 
 [Mg. voaka, mivoaka, to go out, 
 mamoaka to drive out, take 
 out.] See under bua iii. 
 
 Mua, V. i., to flow out, flow (of 
 the tide) ; hence 
 
 Muana, s., c. art., the flood tide, 
 as opposite to the ebb ; and 
 
 Mua-goro, s., c. art., dd. fuagoro, 
 mkgoro, a spring of fresh 
 water on the shore that is 
 covered (goro) by the sea at 
 high water : bua ill. 
 
 Mubu. See mobu. 
 
 Muku ti a, v. t., to cover or en- 
 close in leaves (as bananas, to 
 ripen them) ; to rub, wipe ofi"; 
 and 
 
 Mukumukuen,s.,c. art., the doing 
 so. [Fi. moko-ta, to embrace. 
 
 150 [mulu na 
 
 to clasp round with the arms, 
 Ma. mukumuku, muku, to 
 wipe, rub.] A haka to sweep, 
 cleanse by sweeping ; to rub ; 
 to surround, embrace, enclose. 
 
 J/uli a (mwuli a), v. t., to work 
 into a round mass, as dough 
 or clay ; to gather rubbish into 
 a heap ; to clasp a pig (or 
 man) round with the arms ; and 
 
 Mulimul, V. i., or a., round. 
 [TaSa. molmol. Ml. P. moro- 
 mor, Fi. momoqiliqili. My. 
 bulat, Mg. boribory, round.] 
 This word radically means to 
 roll as to roU dough into a 
 mass ; to roll rubbish or 
 pebbles into a heap ; to roll or 
 clasp the arms round one. H. 
 'agal i.q. galal to roll, revolve, 
 'agol round, and is eg. to gulu 
 tia, iSzc. 
 
 Mulu sia, V. t., to strip off the 
 skin, and 
 
 Mulu, V. i., and tamulu, to cast 
 the skin (as a snake, a crab, a 
 scab, men in myths), redup. 
 mulumulu ; and 
 
 Mulu na, s., c. art., the skiu 
 which is cast ; then, the lower 
 rank which a chief casts off 
 on his being promoted to a 
 higher. [Fi. kuli skin, kulu- 
 caka to strip off the skin, Mg. 
 hoditra skin, manoditra to strip 
 off the skin, hodirana being 
 flayed, skinned, Ef. kuli, d. 
 uili (will) and uli, skin, mulu 
 si a to skin, mulu, also tamulu, 
 to cast the skin, i.e., to be 
 skinned, or to skin oneself or 
 itself.] A. gild' skin, galada, 
 1, 2, to skin, to strip off the 
 skin. 
 
muluen] 
 
 Muluen, s., c. art., act of casting 
 the skin ; namulusien, s., the 
 act of stripping off the skin. 
 
 Mulua, s., a grove or clump of 
 trees : ulua. 
 
 Mumu, a., saving, protecting, 
 preserving : mii-ti a, or mau- 
 ti a. I 
 
 Munu gi a. See minu gi a. 
 
 Munu-ma, d. munu-gi. 
 
 Munu ti a, v. t., to close up (as 
 a wound, a hole in cloth, &c.) ; 
 hence 
 
 Munuai, or munue, s., a sacred 
 man (natamole tab) who by 
 his natabuen, or magical 
 power, closes up, or heals, 
 wounds received by men in 
 battle : bunu tia. 
 
 Muri n, v. t. , d. for mesau na ; 
 
 Murien, s., c. art., d. for mesauen. 
 
 Muri a, v. t. (d. busi a), to 
 return (as a thing borrowed), 
 to repay, recompense, requite 
 (for work done), to return (an 
 injury), repay (a person, for 
 an injury), red up. murimuri; 
 hence 
 
 Murien, s., c. art., the act of 
 returning, repaying, pay, re- 
 quital, recompense, retribution. 
 
 Muri na, s., c. art., the after part 
 of a thing (as of a stream, that 
 is, the place to which it flows 
 and where it ends), opposite to 
 namita na the fore part of a 
 thing (eye), beginning, source. 
 [Fi. muri-a to follow, also to 
 imitate. Ma. muri rear, hinder 
 part, Sa. muli end, back or 
 hinder part, rump, mulimuli to 
 follow after. To. muli, mui, Ja. 
 buri, the back, rear, behind, 
 after, My. burit the fundament. 
 
 151 [musu 
 
 Mg. vody the posteriors, stern 
 (of a ship), voho the back, fody 
 returned, sent back, namody 
 to return the thing bought, 
 verina returned, sent back, ma- 
 merina to return, send back.] 
 See also mauri, busi a, bisi na, 
 bui na, kui na, kusu na, kihi 
 na, fua na, bua na, gere na, 
 uri na. A. 'ah'h'ara to be be- 
 hind, after, Nm. mo'weh'h'ar 
 placed at the end, mouh'ir 
 stern, hinder part, 'eh'ir, end, 
 'uh'ur' behind, after part, H. 
 'allar to be after, behind, 'ahar 
 after, behind, hinder part, ex- 
 tremity, 'ahor hinder part, rear, 
 mealior from behind, behind ; 
 also in Arm. and E. 
 
 Murasa, d. marasa. 
 
 Muru, V. i., to laugh, muru ki to 
 laugh at (one). See bukaru. 
 [Motu kiri to laugh.] A. 
 kahara to laugh. 
 
 Murubua, s., a bat : moru, bua ; 
 from its dwelling in deep 
 holes. 
 
 Musa gi a, v. t., to take on 
 board a canoe or ship (men or 
 things) ; redup., 
 
 Musamusa ; and 
 
 Musagien, s., c. art., and 
 
 Musamusoen, s., c. art., the act of 
 doing so ; and 
 
 Musi a, V. t., to put or drag 
 immersed in the water (a 
 thing, as a log) ; and 
 
 Musu, V. i., to dive (as a man), 
 to set (the sun) ; elo i musu 
 the sun sets, or has set. A. 
 "amasa dip, submerge, to set 
 (as a star), and Jiamasa dip, 
 plunge, dive, and mahasa im- 
 merse in water. 
 
MUSI a] 152 
 
 iiusi a, V. t., to remove a child 
 (from the breast), wean it ; 
 and 
 
 Mus (ki susu), V. i., to be re- 
 moved (from the breast). H. 
 mus' remove, take away. 
 
 Mus ia, V. t., rub, smooth, flatter; 
 
 Musamus ia, id., redup. : mos ia. 
 
 Musuku taki, v. t, to abhor : 
 siki naki. 
 
 J/ut, V. i., to slip or fall out, as a 
 rope out of a block. A. ma'ata 
 to take a sword out (of its 
 sheath), 8, 'amma'ta, id., also, 
 to fall out (as hairs). 
 
 Mu-ti a, V. t., d. for mau-tia, to 
 save, keep, preserve, protect. 
 A. 'amana, 4, render secure, 
 protect, give security to (some- 
 one). Hence 
 
 Mutien, s., c. art., act of saving, 
 salvation. 
 
 Mut ia, and mot ia, v. t., to 
 bind : ut ia, ot ia ; and 
 
 Mut, s., c. art, a bond, rope. 
 A. makata, 6), bind, mukt' 
 bond, rope. 
 
 Mutui, V. i., to sneeze. [Sa. 
 mafatua, to sneeze.] A. 
 nafata (cf. 'afata, 2) to sneeze. 
 
 [nabe 
 
 K 
 
 I a, ad. of assent, and interj., 
 d. .syn, ko : dem. na. H. na 
 indeed, &c. 
 
 Na, d., dem., this, as mal na 
 this time : in. 
 
 Na, sometimes a, also in, ni, 
 n, la (in lausu), the article. 
 [Mg. ny, Epi na, Fi. na, a., 
 Sa. le, the article.] A. al, 
 hal, H. ha, A. a (the 1 being 
 
 assimilated to certain letters). 
 In Mod. A. al is pronounced 
 al or el, and 1'. In South 
 Arabia am was (and even still 
 is) used for al. A. al (and 
 H. ha) is sometimes used as 
 a relative pronoun • so in 
 Efate : see nig, agi. 
 
 N', a particle expressive of past 
 time, in nanum, nasa, nanoasa. 
 [Mg. n', Sa. na, sign of past 
 tense.] 
 
 Na, d. n, and na or nia (in si- 
 kina, or sikinia), nom. suf. 
 pron., 3 sing., his, her, its. 
 [Sam. na, sing., Mg. ny, pi. 
 and sing.. My. nia or fia, pL, 
 and sing.] See nai, note. 
 
 Na, d. n, verbal suf., pron , 3 
 sing., him, her, it. See nia 
 and nai, note. 
 
 Nabati na, s., tooth, teeth; seed, 
 also the shoots from the roots' 
 of a banana, and the shoots or 
 roots of tare. [Ml. ribo, Epi 
 livo, Sa. nifo (whence nifoa), 
 Fut. nifo, Mg. nify teeth.] 
 See also bati, beti, bitia or 
 fitia. A. nab', pi. nubub', &c., 
 tooth, teeth, naba, 2, 4, to put 
 forth roots (a plant). 
 
 Na6e, s., d. mbat, club. Nm. 
 nabboud and nabbout, id. 
 
 Na6e, or na6ea (nakbe, or 
 nakbea), d. nakima, s., a hol- 
 lowed log, set up in the middle 
 of the malala or mala, used as 
 a drum or musical instrument 
 in the dances of the intamate, 
 and on which the face or other 
 symbol of the natemate (the 
 deceased) is carved. [Sa. nafa, 
 To. nafi'a, Fut. kafa, a drum, 
 Ml. U. nambwi, id.] H. 
 
^^ABIS] 
 
 1.53 
 
 [nakonakoa ki 
 
 nekeb a hollowed thing, that 
 which is hollowed, used as a 
 musical instrument (Ezekiel 
 xxviii. 13), English Version, 
 ' ' pipes : " " thy tabrets and thy 
 pipes;" from nakab to hollow 
 out. 
 
 Nabis, s., end, the last, d. nakis : 
 bisi na. 
 
 Na6o, or naioa, d. tamo, v. i., to 
 smell ; and 
 
 Na6on, s., smell. [Sa. namu to 
 have a bad smell, To. namu 
 odour, either good or bad, Fut. 
 namu.] See 6oa. A. falia, 6, 
 to emit odour. 
 
 Nabua, s., a road, path. A. 
 nabiyy' and nabiy', id. 
 
 Nafete, d. sefete, d. nefeha, 
 d (te)uase (wase), inter, pron., 
 what ? which ? M.S. mudi, A. 
 mada, Nm. made, what? Na- 
 fete is na art., and fete, and 
 sefete, se dem., and fete. 
 
 Naga, or nag, dem., this, that : 
 na, dem., and ka dem., changed 
 to ga. 
 
 Nag, or naga, s., dd. lag, rag, 
 nrak, ran, time. A. 'an time, 
 and art. al, 1'. 
 
 Nagasa, inter, ad., when? i.e., 
 naga sa ? lit. what time ? also 
 indefinitely, when, whatever 
 time. Ml. U. seve-lig = Ef. 
 d. ?efe-nag = what time ? = 
 naga-sa ? 
 
 Nago, pers. pron., 2 sing., you, 
 dd. ago, ag, nigo, keiga, keina, 
 nego. 
 
 Nagore na, s., nostrils, nose. 
 See gore na. 
 
 Nai n, d. for nani n, child. See 
 nei n and ani. 
 
 Nai, pers. pron., 3 sing., he. 
 
 she, dd. 6n6a, or inia, ga, 
 niga, kinini. [My. inya, 
 or inla (Ef. inia, sing.), pi. 
 and sing., they, he, she.] 
 M.S. ani (also enehe, anyaha), 
 'ni, na they, those (also enya 
 these), also ignorantly used for 
 sing, sometimes, S. hanun 
 (hanen), ■ anun (anen), they, 
 these, verb. suf. enun (enen), 
 nom. suf. hun (hen). 
 
 Note. — Nai is na dem., and 
 i (for ni) ; niga is ni dem., and 
 ga (for na) ; ga is for na, which 
 is nia in inia, and na in nom. 
 suf. 
 
 Nai, s., water, d. for noai, nifai. 
 
 Nai, i.e., n art., and ai s., side 
 board of a canoe to keep the 
 waves out, a protector or 
 defence of a place (a warrior 
 who keeps out the enemy) ; d. 
 a fence. [Sa. ai a fence, a rail- 
 ing, ai to fence in. To. a 
 fence, Ha. pa, v. and s.] See 
 under baka, s. 
 
 Naita natuo, s., d. for ua-nate- 
 natuo the calf of the leg, hence 
 nalake naita natuo n the 
 ankle, lit. the base of the calf 
 of the leg. 
 
 Nakate, s., d. syn. nete, q.v., lit. 
 the that that. 
 
 Nakima, s., d. naftea. 
 
 Nakis, s., d. nabis : kusu na, 
 kihi (or kisi) na. 
 
 Nakis, or nakisa, or nakes, s., 
 green or blue paint: kesakesa. 
 
 Nako na, s., the face. See ko : 
 n. art., and ako ; hence 
 
 Nakonakoa ki, v. (formed by a, 
 a. ending, from preceding 
 word) to assume the face, or 
 appearance of (ki) someone ; 
 
NAKONAKO Kl] 154 
 
 Nakonako ki, v., to face (some- 
 one), i.e., front (him). A. 
 wagaha, 5, id., to front or 
 face each other. 
 
 Nalu, or nalua, an arrow. A. 
 nabr arrow. 
 
 Namu, s., d., mosquito, d. na 
 mamamami (d. batirik = 
 small tooth). [Sa. mamu, 
 Tah. namu, ramu, Fut. namo. 
 My. flamok, Bu. namok, Mg. 
 moka, Ml. U. num, TaSa. 
 moke, Malo mohe, Ta. kumug, 
 An. inyum, Motu namo, id.] 
 See mu, v. The n in namu is 
 the art., and namu is the 
 buzzer or pinger. 
 
 Nanoa na, s., the neck, i.e., n' 
 art., and anoa neck, eg. manu 
 na, q.v. [Santo d. alo, d. 
 ralo, Bu. olong.] A. 'unk', 
 'unuli', 'anlk', neck. 
 
 Nanua, s., necklace, beads, i.e., 
 n' art., and anua. H. 'anak 
 necklace. 
 
 Nanofa, ad., d., yesterday, and 
 
 Nanoasa, ad., d. nasa, the day 
 before yesterday, and 
 
 Nanu, ad., d. nanofa, and 
 
 Nanum, ad., d. nanu, yesterday. 
 [Fi. e na noa, Santo nonovi 
 (pwanovi to-morrow), Epi 
 niobo (bani = maisa = to-day).] 
 Nan-ofa, nan-u, nan-ura, con- 
 sist of ofa, u, um, day (see 
 ma, s., day), and (Fi. e na 
 noa, e in or on, na the ; noa 
 past day = nu, num, nofa) 
 nan', i.e., na the art., and n' 
 particle expressive of past 
 time, as in nasa, infra. 
 Nanoasa (for nanofasa) has sa 
 (for rua, sometimes ra, 2) : 
 hence na nofa, lit. the past 
 
 [natara 
 
 day, and na noasa the second 
 past day, Nanoasa, nasa. 
 [Epi nua, d. niaha, Ta. d. neis, 
 id.] 
 
 Nao, s., d. noa, q.v. 
 
 Naob, s., lime, d. noba, q.v. 
 
 Nara, pers. pron., 3 pi., they (for 
 nai 'ra), d. gara, or nigara 
 (ga 'ra), d. inira (inia and 'ra). 
 See ra, ru, and nai. 
 
 Naro, d. for nalo. See lo a 
 thing. 
 
 Naroa, s., na, art., a current 
 (of water, especially in the 
 sea) : so called because i roa 
 turns (itself). See roa. 
 
 Nasa, ad., the day before yester- 
 day, d. nanoasa : nasa is 
 without the article and for 
 noasa (in nanoasa). 
 
 Nasafa, inter, pron., also nasefa, 
 and nesefa : na, art., and safa, 
 or sefa, q.v. 
 
 Nasaga, s., na, art., a stretch of 
 sea between two places. See 
 saga. 
 
 Nasu na, na art., s., juice, what 
 flows out, or exudes. [Sa. su 
 to be wet, sua juice.] A. 
 nazza to exude, nizu flow, 
 water. 
 
 Nata, a person. See ata. Nata 
 na, or nate na, soul, spirit ; 
 
 Natamole, a living person, 
 
 Natamate, or natemate, a dead 
 person, a ghost, a demon, an 
 object of worship. See ata, 
 moli, mate, atamole, atamate. 
 
 Natara, s., n art., and atara a., 
 a virgin, young woman ; na- 
 guruni atara a young woman ; 
 and naturiai a young man, bia 
 aturiai young men. [My. 
 dara, Ja. rara, a maid, virgin.] 
 
Nate] 
 
 A. 'adara to be a virgin 
 ('adera' a virgin), 2, to cir- 
 cumcise ; to begin to have a 
 beard (young man), 'idar' a 
 beard, hence with a. ending 
 aturiai bearded, or beginning 
 to be bearded, a young man. 
 
 Nats, or natsS, s., the banana, 
 or plantain, plant and fruit : 
 n art., and at6, or atsS. [Ml. 
 P. nevij, Ml. XJ. navits, Ero. 
 nobos, Epi vihi. Am. nohos, 
 Ml. dd. navis, abus, Paama 
 aliisi, Fi. vudi, Ulawa huti, 
 Fut. vuji, Fila butsh', Aniwa 
 hutshi, Niue futi. My. pisang, 
 Ceram fudi, phitim, Sanguir 
 busa, Mg. ontsy, d. hotsy, id.] 
 A. muz', Amh. muz, id. 
 
 Nati-kuru, s., dried, withered 
 banana leaves. See kuru, a. 
 
 Natemate, for natamate. See 
 atamate. 
 
 Natoara, s., n art., a kind of 
 grass (sword grass). H. hasir 
 grass, A. h'as'ira to be green. 
 
 Naturiai, s., aturiai, a., young 
 man. See under natara. 
 
 Nau, s., reeds ; Pan's pipes ; for 
 nausu : na art., and usu, q.v. 
 
 Nau, V. i., usually nu, q.v. 
 
 Nau ia, v. t., to rub, wipe off. 
 See nu ea. 
 
 Naiia (nawa), n art., and alia 
 (awa), q.v. 
 
 Ne a, for noi a, v., to dwell, or 
 be, beside (someone) : the verb 
 no is intransitive, and i is the 
 t. prep. [Fi. no to lie (of 
 things, not persons), Sa. nofo 
 to sit, dwell, remain, Ma., Tah., 
 Ha., noho.] H. navah and 
 naah, to sit down, to rest, to 
 dwell. 
 
 155 [neta ki 
 
 Ne, dem., here, there, this, that, 
 uane, kine, netu. See in, na. 
 [Sa. nei this.] 
 
 Nei n, or nai n, s., his child, d. 
 for nani n. The n of ani, q.v.,. 
 is elided : nai for nani. 
 
 Nego, pers. pron., d. for nago,. 
 q.v. 
 
 Neko (for naiko), s., n art., and 
 eko the wooden mallet for 
 beating native cloth (in 
 making it). [Sa. i'e. To. igi, 
 id.. Ha. ku, kuku, to beat 
 native cloth.] A. waka'a to- 
 beat, 7), to sharpen, make thin 
 a knife, 8), make slender, &c.,, 
 waki' sharp, thin, slender. To. 
 igi means also small, Ef. iki, 
 kiki, id. ; and kie also belongs 
 here, the leaf being rubbed 
 and split into slender threads. 
 
 Neinei a, v., as boka neinei a 
 beat it soft, beat making it 
 soft (or weak). See maneineL 
 
 Neru, naru, and nieru, war, lit. 
 arms : art., and aru, q.v. 
 
 Net, d. for binet, banotu, q.v. 
 
 Nete, s., a thing, anything, 
 something, d. syn. nakate i 
 art., and te, dem., lit. the 
 that. Neto ra their thing, 
 also ara te, id., agu te my 
 thing, ama te thy thing. 
 
 Netu, dem., this, that: ne, dem., 
 and tu, v., lit. this or that 
 standing out or up. 
 
 Netua, d. nerua, s., twins, art.. 
 and tua, or rua, 2, lit. the two. 
 [Fi. drua, id. ; also double, a., 
 as a double canoe, a double 
 fruit.] 
 
 Neta ki, v. t., to throw, net ia 
 to throw upon, hit with a 
 thing thrown. A. nada' to 
 
3Jl] 
 
 throw, H. nadah, Pi., to cast 
 out. 
 
 JSTi, prep., of (genitive), to, 
 belonging to, also i, in, on, at, 
 with art. ani, q.v., t. prep, 
 after verbs, as mesau ni au 
 desire me (also mesau au, d.), 
 ri, as soka ri join on to, and 
 li, as taka li, d. taka ni, thrust 
 ■on to, also ra in raki, q.v., as 
 toko raki remain, or abide for, 
 i.e., wait for, or wait upon, 
 and i, as in no i, &c. [Pi. ni, 
 i, or e, of, in, t. prep, na, ra, 
 raka, laka, Ma. i of, belonging 
 to, &c., and t. prep., Battak 
 ni, Bu. ri, Holontalo li, Tag. 
 ni, Mg. ny, n', any, of, be- 
 longing to.] A. li, H., Arm. 
 16, E. la, T. ng, id. 
 
 ll^i, art., also na, in, n. [Mg. 
 ny, id.] 
 
 Ni, same as na, ad., and interj ; 
 
 Ni, verb, suf., 3 sing., d. nia, 
 q.v. 
 
 Nia, verb, suf., 3 sing., same as 
 na, q.v., once (in sikinia, and 
 sikina, his one, he alone) nom. 
 suf. (which usually is na). 
 See nai, inia. 
 
 Niba ki, v. t., to throw away, 
 make to go away. A. nafa' 
 drive away, expel, hurl away 
 (as a torrent, rubbish, the 
 wind, dust). 
 
 Nifai, s., water, dd. nai, noai : 
 ni art., and fai water. 
 
 Nife ni, a., v. t., to fan, t. prep, 
 ni, lit. to wave, or brandish, 
 on or to ; 
 
 Nifenife, v. i., to fan, to wave 
 or brandish, as the branches 
 of a tree in the wind ; 
 
 Kife, s., a fan. H. nuf to wave 
 
 156 [ninita 
 
 up and down. Hi. henlf to 
 wave, to shake. 
 
 Nig, d., prep., of (gen.) for 
 (dative), ni art., and g (for 
 gi), i.e., ki, q.v.), dd. nag, 
 nagi, nagki, and, art. with- 
 out its n, agi, d. agki (gk 
 for k). 
 
 Niga, d., pers. pron., 3 sing. : ni 
 art., and ga. 
 
 Nigara, d., pers. pron., 3 pi.: niga, 
 and ra. 
 
 Nigita, pers. pron., 1 pi., inch : 
 ninita. 
 
 Nikenika, v. i., to be silent, 
 quiet, or noiseless, or stealthy ; 
 also to move quickly along a 
 sharp ridge (of a mountain), 
 or along a log across a stream. 
 [Ha. nihi to walk very softly 
 and quietly, as on tiptoe, to 
 do a thing quietly or secretly, 
 nihinihi standing up on edge, 
 narrow ridged, or edged. Ma. 
 ninihi to move stealthily.] A. 
 naga' to hasten ; communicate 
 a secret, 3, act, or speak, 
 secretly (with someone), naga' 
 branch of a tree, higher part 
 of land, nagwai higher part of 
 land, a secret. 
 
 Niko na, s., the spine (ridge) of 
 a cocoanut leaf. See preced- 
 ing word. 
 
 Nin, dem., d., this: n art., and 
 in dem. [My. nun that.] 
 
 Ninita, or nininta, d., obsolete, 
 for nigita, niginta, pers. pron., 
 1 pi., inch, we (and) thou, dd. 
 keigita, igira, akit, nikit : art. 
 ni, and nita (ni we, ta thou). 
 [An. inta, verb, pron., id., 
 Santo d. niti, or inti, separate 
 pron., id.. Ml. d. ante, id., 
 
NITI a] 
 
 My. kita, Mg. isika, Sa. 'o i ta 
 (tou), id.] 
 
 Niti a, or nit ia, v. t., to plane, 
 shave (wood). A. nahata, 
 n. a. naht', id. 
 
 Niu, s., c. art. naniu, the cocoa- 
 nut palm. [Fi. niu, Er. 
 noki, An. ■ neaig, My. nior, 
 Ceram niula. Ml. kula, Mg. 
 nihio, Sa. niu, id. ; niu piu 
 fan palm (therefore niu is 
 a general name for a palm) ; 
 niui to sprinkle with the juice 
 of the cocoanut, Ha. niu to 
 whirl abouti] A. nah'lu palm 
 (gen. name), nah'Ilu (coll. 
 name), nali'ala to sift, to pour 
 out or Sprinkle (snow, as the 
 clouds), Nm., 7, to drizzle. 
 
 No, contr. n, in bano, ban, 
 banotu, &c. [Fi. yani, Sa. 
 ane. To. angi, directive ad., 
 Mg. any there, in that place.] 
 Prep, n (ni), and dem. o. 
 
 No i a, or noi a, d. ne a, noi, d. 
 ne : hence redup. noinoi, and 
 r. binoinoi, d. binofinoi. See 
 ne a. 
 
 Nono, V. i., no (in no ia) redup., 
 to abide, as mala nono abide 
 senseless. See also binoinoi 
 to abide with each other, and 
 binofinoi, or bunofunoil 
 
 Noa ki, V. t., tell, lit. say to, dd. 
 ni ki, ti ki, nofa, q.v. ; noa i, 
 V. t., say or tell it ; binoa to 
 speak about each other. > 
 
 Noai, s., d. nifai water; for na 
 uai. 
 
 Noa, s. (for na ua), d. nao, a 
 swell, or wave. See uaua. 
 
 No6a, s., c. art. nanoia, ,d. naob, 
 lime (ashes of coral) ; and 
 
 NoJanoJa, v. i., or a,, to be 
 
 157 [nunu-tafk. 
 
 dusty, become dust, fly in the- 
 air (dust). See abuobu. [Sa. 
 navu lime. Ma. nehu dust, 
 , nehunehu dusky, whakanehu, 
 reduce to powder.] 
 
 Noba nia, v. t., to wrap in leaves- 
 with hot stones and cook, to 
 cook, d. tuma nia ; and 
 
 No6ano6a, v. i., to be cooked,, 
 soft. See also manubunubu,, 
 and d. tomo or tumu, tumu- 
 tumua, matumutumu. [Ha. 
 nopu thoroughly cooked, soft,, 
 plump, fat, swelled out, and 
 nopunopu spring or swell up 
 (in the mind), swell, be large, 
 round, spring up.] A. tabaha, 
 n. a. tabli', to cook, roast, to 
 ripen, 2, to grow up, 7, 8, tO' 
 be cooked, tubbah' pi. of 
 tabili' fatness, tabih' cooked. 
 
 Nobu, s., flood, d. tobu. A. 
 taf , to flood (Ct.), tawwafu a 
 flood. 
 
 Nof, d. for num, v. i., q.v. 
 
 Nofa i, V. t., d. noa i, q.v., ta 
 tell. A. naba', 6), 2, show, 
 declare, announce, tell. 
 
 Nono. See ante, no, nono. 
 
 Notinoti, v. i., or a., to be 
 spotted (as an animal). H. 
 nakod spotted (as an animal), 
 Nm. nokta a spot, monakkat 
 spotted, H. nakad, A. nakata, 
 to mark with points. 
 
 Notu, d., contraction for banotu,. 
 q.v. 
 
 Nu, V. i., d. num, q.v., hence 
 manua, manunu. 
 
 Nu e a, V. t., to wipe, rub off; 
 redup., 
 
 Nunu ea, id., and 
 
 Nunu, s., a wiper, rubber, and 
 
 Nunu-tafe, s., the wrist, lit. snot- 
 

 
 nuanua] 158 
 
 wiper. [Sa. nunu to grate 
 down, nuaga a grating down.] 
 A. thamma, 4), to sweep (a 
 house, or place), 5), to rub, 
 wipe off. Of. nu, A. tamma. 
 See num. 
 
 Nuanua, v. i., to wave about, or 
 to and fro (as the branches of 
 a tree) ; nuanua ki, v. t., to 
 wave, make to wave, or shake 
 (anything). H. nu'a to move 
 to and fro, wave to and fro. 
 Hi. move to and fro, shake. 
 
 Nua na, s., n art., and ua, q.v., 
 fruit. 
 
 ]Nub, s., d. rub, q.v. 
 
 Nubu na, d. tumu na, s., c. art., 
 the soft swelling protuberance 
 of anything (as of a yam) 
 growing. See no6ano6a. 
 
 Nubu, V. i., d. num. 
 
 Nuf, V. i., d. num. 
 
 Nugnug ia, v. t., d. luglug ia, 
 q.v. : hence manugnug, q.v. 
 
 Numnum ia, v. t., d. for nugnug 
 ia. 
 
 Nugnug, V. i., to be careless, 
 heedless, maturu nugnug to 
 sleep and be devoid of all care 
 or thought, be utterly heedless. 
 A. numa^ heedless, careless, 
 nama to sleep, doze, be quiet, 
 tranquil, 2, deaden (as pain). 
 
 Num, V. i., to be finished, com- 
 pleted, dd. nu, nau, nubu, nuf, 
 nof ; ru nau, nu, num, nuf ban 
 they all have gone, a bat ia i 
 nu I have done it, it is finished. 
 See manua, mauunu, binunu, 
 manubu, manubunubu. A. 
 tamma, n. a. turn', <fec., to be 
 all, whole, finished, completed, 
 at an end, and, transitive, to 
 complete, &c. 
 
 [OFIOFI 
 
 Nura, s., syn. miura, q.v., for 
 ne ura : ura. 
 
 , sign of vocative, interj., as 
 temanami o, O our father. 
 [Ml., Santo, Malo, o, id,] E. 
 o, id. 
 
 0, dem., io, ao, ore, or iore, q.v., 
 and in otaki, q.v., also in ko 
 dem., and in bo (mo, fo, uo, 
 o), q.v. [Fi. o in oqo, Tah. o, 
 Mare o, Motu o, dem.] See 
 ua. M.S. hau, pronounced o, 
 dem., and egg., that is, the 
 Semitic pers. pron. 3 sing, 
 used as a dem., and as a verb 
 substantive. 
 
 O, verbal suf., 1 sing., me, d. 
 for au. 
 
 0, V. i., contr. for oni, q.v. ; also 
 in bao. 
 
 Ob, s., d., c. art. naob, d. noba, 
 lime (ashes of coral) : noba. 
 
 Of, s., dd. um, ubu, ua, cooking 
 oven : ban ia. 
 
 Ofa, in taliofa, dd. taliaba, tali- 
 eba. See tali. Ofa to whirl 
 round. [Tah. ohu (also = 
 kofu, q.v., supra) to whirl 
 round, Ma. koumuumu. My. 
 ubftng, mubang.] E. kabab 
 to whirl round. 
 
 Ofa, i.q., afa to swim, be above, 
 float on ; and 
 
 Ofa ia, i.q. afa ia, q.v. 
 
 Of ia, or ofi a, v. t., to be near 
 to, alongside of, d. afi a ; 
 
 Ofiofi, v., a., near to. [To. ofi 
 near to, at hand.] A. wahafa 
 n. a. wahf, to draw near to, 
 approach near. 
 
OPA Kl] 
 
 Ofa ki, V. t., i.q. afa ki ; nalia 
 ofakien. a place of burial, to 
 be buried in, naofakien act of 
 burying, burial. 
 
 Ofa, a., high, tall, as a tree. 
 [Mg. avo high, lofty, eminent, 
 proud.] H. gabah to be high, 
 as a tree, gobah height (as of 
 trees), pride, gaboah, high, 
 lofty, proud. 
 
 Ola, s., a spear. [Ulawa ilula. 
 New Ireland lelu, Maklay 
 Kiiste (N.G.) iur, id.] A. 
 'allaf, pi. 'alal', 'elal', id. 
 
 Oli a, d. uli a, q.v. 
 
 On, s., sand, d. aran, q.v. 
 
 Oni contr. o, d. ani, q.v., to 
 
 _ abide, be. 
 
 Org, d. or, ad., yes, that's it : o 
 dem., and re, or ri, dem., cf . iore. 
 
 Or, d., s., c. art. naor, or na uor. 
 See uora. 
 
 Ora na, s., sprout, shoot, or vine 
 (as of a yam) ; 
 
 Oraora na, id. : bora, uora. 
 
 Oran, and orain, d., s., sand : aran. 
 
 Oraorana, a., na a. ending, varie- 
 gated. [Tah. purepure spotted, 
 chequered, of diverse colours.] 
 E. hubur variegated, of various 
 colours, Ch. liabarbar spotted. 
 
 Ore, i.q. aure, q.v. 
 
 Ori a, v. t., to rub, grate, ori, v. i., 
 to make a creaking, grating 
 noise (as the branches of trees 
 rubbing against each other) ; 
 
 Ori, s., d. kiri, the rubbing stick 
 in producing fire by the 
 friction of two sticks. [Tah. 
 oro, Sa. olo, to rub, olo a plane, 
 My. urut, to rub, kukur to rasp, 
 Mg. otra rubbed, orina being 
 rubbed.] H. garar to scrape, 
 sweep, saw. Cf. the cognates. 
 
 159 [ra 
 
 Oro, v. i., to grunt (a pig), to 
 growl, snarl (a dog), and with 
 transitive prep, oro-maki to 
 bark at (a person or thing), 
 bioro, V. r., to make a con- 
 fused murmuring noise (as a 
 crowd of men all speaking at 
 once) ; and 
 
 Orooro, id., red up., cf, uru, uru- 
 uru. [Ma. nguru, to sigh, 
 grunt, rumble, ngengere to 
 growl, ngeri to chaunt (in 
 launching a canoe, <fec.), 
 ngengeri to grunt, My. kurkur 
 to grunt (a pig), Mg. erotra 
 to snore, erona, mierona, to 
 growl, snarl, roar.] A. nah'ara 
 Nm. to grunt, b'ara to low, 
 ll'arli'ara snort, snore, harra 
 to growl, snarl (a dog), to 
 creak, harharai murmur -or 
 sound of copiously flowing 
 water. 
 
 Oro, d., V. i., or a., to be barren: 
 d. for bara, q.v. 
 
 Oroa, v. i., or a. Same as ora- 
 orana, to be coloured, varie- 
 gated : a. ending 'a, d. contr. 
 oro ; hence 
 
 Oroa, d. oro, s., a species of 
 grasshopper, so called from its 
 colours. 
 
 Otaki, d. uataki, s., native tongs: 
 o dem., and taki a. 
 
 Oti a, i.q. moti a, uti a, muti a, 
 q.v. 
 
 Ea, 
 
 d. nra, dem., this, that. See 
 arai. 
 
 Ra, s., a depressed place, damp 
 or watery : ruku. 
 
BA na] 160 
 
 Ra na, s., branch. [Sa. la, Ma. 
 ra, My. daan, Mg. rahana, 
 rahaka.], A. s'agnai, s'agan', 
 id. 
 
 Ra, or tra (ta), dd. ta, nra, s., 
 blood, mita to bleed. [Er. 
 de, TaSa. rai, Malo dai, Motu 
 rara, Sa. toto (redup.), Ja. ra, 
 My. darah, Mg. ra blood.] 
 H., E. dam, S. dem, A. dam', 
 blood ; damiya to bleed. 
 
 Ra, V. i., vociferate, in rasoso, 
 rafioso. H. ru'a. Hi. vocifer- 
 ate. 
 
 Ra, verb, and nom. suf., 3 pi. : 
 nara, they. 
 
 Ra, num., two : rua. 
 
 Ra tan ia, rara tan ia, trara tan 
 ia, tara tan ia, v. t., to forget, 
 lit. to think burying or cover- 
 ing it. See mitroa and tun ia. 
 
 Rabk na, S., side (of a river or 
 valley). A. s'affa^' id. 
 
 Rabaraba, v. i., to flap the wings. 
 A. rafrafa, id, 
 
 Rabaraba kaf (or kai), v. i., 
 to be bent with hunger or 
 famine ; and 
 
 Raba, s., hunger or famine, in 
 li raba goddess, or she demon 
 of hunger (a "sacred stone "). 
 H. ra'eb, E. rSliaba, to hunger, 
 H. ra'ab hunger, famine. 
 
 Rabag, see tabag, 
 
 Rafalu, d. lifaru, q.v. 
 
 Raf ea, v. t., to weave a reed 
 fence ; hence 
 
 Rafena, s., a reed (woven) fence, 
 d. rof e ; and 
 
 Rafeen, s., c. art., the act of 
 weaving a reed fence. H. 
 'arab to weave, intertwine, A. 
 'araba a knot, H. 'arubali 
 interwoven work, or network. 
 
 [raite na 
 
 Raf ea, v. t., to go through (a» 
 through a hole in a fence, the 
 eye of a needle) ; and, c. t. prep., 
 
 Rafe aki, v. t., to make to go 
 through. A. thakaba, n. a.i 
 thakb', to perforate, bore 
 through, to go through (as 
 through the eye of a needle). 
 
 Rafioso, V. i., to call out as when 
 in terror or danger: ra v. i., 
 and bioso. 
 
 Rafite na, s., wall or side of a 
 house. E. arafete partition, 
 wall. 
 
 Raga-elo, d., v. i., to warm or 
 dry oneself in the sun (elo) : 
 raga is transposed for gara, as 
 baragai for bagarai. 
 
 Rag, s., time, c. nom. suf. ragi 
 na its time : d. ran, rani na, 
 dd. lag, nag. A. 'an' time, c. 
 art. al, 1'. 
 
 Rago, s., c. art., thorns, prickles, 
 a mass of thorny or prickly, 
 or rough and spiky, or jagged 
 matter (as twigs, &c.) ; 
 
 Ragoa, and ragorogoa, v. i., or 
 a., to be full of rago, as a reef 
 full of jagged, sharp rocks. H. 
 Sinnah a thorn, sSninim thorns, 
 prickles, from sanan, i.q. 
 s'anan, to be sharp, to prick. ' 
 
 Rago, s., I'ollers on which a 
 canoe or boat is hauled up. 
 Der. uncertain. [Ma. rango, 
 id., also a fly, Ef. lango.] 
 
 Rai, d. re, s., forehead, aspect, 
 face. [To. lae. My. dai, Ja. 
 rai, id.] E. rey sight, aspect ; 
 
 Rairai, d. tairai, v. i., to be in 
 good countenance. See baka- 
 rairai, and lo, leo. 
 
 Raite na, or reite na, d., s., 
 mother. See ani na. 
 
haka] 
 
 Raka, v. i., to be willing, and 
 maraka ; also, redup., 
 
 Rakaraka, id., and marakaraka, 
 id. ; also, 
 
 Rakana, s., the willingness, 
 readiness, tuga fat ia rakana 
 sikeimau let us do it, the 
 readiness or willingness for it 
 one only, i.e., with one mind 
 or will. S. rSgag to desire, 
 to will, Ethpael id., rega 
 desire, will. 
 
 Rakaf ia, and rakof ia, v. t., to 
 cleave to, and 
 
 Rarako, d. tarako, as toa i rarako 
 sits on, cleaves close to (her 
 eggs). [My. lakap to adhere.] 
 S. nkaf, etnakaf , to cleave to, 
 eg. E. lakaf. 
 . Raka ia, v. t., to lift, raise up, 
 and 
 
 Eaka tia, id. A. rakiya, 2, raise 
 up, make to go up. 
 
 Rakei a, v. t., to adorn, dress ; 
 tumana rakei a adorn or dress 
 himself ; and 
 
 Rakei, d. raki, s., c. art., dress, 
 adornment. E. sargawa to 
 adorn, dress ; this sa- is not 
 radical, and the original root 
 begins with rag, or raq (Dill- 
 mann, E. Gr., §72). 
 
 Raki, double t. prep., ra and ki, 
 raki na ; or 
 
 Raki nia, also d. raki te na 
 [Fi. raka, Maiwo lagi, Mota 
 rag.] 
 
 Raku sa, v. t., redup. raraku sa, 
 and taraku sa, and d. taku 
 tia, to remove anyone's things, 
 as in a flitting ; i raraku he is 
 doing so, or is removing to 
 another district, or flitting. 
 H. 'athak and Hi., to remove 
 
 161 [rasoso 
 
 away, take away, break up a 
 
 camp. 
 Rakua, and, dd., 
 Rakum, rakoraa, s., a crab : art. 
 
 ra. [Epi lakum, Fi. qumu- 
 
 qumu.] A. h'umh'um' a crab. 
 Rales, a place in Hades, lit. dark 
 
 pit, swamp, or depressed place ; 
 
 ra, and les. 
 Rana, dem. and num., those two: 
 
 ra, 2, and na dem. 
 Rana, and redup. rarana, v. i., 
 
 or a., to branch out : ra, and 
 
 a. ending na. 
 Ran, rani na. See rag, ragi na. 
 Ran, d., s., water : r' art., and 
 
 an. [Fi. drano, Sa. lanu. My. 
 
 danu, J. ranu, Mg. ranu.] A. 
 
 'a'n' fons, and art. al, 1'. 
 Rarua, d. raru, s., a canoe, boat, 
 
 or ship : r' art. [My. prahu, 
 
 Ml. ndrav, Segaar rai, Ta. 
 
 laou (laau). An. elcau, Er. 
 
 lo.] A. markab. See borau, 
 
 supra. 
 Ras, d. nras, dem. and num., 
 
 these two : ra, 2, and s, 
 
 dem. 
 Ras ia, v. t., d. tas ia, to shave 
 
 (the beard or chin), shave (or 
 
 strip) off (as fruit from a tree, 
 
 shave or strip the tree). E. 
 
 las'aya to shave. 
 Ras, or res, d. tas, redup. reres, 
 
 or teres, v. i., to rustle, crash 
 
 (as the foliage of plants, or 
 
 waves of the sea, moved by 
 
 the wind, or men in a tumult). 
 
 H. ra'as' the primary notion 
 
 lies in noise and crashing : 
 
 used of the rustling of grain 
 
 moved by the wind, ra'as' 
 
 noise, tumult. 
 Rasoso, V. i., see rafioso ; rasoso 
 12 
 
RAT Ia] 
 
 to vociferate, calling (for help) : 
 ra, and soso. 
 
 Eat ia, v. t., d. tat ia, d. nrat, to 
 loose, untie. See mirati. [Sa. 
 tala, tatala, Tah., Ma., tara.J 
 H. nathar. Hi. hitir, to loose. 
 
 Eau', and ndau', v. i., d., to go. 
 Ct , rawah to go. 
 
 Rau, redup. rarau, v., to grope 
 for with the hand, seize, snatch 
 out or away. See birife, rifu. 
 [Ma. harau grope for with the 
 hand, Ha. lalau extend out as 
 the hand, Ma. rau catch, lay 
 hold of, gather, Ha. lau seize, 
 take out of a place. To. lau 
 nip, pinch] ; and 
 
 Rau, s., leaves (for food to be 
 cooked, and for putting food 
 on, as on a plate, when cooked) . 
 [Mg. ravina. My. dawun, Sa., 
 Ma, lau, rau, Fi. drau] ; and 
 
 Rau, s., as rau nasuma eaves of 
 a house, rau mita lashes of the 
 eyes, eye-lashes ; a tribe, group, 
 bi rau in parties, rau a fruit 
 that grows in clusters. [Ma. 
 rau 100, Ha. lau 400] ; and 
 
 Rau, in bakarau to divide, dis- 
 tribute ; and 
 
 Raua, rauraua, a., hairy, as a 
 rope, nakasu rauraua a tree 
 full of branches. [Mg. ravi- 
 ravy hanging over, suspended] ; 
 and 
 
 Rau, in barau, i.e., ba to go, and 
 rau speak violently and re- 
 proachfully. [Sa. lau speak, 
 abuse indecently] ; and 
 
 Lau, in launa, a community of 
 people living together. [Ha, 
 launa friendly, social ; lau to 
 spread out, be broad, as a leaf.J 
 H. 'araf to pluck, to seize, to 
 
 162 [eeko 
 
 pull ; A. "araf leaves, ''arafa 
 to pull out (as hairs), ''arf 
 mane of a horse, "urfai' part 
 of collected hair, braid of 
 hair, rafu herd or flock, 
 warafa to be extended, broad, 
 raf a' to sew (from the plucking 
 motion), to make peace, con- 
 cord, warafa, 2, to part, 
 distribute, H. haraf, 3, to 
 carp at, scorn, A. rafraf 
 sides of a rope, branches of 
 trees hanging down, skirt, 
 vallance. These words are 
 all cognates, the radical part 
 being raf, which has the sense 
 of " seizing and plucking." 
 
 Rea, s., d. for reko, bisa ki rea 
 ki nau speak as a pauper to 
 me : reko. 
 
 Rea ki, d. nre a, d. roa i, roi a, 
 to twist, wring, strain out 
 juice by wringing, rei a, re- 
 rei a, or terei a, d. roroi a, to 
 moisten the pudding (nakoau) 
 with lor (the rich oily juice 
 of grated cocoanut). A. ra'a, 
 
 2, to moisten bread with fat, 
 ra"a, 2, id., 1, to bend, turn, 
 
 3, wrestle, 5, roll itself (an 
 animal), 6, wrestle. 
 
 Rei, s., c. art. nerei, a band of 
 men ; a clump of trees. A. 
 ra'a to grow, luxuriate, 2, be 
 congregated, ri'ai' a band, a 
 crowd. 
 
 Rei, d. rea, d. reko, q.v. 
 
 Rei, d. tei, v., rei natano burrow, 
 or cover itself with earth, as 
 the white ant (futei, furei) 
 does. A. damma, 2), to cover 
 its hole with earth, dimmat' 
 ant. 
 
 Reko (see rei, rea, farea), s., a 
 
RELPKO] 
 
 pauper, poor. H. rek empty, 
 vain, impoverished, poor. 
 
 Keluko (or raluko). See taluko. 
 
 Here, rerea, v. i., to break rush- 
 ing upon the sand or shore (of 
 waves), also tarere. Ch. rS'a' 
 to break in pieces, H. ra'a', id. 
 S. etra're', id. 
 
 Res, reres, teres. See raa. 
 
 Hi, trans, prep., ra in raki. See 
 ni. 
 
 E,i, verb, pron., 3 pi., dd. ru 
 (eru) eu. 
 
 Ria, verb, pron., 3 dual, d. ra. 
 
 Rl a. See ti a. 
 
 Ri, or r6, dem., eri, &c. : arai. 
 
 Riu sa, d. tuma ia, to point out. 
 See tiu. 
 
 Riu sa, riuriu sa, also tiu, or tu 
 sa, q.v. 
 
 Ribu, riribu, to sound (with a 
 trumpet), ribu aki baigo sound 
 a trumpet, taribu to sound 
 trumpets alternately (of two 
 men). See rubua. 
 
 Rifalu, d. lifaru, q.v. 
 
 Rifu, d. rife, d. lifu mita, s., eye- 
 lashes, and see birife or birif u 
 to snatch, pluck away, plun- 
 der. [Cf . My. rambiya, rambu, 
 rambut, Mg. rombo, rombotra, 
 rombitra, rombaka, My. ram- 
 pas, rabat.] See rau. 
 
 Rigi, ririgi, or tirigi, v. i., to 
 make a tremulous groaning 
 noise in suffering pain, birigi- 
 rigi. A. ranna vociferate, 
 utter the voice with weeping, 
 make a noise, twang, tinkle. 
 
 Riki, a., small, kari-riki, uarik, 
 batik ; 
 
 Riki, s., c. art. neriki, child, little 
 one. [Ha. Hi, Tah. rii, Ma. 
 riki.] E. dawik to be small. 
 
 163 [roba 
 
 Riki, s., triki, nriki (d,), pud. 
 
 mul. A. rika', id. 
 Rikit, V. i., to be small : kita. 
 Rikitelag, d. for koroatelagi : 
 
 koro, atelagi. 
 Riri, in buariri (Hades), for tiro 
 
 to sink. 
 Riri, V. i., to fly, d. for tiri. 
 Riri, s., a spark : tiri. 
 Riri-mita, s., tears : tuau, tu- 
 
 turu. [To. tulu he mata.] 
 Risu, V. i., to move, shift : rosa. 
 Ro, ad., again, d. mero. 
 Roa i, V. t., to turn. See rea 
 
 ki, re a, mero, ro, meraroa ; 
 
 and 
 Roa-leo, and roaroa-leo, s., echo. 
 Roa, or roua (rowa), or troua, 
 
 V. i., to fall, dd. ro, rouo, 
 
 touo, ti6e (ndiSe), tao, mitao, 
 
 mitefe. [An. erop, My. ru- 
 
 buh, m3,rubuh, rkhah, mira- 
 
 bah, ribah, mS,ribah.] H. 
 
 rafah, S. rgfo', etrafi, to cast 
 
 down, to sink, or fall down. 
 Ro na, roro na, s., thought, mind, 
 
 also trotro na, and d. nro n ; 
 
 and 
 Roro, or trotro, v., to think, rara 
 
 (&c.) tan ia, d. totu ; and 
 Ro-mi a, roro-mi a, v. t., to think 
 
 upon, delight in, love. See 
 
 mitroa. 
 Rouo (rowo), i.q. rau', to go. 
 Ro, V. i., to fall, c. prep, ro bei a 
 
 fall upon it. 
 Ro6a, s. , affluence ; and 
 Ro6a-leba, s., great affluence, a 
 
 rich man. A. raf '' affluence. 
 Roba gi a. See toba gi a. 
 Eoba, roroba, or toroba, d. nrob, 
 
 V. i., or a., to be insane, 
 
 senseless. A. raba, 2), to be 
 
 insane, stupefied. 
 
EOBEl] 164 
 
 Eobei a, d. oro-bei a, v. t., to 
 snarl, snap, bark at or on : ro 
 for oro, and t. prep. bei. 
 
 Rofa, s., a red or purple dye or 
 colour. A. sohbai a red or 
 reddish colour. 
 
 Rofarofa, or tofarofa, v. mid., to 
 cover oneself with cloth, clothe 
 oneself, be clothed. H. 'ataf 
 to cover, be covered, be clothed. 
 S. 'taf, id. 
 
 Rofe, s., d. for rafena. 
 
 Rogo, rog ia, v. t., d. togi (ndogi), 
 d. nrog, also trog ia, to hear, 
 obey, to feel, know (as grief or 
 pleasure), rogo na&on to per- 
 ceive or feel or smell the odour 
 (of anything), rorogo, or torogo, 
 V. i., to be still, s., a species of 
 divination (in order to know 
 what is to be done) by a 
 certain movement in the 
 muscles of the arms or legs, 
 rogorogo ki to make heard, 
 report, rogoan, rogorogoan, s., 
 c. art., report, taki rogo-saki 
 bend or incline oneself hear- 
 ing (a person), saki t. prep. ; 
 bakarogo, q.v. ; marogo, or 
 matrogo, or manrog, v. i., to 
 be idle, amuse oneself, marogo 
 ki to amuse oneself at the ex- 
 pense of (someone). [Sa. logo. 
 My. d^ngftr, Mg. reny and rea.] 
 A. 'adina to hear, to know, 
 to feel the smell of, 2, cause 
 to hear, make known, pro- 
 claim, H. 'azan, Hi. he'zin to 
 hear, listen, to obey. 
 
 Rogo, trogo, in sera-trogo, s., any- 
 thing : rogo is r, art., and A. 
 hano a thing. [Santo sonu, 
 TaSa. kinao, Ml. nanu, a 
 thing.] 
 
 [eua 
 
 Roko, V. i., d. lako, d. nrok, to 
 stoop. 
 
 Ror, s., oil, also same as lor, the 
 oily or fatty expressed juice 
 of grated cocoanut used to 
 moisten or fatten puddings : 
 ro ia, roro ia, rei a. 
 
 Roro na. See ro na. 
 
 Roro ia. See ro ia, rei a. 
 
 Roroa, v. i. See toroa. 
 
 Roro-fi a. See toro-fi a. 
 
 Rosa gi a, v. t., to drag, haul, 
 make to move, shift, t. prep, 
 gi ; and 
 
 Rosa, V. i., to move, shift, trosa, 
 dd. nros, nrus, tosa, also rusa, 
 risu ; and 
 
 Ros, s., 0. art., a breaker or 
 wave that sweeps up upon 
 the sand of the shore. [Sa. 
 toso, tosotoso, to drag.] A. 
 ra'asa to move, shake, drag, 4, 
 id., ra'asa, ra'as'a, to tremble. 
 
 Rot ia, or trot ia, v. i., to em- 
 brace clasping to the breast, 
 to embrace or encircle. [Mg. 
 trotro to embrace, to embosom.] 
 A. sadara, 2, to girth (a camel), 
 Sadr', Nm. sadr, the breast 
 (bosom). My. d-ada,Mg.tratra, 
 An. riti, Fi. sere. Hence 
 
 Rot, s., anything going round 
 another as a band or girdle 
 (as an ulcer round one's leg, 
 &c.) ; and 
 
 Rot ia, as ta rot ia, ta rotirot ia, 
 or rutirut ia, cut a band or 
 girdle round (as in barking a 
 tree). 
 
 Ru, verb, pron., 3 pi., they: 
 eru, d. ri. E. 'ellu those. 
 
 Ru sa. See riu sa, tii sa, tiu sa. 
 
 Rua, num., two. See also tua, 
 ra (and sa, in uasa), d. nru. 
 
rub] 165 
 
 [Sa. lua, My. dua, Ja. roro, 
 Mg. roa.] H. s'ne, <fec., Mahri 
 tharo, Soc. tarawah, M.S. 
 trai. 
 
 Bub, s., d. roba, d. nub, d. 
 raba, s., q.v. 
 
 Ru6a, s., additional wife taken 
 by a man already married. 
 [TaSa. narau a wife, Mg. 
 rafy one of two or more wives 
 of the same husband ; ad- 
 versary, opponent ; rafitra 
 joining together, contention, 
 strife.] See rau. A. rafa' to 
 join, sew together, make peace, 
 2, to utter a formula of bless- 
 ing or prayer to a new spouse, 
 rafa', 2, id. (" May est thou 
 live with concord and with 
 children"), 
 
 Euftaki, s., a big flat nakoau. A. 
 ra"if', round thin cake baked 
 on the hearth. 
 
 Rubua, d. rufua, s., clamour ; 
 noise, tumult (as of mourners 
 in wailing). S. rhab make a 
 noise, uproar, tumult, utter 
 lamentations (Mark v. 38, 39), 
 eg. H. ra'am, v., to make a 
 noise, thunder, s., uproar, 
 clamour, tumult. 
 
 Ruku, s., a hole, of. ra ; edible 
 clay found in holes, syn. tano 
 ra ; a bribe secretly given, or 
 given underhand to procure 
 the death of one hated, nafaka- 
 Tuku- hollow or hole under 
 anything, as a cellar under a 
 house, si ruku to go under 
 (through the hole or hollow 
 under) anything ; and 
 
 Eukua, d., s., a hole, pit, a hole 
 or hollow with water in it, cf. 
 ra. A. raka' to dig (the 
 
 [sA 
 
 ground) ; to revile (someone), 
 rakiyyai a pit, rika' pud. mul. 
 
 Ruma na, s., c. art. n^ruma na ; 
 n art., and ruma, or aruma, 
 and kuruma (in lita-kuruma, 
 q.v., the breast, bosom.) [Sa., 
 Ha., uma, Motu geme, id.] 
 A. lia'zum' the breast, bosom. 
 
 Ruma, dd. bara, oro, v. i., or a., 
 to be barren. H. 'arab, E. 
 'abara. 
 
 Ruma, and tuma, s., a pool of 
 water, d. transposed marou. 
 A. 'arim' a hole, trench, or 
 hollow in which water is col- 
 lected. 
 
 Ru-mi a, ruru-mi a, v. t., same 
 as ro-mi a, also trutru-mi, tru- 
 mi : mitroa. Hence 
 
 Rumien, s., c. art., and ruru- 
 mien, thought about, love. 
 
 Ruru, redup. of ru, riu sa. See 
 tiu, tti sa. 
 
 Ruru, V. i., to tremble. 
 
 Ruru, s., c. art., an earthquake. 
 [Tah. ruru, to tremble.] S. 
 r'el to tremble. 
 
 Ruru, s., a cluster. [Tah. ruru 
 to congregate.] See rei. 
 
 Rusa, see rosa ; rusa gi, see rosa gi ; 
 
 Rusarusa gi, redup., d. nrus, 
 nrusa gi. 
 
 Rutirut ia. See rot ia. 
 
 Rumo, d. ruma, pool. 
 
 S^ 
 
 a, interrogative, contr. of safa, 
 
 sefa : s. dem., and a (fa). 
 Sa, or se, or s, dem., this, here. 
 
 H. zeh, E. zS. 
 Sa, d. for ta, neg. ad., only in 
 
 prohibitive clauses. 
 
sa] 
 
 Sa, si, s. num., one, in gis (or 
 
 gisa), sam, mas, latesa, sikei, 
 
 sikatika. 
 Sa, s' (and see si), verbal suf., 3 
 
 sing., with particle s, as in si, 
 
 q.v., him, her, it, d. a, as ti ki 
 
 nia sa say to him it, d. ti ki 
 
 nia a, id. : sa is s, t. prep., and 
 
 a, verb, suf., 3 sing. 
 Sa, s., d. ta, d. seat, q.v. 
 Sa, caus. pref. See sarafi, sabera, 
 
 sagalugalu, sagara, sigiri. [My. 
 
 sa, Tah. ta.] H. sha. Arm. 
 
 sa (Shaphel, Saphel). 
 Sa, V. i., or a., to be bad, evil, 
 
 sasa, intensive. [Fut. sa, My. 
 
 jahat, Fi. ca, Malo sat, Ta. ra, 
 
 Mg. ratsy.] A. sa' to be bad, 
 
 evil. Hence 
 San, s., c. art., the being evil ; 
 
 also the being ill, sickness, 
 
 misfortune, misery ; and 
 Sasana, v. i., or a., to be ill, have 
 
 a disease : -na, a. ending, and 
 
 sa redup. 
 Sabg, inter, ad., where ? sa, and 
 
 be. 
 Sabe li a, v. t., to bind, tie, d. 
 
 tami sia. H. samam, eg. A. 
 
 zamma, &c., to bind. 
 Sabe li a, v. t., to beat, slap. 
 
 [My. tampar, Ja. tampel, Fi. 
 
 saba-laka.] A. safa'a to beat, 
 
 slap. 
 Saberi-ki, v. t., to scatter, break 
 
 asunder or to pieces, scatter- 
 ing, d. sabura ki. 
 Saberik, v. i., to be broken to 
 
 pieces, fallen or parted asunder. 
 
 [My. sibarkan, sSbar.] See 
 
 bera, tabera. H. s'abar to 
 
 break to pieces : Gesenius 
 
 compares parar. 
 Sa5o, V. i., or a., ignorant, to be 
 
 166 
 
 [SAPAKI 
 
 ignorant, sasa6o to be ignorant, 
 to not know (his way), sabo- 
 naki, v. t., to be ignorant of 
 or about, dd. sub ngki, sbuni ; 
 see also tasabo ; nA,s^Jo (for 
 nata safeo) a stranger (not 
 knowdng the place), meta-saSo, 
 id. A. safoha to be ignorant, 
 6, id. 
 
 Safa, sefa, or sofa, v. i., to pant, 
 redup. sofasofa to hasten, to 
 run; 
 
 Sofa, s., consumption, hard 
 breathing. [Mg. sefosefo, 
 sevosevo, sevoka, in haste, 
 bustling, to hasten.] H. 
 s'a'af to breathe hard, pant ; 
 to hasten. 
 
 Safa, sefa, sefe, inter, pron., 
 what ? c. art. insef a, nasafa, 
 what 1 Without the art. it is 
 used adjectively as sefe 
 nakasu what tree or wood? 
 With the art. it is used sub- 
 stantively, as i till nasafa 
 what does he say? Safa, is 
 sa, dem., and fa, inter, pron. 
 what ? Compare nefe-te. H. 
 mah, A. ma, Himyaritic ba, 
 id. 
 
 Safana, c. art. nasafana, what 
 that, what (is) there ; safa, 
 and na, dem. : contr. sana. 
 [My. apa, mana, Sa. o le a (a 
 as in Ef. sa), se a, le fea, se 
 fea, Fut. tah a, tefe, tehe ; 
 rufe (dual), takafe (trial), efa 
 (plural), Ta. nufe, nufena, &c., 
 Epi ava-kai, vai, Malo sava, 
 savana. An. inhe, ■ Santo nine, 
 Mg. ino, inona.] 
 
 Safaki, pr. n. Ma safaki, name 
 given to a man who had 
 buried a relative ; a sea 
 
SAF IA] 
 
 animal, so called from burying 
 itself in the sand : afa ki. 
 
 Saf ia, or safi a, v. t., to pluck 
 or gather fruit ; to scrape, safi- 
 safi natano (with a hoe), safi- 
 safi-raki scrape, pluck off the 
 husk from (reeds), safi-nauot 
 to excel ; the chief ; safisafi 
 big, so bisab ; bisif excelling ; 
 misafe to be separated (as 
 fruit from a tree). See also 
 sifa, sifi. [Fi. sivi-a, uasivi, 
 excel.] H. 'asaf gather (as 
 fruits), assemble, draw back, 
 take, take away (as breath) ; 
 radical meaning to scrape, 
 yasaf to add, to increase, to 
 surpass. 
 
 Saga, or sega, s.; a crotch, fork 
 (as made by two branches). 
 [Fi. saga] ; and see nasaga ; 
 
 Saga-fi, V. t., to take hold of 
 with a crotch or forked stick. 
 [Fi. saga-va take hold of with 
 with .tongs.] See sega. A. 
 s'akka, 2, 6, to be sundered, 
 split (wood), s'ikkai half of a 
 thing, part, distance. 
 
 Sag, ad., d., there. [My. sana.] 
 Sa, and g, dem. 
 
 Sagalugalu, d. syn. galugalua : 
 sa-, 
 
 Sagara sa, v. t., to rub, grate, 
 ground on, as a canoe or ship 
 on a reef. [Ha. ili.] Gar ia, 
 and sa-. 
 
 Sago, s., a trumpet (conch). H. 
 thaka', E. takwa to blow a 
 trumpet. 
 
 Sai, V. i., to come forth, go forth 
 into the open (as men), saisai 
 to assemble, sai to shoot forth 
 (of a plant), buka sai (of a 
 blossom expanding into a 
 
 167 [SAKI 
 
 flower), sesai shoot forth (as a 
 serpent), misai to be opened, 
 cracked ; 
 
 Sai ki, V. t., make to go forth or 
 out (as the tongue, hand, any- 
 thing) ; 
 
 Sai a, V. t., to cleave, split, 
 open it (as a secret, &c.), tili 
 sai a tell it out, &c. ; 
 
 Saisai, v. i., assemble (come 
 forth of many) ; also to be 
 associated together, or have 
 in common, ru saisai isa, 
 saisai ki make to assemble ; 
 so or soa a follower, com- 
 panion, associate ; si to blow 
 (with the breath), to shoot 
 (with a gun), si to blow (the 
 wind), d. sui, or si a to rest, 
 or spell (one), to help ; esei in 
 the open, an open space ; bisai 
 ki to put forth, to show ; 
 
 Sai, s., c. art. nesai, a scented, 
 white-leaved plant. A. s'a'a 
 (y) to become open, be di- 
 vulged ; c. prep, bi to make 
 open, divulge ; to leave un- 
 divided ; to follow, 2, to roast ; 
 to blow (with the breath), 3, 
 follow each other ; to aid, 4, 
 make open, s'ai' associate, 
 follower, s'aya' common (to 
 many, see saisai), s'ai' com- 
 mon (to many), not distri- 
 buted ; made open, open ; s'l'at 
 a band, assembly, s'ayu' a lire- 
 stick. 
 
 Saka-fe, s., first ripe fruits or 
 yams. [Ha. oo mua.] See 
 maso, and bea. 
 
 Sakau, s., a reef ; d. a branch. 
 See kasau. [Fi. cakau, Sa. 
 aau.] 
 
 Saki, V. i., to ascend, go up, 
 
SAKi] 
 
 168 
 
 bisaki a, v. c, to put up, to 
 appoint (raise up) a chief ; 
 sakesake to be up, to sit upon, 
 tasaki, id., sakei ki to shout a 
 person's name, attributing 
 something (to him). [Sa, a'i, 
 Ha. ae. To. hake. Ma. eke, 
 whakaeke.] H. nasak, Arm. 
 nsak, imp., sak, id. 
 Saki, t. prep, sa, and ki. [Sa. 
 
 sa'i, Fi. caka. My. skan.] 
 Sala, s. See sela. 
 Sali, V. i., to move lightly, easily, 
 to dance, to float, drift ; sali 
 aki, V. t., to send afloat (a 
 canoe, or anything), to send 
 adrift, inisal, misalsal, d. salsal, 
 light (not heavy), moving 
 easily, lightly. H. 'azal to go 
 quickly (spin along), A. 'azala. 
 Sali a, V. t., to weave. [My. 
 s&ring,] H. 'azal, S. 'zal, A. 
 "azala to spin, weave. 
 Sali a, V. t., to deceive; and re- 
 
 dup., 
 Salisali, to deceive. H. s'alah. 
 
 Hi. to deceive. 
 Salube, d. saluke, v. i., to be 
 ignorant, not to know. A. 
 sarafa, 3), to be ignorant, not 
 to know. 
 Sam, a., or ad., one alone, only : 
 
 sa 1, and m for mau. 
 Samben, d., ad., there : san (sag), 
 
 and ben, v. i. 
 
 Sama ia, v. t., to rasp, scranch 
 
 (sugar cane, in sucking its 
 
 juice). [Ml. U. tsumwi, Ml. 
 
 P. jimue, Malo samai] ; hence 
 
 Sama na, s., dregs, shreds, as of 
 
 sugar cane with the juice 
 
 extracted, sawdust, &c. ; hence 
 
 Sama, v. i., or a., dreggy, 
 
 shreddy : -a ending. H. s'afah 
 
 [SAEAPI 
 
 to scratch, scrape, scrape ofi", 
 S. s'fa' to file, s'ofitha a filing, 
 paring : H. Pual to become 
 bald, bare, naked, exposed (as 
 one's bones). See infra, sema, 
 sesema. 
 
 Samit ia, also samat ia, d. sumat 
 ia, V. t., to beat, chastise. 
 [Fi. samu-ta. My. chamiti, 
 chamati, a whip or scourge.] 
 H. s'amas to thrust, to hasten 
 (see infra, sumati), s'amat to 
 smite, strike, A. s'amasa to 
 impel, thrust, s'amisa to hasten, 
 speak hastily, s'amat, Nm., to 
 whip. 
 
 Samura, s., a thing or word of 
 no consequence, that falls to 
 pieces, as it were : for sabura, 
 saberi-ki 
 
 San, ad., there, here, esan, also 
 esanien. [My. sana.] Esanien 
 is esan there or here, and ien 
 it is. See ani, v. i. 
 
 Sante, s., d. seate na, q.v. 
 
 Sao fi, V. t., to look upon, see, d. 
 sa fi, sao kiana look about (in) 
 his place or plantation. H. 
 s'a'ah, and s'a'ah to look, to 
 look about. 
 
 Sar ia, or sari a, v. t., to saw, 
 also seri a to cut with a sawing 
 motion, sara a saw. [Malo 
 sarosaro to saw, isaro a saw, 
 Fut. seria to saw.] H. nas'ar. 
 Arm. nsar to saw, A. nas'ara, 
 was'ara', as'ara, E. was'ar, 
 wasar, H. sur, to saw, rub, 
 sweep, &c. 
 
 Sara gote fi, to saw asunder. See 
 sera, seru, seri, sore, soro, 
 sar ia. 
 
 Sarafi, used as ad.; bat sarafi a 
 did it hastily, i.e., badly, con- 
 
saeia] 
 
 169 
 
 [SAXJ ROA KI 
 
 fusedly, incompletely. See 
 marafi, and cf. tere ti, su- 
 mati. 
 
 Saria, v. i., to look around ; saria 
 kiana look about, or go about, 
 (in) his plantation. [Fi. sara- 
 sara, v. i., to survey, sara-va, 
 V. t.] H. s'ur (2) to look 
 around or about, (1) to go 
 about. 
 
 Saru, V. i., to hang down pros- 
 trated (as the broken branch 
 of a tree, or a broken arm), 
 misaru, id. A. Sara'a to 
 prostrate, sari' prostrated. 
 
 Saru, V. i., to be loud, noisy, 
 speak aloud, saru goro speak 
 aloud or be noisy, drowning 
 the voice (of someone) ; and 
 redup., 
 
 Paruru, v. i., to roar, resound 
 (as the sea, or a waterfall.) 
 [My. daru, Ja. saru, sru.] A. 
 Sarra, Sarii' to make a noise ; 
 to sound, to cry out vehe- 
 mently, make a great clamour. 
 
 Sas, esas, ad., here: sa, dem. 
 
 Sasana. See sa. 
 
 Sati na, s., the shrivelled and 
 worthless seed yam when the 
 new yam has sucked all the 
 substance out of it : sa. 
 
 Sau-fi, v. t., to scoop, or shave, 
 the surface off water ; to cut 
 or shave off the surface of 
 wood, sau-baba, an adze, lit. 
 plank shaver or cutter — see 
 mataisau a master cutter, 
 carpenter ; to strip off, peel 
 off (as clothes) sau lua i. 
 [Sa. mataisau, saufono, Ma. 
 hau, Tah., Ha., hauhau.] H. 
 s'a'ab to draw water. The 
 primary idea lies in taking off 
 
 the surface, eg. sahaf to 
 sweep, scrape off, hasaf to 
 strip off, A. saliafa to scrape, 
 peel, or rub off, to shave. 
 
 Sau, v. i., to blow (wind) ; 
 
 Sau, s., c. art. insau, gentle 
 breeze, cold air, as in the 
 morning and evening, dew. 
 [Ha., Ma., Tab., hau, Sa. sau.] 
 H. nas'af to blow, nes'ef the 
 evening twilight, when a 
 colder gale blows; the morning 
 twilight. 
 
 Sau, v., to desire, mesau na, v. t., 
 desire, tumana sau ki nia to 
 boast, speak well of himself, 
 praise himself (lit. desires 
 himself), sau roa i to mock 
 such a one by pretending 
 maliciously to join with him 
 in such boasting, insau a gift, 
 sautoga, id., a free gift, hence, 
 as ad., for nothing ; sau uia 
 [Fi. sau vinaka] liberal in 
 giving, sau sa [Fi. sau ca] 
 stingy, sau mitaki, d., syn. 
 sau uia ; sau sera greedy 
 (desiring everything). A. 
 s'aha' to desire, 2, to say I 
 will give what you desire, 3, 
 to be like (someone), 4, to 
 give to one what he desires, 
 5, 8, to desire (a thing). 
 
 Sautoga, s. See preceding word. 
 
 Sau-taki, v. t., to place upon, as 
 food upon food already in the 
 oven, or as a speech upon a 
 speech by another previously 
 spoken ; 
 
 Sau roa ki, or sau rouo ki, v. t., 
 to place (their voices) with 
 accuracy together, as giving a 
 shout all together : sau, and 
 rouo or roa ki to cast down, 
 
SAUA Ia] 
 
 or make to fall. H. sura (sam) 
 to put, to set, to place. 
 
 Saua ia, v. t., to fix (as upon a 
 shelf, in a fork of a tree, &c.) 
 See soa ki (for saua ki) ; 
 
 Saua ia, v. t., to shoot with an 
 arrow called saua ; 
 
 Saua (sawa), s., a pronged arrow 
 (which adheres tenaciously), 
 A. nas'aba to stick, inhere, 
 be fixed tenaciously, 2, make a 
 thing be so, 4, id., nos's'aba< 
 an arrow, Nm. nas'ab, 2, to 
 shoot, squirt, fie, into. 
 
 S6, or s, dem., this, here. See sa. 
 S6 is the common form. 
 
 Se, inter, ad., where ? See sa, 
 safa. 
 
 Se a. See so ia. 
 
 Sea, sesea, or seasea (redup.), v., 
 to forget, be forgetful, sesea 
 gor ia forget him. See maga- 
 seasea. A. saha to forget, be 
 forgetful. 
 
 Seara, d., some, a few. S. z'ura 
 small, pi. z'ure' a few (Gen. 
 xxix. 20.) 
 
 Seats, s., a firestick (by which 
 the fire can be rekindled), dd. 
 santS, ta, sa. See sai. 
 
 Sefa, sefe, or sifi. See safa what? 
 This inter, is sometimes used 
 indefinitely in the sense of 
 whatever, however, as a belake 
 namanuka sifi naga I have 
 received, or I carry, a wound 
 however now (or here), fatu 
 sefa a stone however, or what- 
 soever. A. ma qualiscunque. 
 
 Sega, s., or saga, q.v., a crotch, 
 fork. 
 
 Sega, s. , a part ; it takes the 
 nominal suf., as segamu a part 
 of you, segara a part of them 
 
 170 [SELA TI 
 
 or some of them, any part of 
 them, one or more of them. 
 See saga. 
 
 Sei, d. fei, inter, pron., sing., who? 
 pi. se mai, d. se mani, d. kihe 
 (for kise) raaga. [Sa. 'o ai, 
 Tah. o vai. .Ma. a wai (pi, a 
 wai ma). To. ko hai, a hai, Er. 
 me, Ta. ba (pi. niba min), Epi 
 kei, d. sie, Malo isei, My. 
 siapa, siyapa, sapa, mana, 
 Mg. zovy, iza.] H. mi who? 
 N'oTB. — Sei is for sef ei : se 
 dem. 
 
 Seka, V. i., to sit ; seka ki to sit 
 about, or on (someone, or 
 thing, consult about it or him) ; 
 biseka, v. r., to sit with some- 
 one, or with each other. H. 
 s'akan (A. sakana, H. sakan), 
 s'aken to set oneself down, to; 
 lie down, to rest, to abide, 
 dwell. 
 
 S§k e a, ske a, v. t,, to raise up, 
 set upright : saki. 
 
 SSke-mau, v. i., to swear, s6ke, 
 and mau true : a man who 
 swore, as in denying a charge, 
 often tore ofi' his loin cloth, 
 and imprecated all kinds of 
 calamities upon himself if he 
 were not speaking the truth. 
 A. sahaga to peel, scratch; 
 comb the hair, saliug' fre- 
 quently and rapidly swearing. 
 
 Sekof ia, v. t., to catch rapidly 
 with the hand (a thing 
 thrown). A. zakafa to take 
 rapidly, snatch, 8, to take with 
 the hand, snatch quickly. 
 
 Sela ti, V. t., to bear, carry ; d. 
 sola ti ; selasela (of many) ; 
 sela bear (a child), bisela v. r., 
 to bear, bring forth, nafiselan 
 
SELA GISA Na] 
 
 171 
 
 SERA IX 
 
 child-bearing, childbirth, d. 
 bisol. [Fi. oola-ta.] E. sawar 
 to bear, carry. 
 
 Sela gisa na, v. t., to call his 
 name (so and so) ; selk ki, 
 V. t., attribute to (one, some- 
 thing) ; sela go, as sela tera 
 ki go after (one), sela butuaki 
 go between two points, be of 
 two minds ; 
 
 Sela, s., road, path ; landing- 
 place of canoe ; a portion of 
 time (cf. mal place, time). 
 [My. salekan to call, saleh 
 proceed, saleh a road.] A. 
 s'ala' to proceed, 4, to call. 
 
 Sel ia, V. t., to bind. [Fi. soli-a.J 
 H. 'asar to bind, S. 'sar. 
 
 Sel sa, to be unable, selu 6ia be 
 able, sele atai na&o na be able 
 to know his mind, d. for sili 
 atai na6o na, lit. to know 
 (how) to enter his mind, i.e., to 
 understand his secret views : 
 sili. 
 
 Seloa, s., a flat wooden dish. 
 [Mg. soliaka, flat, as a dish.] 
 H. selalia, pi., pans, such as 
 were flat and broad, not deep, 
 A. zululi' large pans, E. salil, 
 platter. 
 
 Sema, sesema, v. i., to be bare, 
 sticking out (as one's bones), 
 or as the point of an auger or 
 piercing instrument : sama ia. 
 
 Semasema, v. i., to. rejoice. H. 
 samah to rejoice. 
 
 Sema ni, v. t., to praise, glorify. 
 S. s'abah, Pa., to praise, glorify, 
 
 Semanien, s., c. art., praise, glory, 
 also act of praising. 
 
 Samasamana, or semasemana, 
 V. i., or a., disgusting: -na, a. 
 ending. A. zahuma, H. zaham, 
 
 to stink, become rancid, filthy, 
 disgusting. 
 
 Semam, s., paternal aunt, ana 
 semam his aunt : susu, mam. 
 
 Semen, or saman, s., the out- 
 rigger of a canoe, or, more 
 accurately, the part of the 
 outrigger, shaped exactly like 
 a canoe, which floats in the 
 water. [An. jmaig, i.e. jimaig, 
 Ta. timen, TaSa. tsania, Fi. 
 cama, cama kau a canoe whose 
 outrigger is only a stick (kau), 
 in distinction from a double 
 canoe ; To. hama the smaller 
 canoe of a double canoe. My. 
 sampan a small boat, Mg. 
 sambo a ship.] A. safinai!, 
 safin', H., . S., seflna, ship, 
 vessel. 
 
 Note. — The Tongan hama 
 suggests that the semen or 
 saman was originally not a 
 mere log fashioned into the 
 shape of a canoe, but a real 
 canoe, and that the outrigger 
 canoe of Oceania is a degen- 
 erate form of the " double 
 canoe." 
 
 Semani, s., the rudder, or steer- 
 ing oar of a canoe, d. uose- 
 man. [Paama seman, TaSa. 
 lamani.] Se in semani is 
 contr. for uose, q.v., oar, and 
 mani is manu, a bird, a figure 
 of which (a bird) was carved 
 on the stern of the canoe 
 where the steering oar is held 
 firmly in steering : hence the 
 rudder was called uose-man 
 the oar of the bird. 
 
 Sera ia, v. t., to bind, fasten on, 
 as the handle of a basket on 
 a hook, sera ki, id., sera-goro- 
 
SERA loaman] 172 
 
 bau a hat, lit. fasten upon the 
 head. H. s'arar to twist, be 
 firm; S. s'rar to be firm, s'arar 
 to make firm, stable, Aph. 
 'as'ar to firmly believe. Hence 
 
 Sera loaman, seralesoko, believe 
 true ; 
 
 Sera loJalo, sera teamole, believe 
 worthless, despise ; 
 
 Sera tea sa, sera tea uia, believe 
 bad, believe good ; 
 
 Sera masika, make firm desire ; 
 
 Sera sog, make firm sog, q.v. ; 
 
 Sera gor ia, make firm upon, or 
 covering. 
 
 Sera ia, v. t., to sweep (as a 
 house), tea sesera, a sweeper, 
 broom ; 
 
 Sera, v. i., to run (water, stream, 
 which sweeps its bed). See 
 under sar ia, saw, rub, sweep, 
 &c. Hence 
 
 Sera guru-maki, v. t., sweep 
 gathering together ; and 
 
 Sera kuruk, v. mid., id. ; and 
 
 Sera taua ki, v. t., sweep into 
 heaps ; and 
 
 Sera lo tua, v. t., sweep things 
 giving (them) to (someone), 
 used of men telling an evil 
 doer of his misconduct and its 
 consequences. Hence 
 
 Seralotu, v. mid., to repent ; and 
 
 Sera tua, v. t., to sweep (to- 
 gether thingsj giving (them) 
 to (someone), as a peace offer- 
 ing ; and 
 
 Sera biri ki, syn. gura biri ki, 
 to startle ; and 
 
 Sera makoto ki, id. See sar ia. 
 
 Sera gisa na, d. for sela gisa na ; 
 
 Sera usi, v. t., to call (pronounce) 
 after (one, as in learning to 
 read) ; sela, and usi. 
 
 [SEBI 
 
 Sera lua, v. t., to remove (cloth- 
 ing, (fee, from one ; also cere- 
 monial uncleanness, sera lua 
 namam), make to go out, or 
 away. A. sara, 2, remove, 
 make to go ; sar', and sair', the 
 whole, every, part, some, any. 
 Hence 
 
 Sera, any, some ; sera-rogo, sera 
 nalo, something, anything ; 
 every, sera natamole every 
 man; the whole, aU (with 
 nom. suf.) sera ra, serasera ra, 
 the whole, all, of them, every 
 of them, sera bakauti era 
 every of them all ; every 
 (kind), sau-sera greedy, ba 
 sera going every (where), a 
 vagabond ; also, d., i nuf sera 
 it is finished all [Fi. sara, 
 ad.] ; bisera, biserasera of 
 every kind (i bisera, i.e., i hi 
 sera it is (in) every (kind, or 
 sort). 
 
 Sera ia, v. t., to rend asunder, as 
 the two branches of a forked 
 stick ; misera rent asunder. 
 A. Sara, 3), wrench asunder. 
 
 Sera, or sere ia, or serei a, v. t., 
 to importune, entreat. A. 
 nazara to ask importunately, 
 to entreat pressingly. 
 
 Serab, v. i., to flow out (as of a 
 vessel, run over). A. sariba 
 to flow (of water), sarab' 
 flowing out. 
 
 Sere ra, v. t., dwell among, near 
 them, bisere to be among, 
 near, bakasere a, and masere, 
 q.v. A. 'asara, 3, to be near, 
 6, to be near to each other, 
 'isr' love, &c. 
 
 Seri, v., to be unable to do a 
 thing (from old age and infirm- 
 
SEEI a] 173 
 
 ity) ; seri nalo forsake, leave, 
 abandon a thing, bakaseri a, 
 to loose (a prohibition, or 
 tabu). [Fi. sere-ka untie, un- 
 loose.] H. s'arah, Ch. sera, to 
 loose, Pi. s'ereh to loose, to 
 desert, leave. 
 
 Seri a, v. t., to speak of, decide, 
 consult about ; make a sign, 
 show. A. s'ara, 2, 3, &o., 
 make a sign, show, consult. 
 
 Seri a, v. t., to strain ; sari is 
 strain with it, nakalu sari 
 straining cloth. S. slal (sal) 
 to strain. 
 
 Seri a, v. t., to hollow out (as a 
 canoe). H. sur to hollow out. 
 See sar ia. 
 
 Seri, v., as seri taku-ra, to cover 
 their back, seri namaseri, or 
 namiseri, put on the miseri, q.v. 
 
 Seri a, seri goto. See sar ia. 
 
 Seritau, s., the cutter-up of a 
 human body for the oven, 
 Seritau, or Saritau, or Sara, 
 pr. n. of a demon who is lord 
 over the entrance to Hades, 
 and whose helpers are Mase- 
 asi, Faus, and Maki. See sar 
 ia, and tau. 
 
 Sere, as nakasu i tuba sere 
 nakalu the stick thrust tear- 
 ing the cloth, masere torn : 
 sar ia. 
 
 Sereserea, or seriseria, v. i., or 
 a., to be hairy, hirsute ; a. 
 ending a. A. s'a'ira to be hairy. 
 
 Sesere, d., rub, grate. Same as 
 sesera. 
 
 Sera mind, d., syn. sera bakauti; 
 and 
 
 Serume (sera 'me) : sera, and me, 
 or mind, contr. of mau, mamau. 
 
 Seru ea, v. t., rub, wash (clothes. 
 
 [SIBI, 
 
 &c.), seseru, rub (as oil on the 
 head). Same as sesere, sesera: 
 sar ia. 
 
 Seru, s., a comb. [Fi. seru, Sa. 
 selu, My. sisir, syn. garu.] 
 Sar ia. 
 
 Sfes, d., to be small : sos. 
 
 Si, V. See su finished off. 
 
 Si a, V. t., scrape, cut (si nabora 
 na scrape the cheeks with a 
 shell removing the skin) ; sisi 
 a, redup. A. saha', n. a. sahy'^ 
 scrape oflf, with the notion of 
 cutting. Nm. also to harrow 
 (the ground). 
 
 Si, sisi, to blow (wind, breath) ; 
 si a, V. t., to blow (a thing, as 
 the fire), to shoot (with a 
 gun) ; si-ruku : sai. 
 
 Si a, d. sui a, to help : sai. 
 
 Si, particle after verbs (t. prep.), 
 as libi si ; sa in saki, as rogo- 
 saki. [Sa. si, Fi. ca. My. s, Mg. 
 zi.] Assy, sa, prep., originally 
 dem., Mahri sh', prep. 
 
 Siba ia, d. suba ia, v. t., to break 
 (as a yam), redup. sisiba 
 and sibasiba ia ; masiba, ma- 
 sibasiba to be broken, na 
 masiba a fragment. [Fi. 
 sove, kasove, Mg. somba, 
 simba.] Ch. s'ibeb to break 
 in pieces, s'iba a fragment. 
 
 Sibu na, s., feathers (short) on 
 a bird's back. A. zifiu small 
 feathers (of a bird). 
 
 Sieg, v.i., to hang on the waist 
 cloth (of a woman) ; and 
 
 Sieg, s., c. art. nasieg, a woman's 
 waist cloth. A. was's'aha, v., 
 id., wus'ah', s., id. 
 
 Siel, a., red. [My. serah.] A. 
 s'ahila to be of a dark reddish 
 (&c.) colour. 
 
SIP a] 174 
 
 Sifa, V. i., to depart, withdraw; 
 sifa ki, V. t., make to depart, 
 toss, throw away, sifesife, 
 redup. ; sifa, v. i., to assemble. 
 See safi. 
 
 Sifanua, s., a cannon, lit. shoot 
 the land : si fanua. 
 
 Sjfili, and sifili ki, d., transposed 
 for sili fi, sili fiki. 
 
 Sifiri, s., parrot. A. safara to 
 sibilate. 
 
 Sig, v., redup. sigsig, v., to be 
 rebellious, disobedient; sigsig- 
 leo (leo thing, or voice) to be 
 disobedient, to sin, sigsigleo ki 
 to be disobedient to (one), 
 nasigsigleoen disobedience, sin, 
 bisig, V. r., to be disobedient 
 to someone or to each other. 
 [Mg. odina rebellious, miodina 
 to rebel.] A. 'asa' to be re- 
 bellious, disobedient, 'isyan' 
 rebellion, disobedience. 
 
 :Sigir ia, v. t., or c, to strengthen : 
 gara, and caus. pref. si. [Cf. 
 syn. My. mangkras kan, My. 
 mampahery.] 
 
 :Sikara, v. i., or a., prickly, spiny, 
 and of hair standing on end : 
 ending -ra. A. s'aka, 2, to be 
 
 - spiny, hirsute, s'akai' spiny. 
 
 ■Sik e a,- V. t., d. siko e, to 
 avenge : soka ria. 
 
 Sik e a, or sek e a, to raise : saki ; 
 hence 
 
 Sike-rau, d. si-rau ki, or si5-rau 
 ki, to raise or lift up a leaf 
 (rau), presenting cooked food 
 to one to be eaten. 
 
 Sike, to be swearing, and 
 
 .Sike-mau (see sgke-mau), to swear 
 true ; and 
 
 Sike, V. t., to comb (the hair) : 
 sSke-mau. 
 
 [siko ti 
 
 Sike ti, V. t., redup. sikisiki, to 
 grasp with tongs, or with a 
 forked stick ; hence 
 
 Esike, s., tongs, syn. uataki. 
 H. Iiazak to hold fast, stick 
 fast (A. liazaka). Hi. to take 
 hold of, seize. 
 
 Sikitau, s., only child : sikai, 
 sikei, totau. 
 
 Sikai, or sikei, num., one, d. siki- 
 tika (redup.) : tesa (in la-tesa, 
 q.v., d. la-teha), also in mas- 
 iki, d. mihi, also in gisa, mas, 
 sam ; and 
 
 Siki, with nom. suf. (translated 
 in this case as nominative, as 
 in H. and A.), as sikina (his 
 one) he alone, sikira (their 
 one) they alone, &c. In i 
 sikina uia (and similar express- 
 ions) the meaning is he alone 
 is good, i.e., he is incompar- 
 ably good ; and 
 
 Sikiskei, one (by) one ; sikiski 
 gisa one by one together, and 
 see bakasikei. H. 'ahad, Mod. 
 S. lida, &c. 
 
 Note. — The ki or kei in 
 siki, sikei is non-radical, as ka 
 in Mg. isaka, iraika. [Mg. 
 isa, iray, also isaka, iraika, 
 My. asa, sa, Sa. tasi.] 
 
 Siko e, V. t., to avenge, d. sik e a : 
 soka ria. 
 
 Siko sa, V. t., to gaze at ; siko 
 mau isa to gaze continually 
 (see mau) at, redup. sikosiko ; 
 hence 
 
 Siko, s., kingfisher, lit. gazer 
 (because it sits gazing into the 
 water for fish). H. sakah. Oh. 
 seka', to look at, to contem- 
 plate. 
 
 Siko ti, or siku ti, v. t., to 
 
SIKI-NAKi] 
 
 adhere to (someone), continue 
 or dwell with. A. 'as'ika to 
 adhere to (someone). 
 
 Siki-naki, v. t., to abhor, loathe, 
 abominate, d. masuku-taki, or 
 musuku-taki. A. zahah, Nm., 
 to take disgust for, loathe. 
 
 Sila ia, v. t., as ta sila ia chop, 
 peeling or shaving off, chop or 
 cut a thin shaving off ; hence 
 
 Masiia na, s., a shaving, chip ; 
 and masila, masilasila, to be 
 thin. [Mg. silaka and silatra 
 to peel, bark, skin, chip off.] 
 A. saJiala to peel, bark, shave, 
 or scale off, mashul' small. 
 
 Sila, v., to crack, as thunder, 
 boro silai a, buru masila, id., 
 silasila, redup., ta silasila, id. 
 [Sa. faitilitili. Ma. whatiri, 
 Ha. hekili.] A. salla, salsala, 
 to sound, to crack (thunder), 
 musalsir braying (an ass). 
 
 Sila ia, v. t., to help, aid, support, 
 strengthen, tasila (dd. tasiga, 
 ahika) helper, supporter, sil 
 wall plate {supporter of roof), 
 tua-sfl givers of support (to a 
 chief, as giving food or other 
 aid when he is making a feast, 
 &c.). A. 'azara, 2, to aid, help, 
 strengthen, support, make firm, 
 H. 'azar to help, aid. Hence 
 
 Sil, s., wall plate (supporter) of a 
 house, help (tua sil give aid or 
 help). 
 
 Sila ia, or sela ia, d. sol ia, sila- 
 sila ia, V. t., to rub, as to rub 
 (oneself with oil, &c,) [Fi. 
 sola-ta rub, Sa. soloi wipe, Ma. 
 horoi wash, Ha. holoi wash, 
 wipe, brush, Mg. soroka 
 sweep.] Cg. sera, seru, &c. See 
 sar ia. 
 
 176 [SIMBOLO 
 
 Sili ki, or sila ki, v. t., make 
 to shake (anything ; if water, 
 to sprinkle), silisili ki, id., to 
 pour out, shake out, throw 
 away, throw down, ru sili ki 
 fisera they flee in different 
 directions (those overcome in 
 battle), lit. they throw (them- 
 selves, shake out, or scatter 
 themselves) in different (or 
 every, or all) directions. H. 
 zalal to shake, mate tremble, 
 pour out, shake out, A. zalzala 
 to shake, make to tremble. 
 
 Sili, V. t., to enter, sila isa enter 
 it (a house), enter him, that is 
 enter under his protection ; 
 sili fi a enter into him (as a 
 spirit or demon into a man) ; 
 sili-faki, or sili-fiki make to 
 enter into, also thrust or throw 
 into (anything into anything). 
 [Sa. sulu thrust into, take 
 refuge, sulu-fa'i, and sulu-ma'i. 
 My. julok thrust into, Mg. 
 joloka enter, Fi. curu, curu- 
 curu, curu-ma, curu-maka, 
 enter, push, or thrust into.] 
 A. daliala, n. a. duh'ul', to 
 enter (a house) ; take refuge 
 with, 2, make to enter, 4, 
 make to enter, thrust, <fec., in. 
 This word is used much with 
 t. prep, bi or fi, as in sili-fi, &c., 
 and to denote among other 
 things the entering into a man 
 of a spirit or demon. See 
 alialia. 
 
 Simi-ki-leo, or sima-leo, d. suma- 
 ki-leo, s., echo, lit. sound of 
 the voice. A. zamai vehement 
 sound, and leo. 
 
 Simbolo, s., d., a basket. Cf. A. 
 zibbir, zimbil', id. 
 
sina] 
 
 Sina, or sine, v. i., to shine, be 
 clear, us i sine the rain clears 
 up, Fi. uca sa siga. [Fi. siga 
 sun, day, My. siyang day, 
 clear.] A. Saba', E. Sallawa, 
 H. Saball, to shine, be clear ; 
 sun, day, in derivatives. 
 
 Sinu, sisinu, v. i., to be hot, 
 burn (of the grass on the hills, 
 yearly), to be inflamed (of 
 one's face) nako na i slnu his 
 face is inflamed (with passion) ; 
 hence 
 
 Sinu, s., c. art., the burning of 
 the grass on the hills ; a place 
 on which the grass has been 
 burned : see also tunu, bitunu, 
 d. bitsin. [Sa sunu.] A. 
 sah'ana, n. a. suh'un', to be 
 hot, sali'una and sah'ina to be 
 hot, 2, to heat, suli'n' and 
 Suh'n' hot, H. s'ahan, S. s'hen, 
 to be hot, inflamed (sore), heat 
 oneself at the fire. 
 
 Siora, s., a pipe for drawing ofi" 
 water from one place and 
 pouring it out at another ; 
 said to be for sie rau (for 
 sike rau, lit. lift up, dist- 
 ribute). 
 
 Si-rau, or sierau, contr. of sike- 
 rau. 
 
 Sirak, a., used as s., for sitaki, 
 i.e., si taki blow, heeling over 
 (a canoe), a squall or high 
 wind : si to blow, and taki to 
 incline over. 
 
 Siri ki, v. t., to scatter, sprinkle, 
 of seeds, water, siri kia ki, 
 i.e., siri ki uia ki scatter or 
 sow well (seeds) ; and 
 
 Sirisir ia, v. t., to scatter (or 
 sprinkle) on him (as water or 
 blood spirting on one) ; 
 
 176 [siUA 
 
 Siri, V. i., to sprout, shoot (of a 
 plant) ; and 
 
 Siria, d., v. i. (-a, ending), to 
 sprout, shoot ; and 
 
 Siri na, s., c. art., a shoot, sprout ; 
 and used of men, offspring ; 
 hence in proper names of 
 children and men, siri (seed, 
 offspring) as siri fakal, &c. 
 H. zara' scatter, disperse, 
 especially to scatter seed, sow, 
 bear seed (of a plant), zere' 
 seed, offspring, A. zara'a 
 scatter seed, to produce plants. 
 
 Sisi a, si a, redup. ; hence 
 
 Sis, s., a shell used for scraping. 
 
 Sisi, V. i., redup. of si to blow; 
 hence 
 
 Sisi, s., a gun ; si fanua a cannon. 
 
 Sito, V. i., cacavit, A. s'abata 
 8), cacavit. 
 
 Siu, s., a pricker, or awl (a 
 sharpened bone). [To. hui, 
 needle or pin (of bone).] A. 
 s'i'a' a prick, spike. See sui. 
 
 Siua (siwa), v. i., to hunt for 
 fish, or shellfish (on the reef), 
 siue a (siua ia) v. t., hunt (fish, 
 or shellfish, on the reef). A. 
 safa (u) to examine or explore 
 the ground by the smell, hence 
 to hunt. 
 
 Siuer (siwer), dd. suuara, surata, 
 v. i., to walk, proceed, go away, 
 sisiuer, redup., walk about. 
 [Sa. savali, savalivali, sava- 
 liga.] A. safara, 3, n. a. 
 sifar', to make a journey, go 
 away. 
 
 Siua, or sua, d. siuo (siwo), v. i., 
 to descend. [Sa. ifo. To. hifo.] 
 S. s'bab, s'ab, part, s'o'eb (Acts 
 xi. 5) to be let down, to 
 descend. 
 
so 
 
 E] 
 
 So e, d.se a (for so ia), v. t., to 
 call (one) ; 
 
 Soso, V. t., redup., to call, sos ia 
 (for soso ia) call him : also in 
 bioso, rasoso, rafioso. E. saw'a 
 to call, H. s'ua', Pi. 
 
 Soa, s., c. art. asoa na, com- 
 panion, follower, or neso (art. 
 ne), especially of the opposite 
 sex, hence tauso, q.v. : sai. 
 [Fi. sa.] 
 
 Soi, d., V. t. See si a, to Scrape. 
 [Fi. so-ya, soi.] Hence 
 
 Soi, or soia, s., the hole scraped 
 out for the yam to be planted 
 in. 
 
 Soa ki, soiia ki. See saua ki. 
 
 Soa ni, or soh ni, v. t., to mock. 
 A. haza' to mock. 
 
 Sokr ia, or souar ia, v. t., to 
 abrade, scrape, scratch, as rago 
 i souari rarua the roller 
 scrapes, scratches, or tears by 
 scraping, or abrades (the bot- 
 tom of) the canoe, souasouar 
 ia, redup., and so^ra, or souara, 
 V. i , to split open (as a ripe 
 seed, pod, or banana), i.e., to 
 be abraded, or uncover or 
 abrade itself. S. safar to 
 shaye, to abrade, H^ safar (to 
 scratch, polish), to write, A. 
 safara to sweep, uncover the 
 face (a woman), to shine (the 
 dawn), H. s'afar (scratch, pol- 
 ish), be bright, beautiful, Ch. 
 s'gfarpara, S. s'afra the dawn. 
 See ante, asouara, or asoara 
 the rainbow, i.e., the beautiful, 
 or brilliant. 
 
 Soata, V. i., to slip. A. dahas'a 
 to slip, E. deh^s'a. 
 
 Sobu, V. i. , to spring up ; also to 
 spring up, arise (of the first 
 
 177 [soK 
 
 beginning of anything), and to 
 begin, or be the first to do some- 
 thing. See futum (bisobu, 
 &c.) 
 
 Sobe na, s., c. art., the nape or 
 back of the neck. E. zaban 
 id., A. zabbunai neck. 
 
 Sofa, sofasofa, v. i., sofa, s. See 
 sefa. 
 
 Sog ia, or sogi a, v. t., d. sug ia. 
 ' Sogo ni a, v. t., to press upon, 
 compress (one, as by crowding 
 upon him), to straiten, sogo- 
 sogo ni, redup. ; 
 
 Sog, or sogi, s., what straitens, 
 compulsion, force, constraint, 
 &c., as i meri sogi au makes 
 or uses constraint or force upon 
 me (to compel me to do some- 
 thing), i till sog soko ia he 
 declares force or compulsion 
 upon him (to make him pay 
 a fine, or to suffer death, 
 as the case may be). [My. 
 s&sak straitened, sSsakkan to 
 straiten.] H. suk. Hi. (A. 
 S'aka, 2), to straiten, compress, 
 press, urge upon, force, compel, 
 H. sok distress. 
 
 Soga, s., c. art., d. nasok, dust, 
 rubbish, a lot of things 
 (belonging to one) ; 
 
 Sogasoga, id. ; hence 
 
 Soga-leba, s., a rich man, lit. big 
 lot of things ; and, d., 
 
 Sogoa, V. i;, or a. (ending, 'a), rich; 
 
 Sok, d. soga, s. ; 
 , Soksok, d. sogasoga, s. ; 
 
 Sok-leb, d, soga-leba ; also 
 
 Sok, s., d., c. art., a cloud. H. 
 s'abak dust, a cloud, A. 
 sah'k' ; the verb signifies to 
 rub, hence dust (from being 
 rubbed small). 
 
 13 
 
soka] 178 
 
 Note. — Sogoa lit. signifies 
 full of dust, dusty, dust being 
 taken in the sense which is 
 given it in the vulgar English 
 phrase " to come down with 
 the dust." 
 Soka, V, i., to leap, jump, go 
 swiftly ; to be violently ex- 
 cited, inflamed with anger (of 
 the belly) ; soka ia, v. t., to 
 spear ; inivit mulierem ; soka- 
 ba, V. i., to go swiftly away, 
 hence, s., what goes swiftly 
 away, a worthless or lost thing 
 or person ; soka-ba ki, v. t. , 
 throw away, make to be soka- 
 ba ; soka ki, v. t., make to 
 soka, throw. A. zak'k'a, 4), 
 leap, 2), inivit mulierem, 5), 
 go with vehemence, 6), to be 
 angry, burn with rage. 
 Sok, s., c. art., what stops or 
 
 blocks, as a dam : suk ia. 
 Soka ri, v. t., to join on to (one 
 thing on to another), then to 
 repay (one thing by another, 
 the one thing being regarded 
 as joining on to, or touching, 
 the other), to avenge (one 
 slain, by slaying another, also 
 sike a, d. siko e) ; soka-soka 
 ri, redup. ; 
 Sokarien, s., c. art., a joining, as 
 a splice ; repayment, retribu- 
 tion, vengeance ; 
 Soka-taki, v. t., to join on to, to 
 meet, tumara soka-taki ra 
 meet together. H. nas'ak (A. 
 nasaka), to join, 2), kiss (join 
 mouth to mouth), join on to 
 each other, meet (of two 
 things). Hi. to join on to (one 
 thing on to another). 
 Soko, V. i., or a., to be true. 
 
 [SOEO 
 
 true, as naleona i soko sa his 
 voice (prediction) is true as to 
 or about it (thing predicted, 
 as is known when it takes 
 place as foretold), le- or lo- 
 soki, a true thing, truth, till 
 lesoko to speak truth, d. tili 
 inori speak true, d. tili lo- 
 amau speak truth. See also 
 masoko. [Sa. sa'o straight, 
 correct, right. My. sungguh 
 truei.] A. Sadaka, n. a. Sadk', 
 to be true, H. sadak to be 
 straight, right, just. 
 Soli a, V. t , rub. See sila ia, id. 
 Soli, sosoli, V. i., to creep {i.e., to 
 rub or scrape along the ground, 
 of. karafi) ; 
 Asolat, s., a worm : a, art. [Sa. 
 totolo, ps. tolofia, Put. toro, 
 Ha. kolo, TaSa. tari, Malo 
 nsalansala, to creep, sulati a 
 worm.] H. zahal to creep, 
 crawl. 
 Sore, V. i., to lie, be untruthful, 
 
 d. bisuru ; 
 Soresore, id. H. zur to turn 
 
 aside, A. zara tell lies. 
 Sor ia, or sori a, v. t., to give (a 
 thing). [Fi. soli a give, My. 
 s&rah and srah to submit, 
 sSrah kan to give.] A. s'ara'a, 
 1, to submit, 4, to give. 
 Soro, V. i., to burn, flame, soro 
 fi, V. t., send a flame on to, 
 also to treat with violence, to 
 rush violently and with savage 
 rage upon (as a wild pig 
 charging a man), bakasoro- 
 soro fi, V. c, make the fire to 
 burn up. [Mg. doro, sa, tolo, 
 matoro.] A. sa'ara to kindle 
 (a fire, war), 2, to rage (of a 
 camel), 3, to treat with cruelty 
 
SOROA sa] 179 
 
 and rage, so'r' blaze of fire, 
 rage, insanity, sa'ir' flame of 
 fire, fire bursting into flame. 
 
 Soroa sa, v. t., to covet, desire ; 
 
 Soro, a. used as s., a covetous 
 person, and see miseroa. A. 
 s'ariha to covet. 
 
 Soroa, d., v. i., to be sick, syn. 
 sasana. A. s'arro fever, and 
 a. ending, from s'arra to be 
 bad, as sasana from sa. 
 
 Soroa, s., c. art., d. tiroa. 
 
 Sore a, v. t., to saw (one, of the 
 breakers sawing one on the 
 reef) ; and 
 
 Soro aki, v. t., to make a man's 
 body saw on the reef (of the 
 waves or breakers) : sar ia. 
 
 Sos, v. i., to shrink, become con- 
 tracted, as cloth when wet, 
 india rubber, &c., to be small 
 (syn. mito), d. ses small, little. 
 A. 'aza', 4), to be contracted, 
 made small, also 'aziya, 3), to 
 be contracted, 2), to contract, 
 4, to diminish, 
 
 Su, sua, V. i., to rise up (tobu i 
 tubu sua swells up) as ground • 
 in which the growing yams 
 are swelling (cf . lua) ; another 
 form of this word is tu to 
 stand up ; 
 
 Su raka ti, v. t. (to take up, 
 lift up), to startle ; 
 
 Sua i, V. t., to take up, lift up, 
 then to take, receive, obtain, 
 acquire, as i su naleo he 
 obtained something ; and to 
 bear, as i su nafolofolon sa 
 anena he bore his sin, i.e., 
 he received its punishment; 
 and to meet, as i sua nata 
 he met a person, bisua, v. 
 r. ; su-naki to carry on the 
 
 [su NA 
 
 head (of women), su-ni to 
 put on (clothes), hence susu 
 clothed (having clothes upon 
 or carried or borne by one) ; 
 to meet or take up the (odour 
 of a thing) su rogi naSon. 
 The notion of meeting is in 
 that of lifting oneself or rising 
 up against (one) ; and a 
 swelling in the skin is said to 
 sua, i.e., raise itself up, it rises 
 up ; su (nasuma), s., the upper 
 part (ridge-pole) of a house, 
 and masua, s., the highest part 
 or top of anything. Su or sua 
 is also used in proper names 
 of children, as Sua ragoa, &c. 
 H. nasa' to take up, lift up, E. 
 nasa' take, receive, A. nas'a' 
 be exalted, grow, to bear, 
 carry, to bear one's sin, that 
 is, to receive its punishment. 
 H. si', sg'eth height, a raising 
 or lifting up, a rising up in 
 the skin, A. nas'a' to grow up, 
 to. be raised, high, 4, to pro- 
 duce, 10, perceive or feel the 
 odour (of a thing), nasa' sprout 
 or shoot (of a plant) — sua (in 
 pr. names), young people. 
 
 Su, d. si, v., finished off, as i nu 
 su, it is ended or completed, 
 finished ofi", i bati su e a he 
 has finished off doing it ; i 
 bano su he has gone, he has 
 finished off' going, completed 
 going. The word thus forms 
 with any other verb a com- 
 pleted tense denoting that 
 what is expressed by the first 
 verb is finished off. See under 
 maso to be done. 
 
 Su na, s., c. art., highest part (as 
 ridge of a house, or top of the 
 
su na] 180 
 
 head), cf. masua na top (of 
 anything) : su, or sua. 
 
 Sii na, s., c. art. nasu na, q.v., 
 juice. 
 
 Sua, for suua (suwa), siua, siuo. 
 
 Sua, s., brother. See tai. 
 
 Suasua, V. i., to be willing ; and 
 
 Sua ki, V. t., to impel, order, 
 send. See bisuaki. A. s'ayaya, 
 1, to be willing, to will, 2, to 
 impel. 
 
 Suara, or suuara (suwara), 
 susuara, d. siuer, q.v. 
 
 Suara, v. t., to meet (as a head 
 wind, any obstruction in one's 
 way) : sua, and ara, v. t. 
 
 Suer, V. i., d. suerai. 
 
 Suerai, v; i., to put out rai, i.e., 
 tai, q.v., dung, cacavit : sui, 
 see si, v.t., and tai. 
 
 Suer ia, v. t., to vituperate, d. 
 sur. A. zara to vituperate. 
 
 Suba ia. See siba ia. 
 
 Su6e, v. t., to place, determine, 
 appoint, constitute, syn. to- 
 naki, as i , su6e biri a he 
 appoints it over again (and 
 differently), syn. to-naki biri a, 
 as to appoint a day of meet- 
 ing, &c., and afterwards to 
 alter the day, appointing 
 another ; i suJe roa au he 
 appoints me, changing, changes 
 or alters (roa to turn round, 
 to alter) the appointment he 
 made with me, as having first 
 appointed me a certain day, 
 he afterwards changes the 
 appointment to another day ; 
 hence 
 
 Su6e, s., what is placed, fixed, 
 redup. susuSe, as upright 
 stones firmly planted in the 
 ground, nafera susu&e a row 
 
 [SUBB 
 
 of such stones, sube such a 
 stone, a statue, an idol, or 
 sacred stone ; a thing fixed 
 firmly, as a plank firmly 
 nailed, a stone firmly fixed, a 
 wind continuing firmly in one 
 quarter, nalagi i be su6e the 
 wind is firmly fixed (in some 
 quarter) ; also, custom, as a 
 thing fixed, su6e nafanua 
 custom of the country, su6e 
 na its or his custom, also the 
 fixed nature, custom, or dis- 
 position, su6e nig Atua i leg 
 the nature, custom, or dis- 
 position, or fixed character of 
 God is righteous ; sube i to- 
 naki nafanua the fixed, or 
 constituted, or established — 
 fixed, established, or con- 
 stituted the country. In this 
 last sense it is a general term 
 used to denote either the first 
 or early or ancient inhabitants 
 of a place (the original settlers 
 of a district), or, which is the 
 same thing in another form, 
 the persons who figure in 
 Efatese myths, or the spirits 
 of such, now being natemate. 
 Su6e is also used as a proper 
 name of men, as Mariki Su6e, 
 or Ma Su6e, Mr. Su6e (the 
 present Christian chief of the 
 village of Moso, in Havannah 
 Harbour), and of women, as 
 Li Su6e, Mrs. or Madam Su6e. 
 (See ma, andli.) [Ma. tupu 
 firmly fixed, Sa. tupua a stone 
 supposed to have been a man 
 petrified, an image, Fi. tovo 
 habit, nature, practice.] H. 
 nasab, i. q. yasab to set, put, 
 place, Hi. hissib to make to 
 
SUBU] 
 
 stand, place, erect, set up (as 
 a column), fix, establish (as 
 bounds), Ho. to be fixed, 
 planted, yassib firm ; A. 
 nasaba to place, fix, set up, 
 declare, appoint, constitute ; 
 nasb' a thing set up, a statue, 
 what is worshipped besides 
 God, i.e., an idol ; nasib erect- 
 ing, setting up ; nasibai stones 
 placed or fixed round a water- 
 hole, 
 
 Subu. See sobu, v. i., and d., 
 s., child, offspring. 
 
 Su-bua, V. t., to lift up, or 
 ascend, bursting or breaking 
 through (the ground, hence 
 subua (natano) a demon or 
 demons who do so), syn. su- 
 6ora ia, and sua-sai a : su or 
 sua to rise, or lift up, and 
 bua. 
 
 Sub-neki. See sabo-naki. 
 
 Sug ia, V. t., to kiss, d. sum ia. 
 
 Sug ia, V. t., to block up, d. 
 suk ia. 
 
 Sui a, V. t., d. si a, q.v., to help ; 
 to blow upon ; also (see sai a) 
 to make holes in (as a moth 
 in cloth) ; also to burn with 
 heat, as elo i sui a the sun 
 burns him ; and redup., elo i 
 tera suisui, the sun shines 
 burning (hot); and 
 
 Sui, s., heat ; sui ni elo heat of 
 
 ■ the sun. See sai. 
 
 Suk ia, V. t., d. sug i, to block 
 up, obstruct. A. s'akka, 2), 
 3), block up, obstruct ; 
 
 Suk ia, V. t,, to cause to stoop, 
 suki Ufa ia (a burden) makes 
 him stoop,' bending him; to 
 
 , still, as suki namaritana still 
 the commotion (of passion) 
 
 181 [SULU 
 
 within him, suki namaieto 
 stills the anger ; and 
 Suki, V. i., to be patient, firm, 
 
 quiet, still, sink (subside). H. 
 
 s'akak to stoop (A. s'akka), 
 
 subside, be appeased. Hi. ■ to 
 
 still ; 
 Suki a, V. t., make fast, firm, seli 
 
 suki a, bisa, till (&c.) suki a 
 
 tie firm, speak making it firm 
 
 and sure, meri sukisuki a make 
 
 firm, turi suki a nail firm. 
 
 A. s'akka, 3), adhere, cohere 
 
 firmly ; 
 Suki a, V. t., to stick, stab. A. 
 
 s'akka, 7), transfix (with a 
 
 spear). 
 Suka, V. i., to draw back, recede, 
 
 sukasuk, redup. ; hence 
 Sukei, or sukai, s., c. art., the 
 
 receding (of food), the annual 
 
 time of scarcity of food, opp. 
 
 to namasu. [Fi. suka, of. 
 
 cuqa.] H. nasag, sug, to draw 
 
 back, retreat. 
 Suku ti. See siko ti. 
 Suku ti. See sike ti. 
 Sula, V. i., to rise up (as a rising 
 
 ground) ; 
 Sula, s., a rising ground. H. 
 
 salal to lift up, cast up a bank. 
 Suli na, s,, shoot (as of a banana), 
 
 ofispring (of man) ; hence 
 Sulia, V. i., to have shoots (as a 
 
 banana). [Sa. suli a young 
 
 banana, son of a chief.] H. 
 
 neser a sprout, shoot; ofispring. 
 Su-lua i, V. t., to bring up (a 
 
 child) : su, or sua, and lua. 
 Sulu ea, V. t., to scorch with 
 
 flame, illuminate with a torch 
 
 (ne sulu), and see masula ki ; 
 
 hence 
 Sulu, s., c. art. nasulu, a torch. 
 
suma] 
 
 [Sa. sulu, V. and s., Ja. suluh.] 
 A. s'a'ala, 1, 2, 4, to kindle (a 
 firej, 8, be kindled, 10, light 
 or kindle (a torch), s'u'ulu 
 flame of fire, mas''al' a torch. 
 
 Suma, s., c. art. nasuma, house, 
 d. uma, see also katema, im- 
 rum : the s' in suma is a dem. 
 or art. [My- rumah, Ja. 
 umah. Ml. im, TaSa. ima, 
 Motu ruma.J A. ll'a'ma*, pi. 
 h'im' ikc, house. 
 
 Sum ia, v. t., to kiss, dd. sug i, sog 
 ia. [An. aijumnyi, to kiss, 
 Sa. sogi rub noses, salute, 
 sogisogi to smell, My. chyum 
 to smell, to kiss.] A. s'amma 
 to smell. There is no trace of 
 this meaning in sum ia. In 
 E. sa'ama is to kiss. 
 
 Sum ia, v. t., to suck, as fat. 
 My. isap, An. admoi to kiss, 
 lick, suck, as fat. A. sahab, 
 Nm., suck in (liquid or air). 
 
 Sume li, v. t., to make a sucking 
 noise to (to attract one's atten- 
 tion). See preceding word. 
 
 Sumi li, V. t., d. sumo li, to shut, 
 close (as a door), to patch up, 
 repair (as a hole in a mat) ; 
 hence 
 
 Sumili, s., a thing like india- 
 rubber in a clam shell which, 
 when touched, causes the shell 
 to close ; an ornament (shell) 
 which stops up a hole pierced 
 in the septum of the nose. A. 
 samnia, 4), to stop (as a bottle), 
 6), to patch up, repair (a thing). 
 
 Suraat ia, v. t., to beat, d. samit 
 ia ; d. sumanr i to beat, also 
 used as an ad., hastily, con- 
 fusedly, inefiectively, as lo 
 sumanr i, brig sumanr i, &c., 
 
 182 [SU-EUA 
 
 see, do hastily, confusedly, 
 ineffectively (cf. sarafi, tere 
 ti). See samit ia. 
 
 Sur, V. i., to go (of a departed 
 spirit going to Hades), to 
 writhe and twist with pain. 
 H. sir to go in a circle (eg. 
 s'ur to go, journey). Sir hinge, 
 writhing pain. 
 
 Sur i, V. t., d. suer ia, q.v. 
 
 Sura ia, v. t., to root up, extir- 
 pate (as the things growing in 
 one's plantation). E. sarawa 
 to root up, extirpate. 
 
 Surata, sursurata, v. i., d. for 
 suara, to walk, go on a jour- 
 ney. 
 
 Suru ki, V. t., make to suru, i.e., 
 to be covered, as by inserting 
 an arrow head into the (reed) 
 shaft ; and 
 
 Suru faki, v. t., make to be 
 covered, as by thrusting a 
 thing into the dust or earth ; 
 and 
 
 Suru goi a, v. t., to cover drain 
 out (as the milk of a cocoa- 
 nut) by covering the aperture 
 of the nut with the mouth 
 and draining* out the contents. 
 For goi see go ia. Tasuru ki 
 to conceal, suruoli, dd. suruili, 
 suruauli (see uli, auli), to take 
 the, place, or assume the form 
 of, hiddenly or stealthily, and, 
 B., a demon, or demons, who 
 do this to destroy men. [My. 
 suruk to conceal, Mg. sarona 
 to cover.] E. sawai-a to cover, 
 tasawara to be hidden, secret, 
 to hide. 
 
 Su-rua, s., upper of the two 
 ridge-poles of a house : su na, 
 and rua two. 
 
SUKU EA] 
 
 Suru ea, v. t., to allure, tempt 
 (deceiving), lit. to deceive ; 
 
 Surusuru ea, id., redup. See 
 sore, bisuru. 
 
 Suruk, i.e., su-ruk, also si-ruk, 
 and sai-ruk (see sai, and ruku) 
 to go into the ruku (of any- 
 thing). 
 
 Surut ia, v. t., to scarify, make 
 fissures on the surface of any- 
 thing. A. s'arata to scarify. 
 
 Susu, s., the breast or bieasts; a 
 calabash (round like a breast) : 
 susu na, d., his mother, lit. his 
 breast, or mamma ; hence 
 
 Susu, v., to suck the breast. [Sa. 
 susu the breast, to suck the 
 breast, Fi. sucu the breasts, 
 to suck the breast. My. susu, 
 Mg. nono, the breasts.] H. 
 s'od, A. thidy', pi. thudiyy', 
 breast, breasts. 
 
 Xa, passive or reflexive passive 
 prefix to many verbs. [Fi., 
 Sa., My., Ja., Mg., id.] A., 
 E., ta, reflexive or reflexive 
 passive prefix to verbs. 
 
 Ta, nom. and verb, suf., 3 pi. 
 (very common), for ra. 
 
 Ta, s., for ata man, person. 
 
 Ta, neg. ad., not, dd. ti, tu, and 
 see sa. [Sa. le. My. ta, Mg. 
 tsy.] H. lo, le, li, Ch. la, A. la. 
 
 Ta ia, v. t., to chop, cut, also to 
 speak or utter (as it were 
 making a chopping noise), 
 redup. tata. [Fi. ta-ya. My. 
 tatah, Sa. ta, Mg. tatana.] A. 
 hadda to cut quickly; utter 
 speech quickly. 
 
 183 [ta 
 
 T', conj., that (because), ta that 
 I, te that he, t6 ku that you : tS. 
 Ta, ad., now, dd. syn. uo, ko, i, 
 as i ta toko, i uo toko, i ko 
 toko, he yet (now) remains : 
 ta, dem. 
 Ta, verb, pron., 1 dual incl. 
 [An. intau, Sa. ta, for taua.] 
 The ta of nigita, or ninita, 
 and -a, for rua two. 
 Ta, tra, or ra, d. nra, q.v., blood. 
 Originally ta, as in mita to 
 bleed. 
 Ta, s., d. sa, d. s&tg, q.v. 
 Ta na, s., friend, companion. 
 [Of. Fi. tau, to. Ma. ta.] A. 
 Sahi, contraction of Sahib', 
 friend, companion, ya salli 
 (cf.' Ma. e ta !) O friend, com- 
 rade ! saliaba to be a friend or 
 companion, to take with one 
 as a companion, 3, to accom- 
 pany (someone), 8, to be com- 
 panions to each other. Hence 
 bita, and bita-naki, q.v. 
 Ta-atuta, v. and s. : ta cut, speak, 
 utter, and atuta, s., a fixed or 
 appointed time ; ta-atuta ki 
 appoint a time and place (of 
 meeting) to (someone). H. 
 'adad, A. 'adda, to number, 
 especially days, time, hence 
 S. 'ad'da, same as H. mo'ad, 
 a set time, appointed time, 
 eg. H. ya'ad, A. wa'ada, 3, to 
 appoint a time and place (of 
 meeting). 
 Ta-bau, s., syn. tagoto-bau, a 
 
 cap, or hat, lit. out-head. 
 Ta, v., to bend, bow, incline, 
 extend, as ta bau bend the 
 head, bow, ta tuba strike, 
 turning aside, deflecting (a 
 spear, &c.), ta gor ia extend 
 
tab] 184 
 
 over it (of time, so many clays), 
 ta gor ia extend over (or 
 cover) it (the day in the 
 past named). H. natah, fut. 
 yitteh, to extend, to incline, 
 to bow, to turn. 
 
 Tab, d. tiba, neg. ad., not : ta not, 
 and ba for ma as in Assy. 
 aama not, i.e., H. mah, A. ma, 
 used indeiinitely. 
 
 Ta6a na, d. tauba na, s., side, or 
 shore (as a side). [Ma. tapa.] 
 A. taff' side, shore. 
 
 Taba ia, d. tama ia. 
 
 Taba, v. t., to be like, tabale to 
 be like that thing (taba le), 
 so, also tabalai, tabalan, 
 tabalas, tabalo uai (taba, lo 
 or r (thing), and uai, n, s, 
 i, dem.) to be like that or this 
 thing, tabalo uanaga, id. ; also 
 tabale sa ? tabale safa ? to be 
 like what thing 1 to be how 1 
 [My. dama-kiyan so, Mg. 
 mitovy.] H. damah to be like. 
 
 Taba, s., property given away in 
 payment of a fine for miscon- 
 duct : ta to cut, and ba (away) 
 as in soka-ba. 
 
 Ta5a, v. i., to turn, bend, taSa lo 
 sua, or lo saki, bend looking 
 down, or up, taSa kai bend 
 contracting the stomach (as 
 to avoid a spear), bitelo ta6a6a 
 to be bent with hunger, also 
 tama, as tama-lu, d. tumalii, 
 to bend rising (in setting forth 
 or out), taJa soka to bend, 
 leaping (as in climbing a tree), 
 d. tama or tuma soka, also, to 
 leap aside. A. dafa', 6, to 
 turn hither and thither, dafa' 
 bending, 'adfa' bent, curved (of 
 men). 
 
 [tabe 
 
 Tabaraba, for rabaraba. 
 
 Tabag, v. t., to slap. [My. 
 tapuk, Ja. tabuk). A. safaka 
 to slap. 
 
 Tabalaga, v. r. (see balaga ti), to 
 raise itself off, as a scab, ifcc. 
 Reflexive causative. 
 
 Tabalas', or tabalasoa, v. i., 
 tabale, and aso to burn, to 
 peel itself off after a burn (of 
 the skin) : tabal' is the reflex- 
 ive of bale si, or bala si ; 
 and 
 
 Tabales, v. i., reflexive of bale si, 
 to peel itself off, as the skin 
 of one's lips ; and 
 
 Tabales, s., husk (as of cocoanut, 
 chestnut), finger nails. 
 
 Tabara, v. i., to be burned. 
 
 Tabara ki, v. t., to burn : bara. 
 
 Tabare, tabarebare, v.. i., reflex- 
 ive of 6ora ia, to be split, split 
 open, to be open. 
 
 Taiare, s., a male animal. Com- 
 pare E. taba't mas, a male. 
 
 Taftaro, ta6aro&aro, v. i., to be 
 heedless, careless, disobedient.: 
 reflexive of ba.ro ; and 
 
 TaSaro, d., s., senselessness, sin. 
 
 Taiasuli, v. i., to be detached, 
 broken off: reflexive of basu 
 li. 
 
 Tabau sa, v. t., to cover, to be over 
 (surpass, be above another) : 
 bau. 
 
 Ta6elu, v. i., reflexive of 6elu, 
 
 . q-v. 
 
 Tab ea, y. t., to take ; and 
 Tabe, s., c. art. natabe, a freshet, 
 
 lit. that which takes, or 
 
 carries. [Fi. tabe-a, Mg. 
 
 taba.] S. nsab to take. 
 Tabe, v., to lean or incline, 
 
 tabe to osa lean abiding on it, 
 
tabitab] 
 
 tabe ki lean upon, trust in (a 
 thing) ; 
 
 Tabitab, s., a thing leaned upon, 
 or trusted in. [Fi. ravi, My. 
 
 , arapi.] A, s'afa, 4, to make 
 to lean or incline (a thing 
 towards a thing), 1, be the 
 guest of someone. 
 
 Tabei a, v. t., to desire or pur- 
 pose setting the mind on. A. 
 bayya, 5, id. 
 
 Ta6feti, V. i., to adorn oneself. 
 Oh. sabet to adorn, Ethpa. 
 adorn oneself. 
 
 Tabera ki, v. t., to make to be 
 tabera scattered, taberafera, or 
 taferafera, to be scattered, 
 taberafera ki make to be so : 
 bera, berafera. 
 
 Ta6es, s., axe : ta to cut, and 6es. 
 
 Tabisa, v. i., to speak ; 
 
 Tafisafisa, v. i., to pray : bisa. 
 
 Tabilakigon, d. tabilagon, v. i., 
 to stumble, d. tabila kon, id. 
 lit. to strike, or knock (the 
 foot) by mistake (hastily) fast 
 (that is, the foot caught fast) : 
 ta, bila, or bile, gon, or kon. 
 
 Taiora ia, v. t., to cut, splitting 
 (a thing) ; 
 
 Ta6orai na, s., c. art., the body 
 where it forks off or is divided 
 into the two legs : ta, 6ora ia. 
 
 Taios, V. i., compressed, narrow: 
 
 185 
 
 [taga 
 
 Tabu, s., naked people, people 
 of other islands of the New 
 Hebrides, so called by the 
 Efatese : ta men, and bua I. 
 
 Tabu, tab, v. i., or a., to be 
 forbidden, prohibited ; to be 
 sacred ; 
 
 Tabua, s., c. art., sacredness ; 
 and 
 
 Tabuen, s., id. A. dabba, n. a. 
 dabbu, to prohibit. 
 
 Tabua, v. i., to be split open, 
 cracked, also mafua : bua. 
 
 Tafa, s., c. art. natafa, a hill, lit. 
 that which goes up or is high ; 
 and 
 
 Tafa (d.), ad., high, above. [Fi. 
 cabe.] T. dayaba to go up. 
 E. diba above. 
 
 Tafagka, tafakaka. See baku. 
 
 Tafakarua ki, i.e., ta utter, and ba- 
 karua ; to repeat a thing, as a 
 slanderer's words to the person 
 slandered. 
 
 Tafar. See taiar. 
 
 Tafasi, v. See.fasu, eyebrows. 
 
 Tafe, s., c. art., d. tabe, freshet. 
 
 Tafi na, s., and c. art. a, atafi, 
 follower, successor of a chief 
 (next in rank), that is, his 
 present helper and right hand 
 man, and who is bis recog- 
 nized successor. A. tabi' 
 follower, helper. 
 
 Tafea, d. for tofe, q.v. 
 
 Tafera, s., c. art., breaker, 
 breakers ; and 
 
 Taferafera, v. i., to break, as 
 waves, Ch. tebar, H. s'abar, to 
 break, mis'bar breakers. See 
 bera. 
 
 Tafi a, V. t., to be near. A. 
 taffa to be near. 
 
 Tafifi, V. i., to be involved, en- 
 twisted : fifi, fisi. 
 
 Tatiloga. See bulo ki, and bol- 
 oga. 
 
 Tatilo, tafolo, taifolo, and 
 
 Tafulus. See bulo ki, bulu si. 
 
 Tafiroliro, to be twisted (crooked) - 
 biri a. 
 
 Taga, s., basket, d. toga, q.v.; d. 
 stomach. [Sa. taga, taga 'ai.] 
 
TAGAL| 
 
 Tagal, s., a hook for hanging 
 things on : tageli. 
 
 Tagaragara, v. i., or a., strong: 
 gara, garagara. 
 
 Tagaru, v. t., to grasp : kar ia. 
 
 Tagau, s., a hook, so called from 
 seizing ; 
 
 Tagau, tagaugau, v., to grasp, 
 seize ; 
 
 Tagau lua, select, lit. grasp or 
 seize, lifting up or out : gau, 
 kau. 
 
 Tagatag, s., a mist, or mass of 
 clouds : tagotago. 
 
 Tageli, tageligeli. See take!. 
 
 Tagi, V. i., to wail, cry, ring, 
 sing, clank, hum, (fee. (as a 
 drum, (be.) ; tagi si, v. t., to be- 
 wail, tagitagi, redup., natagien 
 wailing, sounding (in various 
 ways). [Sa. tagi. My. tangis, 
 Mg. tany, a cry, tomany, 
 mitomany to cry.] A. tanna 
 to tinkle, &c., Nm. to clank, 
 ring, hum, tanien din, tantun 
 to tinkle, jingle. 
 
 Tagia, v., d. tine (ndine), to hoist 
 the sail on a canoe, tagi aki 
 rarua. See under miten and 
 tago. 
 
 Note. — The idea is that of 
 making the sail mount on the 
 canoe as a horseman mounts a 
 horse, or a burden mounts, or 
 is placed upon, the back. 
 Tagifegi, V. i., to be slow, dilatory. 
 A. 'aka, 5, to be averse, to 
 delay. 
 Tagotago, v., to be placed one 
 thing above or upon another, 
 as the stories of a house, banks 
 of clouds (see tagatag), genera- 
 tions of men ; and 
 Tago na, s., such a thing, or 
 
 186 [TAKANt 
 
 things, as the story of a house, 
 a generation of men, leaves of 
 a book (which lie one upon 
 the other). See under miten 
 (and cf. tiena, tagi aki, 
 mitaga). 
 
 Tago fi, V. t., to beg, . ask (a 
 person for a thing), tatago sa 
 beg, ask for (a thing) ; bitago, 
 V. r., to be asking, begging, 
 earnestly (from others). [Mg. 
 hataka.] E. tayaka (so Amh., 
 T., Luke ix. 45) to ask, 
 tatayaka to ask earnestly. 
 
 Tagoto, s., tomahawk, axe : ta, 
 goto ; and 
 
 Tagote fi, v. t., to cut with an 
 
 Tagura, s., a heap (of stones) : 
 
 guru, kuru. 
 Tai or tae a, v. t., d. for ata ia, 
 
 or atai a, to know. H. yada' 
 
 to know. 
 Tai, s., excrement, filth. [Sa. 
 
 tae. My. tai, Mg. tay.] H. 
 
 seah excrement, filth, from 
 
 yasa' to go out. 
 Tai na, s., d. ke sua, brother's 
 
 brother, or sister's sister. 
 
 [Fi. taci, Malo tasi, Ml. tesi, 
 
 Bauro asi, Epi tahi, Motu 
 
 tadi. My. ad-ik, Bu. anri, Mg. 
 
 zandry.] A. sinw', or sunw', 
 
 brother, and art. ta. 
 Taiar, a., d. tafar ; fatu taiar, or 
 
 tafar, crumbling stone : bera, 
 
 taferafera. 
 Taifolo, d. tafolo. 
 Tairai, d. rairai. 
 Taka, a., such as, like, such like 
 
 S. da'k, id. ('a'k, and d') talis 
 Takani (takan uan, takana uai, 
 
 &c., putting any dem. after it) 
 
 like this, that, &c. ; so, in this 
 
TAKA Nl] 
 
 187 
 
 way, in that way, thus, &c. ; 
 also, interrogatively, how 1 
 S. da'k hana (for da'k see 
 preceding word), such as this, 
 like this. This S. word is 
 composed of d' (dem. or rela- 
 tive pron.), a', or ai (inter.), 
 k', as, like (ad.), and hana, 
 or 'na this ; without the d', 
 S. 'akana how 1 
 
 Taka ni, v, t., to thrust on, or 
 into (a thing), to thrust (a 
 thing), taka sila ki thrust 
 making to shake or fall. H. 
 dahah, A. dalia, (fee, to thrust. 
 
 Takal ia, or tikal ia, d., v. t., to 
 carry ; hence 
 
 Tak'amo, or takaamo, to carry 
 on a stick across the shoulder: 
 takal and amo. S. s'kal to 
 carry. 
 
 Takara, s., the crowd, lit. men 
 (ta) gathered together (kara) : 
 ta, kuru, guru. 
 
 Takara, s., c. art. natakara, that 
 which seizes, or grasps, or lays 
 hold (of one), as the conse- 
 quence of some act, &c. See 
 kar ia, tagaru. 
 
 Takari, v. i.,to hasten, go swiftly, 
 sail swiftly (as a canoe) : kari. 
 
 Takel, takelkel, v. i., or a., to be 
 crooked, then unrighteous, d. 
 tageli, tageligeli. H. 'alial, 
 'akalhal, A. 'aliila, 5, ifec, id. 
 
 Takes, d. for nakes, or nakisa : 
 kisa. 
 
 Tak ia, or taki a, v. t., to fasten 
 (as thatch on a roof, a rope on 
 a log, anything on anything), 
 and see mitakitaki ; to fasten 
 the tongs on an oven stone (to 
 lift it), bitaki a, uataki, otaki ; 
 and matuki trusted in, confi- 
 
 [taku na 
 
 dent, brave; and taki, s., a mass 
 of anything, as of yams grow- 
 ing together, as it were firmly 
 bound together. A. wathika 
 to trust in, be firm, steadfast, 
 confident, resolute, 4, to fasten, 
 to bind. 
 
 Taki, s. See under preceding 
 word. 
 
 Ta-ki, v. t., to incline, to pour 
 out (anything by inclining, a 
 vessel); takitoinoline(oneself), 
 taki mita incline watch, taki 
 torogo-saki incline, hearken 
 to, lo taki look inclined, look 
 round or back, mitaki to be 
 inclined, lean over (as if ready 
 to fall) ; see si-rak, i.e., si-taki 
 a squall, lit. blow, incline (a 
 canoe, or cause it to heel over 
 on its side). H. sa'ah (A. 
 Sa"a') to incline (as a vessel 
 which is to be emptied) ; to be 
 inclined, bent, stoop. 
 
 Taku, V. i., to be after, behind, 
 d. nruk ; or itaku, inruk ; 
 
 Taku na, s., the back ; etaku or 
 itaku at the back, behind 
 (d. inruk), also outside (the 
 village), also the (time) behind, 
 or after (as opposite to the 
 time before, the past), as te 
 naliati etaku some day after, 
 as he died, sela itaku ru afa 
 ki nia some time after they 
 buried him, generally tau 
 itaku, naliati itaku, the years, 
 or days after {i.e., hereafter), 
 naliati itaku mau the last day, 
 day of judgment. [Sa. tua, 
 Malo tura, Epi taka, Motu 
 dolu, the back.] A. t'ahr' the 
 back, E. dalir posterior jiart, 
 daliari the last, deliara after, 
 
TAKUTAKU] 188 
 
 behind, daliara to be after, 
 behind. 
 
 Takutaku, v. i., to speak in an 
 unknown or foreign tongue. 
 A. thalithaka to speak with 
 foolish or senseless words. 
 
 Taku, s., brothers-in-law, sisters- 
 in-law, syn. tauien. A. 'aha, 
 
 5, to treat or act as a brother, 
 
 6, to be brothers and friends 
 to each other. E. ta'ha 
 agnatio, or cognatio, also 
 agnati who are as brothers to 
 each other. 
 
 Takuer, or takuwer, s., a big 
 man, a strong man : ta man, 
 and kuwer. A. kabura to be 
 great, of big body. 
 
 Takus ia, or takusi a, v. t., to be 
 like, similar to, also, with k 
 elided tausi a, id., and to 
 follow, also rausi a (t to r), 
 V. t., to follow, from usi a, 
 V. t., to follow, and also (in 
 rafe-kusi a) kusi a, id. See 
 usi a, and bausi a. A. hassa 
 to follow ; to narrate, and 5, 
 8, to follow; 1, to be near, 
 10, to ask. 
 
 Taku ti, d. raku sa, q.v. 
 
 Talakolako, v. i., to whisper, i.e., 
 to conceal what is being said 
 (from someone) : ta utter 
 speech, and lakolako. 
 
 Talekabu na, d. arekabu, q.v. 
 
 "Ikle is, V. t., d. tfele is, to search 
 for. [Mg. tady.] A. dara, 2, 
 Nm., to rummage (vulgar), lit. 
 to turn over (things, in search 
 of something) ; 
 
 Tale, s., c. art., a belt, al.so a 
 rope, string ; and 
 
 Tale ki, v. t., to make to go 
 round (as a yam vine round a 
 
 [talemat 
 
 stake), tale is to coil round 
 something (as a snake), tale 
 ki maro (see roa) to whirl 
 round (as the eyes in dizzi- 
 ness), tale ki to twist round 
 one (crooked dealing, to injure), 
 talc round, around, taltal 
 round. [Mg. tady, mitady, 
 to twist, tady a rope, My. 
 tali a rope, string, bandage, 
 &c.] A. dara to go round, 
 whirl, turn ; be dizzy, 2, make 
 round, 4, turn round, da'ro orb, 
 around, dairo round ; circuit, 
 &c. 
 
 Tale, s., c. art., the taro (so called 
 because round.) [Sa. talo. 
 My. talas, id.] See preceding 
 word. 
 
 Talekba, and taltaleaba, v. i., to 
 whirl round (as a wheel), 
 taleaba ki, v. t., to make to 
 whirl round, to turn round 
 (as a grindstone) : tale and 
 aba. 
 
 Talebaga, s., d. syn. kalebaga, 
 bow-string : tale, and baga, s. 
 (the tree from which the string 
 is made). 
 
 Talefa, s., a side region, circuit : 
 tale, and fa (ba) to go. 
 
 Talefan, s., the circuit of the 
 horizon : tale, and fan to go. 
 
 Tale-firi, a., all round (as round 
 an island, &c.) : tale, and firi 
 or biri. 
 
 Talle, or tal'le, v. i., to turn aside 
 (as from a path) ; and 
 
 Talele, id., talele ki to turn aside 
 or away from (a person or 
 thing.) See lele. 
 
 Taleuor, s., a side, circuit : tale, 
 and uor, or uora. See bora ia. 
 
 Talemat, s., plantation, enclosed 
 
TALIALl] 
 
 and cultivated field. Cf. H. 
 s'gdemoth and s'gremoth id. 
 
 Taliali, v. i., to be slow, delay : 
 aliali. [Cf. Sa. tali, tatali.] 
 
 Talibo (see libo), to hide, be hid, 
 hide oneself. 
 
 Tali-si, V. t., to prize up, wrench 
 up (as the side of a flat stone). 
 See tila ia, or til ea. 
 
 Taliga na, s., c. art. nataliga na, 
 d. liga na, and naliga na, the 
 ear or ears : ta, art." [Ml. P. 
 ririga, Epi dd. tiline, seligo. 
 An. tikga, Motu taia, Sa. 
 taliga, Fut. tariga. My. talinga, 
 Mg. tadiny.]. H. 'ozen, du., 
 used also as pi., 'azSnaim, 
 'az6ne, S. 'adna, Ch. 'uden, 
 'ud6na, A. 'udn', pi. 'adan', 
 and 'udun'. For the verb, 
 see rogo. 
 
 Talo, taloalo. See alo-fi. 
 
 Talo, a., round, and ad., round 
 about : tale. 
 
 Talokuloku ki. See taluko. 
 
 Taltal, a., round : tale. 
 
 Taltalurai, s., a sea snake covered 
 with round strips or bands. 
 
 TMu, or taliilu, s , a crowd, herd : 
 lulu. 
 
 Taluko, or taluku, and taluko- 
 luko ki, v., to conceal oneself 
 from ; atu taluko baki nia turn 
 away from, or conceal oneself 
 from : lako. 
 
 TaluSaki, v. i., to be spilt, poured 
 out, to pour itself out : lubaki. 
 
 Talug ia, d., and 
 
 Talum ia, d. See tulum ia. 
 
 Tam ia, v. t., to add to, dd. tarn 
 ia, taum ia. A. s'amma to add. 
 
 Tama ia, d. taba ia, v. t., to 
 cover (as fruit, &c., covering 
 the ground, being abundant). 
 
 189 ■ [tan I a. 
 
 and see atama that which 
 rubs, syn. ore. A. tamma to 
 cover with abundance (Nm. 
 smother, overwhelm), 2), to- 
 scrape or shave. 
 
 Tama na. See tema na. 
 
 Tamaliam', v. i., to delay. A. 
 mahala, 5, to delay, and H.. 
 mahah to delay, linger (prop, 
 to refuse, turn back). 
 
 Tamalu, v. i., to bend, rise (to- 
 set out), to go or come forth, 
 set out : taba, lu. 
 
 Tamate, v. i., to fall calm, be- 
 calm (as the sea, the wind), 
 hence 
 
 Tamate, s., c. art., peace (oppo- 
 site to war), a calm, silence ; 
 also, the festivals in honour 
 and worship of the dead, at 
 which the people of different 
 villages assembled : mate. 
 
 Tamisal, or tamusal, s., an un- 
 married person : ta a person, 
 and misal. 
 
 Tamaras, reflexive of maras, q.v. 
 
 Tami sa, d. sabe li, q.v., to tie. 
 
 Tamo, V. i., d. na6o, to smell, 
 see na5o. 
 
 Tamon, s., smell, d. naion. 
 
 Tamole, s., man : ta man, and 
 mole to live, living. [Fi. ta- 
 mata, Sa. tangata, My. orang- 
 idup, Mg. olombelona, id.] 
 
 Tamtam, a., dusky ; ragi tamtam 
 (syn. rag melu), evening, lit. 
 time dusky, or of dusk. A. 
 'atama to be evening, dusky,, 
 'atamai dusk of evening. 
 
 Tamulu, v. i., syn. c. mulu, q.v. 
 
 Tanekabu, s., d. arekabu. 
 
 Tan ia, v. t., to earth it, to- 
 cover with earth, then with 
 anything (tun ia) ; 
 
»rANU Ml] 
 
 Tanu mi, v. t., to cover with 
 earth, put into the ground ; 
 and 
 
 Tanu maki, id. ; hence 
 
 Tano, s., d. tan, earth of any 
 kind, soil, clay, ground, and 
 etan, ad. and prep., on the 
 ground, below. (Sa. tanu, 
 ps. tanua, and tanumia, My. 
 tanam, tanamkan, tanuman, 
 Sa. tanuma'i, tanuga, tanu- 
 maga.] A. tana to cover 
 with clay ; to cover, tino, 
 dialect tano, earth, clay. 
 
 Tanoabu, d. tanoafu, d. tanoau. 
 s., ashes, lit. earth or dust of 
 the fire : tano, kabu ; 
 
 Tanonon, or tanoonon, s., level 
 ground, d. ten : tano, and on6 
 reduplicated. 
 
 Tanotanoa, a., soiled with earth : 
 tano, and ending a. 
 
 Tanu ea, tanua, v. t., to spit, 
 dd. tani, taniu ; and 
 
 Tanua, d. taniu, s., c. art., 
 spittle. [Sa. anu, ps. anusia, 
 Motu kanudi, ps. kanudia, Fi. 
 kanusi.] A. 'antha'a to vomit 
 (tha"a, 7, to come out and be 
 ejected from the mouth). 
 
 Tao, V. i., to fall, d. for roa 
 (rouo, touo). 
 
 Tao s, d., v. t., to lay down, 
 leave, permit, (fee. A. wada'a 
 not used in perfect, fut. yada'o 
 imp. da', to lay down, leave, 
 permit. 
 
 Taosi, d. tausi a. See takusi a. 
 
 Taos, V. i., d. maosa, q.v. 
 
 Taoti na, s., bone, bones, weapons 
 made of dead men's bones. 
 [My. tulang, Mg. taolana.] 
 A. 'at'm', Mahri fm elided) 
 'atait (Von Maltzan), athath 
 
 190 [tas 
 
 (Carter), H. 'esem, pi. 'asa- 
 moth, id., often of bones of 
 the dead. 
 
 Tari a, or tar ia, v. t., to rub, 
 wipe (it), tari isa rub, wipe 
 wijbh (it), d. tara ia rub or 
 scrape off (it), baka tar ia 
 gather. [Sa. tele.] See terafi, 
 karafi. 
 
 Tara, taratara. See tera to be 
 quick. 
 
 Targ, V. i., or a., to be pure, 
 clean, white, tartare whitish, 
 matiratira polished, bright, 
 shining, A. tahara, to be 
 clean, pure, H. taher to shine, 
 be bright, clean, pure. 
 
 Tare, v. i., to cry, call out (of 
 men) ; to call out, i.e., crow 
 (cock). A. Saraha and Sara' 
 to cry, call out, sarih' a crying 
 or calling out, a cock. 
 
 Tarere, v. i., to break on the 
 shore with noise (of breakers) : 
 rere. 
 
 Taroa, s., a pigeon. [My. dara.] 
 A. tair' id. 
 
 Taru si, or taro si, v. t., to pray 
 to (the natemate), tarotaro, 
 redup. [Sa. talalo, talotalo, 
 ps. talosia. Ha. kalokalo, Tah. 
 tarotaro.] A. sala', E. salaya, 
 Ch. sela to pray. 
 
 Taru6a, v. i., to be thrown down, 
 to fall ; taruJa ki, v. t., throw 
 down, make to fall, d. tarubik, 
 V. i., and 
 
 TaruJa, s., c. art., sticks thrown 
 on or laid across the rafters of 
 a house. H. ramah to cast, 
 to throw, S. remo', id., etremi 
 to cast itself or oneself. See 
 under eg. roa. 
 
 Tas, s., c. art., the sea. [My. 
 
TAS Ia] 
 
 tasik, To. tahi, Sa. tai.] A. 
 ta's' the sea. 
 
 Tas ia, or tasi a, v. t., to shave : 
 ras ia. 
 
 Tas, V. i., for ras, teres. 
 
 TasaSo, v. i. See sa6o. 
 
 Tasiga, s., d. for tasila. 
 
 Tasike, v. i., to lift, raise (the 
 head) : saki. 
 
 Tasila, s., helper, assistant : 
 sila ia. 
 
 Tasmen, s., salt : tas the sea or 
 salt, and men or mena, 
 pleasant (so called because it 
 makes food pleasant tasted). 
 
 Tasuru ki, v. t., to conceal : 
 suru. 
 
 Tasuki, v. i., to bow : suki. 
 
 Tata, s., voc, maternal grand- 
 mother. [TaSa., MI., tata, 
 father, Ml. and Male tata 
 paternal uncle.] See ani na 
 (atene na, &c.) 
 
 Tata, redup. of ta to chop, cut. 
 
 Tatau fi, V. t,, as bisa tatau fi to 
 speak, diverting or taking the 
 attention : tau. 
 
 Tata-gasi, v. t., tata same as 
 tatau (in preceding word) 
 redup. of tau, and gasi to 
 (wipe) stroke, smooth, flatter. 
 
 Tatalai, redup. of talai, also 
 tilai, titilai, v. i., to warm 
 oneself (at the fire). [Fi. 
 tatalai, Mg. mitolo (boho).] 
 H. dalak to burn, Hi. to heat, 
 Ch. dfilak. 
 
 Tatamares, tamares with ta-, 
 doubled. 
 
 Tatia or tati a, d. for rati a. 
 [Sa. tala, Tah. tara.] 
 
 Tatok, or atatok (or natatok, s.), 
 a., resident, native : ta man, 
 and toko. 
 
 191 [tau 
 
 Tatu, s. (see tui), a stake, post 
 (of a fence), then tatu nafanua 
 lord or chief of the land. A. 
 watada to fix, stake, make 
 firm, watadu stake, post, H. 
 yated pin, nail, then prince. 
 
 Tasilasila, v. i., to make a clear 
 startling sound (of men), to 
 crack (of thunder) : ta chop, 
 ifcc, and silasila. See sila. 
 
 Tau, tautau, v. i., or a., to be 
 pure, clean, white. [Ma. tea,] 
 A. nasa'a to be pure, white. 
 
 Tau, V. i., also mitau to be fixed,, 
 abide, as i tau suma he abides 
 (in) the house, i tau nara, 
 nakasu it is fixed or abides 
 (on) the branch of the tree 
 (as a bird or fruit), nafiona i 
 tau isa his heart is fixed on 
 (the person or thing), i tau 
 isa it is fixed, abides, or 
 (as fruit) hangs on it (the 
 branch) i tau ki nuana makes 
 to tau, as a tree makes fruit 
 to tau, yields (fruit), nakasu i 
 tau the tree yields (fruit), tau 
 isa to hold firmly (with the 
 hand), tau gi to grasp firmly 
 with the hand, to pluck ofi" (as 
 a fruit), tau nata take hold 
 firmly of a person (taking him 
 to one's house as a guest), tau 
 e a ; mamitau, matau, d., an 
 anchor (what holds firmly), 
 tau ri to take hold of firmly, 
 or be fixed firmly to, to marry 
 (a woman), tau lua to attach 
 or be fixed firmly (to one), 
 bringing out one (as from 
 bondage, or from her rela- 
 tions), to redeem ; to marry ; 
 tau raki to attach firmly to, 
 as a boat to a ship to be 
 
TAU] 
 
 192 
 
 [taua 
 
 towed, bitauri, v. r., to be 
 attached firmly to each other, 
 to be married ; tau asa, to 
 mea.sure (it), toil gi and toil 
 ni to measure, to weigh, and 
 to-naki (for tau naki) to place, 
 set, fix firmly, appoint, deter- 
 mine, establish, tau, s., a 
 measure, also to, toto, and (t 
 to r) boroaki to give commands 
 to one's family, to make one's 
 will, to commission (anyone 
 to do something), tau, redup. 
 tautau, V. t., to commission 
 (one to do something), hence 
 fitaua, c. art. na-fitaua one 
 commissioned, a messenger, 
 also a commission or message 
 (syn. fakaua, q.v.), also tau, 
 tautau to divert or amuse the 
 mind (of one), to fix, his atten- 
 tion (as of a cliild to make 
 him stop crying), then to 
 deceive, to take up a man's 
 attention deceitfully conceal- 
 ing your real aim, belaki tau- 
 tau sa to lead one, diverting 
 his attention or soothing his 
 mind (with a view, when he 
 is ofi^ his guard, and in a 
 suitable place, to tomahawk 
 or otherwise kill him) ; bitau, 
 bitautau, v. r., to invite (as 
 to a feast), taua a heap, also a 
 crowd (of men or a herd of 
 animals), from the things or 
 people being firmly compacted 
 together or attached to each 
 other ; tau a season, a year, 
 from tau in the sense of to 
 bear fruit (of a tree — see 
 above) ; tau to be fixed, to 
 abide firmly, is also used 
 and may be used before any 
 
 verb, like toko or to, ani, tu, 
 to denote continuous action as 
 i tau bat ia he continues 
 fixedly doing it. (So Fi. tau, 
 or dau, Sa. tau.) [Ma. tau to 
 light, rest, be anchored, be 
 suitable, &c. ; Sa. tau fixed, 
 to fit in, be anchored, pluck 
 fruit with the hand, buy (see 
 tau lua), taula'i to anchor 
 with, hang up with, hang on 
 to (tau-raki), taula an anchor; 
 M. tau-ra take hold of, seize, 
 tau-vata equal (tau, or to, 
 equal). Ma. taua army, Tah. 
 taura a herd or flock, also a 
 rope, Sa. tau a season, a year, 
 Mg. taona a year, season, also 
 gathered, collected (cf. taua) ; 
 also enticed, allured, attracted 
 (tau, tautau), mitaona to 
 gather in, collect, entice, draw, 
 My. taun a season, year.] 
 H. sawah to set up, place 
 (S. so'). Pi. sivah (A. wassa', 
 see boroaki) to constitute, 
 appoint, to decree, to charge, 
 to command, to commission 
 (delegate anyone with com- 
 mands), to give last commands 
 to one's family, to make one's 
 wiU (Rabb. Sava'ah a will), 
 eg. s'awah to be even, level ; 
 equal in value, equivalent, be 
 fit, suitable, be like, resemble. 
 Pi. to make level, then to 
 compose, calm the mind ; to 
 put, set, s'ivah pgri to yield 
 fruit (frucht ansetzen) ; fol- 
 lowed by ace. and k', to make 
 one like anything. Hi. to 
 liken, compare (to-naki, infra). 
 Taua, s., a heap, a crowd, a 
 herd : preceding wprd. , 
 
TAU] 
 
 Tau, tautau, v. t., to commission. 
 [Fi. tatau-naka, id., My. titah, 
 to command, order, decree 
 (to-naki, infra.)'] See tau. 
 
 Tail ni, or tad ni, v. t., to cook, 
 to bake (in the oven). [Sa. 
 tao, ps. taoa, taoina ; taona'i 
 to bake food the day before 
 giving it; To., Ma., tao.] A. 
 taha, n. a. tahw', to cook. 
 Hence 
 
 Tao, s., c. art., leaves for cooking 
 which are^ put into the oven 
 along with the food to be 
 cooked. [To. tau the cooking 
 leaves, Tah. tao leaves and 
 stones put into the inside of a 
 pig to be cooked.] 
 
 Taueru isa, v. t., to haul, drag, 
 tau place, fix, and eru, i.e. aru, 
 the hand, lit. fix the hand on 
 (to drag) as to drag a man to 
 punishment. 
 
 Taul a, v. t., to twist, wring (as 
 to wring clothes after washing 
 them), to milk (as a goat) 
 squeeze, or wring (the milk 
 out). A. tawa' (E. tawiy, H. 
 tawah) to wring, twist. 
 
 Tauien, or towien, s., a sister's 
 husband, a wife's brother, that 
 is, brother-in-law ; but, d., a 
 general name for reliable 
 friend, brother, or sister, and 
 in another d. the word is 
 applied to father-in-law and 
 son-in-law. [Fut. safe, Aniwa 
 nosafe, Ta yafuni, d., c. art. 
 nevun.] A. Safiyy' a friend 
 of a pure and sincere mind, i.e., 
 a real friend, safa', .3, to be of 
 sincere and pure affection 
 (towards someone), 4, to show 
 sincere love, 6, to live in 
 
 193 prAuso 
 
 mutual sincerity of friend- 
 ship. 
 
 Taubora, s., an ornaaient that 
 hangs or is fixed on the side 
 of the head : tau, bora. 
 
 Taulalo, v. or s., to hang, or be 
 fixed or what hangs or is fixed 
 in front of the belly, nasieg i 
 taulalo : tau, lalo. 
 
 Taunako, s., a thing (like the 
 peak of a cap) worn or fixed 
 over the forehead. [Cf. syn. 
 Sa. taumata] : tau, and nako. 
 
 Taumako, s., the wild (edible) 
 yam that grows on the hills : 
 tau, and mako for which see 
 aka, ako. 
 
 Taumafa, d. taumofa, v. i., to 
 give an ofiering (to the nate- 
 mate), taumafa sa give an 
 ofiering of or with it (some- 
 thing), taumafa ki nia offer 
 it (something), taumafa tua i 
 make an offering, giving to 
 him (a nateraate). [Ml. P. 
 tomav, Ha. kaumaha to off'er 
 in sacrifice, to offer a gift upon 
 an altar, s., a sacrifice, Tah. 
 taumaha a portion of food 
 offered to the gods or spirits of 
 the dead.] Tau (to place) and 
 mafa, or mofa (q.v.), a gift or 
 offering. A. ma'haba* a gift 
 H. habhabim (Hos. viii. 13) 
 offerings (to God), A. wahaba, 
 H. yahab, to give. 
 
 Taumi a. See tami a. 
 
 Tauruuru, v. i., to grumble, mur- 
 mur, mutter : ta, and uruuru. 
 Tausi a, v. t. See takusi a. 
 Tauso, or tausoa, v. i., to com- 
 mit adultery or fornication (of 
 either sex) : tau, and so, or 
 soa. [Fi. dauca.] 
 
 14 
 
te] 
 
 Te, dem., rel. pron., coiij., as 
 agute mine this, ana te his 
 this or that ; te uia what (is) 
 good, that which is good, or he 
 or she who is good, te sa that 
 which is bad, or he or she who 
 is bad ; in this sense d. tea, as 
 tea uia, tea sa ; te nata what, 
 or whatever person, any per- 
 son, someone ; te, redup. tete, 
 may be used substantively, as 
 te ru ban, or tete ru ban, some 
 went ;i te dem. is found in fite 
 (nafite, sefete, what this, that, 
 or it? or simply, what?) also 
 in matuna, banotu, binote ; 
 with art. nete, s., the that, 
 anything, something, and d. 
 with dem. ka prefixed nakate, 
 id. ; te is also found with ka, 
 dem. prefixed in one d. as a 
 tense particle (see kate, tense 
 particle, supra) ; te, or t', is 
 also used as a conj. and before 
 the verbal pron. of the 1st 
 person sing., a, and of the 3rd 
 sing., i or e, loses its vowel, as 
 ta ban that I go, or he gone, 
 te ban that he has gone, or 
 because he has gone. In one 
 dialect for i kate, ku kate, a 
 kate ban, he, you, I went, 
 there is ka te ban, ku te ban, 
 ki te ban, I went, you went, 
 lie went, in which the verbal 
 pronouns are suffixed to the k. 
 A. da, dem., (]u, rel., S. d', Ch. 
 di, rel. and conj., that, because. 
 
 Tea. See te. 
 
 Teia, or taSa, v. i., to dry up 
 (of liquid or moisture), to be- 
 come dry ; and mun te6a ki 
 to drink, making itdry (liquid). 
 E. nasepa to become dry (as 
 
 194 [tefaea 
 
 a river) ; to dry up (as a 
 spring), ngsup dry, dried up. 
 
 Teel, s., shellfish, &c., got on the 
 reef, lit. te el', that which is 
 pleasant, sweet, or tasty : te, 
 elo. 
 
 Tefa, tetefa, v. i., to draw up in 
 order of battle ; and 
 
 Tefa ki, v. t., to put in a series, 
 to range (troops, in order of 
 battle) ; bitefa range them- 
 selves in order of battle, face 
 to face ; tefa gi, d. tefa ni, 
 V. t., to put things in a series, 
 either one before or one 
 above another ; rogo tefa sa 
 hear paying no attention, dis- 
 obeying, lit. hear putting 
 down, d. syn. rogo tao sa (see 
 tao). [Fi. tuva, v. i., tuva, 
 ^■. t., to place in regular order, 
 to range in close compact, or 
 place one upon another, tuvai 
 nai valu, tuvai valu to put in 
 the attitude of war, put in 
 battle array, tuva na lawa ni 
 valu arrange or put in ranks 
 the lawa ni valu.] A. saffa, 
 1, 2, 6, 8, to set or place in 
 order in a series ; to arrange 
 the line of battle, draw up in 
 order of battle ; Nm. to 
 arrange (troops), 2, id., to 
 range themselves mutually 
 face to face. 
 
 Tef ia, or tefi a, redup. tetefi, 
 V. t., to cut ; tefi, to circum- 
 cise. [Fi. teve, tava, Sa. tefe. 
 To. tefe, Sa., To. tafa.] A. 
 'as'aba to cut. 
 
 Tefarafara, v. i., to break (of 
 the sea) ; and 
 
 Tefara, s., c. art., breakers: 
 tafera, taferafera. 
 
tjlfaeeee] 
 
 Tefarere (i.e., tefarrere), v. i., to 
 break rushing up on the shore 
 (of the breakers) : tefarafara, 
 tefara, and rere. 
 
 Tei, s., c. art. intei, a reddish 
 powder made from a plant, 
 turmeric : bitei a. 
 
 Tei. See rei. 
 
 Telake na, d. telakea na, s., c. 
 art. a, lord, owner, possessor ; 
 lake. 
 
 Telatela, v. i., or a., to be large, 
 wide ; and 
 
 Telatelana, id., c. ending -na, and 
 see matulu, matultul, matoltol, 
 swollen, large. [Epi toru 
 large, Sa. tetele, telatela, 
 latele, vatele. Ma. tetere, large, 
 swollen.] H. 'adir large, great, 
 'adar to be wide, A. 'adira 
 to have hernia (to swell 
 out). 
 
 Tele, V. t. See tale is, to search 
 for. 
 
 Teluko. See taluko. 
 
 Telei, or talai, s., the ancient 
 axe, or adze-like axe (a shell). 
 [Sa. talai to adze. Ma., Tah. 
 tarai chop with an adze. Ha. 
 kalai to chop, hew, pare, 
 carve.] A. s'araha to cut, 
 slice, carve, dissect. 
 
 Tema na, or tama na, s., father : 
 t', art., and ama for afa, as 
 mama for abab (q.v.) [Sa. 
 tama. My. rama, id.] 
 
 TemaSalu, s., brothers, lit. te 
 (he who) ma (with) fialu 
 (brother) : 6alu ; and 
 Temabalu ta, for temabalu ra, 
 who (or those who) with their 
 brother, i.e., brothers. So 
 tema in the following words 
 is lit. he or she who or those 
 
 195 [tematua ta 
 
 who, or that (person) or those 
 (persons) with. 
 
 Teiiiabau ra, s., d., uncle and 
 nephew : bau. 
 
 Tema6ele ta, s., mother and 
 child : 6ele na. 
 
 Temagore ta, s., brother and 
 sister : gore na ; d. mera gore 
 na. (See mera). 
 
 Temaloa ta, s., d. syn. temabau 
 ra : aloa na. 
 
 Temamo ta, s., mother-in-law 
 and son-in-law : mo na. 
 
 Tematrilfa, for temarafa, s., 
 father and child, lit. that {i.e., 
 the child) with the father. 
 See afa. 
 
 Tematema ta, s., father and 
 child : tema na. 
 
 Temataku ta, s., a man and his 
 brother-in-law (his wife's gore 
 na) : taku na. 
 
 Temaratauien, s., i.e., te mara 
 tauien that with (his) taulen, 
 d. syn. temataku ta : taulen. 
 
 Temarauota, s., i.e., te mara 
 uota, that with (her) uota 
 (husband), wife and husband : 
 uota, d. me nimariki. 
 
 Teniasere, s., a beloved one, 
 especially a child much cared 
 for ; te that, masere loved, 
 cared for. See also sere a, 
 bakasere a. 
 
 Tematete ta, s,, maternal grand- 
 mother, and her grandchild : 
 tena na. 
 
 Tematia ta, s., paternal grand- 
 father (ifec.)and his grandchild : 
 tia na. 
 
 Tematobu ta, s., maternal grand- 
 father and his grandchild : 
 tobu na 
 
 Tematua ta, s., paternal grand- 
 
t'te na] 196 
 
 mother and her grandchild : 
 tua na. 
 
 T'te na, s., juice : toto. 
 
 Ten, d. for tanonon. 
 
 Tena na, s. See atena na ; d. 
 atia, or tia na. 
 
 Tcr, V. i., to be slow, tardy. A. 
 'ah'h'ara, 5, to be slow, tardy. 
 
 Tera sa, v. t., be ignorant of, 
 forget, not to know (it), d. 
 rera, d. tenr. A. s'alla to not 
 know, be ignorant of ; forget. 
 
 Tera, v. i., to shine (of the sun), 
 tera ia, v. t., shine upon it (of 
 the sun). [My. tarang, tarang 
 kan, Fi. cila, Malo sarasara.] 
 H. Sahar (cf. zaliar, <fec.) to 
 shine. 
 
 Tera ia, tetera ia, v. t., to go 
 after, to do anything after (or 
 in the track of) another, baka- 
 tera ia to answer (make one's 
 word to go after another's), 
 ba, and sela tera ia go after, 
 gua tera ia shout after, bisa 
 tera ia speak after ; also to 
 rehearse, recount, tera usi to 
 recount following, tera uti na 
 to go after following. [My. 
 turut follow, go after.] A. 
 'athar' track, 'athara, 4, make 
 something follow another, 5, 
 8, follow the track of someone, 
 go after, 1, recount, rehearse. 
 
 Tera, v. i., to be quick, swift, 
 tera ki mala wheel, swoop, 
 shoot, or glide swiftly like a 
 a hawk, tera gulu ti swoop 
 (upon one) clasping (him, as 
 in war), tera tukituki run 
 rapidly beating the ground 
 with one's feet, tera belbel to 
 be exceedingly swift or quick, 
 tera mau to be quick indeed 
 
 [teee 
 
 or truly, to be instant, do 
 instantly, tera bile to be very 
 quick, teratera, redup. ; tera 
 lo saki to turn quickly, looking 
 up, tera ta6o (d.) to turn 
 quickly bending the head 
 down. [Ma. tere, Sa. tele- 
 tele.] A. darra, 10), to run 
 vehemently, or swiftly, 4, to 
 turn or whirl a spindle very 
 swiftly, H. darar (also) to fly 
 in a circle, wheel in flight ; 
 and like A. darra to spout, to 
 pour out (as rain, &c.) Hence 
 
 Ter ea, v. t., to pour into ; and 
 
 Tera, s., c. art., a pouring out ; 
 natera ni us, a rain squall, an 
 outpouring of rain. 
 
 Tera, a., having (lit. that has) 
 branches, as tera rua, tolu, 
 &c., having two, three, &c., 
 branches (of a tree) : te, and 
 ra. 
 
 Terafi, v. t., to scratch (as the 
 ground) : cf. BT. sarab, and see 
 tari a, tara ia ; d. syn. garafi, 
 or karafi. See kar ia. 
 
 Teragi, v. t., in kabu teragi, to 
 heat cooked food over again 
 teragi is for reragi, as in bau- 
 ragi a, bau-terag ia (see bau 
 sia, baraga i, raga-elo). 
 
 Teratera, v. i., to be delirious, 
 insane; A. hatara, 1, 4, to 
 make, or to be delirious, in- 
 sane ; also torotoro. 
 
 Tere, teretere (a, ra), v. t., to 
 feast, to entertain (especially 
 visitors at a festival), also to 
 make a feast or banquet for a 
 friend who visits one. The 
 radical idea lies in that of 
 gathering folks together for a 
 festival, or enclosing them as 
 
teratar] 
 
 it were in ono's house and 
 hospitality. H. 'asarah an 
 assembly of people for keeping 
 a festival, 'asar (primary idea 
 is that of surrounding, enclos- 
 ing), Ni., 3), to be gathered 
 together, especially for a festi- 
 val, A. a'asir breakfast and 
 dinner, or supper. 
 
 Teratar, v. i., to stagger, totter 
 (as a man drunk). A. tartara 
 to stagger (as a man drunk ). 
 
 Tere, s., c. art., the mast (of a 
 canoe or ship), calf (column) 
 of the leg. A. sariyai!, Nm. 
 sari, the mast (of a ship), a 
 column. 
 
 Tere, s., and teretere, s., the 
 comb (of a cock) ; the eaves of 
 a house. [Sa. tala, Tah., Ma. 
 tara, Ha. kala.] Nm. torra 
 crest, comb of bird, A. torrai 
 extremity, side of anything, 
 forelock, pointed, from tarra 
 to cut, to shai-pen, to snatch, 
 to shoot (as plants), to propel 
 vehemently, irritate, stir up. 
 
 Terei a, v. t., for rerei a, for 
 roroia : rei a. 
 
 Trea ki, for rea ki. 
 
 Trei a, for toitoi a. 
 
 Terina, s., enclosure. H. tur 
 fence, enclosure. 
 
 Teres, for reres : res. 
 
 Tere ti, v., used as ad., as boka 
 tere ti to smite or strike hastily 
 (and therefore ineffectively, 
 confusedly), syn. sarafi and 
 sumati, and bile, or bilebile : 
 tera to be quick. 
 
 Tete, s., voc, mother. See 
 under ani na. 
 
 Tete, and tetea. See te. 
 
 Ti, and d. tsi, neg. ad., not : d. 
 
 197 [tiba 
 
 ta. [Sa. le. Ma. te, Fut. si, 
 My. ta, Mg. tsy.] _ 
 
 Ti, V. t., to say ; ti ki nia say to 
 him, tell him, ti ki nik sa tell 
 him it : dd. ni, noa, nofa, q.v. 
 
 Ti, s., chief, as ti Tongoa chief of 
 Tongoa : for tui, q.v. 
 
 Ti a, and ri a, v. t., to push, 
 thrust, propel, or drive. A. 
 (laya to propel, thrust. 
 
 T'tie na, or t'tia na, s,, saliva, 
 water of the mouth, nat'tia na 
 i sera sa his mouth waters 
 because of it, lit. the water 
 (of his mouth) runs at it : 
 titia. 
 
 Tia na, or tie na, s. See atia na. 
 
 Tiamia, v. i. or a., to be first, d. 
 bea or tobea (for toko bea) : 
 tia to abide or be, and mia, d. 
 bea, q.v. [Oba tomua, Sa. 
 mua and tomua.] 
 
 Tiele, v. i., to finish a laugh with 
 shrill cries, in a whinnying 
 manner (of women). H. Sahal 
 to utter shrill cries ; to neigh 
 (of a horse), A. sahala, n. a. 
 Sahir, to whinny. 
 
 Tiena, v. i., to be with child. 
 See miten. S. t'yina laden, 
 gravid. 
 
 Tiba, neg. ad., not. See d. tab : 
 ti ad., and ba for ma, as in 
 Assy, aama not. 
 
 Tib ea, or tuba ia, v. t., to shoot 
 with an arrow ; 
 
 Tiba, or tuba, s., c. art., an 
 arrow, i.e., what is cast : tuba. 
 [Mg. tsipika.] E. nadafa, (2) 
 to shoot with an arrow, (1) to 
 strike, (3) to prick, H. nadaf 
 to drive away. The radical 
 idea is thrusting, pushing. 
 
 Tiba, s., the post in a house that 
 
TIBI Ll] 198 
 
 supports the ridge-pole : so 
 called because i tuba ia. See 
 tuba, which is the same as 
 tiba. 
 
 Tibi ]i, V. t., to burn, to sear. 
 A. s'ahaba to roast, to broil. 
 
 Tifai, s., thunder ; ti art, and 
 fai. [Sa. fai-tilitili, Fila te- 
 fachiri, Aniwa tefachiri.] A. 
 bahh'(used of thunder) hoarse, 
 cf. Sa. fa hoarse. 
 
 Tibu (pronounced timbu), d., 
 s., c. art. natimbu, the deep 
 (sea) : bua. 
 
 Tikal ia. See takal ia. 
 
 Tigi na, or tiki na, s., side, 
 edge; 
 
 Tigi elo, v., to bask in the sun, 
 warm oneself in the sun. A. 
 S'alla to bask or warm oneself 
 in the sun, s'allijat side, out- 
 side or edge. Hence 
 
 Tigi (side) in malitigi, malirigi, 
 Ac, place at the side, that is, 
 beside, near ; and 
 
 Tigitigi na, s., d., edge (outside 
 or exposed edge or side of a 
 thing), and 
 
 Tiki na, and 
 
 Tikitiki na, id. ; and 
 
 Tiki nra nin, d., this point (of 
 time), now. 
 
 Tika, a strong negative, it is 
 not, no, by no means ; 
 
 Tiki (or tika), neg. ad., not ; i 
 tiki ban he did not go ; and 
 
 Tika, and tiki, the same, used, 
 with the verb, pron., as a 
 verb, to be not, to exist not, 
 dd. tsika, nika, rika, tika : 
 neg. ad. ti, and ka. It is 
 thus construed : i tika sa it is 
 not in it or him, or he has it 
 not, i tika ki nia it is not to 
 
 [tiko 
 
 or in him, or he has it not, 
 thus namuruen i tika ki nia 
 there is no laughing in him, 
 i tika ki namuruen he has not 
 laughing. See also under bi 
 enia, supra. For ti see ti, 
 ad., supra ; ka is to be com- 
 pared with the E. ko in 'eko 
 not, ko being a contraction of 
 kona (A. kana) to be, and 
 tika with the Talmudic and 
 Mandaische lika not, is not 
 (Noldeke, Mand. Grammatik). 
 [Fut. jikai, My. tak, Mg. tsia, 
 and diahoe, To. ikai, Sa. i'ai, 
 no, not, not so.] 
 
 Tiki-amo, d. takamo, q.v. 
 
 Tiki, V. i., to be soft (of the 
 skin), syn. busa, as nauili na i 
 tiki, or i busa, his skin is soft 
 (his skin is bad, or has an un- 
 comfortable feeling, as on 
 hearing some dreadful story, 
 or witnessing some fearful 
 thing). See busa. A. 'atiha, 
 b), 3), to become soft and 
 tender (of the skin). 
 
 Tiki na, and triki na, s., for riki 
 na. 
 
 Tiko, s., a staff, a walking stick, 
 a pole by which a canoe is 
 poled forward in shallow 
 water. [Sa. to'o a canoe 
 pole, a stick in which is fixed 
 the perch of a pigeon, to'o- 
 na'i to Jean on a staff, to lean 
 on anything for support, too- 
 too a staff, walking stick, 
 toto'o to lean upon a staff, 
 To. toko a post used to make 
 fast canoes to, tokotoko a 
 staff, My. takan, Mg. tehina, 
 a staff, mitehina to walk with 
 a staff, to walk leaning on a 
 
TIKO KlJ 
 
 person.] A. toka'a* a staff, a 
 support, he who leans much 
 on his side, and props himself 
 up. Hence, Nm., taka, 8, 
 itteci to lean upon. Hence 
 
 Tiko ki, V. t., to pole (a canoe). 
 This is done by leaning upon 
 the tiko, and so throwing 
 one's weight upon it. 
 
 Tila ia, d. til e a (and ta lisi) 
 V. t., to wrench, prize (with a 
 lever), to struggle, wriggle, 
 wrestle (as through a narrow 
 place) ; tila ki, v. t., to wrench, 
 sprain, twist (as one's foot by 
 stepping into a hole) ; tilatila, 
 V. t., wrench up with a lever 
 roots and rocks in making a 
 hole in which to plant a yam ; 
 hence 
 
 Tila, s., a lever, crowbar. [Mg. 
 tolona, mitolona, to struggle 
 together, to wrestle.] A. 
 'atala to violently drag and 
 wrench away, 3, to wrestle 
 with, atalaf, Nm. 'atela, crow- 
 bar, lever, hod. 
 
 Tila ia, tila, d. for lita ia : lita. 
 
 Tili-mar, v. i., d. for lele maroa, 
 to revolve or roll turning 
 round : lele, maroa. 
 
 Tilasi a, and redup. tilatilasi a : 
 lasi a. 
 
 Tilai, titilai. See talai, tatalai. 
 
 Till a, V. t., to tell, relate (a 
 thing). [Sa. tala, v. and s., 
 tell, relate, tale, narration, 
 tala'i, talatala'i. To. tala.] 
 A. tala', to follow, to relate (a 
 narrative), read, recite. 
 
 Tinom ia, d. for tulum ia. 
 
 Tiragi (tira gi), v., to look at (as 
 at a spectacle). A. Sara, c. 
 'aJi, to look at. 
 
 199 [titiro 
 
 Tira sa, d. rira sa. See tera sa. 
 
 Tiri, V. i., to fly (of birds), d. 
 riri ; also to fly into a rage, to 
 be transported with rage, 
 flying and jumping about 
 excitedly ; i tiri, syn. i miti, 
 as i tiri bus ia, or i mitiSas ia, 
 lie (transported with rage) 
 flies snatching him (the object 
 of his passion, as if to tear 
 out his eyes). Hence rIri a 
 spark, and mitiri a grass- 
 hopper (from leaping and 
 flying), and taroa a pigeon). 
 [Sa. lele. Ma. rere.] A. tara 
 to fly ; to be swift, move 
 quick. 
 
 Tirigi, for ririgi, rigi. 
 
 Tirikit, v. i., to begin to drop or 
 sputter (of rain). [Fi. tiri to 
 drop.] For tiri see tuturu, 
 and for kit, kita small, little. 
 
 Tiro, V. i., to sink, roll down (as 
 in the sea, or down a precipice, 
 or into a pit) ; hence 
 
 Tiroa, s., c. art., a precipice, or 
 deep, steep place. [Fi. tiro, 
 siro, sisiro. My. turun, turun- 
 kan.] H. salal, sul, to be 
 rolled down, sink (as in the 
 sea), m6solah and mSsulah 
 depths (of the sea, a river, 
 clay). See mitaru, toroaki ; 
 also 
 
 Tiro e, d., v. t., to swallow, send 
 down, make to sink down 
 (into the stomach) ; and 
 
 Tiro aki, v. t., make to sink 
 down ( as an anchor,) to anchor, 
 d. toro aki, tirotiro, redup. 
 
 Titiro, V. i., to gaze into the sea 
 looking for fish or shellfish ; 
 to look at one's image in 
 water or a looking-glass. [Fi. 
 
TISO] 
 
 200 
 
 tiro, tiio-va, to look at oneself 
 in the water, peep at, Sa. 
 tilotilo, ps. tilofia, to peep, spy. 
 Ma. tiro, tirotiro, titiro, look, 
 gaze, Ha. kilo to look hard, 
 earnestly, to star-gaze, prog- 
 nosticate, act as a sorcerer.] 
 A. nat'ara to gaze, look for, 
 consider, spy, to prognosticate, 
 divine. 
 
 Tiso, V. i., to exude, d. lisoa, tise 
 a exude on to (a thing) : toto. 
 
 Titi, v., to tread, titia ki nakasu 
 tread on a log (as on a log 
 thrown across a stream). [My. 
 titi.] A. watiya to tread. 
 
 Titia, V. i., to slaver, dribble (as 
 an infant), to have saliva 
 flowing, to have the mouth 
 watering, nat'tia na saliva, 
 water of the mouth. [Mg. 
 rora salivn.] H. rir saliva, A. 
 rala to slaver, dribble (of an 
 infant), riyal' saliva, cf. My. 
 liyor slaver, dribble. 
 
 Tiu sa, d., v. t., to sink, dip, 
 matiu, V. i., to sink, d. ledup. 
 tutu, d. lulu, V. i., to sink, d. 
 riu sa, v. t., to point out with 
 the finger, d. tuma ia, v. t., to 
 point out with the finger, d. 
 till sa, til sa, d. tii nia, or riu 
 sa, or ru sa, or redup. tiutiu 
 sa, tutu sa, riuriii sa, or riiru 
 sa, v. t., to smear, tinge, 
 colour, or paint nafona (native 
 cloth). See also lolofa, lum, 
 luma, lulum. [Ma. totohu to 
 sink, tohu mark, sign, toi 
 fingei-, also toe, Tah. tohu 
 to point at with the linger, 
 make a sign, To. tuhu, v., 
 to point with the finger, s., 
 the forefinger, Sa. tusi to 
 
 [toitoi a 
 
 mark (native cloth), to 
 write, to point out, tusitusi 
 striped, Fi. luvu to sink, Mg. 
 tsoboka soaked, drenched, 
 dipped. My. tud-ing to point 
 at with the finger, to indicate. 
 See also under lolofa, luma.] 
 H. taba' to sink (eg. saba', A. 
 Saba'a to dip into, immerse, 
 E. tam'a, id.), to be dipped, 
 plunged, H. saba' to dip in, 
 immerse, to dye, tinge, Seba' 
 something dyed, a versicoloured 
 garment, Ch. (see lolofa) s6ba', 
 A. saba'a to point out or at 
 with the finger, 'asbi', 'asbu', 
 &o., the finger, H. 'asba' 
 finger, also toe, A. saba"a to 
 dye or colour (cloth), to make 
 a sign, indicate. 
 
 To, V. i., contr. for toko, or tok, 
 dd. ti, te, to rest, sit down, 
 dwell, remain, be. [Malo ate, 
 Ml. d. at, Mg. toetra, toatra, 
 toitra.] See toko. 
 
 To, redup. toto, d. touo, d. tau, 
 s., a measure, equal. [Fi. rau.] 
 And 
 
 To-naki, v. t., to compare ; to 
 place, fix; to appoint, deter- 
 mine, establish. See tau. 
 
 To (and see tofi a), v. t., to push, 
 press upon. A. da"a to push, 
 propel. 
 
 Toa (towa), or to', s., a (domestic) 
 fowl, also a bird ( = manu). [Fi. 
 toa. My. ayam, Ceram dd. tofi, 
 towim, Bouru dd.tehui, teput, 
 teputi, Oocos Island ufa, bird. 
 Tag. Ibon.] H. 'of bird (gen. 
 name), A. 'a'f gall us. Note 
 toa (towa) has t' art. 
 
 Troa i. See roa i. 
 
 Toitoi a, v. t., also teitei a (and 
 
TOUO] 
 
 •201 
 
 [toko-naki 
 
 trei a), to hate. A. -ada', 2), 
 
 n. a. 'adw', b), 'adiya, to hate. 
 Touo, d. for roua. See roa. 
 Tob, d., V. i., or a., to be large, 
 
 gi-eat. [Epi sombi, Mg. dobe.] 
 
 A. 'at'oma to be great. 
 Tob, s., c. art. natob, spittle. 
 
 H. tof, E. tafe' to spit. 
 Tobag ia. See tabag ia. 
 Tobaroba. See rabaraba. 
 To6et, s., rubbish heap. Of. H. 
 
 tofet spittle. See tob. 
 Tobu, s., a tumour, swelling. 
 
 See tubu. 
 Tobu na, s., grandfather. See 
 
 bobu, bua. {Malo tubu, Ta. 
 
 tupu, Epi kumbuo. Ml. P. apu, 
 
 Fi. bu, Fut. bua, grandfather 
 
 or grandmother, prop, ances- 
 tor.] H. 'ab (father), pi. 
 
 'aboth, A. pi. 'abau, 'ab'u (and 
 
 'abuna) ancestors. 
 Tobua, s., d., a natemate, spirit, 
 
 familiar spirit, demon. [Fut. 
 
 tupua, Ma. tupua, of. Sa. 
 
 tupua.] See su6e (where see 
 
 Sa. tupua). 
 Tobu, d. nobu, q.v, 
 Tofena, s., native cloth, clothing. 
 
 [To. tapa. Ha. kapa, Sa. siapo.] 
 
 Nm. thiyab clothes, dress ; 
 
 sole essential article of Arab 
 
 dress, A. tha'b', pi. thiyab'. 
 
 And hence 
 Tofe, V. i., d., to put on the 
 
 tofe, to dress. 
 Tofi a, V. t., to push. A. da 'aba 
 
 to push. 
 Toga, d. rog, d. taga, s., a basket. 
 
 H. tene', id. 
 Toga, s., far away, also natoga 
 
 a distant place or country. 
 
 H. rahok, S. ruhka, E. rShuR 
 
 far off, away. 
 
 Togo ia, d. toko ia, v. t , to push, 
 thrust, and see bakatoko ia. 
 H. daiiak, A. dahaka to push, 
 thrust. 
 
 Troga, for toga, basket. 
 
 Trogo, d. nrogo, for rogo, to 
 hear. 
 
 Toki a, tokitoki a, v. t., to 
 gather up one's things, or pack 
 up, preparatory to flitting. 
 See raku, taku ti. [Of. Fi. 
 toki a.] 
 
 Toko, d. tok, V. i., to rest, sit 
 down, dwell, remain, be, contr. 
 to, q.v., sometimes pronounced 
 tuk. [My. and Ja. duduk, 
 dodok, Mg. toatra (see to), Fi. 
 tiko, toka.] H. takah, Pu. 
 tukah (Deut. xxxiii. 3), A. 
 waka'a, 8, 'ttaka'a, cf. 5, to 
 sit (Lnke xiv. 8), to remain. 
 Hence 
 
 Tokon, s., c. art., a village, re- 
 maining or dwelling place. 
 
 Tokei, or tokai, s., c. art., a 
 prop, or rafter (which reaches 
 from the ground to the ridge- 
 pole in an Efatese house) ; 
 then natokai nafanua the 
 prop, i.e., chief, of the land. 
 A. 'atka'a to prop up. 
 
 Tokora, s., a place. [Mota togara 
 behaviour, togava a station.] 
 See toko. 
 
 Toki, s., an axe ; and 
 
 Tok, s., violence, force. A. 
 takka to cut, H. tok violence. 
 
 Tokalau, s., easterly wind : tok 
 remain, alau on the sea. 
 
 Toko ia. See togo ia. 
 
 Toko-naki, v. t., to strike on (as 
 one's foot on a stone, the wind 
 on a mountain). [Ma. tu- 
 tuki. To. tugia.] See tuki a. 
 
TOKOTOKO Na] 
 
 202 
 
 [toeotoeo 
 
 Toko toko na, s., a shark's fin : 
 toko ia. 
 
 Toko ni, v. t., to kindle, set fire 
 to, redup. tokotoko. A. daka' 
 to kindle. 
 
 To], s., violence, force. See tila 
 to wrench. 
 
 Tola, V. i., to be early dawn ; 
 toa i tola the cock crows, lit. 
 crows at early dawn ; 
 
 Tola, s., the dim early dawn ; 
 the dim distance in the sky ; 
 and 
 
 Tolarola, id., redup. ; and, d. to- 
 lau, id. Hence matol, d. to- 
 morrow. H. s'aliar, A. 
 Sahara, to be far remote, 
 saliira, to do, or to set out at 
 early dawn, 8, the cock crew 
 at early dawn, H. mis 'liar the 
 morning. 
 
 Toll a, V. t., to surpass, to go 
 past, before, bitoli, v. r., d. 
 bilele ; to pass or go before 
 each other, d. toliu sa. See 
 liu, and to. 
 
 Tol6 na, s., c. art., egg (of a 
 bird), d. atol mita na eye- 
 ball. [My. falor, Mg. atody, 
 Oba toligi, Sulu iklug, Nias 
 ajuloh, Poggi agoloh.] Mahri 
 chali, Amh. 'ankuilal ; the 
 radical meaning is round. 
 
 Trom, or torn, s., turmeric, a 
 reddish curry powder. [Fi. 
 damudamu red, Mg. tamotamo 
 turmeric, tomamotamo yellow, 
 of an orange, saffron colour.] 
 A. 'adomato be red, H. 'adam- 
 dom reddish. 
 
 TOnako, for taunako. 
 
 Tontono sa, v. i., to be perplexed, 
 in pain or distress on account 
 of (something) : tunu. 
 
 Tomo na, s., tumu na. 
 Tomotomoa, v. i., tumutumua. 
 Toro, V. i., to leak (as a canoe). 
 A. ta''ara to boil, emit water 
 (as clouds), to leak (as a vein 
 or vessel). 
 
 Toro, V. t., to lay down, abandon, 
 let down, permit, tor ea lay it 
 down, <tc. 
 
 Tor6 sa, lit. lays down or aban- 
 dons on account of it, i.e., 
 gives up his old mind or 
 opinion in consequence of the 
 evil it has brought ujion him, 
 rues ; toro bisi a, also dd. turu 
 bisi, and taru bisi, lay down 
 leaving (a thing), permit, &c.; 
 tor ea put into (as liquid into 
 a vessel), totor ea, id., syn. 
 tutua ki ; 
 
 Toroa, V. i., to be rich, toro (lay 
 down, store up, and a. ending 
 a) : matoro-toro, let down, 
 slackened, slack (as a rope), 
 A. wadara (not used in per- 
 fect), fut. yadaro, imperative 
 dar, to lay down, leave, permit. 
 
 Toro aki, for tiro aki. 
 
 Torotoro, for teratera. 
 
 Toro na, s., his impulse, onset, 
 power, might. [Ma. tara 
 courage, mettle.J This same 
 word occurs as tere na (comb 
 of cock, A'c), where see the 
 verb. A. tarra to propel vehem- 
 ently, &c., Nm. tarr free will, 
 arbitrary power ; 
 
 Torotoro na, id., redup. 
 
 Tore, or tere (natuone), s., the 
 leg below the knee. See tere 
 mast (of ship), column. 
 
 Torotoro, v. i., to be hot, to 
 sweat. A. sala' to be hot. 
 Hence 
 
TOKUTORU] 203 
 
 Torutoru, id., and 
 
 Toru, s., sweat. 
 
 Tos, d., V. i., to creep, d. for 
 rasa. 
 
 Trot ia. See rot ia. 
 
 Totau, dd. tatau, titau, titu, s., 
 a child, infant. [Mg. zaza.] 
 E. sa's'ae, H. se'esa'em off- 
 spring. 
 
 Trotro, v., to think ; and 
 
 Trotro na, s., thought, mind. 
 See mitroa. 
 
 Toto, dd. tiso, lisoa, v. i., to 
 exude (as gum, juice, from 
 plants). [Fi. titi, titi-va, My. 
 titik, Mg. niitete, mitate, tete- 
 vana.] A. nas's'a, n. a. nas'is', 
 to exude. Hence 
 
 Toto, s., a plant abounding in 
 a milky juice, and its juice. 
 
 Totofa, d., V. i., to swell: d. 
 tubu, q.v. 
 
 Toil gi, d. toii ni, v. t., to 
 measure, to weigh. See tau, 
 d. tau asa, to measure. 
 
 Tu, dem., in banotu, matuna. 
 
 Tu, verb, pron., 1 pi., incl., dual 
 ta. See nigita, ninita. 
 
 Tu, V. i., to stand, dd. tsu, ru, 
 and see su ; also to abide, 
 dwell, be ; tu lena stand up 
 straight, used also of rising up, 
 to rise up ; tu-ri a (ri t. prep.) 
 also occurs, to stand, or abide 
 to (or with) a person, and tu- 
 raki, to stand or abide for (a 
 person or thing). [.Fi. tu, 
 tu-ra, turaga, TaSa. turu, Ml. 
 P. tu, tutu (= My. diri), Sa. 
 tu, tutu, faatu, tula 'i, tulaga, 
 Ma. tu, tutu, turanga. Ha. 
 ku (1, rise up, 2, to stand), 
 My. diri, Mg. joro.] H. nasa', 
 so', s'et, imp. sa', of. Hithp., 
 
 [tua na 
 
 E. nasa'a, A. nas'a'. See su, 
 supra. 
 
 Note. — This word also oc- 
 curs as matu, batu, fatu ; and, 
 like toko, matoko, and also 
 ani, it is put after demonstra- 
 tives, as uane tu, uane matu, 
 nin batu, nistu, &c., lit. this, 
 or that standing or being 
 (there or here). 
 
 Tu na, s. , bones (of fish), and 
 
 Tutu, a., bony. [Fi. sui, d. dua, 
 bone, suisuia, lean, bare of flesh, 
 bony, rough, sharp.] Cf. A. 
 s'a'a, 4, to become spiky, to 
 be rayed. 
 
 Tua, V. t., to place, put down ; 
 also to give, tua i give him ; 
 tua ki place, put down ; used 
 also of liquids, tua ki nia las 
 put or place it in the vessel 
 (cf. tor ea), make it to fall 
 into the vessel, redup. tutua 
 ki, bitua ki nia, or bitua sa, 
 to put down, also to give (a 
 thing) ; with some verbs it is 
 like " from " as ba tua ki nia 
 go or come from, lit. go or 
 come leaving, or putting it 
 down, or placing it, hence 
 ba bituaki to halt between 
 two opinions (in which 
 the reflexive force of bitua, 
 V. r., comes out), ba bituaki 
 lit. being to go leaving it over 
 and over again. A. "was'a'a 
 to place, lay, or put down. 
 
 Tii sa (see tiu sa), d. ttt nia, to 
 tinge, mark, colour native 
 cloth, hence (c. ending a) tuni- 
 tunia striped, marked. 
 
 Tua na, s., name of various rela- 
 tives, as brother's wife, 
 husband's mother, paternal 
 
TUAl] 
 
 grandmother, and her grand- 
 children, husband's sister. 
 See under the following word. 
 [Ml. U. tuan elder brother, 
 M}'. mantuwah father-in-law 
 or mother-in-law.J 
 
 Tuai, ortuei, a., old, ancient, and 
 ad. long ago, also a long time 
 hereafter. See bakatuai to 
 make long (of time), matua 
 old, mature, &c. [Sa. tuai, faa- 
 tuai, matua, My. tuwah, 
 Ja. tuwa, bartuwah, bS,tuwah, 
 mantuwah, Bu. matua, Mg. 
 antitra, anti (panahy), anto 
 (andro), matoa, matotra.] A. 
 'adiyy' old, ancient (has the a. 
 ending), and 'a'd' from 'ada to 
 confer a benefit on one, to 
 favour, &c. (see preceding 
 word), mo 'id' powerful, ex- 
 perienced, accustomed. See 
 matua. 
 
 Tuasil, s., giver of help : tua 
 place, give, sila. 
 
 Tua, d. tue, s., c. art., twins : 
 rua. 
 
 Tua, V. i., to go, redup. tutua. 
 Hence 
 
 Tua na, or tuo na, s., legs, feet. 
 [An. thuo, Ta. su, legs.] H. 
 s'uk to run, whence s'ok, Ch. 
 s'ak, A. sak', pi. suk', the legs. 
 
 Tui, pronounced also ti, s., as 
 tui Tongoa chief of Tongoa. 
 [Fi. tui.] A. waddu, for 
 watadu. See tatu, supra. 
 
 Tuuti a, V. t., to tie ; hence 
 
 Tuut, s., a knot. [Tah. toti, 
 My. tambat.] E. s'abata, 
 Arm. s6bat and sfiwat, id. 
 
 Tubu, or tub, d. totofa, or totoba, 
 V. i., to swell. [Oba tutumbu, 
 Ml. timb.] Arm. sSba, H. 
 
 204 
 
 [tubara 
 
 Sabah to swell, sabeh a swell- 
 ing. See tobu, supra. This 
 word also means to will, as 
 Arm. s6ba to will, to wish, 
 properly to be inclined, prone, 
 so H. Sabah ; hence in Efatese 
 (cf. S., John iii. 27 and 8) 
 tuma, d. tumbu (ndumbu), 
 with the nom. suf. denotes 
 will, sua sponte, as i tuma-na 
 he of his own will or accord, 
 as " Who told him to do 
 this " ? i tumana bat ia " He of 
 his own will or accord did it." 
 
 Tuba ia (see tiba ia, tibea, which 
 is the same word), to thrust, 
 impel, hence tuba ki to send, 
 and natuba, s., an arrow, 
 also a prick, sting, or thorn ; 
 tuba gote fi (to thrust break- 
 ing) to condemn, or adjudge 
 to die, tuba gori (thrust over or 
 in front of) to forbid, tuba gasi 
 (thrust wiping) to wipe, and 
 redup., tubatuba ia, to impel, 
 propel, send off : from the idea 
 of thrusting comes that of 
 reaching to, touching, hence 
 bitub, bitubetuba, v. r., to be 
 touching (thrusting, lit.) each 
 other, i.e., throughout, wholly, 
 continually, as tale firi bitub 
 all round wholly, tafisafisa 
 bitubetuba pray continually 
 (one prayer touching an- 
 other as in a series), and 
 i mate tuba nasefa 1 he dic-d 
 on account of what ? lit. 
 touching what; ru tumaratuba 
 ra they touch each other (as of 
 any two things, also of one 
 thing done in retaliation for 
 another). See tiba ia. 
 
 Tubara. See tabara. 
 
TUBATUA 
 
 205 
 
 [tuma ia 
 
 Tubatua, y. i., to kneel, lit. to 
 stand on the knees :. tu, batua. 
 
 Tubut, d., S., rainbow : lit. 
 stand in the middle {i.e., of 
 the sky) : tu, but. 
 
 Tugo fi a, d. for toko ia, togo ia. 
 
 Tuk ia, or tuki a, v. t., to strike, 
 beat, pound, redup. tukituki a; 
 and uru tukituki run quickly, 
 lit. run beating (the ground 
 with the feet); [Fi. tuki-a. 
 To. tugi. Ma. tuki, tukituki.] 
 H. duk, dakak, A. dakka, 
 dakka, &c., beat, pound, Nm. 
 daqdaqa sound of horses' feet 
 beating (the ground). 
 
 Tuku, V. i., to go down, sink 
 down, also v. t., tuku nalai 
 lower the sail (of a canoe), 
 tuku bia kiki put a child in a 
 cloth basket to be carried on 
 the back. [Ma. tuku, To. 
 tugu, Sa. tuu. Ha. kuu, Fi. 
 tuku-ca.] H. s'uah, A. sah'a, 
 Sall'a (cf. thah'a, tall'a) to 
 sink down, H. s'ubah, s'iliah 
 a pit, s'aliat pit, cistern, the 
 grave. Hence 
 
 Tuk, s., a hole, enclosure like a 
 hole or pit ; and 
 
 Tukituki, s., the seven stars 
 (because like, an enclosure) ; 
 and 
 
 Tuk, s., uora tuk, place of the 
 pit, i.e., Hades ; and ' 
 
 Tukituki, or tukutuku, s., name 
 of a place on the western side 
 of Efate, where is the entrance 
 to Hades ; and 
 
 Tuku, s., a fence, stake, or post 
 (because sunk in the ground 
 and firm). 
 
 Tuki, in matuki, s., q.v., and 
 Mau-tukituki, or Mau-tiki- 
 
 tiki, name of a mythical 
 
 person, one of the first men. 
 
 [Mg. toky, matoky. See ma- 
 tuki, supra.] See under taki 
 
 a, supra, and see mau. 
 Tukunua, s., a story, tradition, 
 
 d. syn. kakai. [Fi. tuku-na,. 
 
 V. t., and tukuni, s.] A. 
 
 nataka to speak. 
 Tu-ki-roa ki, v. t., to give in 
 
 commission : roa as in boroa 
 
 ki, and tua, or tu, to give. 
 Tuletule, v. i., to swing ; and 
 Tule aki, v. t., to swing ; and 
 Tula, s., d. a swing, v. i., tO' 
 
 swing. H. dalal, dalah, talal, 
 
 A. daldala and taltala tO' 
 
 swing. 
 Tula, s., wax of the ear. [Fi., 
 
 tule, id., daligatula deaf, Sa. 
 
 tuli deaf. My. tuli deaf.] A. 
 
 Sal ah' deafness. 
 Tuli for till, to tell, relate. 
 Tuluku for taluko. 
 Talum ia, or 
 Tulum ia, v. t., to swallow down, 
 
 dd. tulug ia, tinom ia, tunug 
 
 ia, talug ia. [An. atleg. My. 
 
 taian, cf. Parian, ta,rlan, Mg. 
 
 telina.] A. lahima, n. a.,. 
 
 lahm', 5, 8, Nm., 5, telehhem, 
 
 to swallow down. 
 
 Note. — Sa. and To. " to- 
 
 swallow " is folo, A. bali'a, id. 
 Tu-lake, v. t., to give in com- 
 mission : tua give, and lake, q.v. 
 Tuma, d. tumbu (see under 
 
 tubu). S. S6bu will. 
 Tuma ia, v. t., to point out with 
 
 the finger, bituma v. r. ; d. 
 
 riu sa. See tiu sa. 
 Tuma ia, v. t., to knock (as a 
 
 door), as a sign to open it 
 
 And 
 
TUMATUMA IA] 
 
 Tumatuma ia, id., redup. [Sa. 
 
 tuma, cf. My. antam.] For 
 
 tuba ia. 
 Tuma, or tama sok, for ta6a 
 
 soka : taia. 
 Tumalu, for tamalu : tafta. 
 Tuma, d. ruma, q.v. 
 Tuma ni, v. t., d., to cook (in a 
 
 particular way), redup. tu- 
 
 tuma ; and 
 Tumu na, d. nubu na, q.v., also 
 
 tomo na ; 
 Turautumua, v. i., or a., formed 
 
 from tumu by a. ending a. 
 
 See noba nia, and no6ano6a, 
 
 and matumutumu, and manu- 
 
 bunubu. 
 Tumana, s., a parcel : taum ia, 
 
 tarn ia. 
 Tumi a, or tomi a, v. t., to suck. 
 
 [Motu toboa.] E. tabawa to 
 
 suck. 
 Trumia. Seerumia, i.e., ru-mia. 
 Tuni, V. t., to heat, tuni fatu to 
 
 heat red hot the oven stones. 
 
 [Fi. tunu, tunutunu, vaka- 
 
 tunu-na.] And 
 Tunu, V. t., to heat, to oppress or 
 
 make to suffer (as heat does) ; 
 
 bitunu to be hot, painful, dd. 
 
 bitin, bitsin (see also sinu, 
 
 sisinu, and tontono) ; tutun to 
 
 light up (torches, the evening 
 
 cooking fires) ; and 
 Tunu, s., heat (of fire, or of the 
 
 sun). See sinu. 
 Tuni a See tani a. 
 Tunika, s., place where the 
 
 watchers at a koro (fish trap) 
 
 noiselessly remain : tu to 
 
 stand, and see nikenika. 
 Tunitunia (see tiu sa, tu sa, d. 
 
 tu ni a), a , striped, marked. 
 Turk sa, v. t., to lengthen (as by 
 
 206 [tutun 
 
 splicing) ; tutur ki, to delay 
 for (as for a sick man unable 
 to walk quickly), d. tutura ki, 
 bakatura ki, id. A. tala 1, 2, 
 4, make long, lengthen, to 
 delay. 
 
 Turausi. See tera usi. 
 
 Tur ia, d. turu sa, v. t., to sew ; 
 also to nail ; to go through an 
 opening (as a ship through 
 the entrance of a harbour) : 
 turu sa ; 
 
 Turi, and turituri, s., needle, 
 also nail ; 
 
 Turua (a. ending a), full of 
 holes (as a rock of holes 
 through which rain percolates) ; 
 
 Tuturu, V. i., to drip (as eaves), 
 leak (roof) ; 
 
 Tuturu, s., a drop, a dripping, 
 c. art. ; and 
 
 Turu ki, drip or leak through. 
 See also tiri-kit. [Sa. tulu'i, 
 tulutulu, faatuUitulu, To. tulu, 
 tului. To. tulu he mata = riri 
 mita (tears), Fi. tiri, turu, 
 titiri, tuturu, tiri-va, turu-va.] 
 A. s'alla, 3), to sew, 2), shed 
 tears, s'als'ala to drip, fall in 
 drops, was'ala to drip, drop, 
 leak out. 
 
 Turu bisi. See tore bisi. 
 
 Turuk, d., v., to permit. A. 
 taraka, id. 
 
 Tusi, s., book, writing, Sa. word. 
 See tiu sa, tu sa, for its origin. 
 
 Tutu, v. i., to sink : tiu sa. 
 
 Tutua ki, redup. of tua ki, to 
 place. 
 
 Tutua, redup. of tua, to go. 
 
 Tutuma, redup. of tuma ni, to 
 cook. 
 
 Tutun (redup. of tunu, q.v., to 
 heat), to light up (torches and 
 
^'] 
 
 cooking fires, as in the even- 
 ing). 
 
 u. 
 
 ', verb, pron., 1 pi., excl. (con- 
 traction for au), d. bu (dual 
 mo%), we (and) they. Mahri 
 hem, or habu, they (Ef. bu = 
 habu = 'mi in kinami, nami). 
 
 U, s., in nau, d. for usu ; also in 
 biteu, for bitesu. 
 
 U, verb, pron., 3 pi., they : d. 
 for ru (r elided). 
 
 U, v., d. for ba, q.v. ; in umai to 
 come here. 
 
 Ua (wa), dd. ua (uwa), ui (wi), 
 interj., ad., yes: ua, dem. 
 
 Ua (u-a, and u-wa), s., oven, dd. 
 um, ubu, of (ov), 
 
 Ua (wa), d. uh, q.v., inter, ad. 
 
 Ua, s., c. art. naua (nawa), 
 veins, or muscles (so called 
 from swelling out or up). [Fi. 
 ua, Sa. ua.] See ua'a. 
 
 Ua, V. i., d. for 6a, and boua, to 
 rain : ba,. 
 
 Ua ki, V. t., d. boua ki, to yield 
 fruit ; and 
 
 Ua, s., c. art. naua, or nua na, 
 its fruit. [Ta. v., auwa, s., 
 nowa, Oba, v., mo ai, Sa., v. 
 and s., fua. My,, s., buwah, Ja. 
 uwoh, woh. My., v., barbuwah, 
 Mg., s., voa, v., mamoa.] Arm. 
 'eb, 'ub, 'iba, 'Sbo, Assy, (inbu) 
 imlDU, fruit, and Arm. abeb to 
 produce fruit. 
 
 Ua, dem., this : with other 
 demoastratives suffixed, either 
 this or that, uana, uane, ua 
 naga, uai, uase, uai na, uai 
 naga, and with tu (to stand, 
 
 207 [uana 
 
 to be) uane tu, dd. uo, uose, 
 uintu. Connected with this 
 word are ua, uua, ui, uisa, 
 uiko, uila, uank. Compare O, 
 dem., supra, which is identical 
 with the u in ua. The S. also 
 suffijced other demonstratives 
 to hu, or 'u, thus huhana, cf. 
 St., p. 23, owa (oa, wa = Ef. 
 ua) this, that. Compare 
 Assy, uma (which, however, 
 has the appended enclitic 
 ma) this or that indeed, also 
 thus. 
 Ua'a, s., a swelling, rise, i bi 
 ua'a (of, e.g., an island seen 
 from a distance swelling up or 
 rising out of the sea). See 
 fuata, and bua iii, 
 UabS, inter, ad., d. syn. sabe, 
 where now 1 where then ? See 
 be and ue (d. ua). 
 Uago, s., d. uak, pig, swine. 
 [Ta. puka, Fi. vuaka. Sa. 
 pua'a, Malo boi, Epi bue, 
 Bouru babue. My. babi, Mysol 
 boh.] This name seems lit. 
 to denote " grunter," Ta. puka 
 to grunt, puka, s., a pig. 
 Compare supra buka to bark, 
 to cough (also d. buku). 
 Uai, dem., this, that ; and 
 Uaia, id., also uai na, uai naga, 
 uai ntu, id. Compare English 
 this here, this 'ere, for this. 
 Uaka na, s., d. for aka na : aka. 
 Uako, interj., a mere exclama- 
 tion : ua and ko, dems. 
 Uai, for ali, day. 
 Ualu, for 6alu, friend ; and 
 UaluSota, s., enemy, lit. alien 
 
 friend. 
 Uana, dem., that : ua dem., 
 and another dem. suffixed to 
 
uana] -208 
 
 it. Compare S.- huliana. See 
 Tia, dem. 
 
 Uana, inter j., an exclamation, 
 see ! look out ! Denis, ua 
 and na. 
 
 Uan, inter, ad., d., where? This 
 is dem. n suffixed to ua, inter, 
 ad. See ue. [Santo veai and 
 even, id.] 
 
 Ua-nate natua na, s., d., calf of 
 the leg, lit. fruit of the belly 
 (liver) of the leg. 
 
 Uane, dem., this : ua, ne. 
 
 Uarik, d. for iatlk, q.v. 
 
 Uasa, ad., d. asa, the day after 
 to-morrow. [An. vith, Epi 
 veiia, Ml, vis, wisa. Am. 
 bugirua, Santo pogirua, Lo 
 weria, Mota arisa.] The word 
 uasa is ua (for which see ma) 
 day, and sa (for ra, or rua, 2), 
 2, or 2nd : in pogirua, po,^i is 
 another word for day, and, in 
 arisa, ari is still another, Ef. ali. 
 
 Uase, dem., this : ua, se. 
 
 Uasi a, v., d. for asi a. 
 
 Uata, s., a portion : 6ota ia. 
 
 Uataki, v., d. for bitaki ; and 
 
 Uataki, s., dd. otaki, itaki. 
 
 Uateaf, and d., 
 
 Uateam, and d., 
 
 Uateau, s., kidneys : ua fruit, 
 ate liver (Ac), and amo belly, 
 lit. fruit of the liver (or inside) 
 of the belly ; and 
 
 Uateau-laso, s., testicles, lit. 
 kidneys of the scrotum. 
 
 Uati a, v., d. ati a. 
 
 Uatu, v., d. for atu. 
 
 Uaua (waua), v. and s., for 
 baua, q.v. 
 
 Uba na, or ube na, s., his day, d. 
 kuba na. 
 
 TJbog, s., day. See bog. 
 
 __\^ 
 
 XJbu, s., dd. urn, ua, of. 
 
 Ufe, inter, ad., where? dd. ua 
 (uan, uabS), bai, mbe. [Fi. 
 vei, Sa. fea.J H. 'e', and, 
 with n suffixed, 'ain, 'an, A. 
 Vna, and, with fi (prep.) 
 fa'na. Mod. A. fain, or fein 
 (where? sans mouvement). 
 
 Note. — In Ef. sa or se (for 
 safa or sefa) also denote 
 where, lit. what (place)? some- 
 times fully expressed sefa 
 nalia? or sefe tokora ? But ufe 
 is an entirely different word, 
 with a different construction, 
 being always used with the 
 verb, pron., with which se or sa 
 cannot be used. Thus i ue he, 
 she or it (is) where ? This is 
 because the prep, fi (bi) is used 
 also as the verb " to be." On 
 the other hand i baki (ba ki) 
 se he goes to where (i.e., to 
 what place) ? One cannot say 
 i se for i ue, nor baki ue for 
 baki se. 
 
 Uei, interj., an exclamation: uai. 
 
 Uelu, v., for 6elu, and 
 
 Uelu, s., a heathen function 
 in which the men pass days in 
 the bush, hidden from the 
 women, under the direction 
 of the natamole tabu, in order 
 to ascertain from the natamate, 
 in dreams, what their future 
 fortune is to be. 
 
 Uen, s., c. art., sand : aran. 
 
 Uenr, d. for 
 
 TJere, d. for 
 
 Uete, d. for fata, q.v., and fatu. 
 
 Ufea, ad., afar, far away, at a 
 distance : d. emai, q.v. 
 
 XJi, intei'j., and ad., yes (that's 
 it) : ua, or uai, dem. 
 
ui] 209 
 
 Ui, uia, also 6ia (pwia), v. i., or 
 a., good, well, beautiful, &c. 
 [Mota wia. Am. wi, Ml. bu, 
 Santo va. Ma. pai (whakapai- 
 pai to adorn), Sula pia, Ceram 
 fia, My. baik.] H. yapah to 
 be fair, beautiful, Pi. to adorn 
 (cf. Ma. supra), yapeh fair, 
 beautiful, good, excellent. 
 
 Uiko, interj., exclamation : ui 
 inter]., and ko dem. 
 
 Uila, interj., exclamation : ui 
 interj., and la ad. 
 
 Uili na, s., d. for kuli na, the skin. 
 
 Uiroa, s., a crooked kind of 
 yam : biria, tafirofiro. 
 
 Uis, or uisa, interj., and ad. yes: 
 ui, and sa dem. 
 
 Uisia, v., for 6isi a, to take with 
 the hand. 
 
 Uisi, uisiuisi (wisiwisi), d. 6isi- 
 uisi, d. 6isi, d. Susiwusi, v., to 
 ■ make, to work, 6isi ekobu 
 make a house, uisiuisi ki work 
 at, nauisien work, or act of 
 working. [Sa. osi, Ja. yasa, 
 Mg. asa.] H. 'asah, n. a. 
 ma'Sseh (work), to make, pro- 
 duce by labour. 
 
 Uisiki na, s., elbow, or anything, 
 as a corner, like ala elbow, 
 uisiki aru na (or naru na) 
 elbow of the arm, d. mago 
 naru na heel of the arm. 
 [My. siku.] A. zugg' elbow. 
 Ula, s., a maggot. [Sa. ilo. My. 
 ulat, Mg. olitra.] E. 'es'e 
 vermis, 'as'ya vermes producere 
 ■ (Ex. xvi. 23 (4), Actsxii. 23): 
 eg. A. 'uthaJ. 
 
 Uli, for uili, kuli, skin. Mahri 
 
 gotl. See kuli na. 
 Uli a, or ul ia, v. t., dd. oli a, 
 auli a, uilia, to take the place 
 
 [ULUULUA 
 
 of, to substitute for, to 
 barter for, buy. See biauli, 
 d. bioli, V. r., and bauli a, 
 faulu ; also c. art. naulu, s., 
 barter, and redup., 
 
 Uliul, id., and especially in the 
 phrase uliul nako substitute 
 the appearance (or face) of 
 some other person for his own 
 to deceive (demons were sup- 
 posed to do this). [Mg. vidy, 
 mividy to buy. Pi. voli a, id., 
 volivoli to trade or barter, 
 Santo uliul give for, buy ; 
 Ha. ouli.] A. 'as'a to do or 
 give something for another 
 thing, 2, 3, id., 4, id., 5, 
 accept one thing for another, 
 8, substitute one for another ; 
 'awis' one (person or thing) in 
 place of another, in place of, 
 ma'us'ai what is given for 
 another thing (i.e., one thing 
 given for another thing, Ef. 
 faulu, id.) 
 
 Uli na, s., leaf, leaves, also ulu ; 
 and 
 
 Ulua, V. i., or a., to put forth 
 leaves, to grow up (of plants 
 and hair), and redup., 
 
 Uluulua, id., also to be full of 
 leaves, to be hairy, hence 
 lulu na (for uluulu na) hair, 
 and uluma, s., a pillow for the 
 head. [Ha. ulu, uluulu, Fi. 
 ulu. Ma. uru, Sa. ulu, Malo 
 ulu. My. ulu ; To. ulunga 
 (ulu the head), Tah. urua, 
 pillow for the head.] See lu 
 lulu, lua, laga, elagi, ka. A. 
 'ala, n. a. 'aluw', H. 'alah, 
 whence A. 'ilawai the head, 
 H. 'aleh leaf, leaves, 'oleh 
 sprouting forth, growing up. 
 15 
 
ululuia] 
 
 210 
 
 See 
 
 Ululuia, ululia, and lulia. 
 alialia. 
 
 Urn. s., oven, dd. ubu, &c. See 
 bani a (ba ni a). 
 
 Uma, v., to clear for a planta- 
 tion, cut down the jungle for 
 this purpose, d. syn. beru. 
 [My. uma.] And 
 
 Uma, s., a clearing, for cultiva- 
 tion, in isuma, q.v. [My. 
 uma.] A. h'amma to cut; 
 to sweep out, to clean, h'imm' 
 a garden vacant of trees and 
 fruits. 
 
 Umai, d. See banomai, babe. 
 [Sa o mai.] 
 
 Umkau, d. makau, or mukau, a 
 cluster, gathering, hence many, 
 all (d.) : kau. 
 
 Umba ia, v. t., to cast on it, 
 umbaki, v. t., to cast a thing, 
 d. 6i. E. haypa to cast. 
 
 Una, v., to cover or bury itself 
 in the sand or mud (of a snake, 
 and an eel-like fish which does 
 so); 
 
 Una ki, v. t., to make to bury 
 itself in the ground (a post or 
 fence stake) ; 
 
 Una, s., an eel-like fish that 
 burrows or buries itself in the 
 sand ; 
 
 Una, s., a post, or fence stake ; 
 
 Un, s., a fish scale (because it 
 covers) ; 
 
 Unu, s , ghost. See anu. [Sa. 
 una fish scale or tortoise- 
 shell (covering).] H. ganan 
 cover over, A. ganna to cover, 
 bury, ogg. H. kanan, 'anan, 
 A. kanna. See anu. 
 
 Uo, dem., d. for ua. 
 
 Uo, ad., d. for bo, now, then. 
 See bo. 
 
 [UOSE 
 
 Uokati, v., for boka ti ; hence 
 
 Uoka, chapped, sore (of the 
 hands, as from striking or 
 chopping with an axe, (fee.) 
 
 Uoki, s., an axe. A. waki' a 
 sharp cutting instrument. 
 
 Uol, s., c. art., a bed ; and 
 
 Uolis ia, V. See 6olis ia, mauol, 
 <fcc. 
 
 Uol. See bol, bo\o. 
 
 Uolau. See 6olau, bouolau. 
 
 Uolo, interj., exclamation. [Fi. 
 uala.] See uoro. 
 
 Uon, dem., d. for uane. 
 
 Uon, v., for 6on. 
 
 Uonda, s., d. uete. 
 
 Uontu, dem., and v., uon, tu : 
 d. for uanetu. 
 
 Uora, v., and 
 
 Uora na, redup. uorauora na, s., 
 and 
 
 Uoratan, s. (uora sprout, tano 
 of the ground) a plant that 
 springs up of its own accord 
 (without being planted or 
 sown) ; fig. a person without 
 friends or connections to 
 avenge him, i bi uoratan ba 
 faku sa he is a person with- 
 out friends, pluck him up (i.e., 
 uproot, or kill him). See 
 6ora II. 
 
 Uorausi a, d. for uru usi a. 
 
 Uora, or era, s. See 6ora ia. 
 
 Uori a, uoriuoria, mauori. See 
 bori a. 
 
 Uoro, and auoro, interj., excla- 
 mation (d. uolo) : uo, dem., 
 and ro, dem., and a as in ako, 
 ake. 
 
 Uosa, iiosauosa, uosagoro. See 
 6osa, fiosauosa, Sosagoro. 
 
 Uose, or uos, d. uohe, s., oar, 
 paddle. See balu sa. [Ml. 
 
uosb] 211 
 
 bos, Epi Bi. voho, Fi. voce, 
 Ta. vea, Fut. foi, Sa. foe, My. 
 dayung, Mg. fi-voy, Bisaya 
 bugsai.] A. mikdaf , rnigdaf, 
 milidaf, mikdaf, Anih. mak- 
 zaf , A. "aduf , oar. 
 
 (Jose, dem., d. for uase, 
 
 Uota, s., c. art., a chief, lord, 
 husband. [Tah. fatu. Ha. 
 haku.] See fatu. 
 
 Uota-n-manu, and fatu-n-manu, 
 s., name of a pillar-like rock 
 (Monument Rock) off Efate, 
 lit. pillar or stone of birds. 
 
 TJota, uotauota : for 6ota, 6ota- 
 uota. 
 
 Uoti a, d. for uti a, oti a : moti a. 
 
 Uotu, s., a mark ; hence 
 
 Uotuuotu, a., having marks. A. 
 nabathu mark. 
 
 Ua (u-a), d. for ua (wa), yes, 
 that's it : ua, dem. 
 
 Ura, v., in masi ura ki to scoop 
 up water, sprinkling (someone) ; 
 and 
 
 Ura, s., c. art. niura, dew, or 
 rain water on the foliage of 
 plants (from its sprinkling and 
 wetting people). H. yarah to 
 sprinkle, to water, hence yoreh 
 rain, lit. sprinkling. 
 
 TJri na, s., the latter or after 
 part, i.q. muri na, s, 
 
 Ura, s., lobster, prawn. [Sa., 
 Ha. ula. Ma. koura, My. 
 ud'ang, Ja. urang, Mg. orana 
 (oranorana eating greedily).] 
 H. hawar to be white, become 
 pale, A . hara to be bleached, 
 (fee, 4, to eat greedily, liawar', 
 Nm, haur, red leather 
 
 Note. — Ef. ura seems to be 
 so called because of the red 
 colour which the lobster 
 
 [UTA 
 
 assumes immediately on being 
 put on the fire to be cooked : 
 hence the proverb i ti bi ura 
 iga miel marafi it is not the 
 lobster to become red imme- 
 diately (said of wickedness 
 whose punishment does not 
 follow at once, but will come, 
 however slowly and un- 
 observed). 
 
 Uru, V. i., to run. A. "ara (H. 
 'ir) to run. 
 
 Uru, uruuru, v. i., to growl, 
 grumble, mutter, murmur. 
 See oro, orooro. 
 
 Usi a (for kusi a), v. t., follow 
 in the track of, investigate, 
 ask, question ; and redup., 
 
 Ususi a, V. t., investigate, ask. 
 See takusi a. [My. usir, 
 mangusir, tarusir.] 
 
 Usi, V. i., to hasten, usii-naki, 
 v. t., hasten about, or as to. 
 H. lius' (and 'us'), A. lias'a, to 
 hasten. 
 
 Usiraki, or usereki, i.e., usi-raki 
 (usi to follow), v., to follow 
 through, hence, as ad., through- 
 
 _ out. 
 
 Usii, s., c. art. nausu, d. iu, or 
 u, a reed. [Ml. ui, Epi yi, Sa. 
 u. Put. gasau. To. kaho.] E. 
 has6, H. hes, reed, arrow. 
 
 Us, d. for su, v. t., to take up. 
 
 Uta, s., land, euta ashore, on 
 land, by land. [Sa. uta. My. 
 utan (hutan).] A. "uta<' land 
 planted with trees ; and 
 
 Uta i, or uta ki, v. t., to load 
 (make sink, immerse) a canoe. 
 [Ma. uta, Mg. ondrana.] And 
 
 Uta, s., c. art. nauta, a canoe 
 load, cargo. [Sa. uta, Ma. 
 utanga.] And 
 
UTu] 212 
 
 Utu, ut 1 a, V. t., to fill (by 
 immersing) a water vessel. 
 [Sa. utu, utu-fia, Ha. uku-ki.] 
 A. "ata ("a'tu), 4, to immerse. 
 
 Uti a. See oti a, moti a. 
 
 Uti na, prep., after, following ; 
 originally v., i.q. usi a. 
 
 Uulu, V. i., also uilu (wulu, wilu), 
 for 6ilu, q.v., to dance. [Ml. 
 U. velu, Malo velu, Motu 
 
 mavaru, Ha. mele.] H. 
 
 niahol, and mholah dance, 
 
 dancing, from hul, or hil to 
 
 go round, also to dance (in a 
 
 circle). 
 Uusike, and uisiko, or uisiki, 
 
 q.v., elbow. 
 Uui (uwi, and u-i), s., c. art. 
 
 naui (nau-i, or nau-wi), the 
 
 yam. See afa ki.